Manual SewerCAD V8i - Guia Del Usuario (Ingles) PDF

Chapter
Welcome to Bentley
SewerCAD V8i Help
Getting Started on page 1-1
Loading on page 7-297
Learn about Bentley SewerCAD V8i, how to install and uninstall the
product, and how to contact Bentley Systems.
Learn how to use Bentley SewerCAD V8i data loading features to

extend your model.
Introducing the Workspace on page 2-9
Calculating Your Model on page 8-369
Learn about the Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace, including menus,

toolbars and dockable managers.
Learn how to create and manage "what-if" scenarios.
Quick Start Lessons on page 3-51
Using Scenarios and Alternatives on page 9-397
Perform these tutorials to learn the basics of using Bentley SewerCAD

V8i.
Learn how to define calculation options, calculate your model, and

review your results.
Starting a Project on page 4-109
Presenting Your Results on page 10-453
Learn how to set up a new project, manage existing project and set
project and other global options.
Learn how to present results in graphs, profile s and reports.
Using Modelbuilder on page 5-135
Working in AutoCAD Mode on page 12-607
Learn how to use ModelBuilder in ArcGIS mode or the Stand-Alone

Editor.
Learn how to use Bentley SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode.
Creating Your Model on page 6-169
Theory on page 13-619
Learn how to use Bentley SewerCAD V8i layout and editing tools to
build your model.
Learn about the theory behind Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
DAA038110-1/0001
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Users Guide
1-1
1-2
Chapter 1: Welcome to Bentley SewerCAD V8i

Help1
Chapter 1: Getting Started1
What is Bentley SewerCAD V8i?1-1
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates1-2
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration1-2
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT1-3
Troubleshooting1-3
UPDATING YOUR SENTINELLM LICENSES IF YOU MOVE YOUR LICENSE SERVER1-4
UPDATING YOUR BENTLEY SELECT SERVER LICENSES IF YOU
MOVE YOUR LICENSE SERVER1-4
Checking Your Current Registration Status1-4
Documentation1-4
Quick Start Lessons1-5
Contacting Us1-6
Sales1-6
Technical Support1-6
SUPPORT HOURS1-7
Addresses1-7
Your Suggestions Count1-8
Chapter 2: Introducing the Workspace9

The Workspace2-9
Stand-Alone Editor2-9
Microstation Mode2-10
AutoCAD Mode2-11
Menus2-11
File Menu2-11
Edit Menu2-15
Analysis Menu2-17
Components Menu2-18
View Menu2-19
Tools Menu2-22
Report Menu2-24
Help Menu2-24
Toolbars2-25
Layout Toolbar2-27
Standard Toolbar2-28
Edit Toolbar2-30
Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide
Contents-i
View Toolbar2-30
Scenarios Toolbar2-32
Analysis Toolbar2-32
Compute Toolbar2-33
Tools Toolbar2-33
Help Toolbar2-34
Zoom Toolbar2-34
Customizing the Toolbars2-36
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons2-36
Controlling Toolbars2-36
Dynamic Manager Display2-37
Opening Managers2-38
Customizing Managers2-40
Using Customizations2-42
Customization Manager2-42
CUSTOMIZATION EDITOR DIALOG BOX2-44
Using Named Views2-44
Copying and Pasting Data To and From Tables2-46
Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons51

Lesson 1 - Creating a Schematic Network3-51
Part 1 - Creating a New Schematic Project File3-52
Part 2 - Entering Data3-56
ENTERING DATA THROUGH THE PROPERTIES EDITOR3-57
ENTERING DATA THROUGH FLEXTABLES3-59
ENTERING INFILTRATION DATA FOR GRAVITY PIPES3-61
STEADY STATE LOADING3-61
EXTREME FLOW FACTORS3-66
Part 3- Calculating the Model3-69
Lesson 2 - Automatic Design3-71
Part 1: Specifying Design Constraints3-71
Part 2: Design3-75
Lesson 3 - Scenario Management3-76
Part 1 - Opening the Project File3-76
Part 2 - Creating Alternatives3-76
Part 3 - Editing Base Scenarios3-81
Part 4 - Creating Child Scenarios3-82
Part 5 - Calculate and Compare3-84
Lesson 4 - Presentation of Results3-86
Part 1 - Reports3-86
Part 2 - FlexTables3-89
Part 3 - Element Annotation3-93
Contents-ii
Part 4 - Create a Profile3-95

Part 5 - Color Coding3-97
Lesson 5 - Running an Extended Period Simulation3-98
Part 1 - Entering and Applying Loading Patterns3-99
Part 2 - Entering Hydrographs3-101
Part 3 - Running the Extended Period Simulation3-103
Part 4 - Time Based Graphs and Tables3-103
Part 5 - Animations3-105
Chapter 4: Starting a Project109

Welcome Dialog Box4-109
Projects4-110
Setting Project Properties4-110
Setting Options4-111
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab4-111
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab4-114
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab4-116
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab4-117
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab4-120
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab4-121
Considerations for ProjectWise Users4-123
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise 4-123
Performing ProjectWise Operations4-124
Importing Data From Other Models4-127
Importing Data from a SewerCAD V8 Database4-128
Importing a Submodel4-128
Importing from LandXML4-129
Importing StormCAD V84-130
Importing from SewerGEMS V84-131
Exporting Data4-132
Exporting a .DXF File4-132
Exporting a Submodel4-132
Exporting to LandXML4-133
4-133
Chapter 5: Using Modelbuilder135

Preparing to Use ModelBuilder5-135
ModelBuilder Connections Manager5-138
ModelBuilder Wizard5-141
Step 1Specify Data Source5-141
Step 2Specify Spatial Options5-142
Contents-iii
Step 3Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class5-144

Step 4Build Operation Confirmation5-146
Reviewing Your Results5-146
Multi-select Data Source Types5-147
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages5-147
Warnings5-147
Error Messages5-148
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder5-149
Sample Spreadsheet Data Source5-151
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder5-152
Importing Pump Definitions Using ModelBuilder5-153
Using ModelBuilder to Import Pump Curves5-158
Using ModelBuilder to Import Patterns5-162
Chapter 6: Creating Your Model169

Elements and Element Attributes6-169
Link Elements6-170
ENTERING ADDITIONAL DATA TO LINK ELEMENTS6-170
Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe6-171
Diversion Rating Curve Dialog Box6-172
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element6-172
Irregular Channel Editor Dialog Box6-173
Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element6-174
SECTIONS RESULTS DIALOG BOX6-175

Manholes6-175
FLOW (DOWNSTREAM CONDUIT)6-176
FLOW HEADLOSS CURVES DIALOG BOX6-176
DROP MANHOLES6-178
Transitions6-178
Wet Wells6-179
PERCENT FULL6-179
INFLOW (WET) COLLECTION DIALOG BOX6-180
Outfalls6-180
ADDING ELEVATION VS. FLOW DATA TO AN OUTFALL6-181
Pressure Junctions6-182
Pumps6-182
PUMP DEFINITIONS DIALOG BOX6-183
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS6-189
Variable Speed Pump Batteries6-190
Air Valves6-191
Other Tools6-192
Adding Elements to Your Model6-193
Contents-iv
Modeling Curved Pipes6-194

Connecting Elements6-194
What Is A Virtual Conduit?6-195
Connecting a Pump to a Wet Well6-195
Manipulating Elements6-195
Splitting Pipes6-198
Disconnecting and Reconnecting Pipes6-199
Editing Element Attributes6-199
Property Editor6-199
RELABELING ELEMENTS6-201
SET FIELD OPTIONS DIALOG BOX6-202
What Length is Used for Conduits and Pressure Pipes When I Don't
Enter a User-defined Length?6-203
Automatic Design6-204
Default Design Constraints6-205
Minor Loss Coefficients6-208
Using the Totalizing Flow Meters6-210
Totalizing Flow Meters Manager Dialog6-210
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor Dialog6-211
System Head Curves6-213
System Head Curves Manager Dialog6-213
Element Property Inferencing6-215
Element Property Inferencing Dialog6-217
NEW ELEMENT LAYOUT SUMMARY DIALOG6-223
Changing the Drawing View6-223
Panning6-223
Zooming6-224
USING THE ZOOM CENTER COMMAND6-226
Using Selection Sets6-227
Selection Sets Manager6-228
Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets6-230
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection6-231
Creating a Selection Set from a Query6-231
Adding Elements to a Selection Set6-233
Removing Elements from a Selection Set6-234
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets6-234
Network Navigator6-236
Using Prototypes6-239
Creating Prototypes6-239
Engineering Libraries6-241
Working with Engineering Libraries6-242
SHARING ENGINEERING LIBRARIES ON A NETWORK6-245
Contents-v
Converting Legacy Engineering Library Files6-245

Conduit Catalog Dialog Box6-247
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements6-251
Hyperlinks Dialog Box6-251
Using Queries6-254
Queries Manager6-255
QUERY PARAMETERS DIALOG BOX6-256
Creating Queries6-257
USING THE LIKE OPERATOR6-261
Controls6-262
Controls Tab6-264
Conditions Tab6-269
Actions Tab6-275
Control Sets Tab6-279
LOGICAL CONTROL SETS DIALOG BOX6-280
User Data Extensions6-280
User Data Extensions Dialog Box6-283
User Data Extensions Import Dialog Box6-287
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types6-287
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box6-288
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box6-289
Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box6-290
External Tools6-291
External Tools Workflow6-292
TRex Wizard6-293
Chapter 7: Loading297
Loading7-297
Methods for Entering Loads7-298
Types of Loads7-299
Adding Fixed Loads7-301
Hydrograph vs. Pattern Loads7-301
Adding User Defined Hydrographs7-302
Pattern Loads7-303
WORKING WITH PATTERNS7-303
Pattern Manager7-305
DEFINING PATTERN SETUPS7-307
Unit Sanitary Loading7-309
TYPES OF UNIT SANITARY (DRY WEATHER) LOADS7-310
ADDING UNIT SANITARY (DRY WEATHER) LOADS7-311
Composite Hydrographs7-318
Composite Hydrograph Window7-318
Contents-vi
Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window7-318

Inflows7-319
Defining Inflow Collections7-322
Inflow Control Center7-325
APPLY SANITARY INFLOW TYPE TO SELECTION DIALOG7-329
Sanitary Load Control Center7-329
APPLY SANITARY LOAD TO SELECTION DIALOG7-332
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections7-332
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data7-335
Allocation7-336
Billing Meter Aggregation7-338
Distribution7-339
Projection7-341
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data7-342
LoadBuilder Manager7-342
LoadBuilder Wizard7-343
LoadBuilder Run Summary7-354
Generating Thiessen Polygons7-354
Thiessen Polygon Creator Dialog Box7-357
Creating Boundary Polygon Feature Classes7-359
Pipeline Infiltration7-360
Hydrograph Curve Dialog Box7-360
Extreme Flows7-361
Extreme Flows Dialog7-361
Extreme Flow Setups Dialog7-366
Chapter 8: Calculating Your Model369

Steady State/Extended Period Simulation8-369
Steady State Simulation8-369
Extended Period Simulation8-369
EPS RESULTS BROWSER8-370
Calculation Options Manager8-373
Creating Calculation Options8-374
Calculation Option Attributes8-376
FLOW PROFILE METHOD8-382
Controlling Results Output8-382
REPORTING TIME STEPS DIALOG BOX8-383
Check Data/ Validate8-383
Detailed Calculation Summary Dialog Box8-384
Executive Summary Tab8-384
Calculation Options Tab8-385
Contents-vii
Pressure Summary Tab8-391

Pipe Report Tab8-392
Node Report Tab8-392
User Notifications8-393
User Notifications Manager8-393
USER NOTIFICATION DETAILS DIALOG BOX8-395
8-395
Chapter 9: Using Scenarios and Alternatives397

Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives9-397
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management9-398
A History of What-If Analyses9-398
BEFORE HAESTAD METHODS - DISTRIBUTED SCENARIOS9-398
WITH HAESTAD METHODS: SELF-CONTAINED SCENARIOS9-400
The Scenario Cycle9-400
Scenario Attributes and Alternatives9-402
A Familiar Parallel9-402
Inheritance9-403
OVERRIDING INHERITANCE9-404
DYNAMIC INHERITANCE9-404
Local and Inherited Values9-405
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance9-405
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance9-406
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System9-407
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions)9-408
Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions)9-408
Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions)9-409
Correcting an Error9-409
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions9-410
Finalizing the Project9-411
Summary9-411
Scenarios9-412
Base and Child Scenarios9-413
Creating Scenarios9-413
Editing Scenarios9-413
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs)9-414
Scenario Manager9-415
Alternatives9-417
Types of Alternatives9-417
Base and Child Alternatives9-418
Creating Alternatives9-418
Editing Alternatives9-419
Alternative Manager9-419
Alternative Editor Dialog Box9-420
Contents-viii
Active Topology Alternative9-421

CREATING AN ACTIVE TOPOLOGY CHILD ALTERNATIVE9-422
ACTIVE TOPOLOGY SELECTION DIALOG BOX9-423
Physical Alternatives9-424
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR CONDUITS9-424
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES9-431
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR TRANSITIONS9-432
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS9-432
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR OUTFALLS9-434
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE PIPES9-435
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNCTIONS9-437
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR PUMPS9-437
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR VARIABLE SPEED PUMP BATTERIES9438
PHYSICAL ALTERNATIVE FOR AIR VALVES9-439
Design Alternative9-440
Headloss Alternative9-443
Boundary Condition Alternatives9-444
Initial Settings Alternative9-445
Sanitary Loading Alternative9-447
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES9-448
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS9-448
SANITARY LOADING ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNCTIONS9448
Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives9-449
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR CONDUITS9-449
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR MANHOLES9-450
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR WET WELLS9-450
INFILTRATION AND INFLOW ALTERNATIVE FOR PRESSURE JUNCTIONS9-450
System Flows Alternative9-451
Operational Alternative9-452
User Data Extensions Alternative9-452
Calculation Options9-452
Chapter 10: Presenting Your Results453

Using Background Layers10-453
Background Layer Manager10-454
Working with Background Layer Folders10-456
Adding Background Layers10-457
Deleting Background Layers10-457
Editing Background Layers10-458
Renaming Background Layers10-458
Turning Background Layers On and Off10-458
Image Properties Dialog Box10-458
Contents-ix
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box10-460

DXF Properties Dialog Box10-461
Annotating Your Model10-462
Element Symbology Manager10-463
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager10-465
Adding Annotations10-466
Deleting Annotations10-467
Editing Annotations10-467
Renaming Annotations10-467
Annotation Properties Dialog Box10-468
FREE FORM ANNOTATION DIALOG BOX10-469
Zoom Dependent Visibility10-470
Color Coding Your Model10-470
Adding Color-Coding10-471
Deleting Color-Coding10-471
Editing Color-Coding10-472
Renaming Color-Coding10-472
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box10-472
Using Profiles10-474
Profiles Manager10-475
Viewing Profiles10-476
Creating a New Profile10-477
Editing Profiles10-478
Deleting Profiles10-478
Renaming Profiles10-478
Profile Setup Dialog Box10-479
Profile Viewer Dialog Box10-480
AXIS OPTIONS DIALOG BOX10-483
Engineering Profile Viewer Dialog Box10-483
ENGINEERING PROFILE OPTIONS10-485
GROUND PROFILE OPTIONS10-487
ANNOTATION PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX10-487
LINK ANNOTATION PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX10-487
TEXT PROPERTIES10-488
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables10-488
FlexTables Manager10-489
Working with FlexTable Folders10-491
FlexTable Dialog Box10-492
STATISTICS DIALOG BOX10-494
Opening FlexTables10-494
Creating a New FlexTable10-495
Deleting FlexTables10-495
Naming and Renaming FlexTables10-495
Editing FlexTables10-496
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data10-498
Contents-x
CUSTOM SORT DIALOG BOX10-501

Customizing Your FlexTable10-501
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box10-502
Element Relabeling Dialog Box10-504
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data10-505
Using Predefined Tables10-507
Reporting10-507
Using Standard Reports10-507
CREATING A PROJECT INVENTORY REPORT10-507
CREATING A SCENARIO SUMMARY REPORT10-508
CREATING A CONDUIT AND PRESSURE PIPE INVENTORY10-508
Reporting on Element Data10-508
Report Options10-508
Graphing10-509
Graph Manager10-510
Creating a Graph10-511
Printing a Graph10-512
Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying10-512
Graph Dialog Box10-512
GRAPH SERIES OPTIONS DIALOG BOX10-517
FILTER DIALOG BOX10-517
OBSERVED DATA DIALOG BOX10-517
Sample Observed Data Source10-519
Chart Options Dialog Box10-520

Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab10-521
SERIES TAB10-522
PANEL TAB10-522
AXES TAB10-525
GENERAL TAB10-532
TITLES TAB10-533
WALLS TAB10-538
PAGING TAB10-539
LEGEND TAB10-540
3D TAB10-546
Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab10-547
FORMAT TAB10-547
POINT TAB10-548
GENERAL TAB10-549
DATA SOURCE TAB10-550
MARKS TAB10-551
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab10-555
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab10-556
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab10-558
Border Editor Dialog Box10-559
Gradient Editor Dialog Box10-560
Color Editor Dialog Box10-561
Contents-xi
Color Dialog Box10-561

Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box10-562
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - SOLID TAB10-562
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - HATCH TAB10-563
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - GRADIENT TAB10-563
HATCH BRUSH EDITOR DIALOG BOX - IMAGE TAB10-564
Pointer Dialog Box10-565
Change Series Title Dialog Box10-566
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box10-566
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - SERIES TAB10-566
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - AXIS TAB10-570
CHART TOOLS GALLERY DIALOG BOX - OTHER TAB10-573
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box10-578
SERIES10-578
FUNCTIONS10-578
Customizing a Graph10-578
Print Preview Window10-587
Contours10-588
Contour Definition10-590
Contour Plot10-591
Contour Browser Dialog Box10-592
Enhanced Pressure Contours10-592
Using Named Views10-592
Using Aerial View10-593
Time Series Field Data10-594
SELECT ASSOCIATED MODELING ATTRIBUTE DIALOG BOX10-596
Chapter 11: Features of the MicroStation Version

597
MicroStation Environment11-598
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout11-598
MicroStation Project Files11-599
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties11-599
Element Properties11-600
Levels11-600
ELEMENT LEVELS DIALOG11-601
Text Styles11-601
Working with Elements11-601
Edit Elements11-601
Deleting Elements11-602
Modifying Elements11-602
CHANGE PIPE WIDTHS11-602
Contents-xii
EDIT ELEMENTS11-602
Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands11-602
BENTLEY SEWERCAD V8I CUSTOM MICROSTATION ENTITIES11603
MICROSTATION COMMANDS11-603
MOVING ELEMENTS11-603
MOVING ELEMENT LABELS11-604
Snap Menu11-604
Undo/Redo11-604
Special Considerations11-605
Import Bentley SewerCAD V8i11-605
Annotation Display11-605
Use SewerCAD V8i Z Order Command11-605
Chapter 12: Working in AutoCAD Mode607

The AutoCAD Workspace12-608
AutoCAD Integration with SewerCAD V8i12-608
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout12-609
Menus12-609
Toolbars12-609
Drawing Setup12-610
Symbol Visibility12-610
Layout Options Dialog12-610
AutoCAD Project Files12-611
AutoCAD Project Files12-611
Drawing Synchronization12-612
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands12-613
SewerCAD V8i Custom AutoCAD Entities12-613
SewerCAD V8i Custom AutoCAD Entities12-614
AutoCAD Commands12-614
Explode Elements12-614
Moving Elements12-615
Moving Element Labels12-615
Snap Menu12-615
Undo/Redo12-615
Importing SewerCAD V8i Data12-617
Importing SewerCAD V8i Data12-617
Working with Proxies12-617
Contents-xiii
Chapter 13: Theory619

Loading13-620
Common Load Types13-620
HYDROGRAPHS13-620
PATTERN LOADS13-621
HYDROGRAPHS VS. PATTERN LOADS13-621
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loading13-621
UNIT SANITARY (DRY WEATHER) LOADS13-622
EXTREME FLOW FACTOR13-622
COMMON VARIABLE PEAKING FACTORS13-623
Wet Weather Loading13-624
INFILTRATION13-624
INFLOW13-625
Known Flow13-625
Gravity Pipe Hydraulics13-626
The Energy Principle13-626
THE ENERGY EQUATION13-627
Hydraulic and Energy Grades13-628
HYDRAULIC GRADE13-629
ENERGY GRADE13-629
Friction Loss Methods13-629
CHEZYS EQUATION13-629
COLEBROOK-WHITE EQUATION13-630
HAZEN-WILLIAMS EQUATION13-631
DARCY-WEISBACH EQUATION13-631
Swamee and Jain Equation13-633
MANNINGS EQUATION13-633
Flow Regime13-634
PRESSURE FLOW13-635
UNIFORM FLOW AND NORMAL DEPTH13-635
CRITICAL FLOW, CRITICAL DEPTH, AND CRITICAL SLOPE13-635
SUBCRITICAL FLOW13-636
SUPERCRITICAL FLOW13-636
Gradually Varied Flow Analysis13-636
SLOPE CLASSIFICATION13-636
ZONE CLASSIFICATION13-638
PROFILE CLASSIFICATION13-639
Energy Balance13-640
STANDARD STEP METHOD13-641
DIRECT STEP METHOD13-641
Mixed Flow Profiles13-641
SEALING (SURCHARGING) CONDITIONS13-642
RAPIDLY VARIED FLOW13-642
Backwater Analysis13-642
FREE OUTFALL13-643
STRUCTURE FLOODING13-643
Contents-xiv
Frontwater Analysis13-643
Pipe Average Velocity13-644
UNIFORM FLOW VELOCITY13-644
FULL FLOW VELOCITY13-644
SIMPLE AVERAGE VELOCITY13-644
WEIGHTED AVERAGE VELOCITY13-645
PIPE AVERAGE VELOCITY AND TRAVEL TIME13-645
Capacity Analysis (Approximate Profiles)13-645
FULL CAPACITY PROFILES13-646
EXCESS CAPACITY PROFILES13-646
COMPOSITE EXCESS CAPACITY PROFILES13-648
Junction Headlosses and Minor Losses13-648
Manhole Head Loss Equations (AASHTO/HEC-2 Overview)13-649
Junction Headlosses13-649
STRUCTURE HEADLOSS13-649
SPECIAL ASSUMPTIONS13-652
Pressure Flow, Free Surface Flow, and Transitional Flow13-652
Initial Headloss Coefficient13-652
Correction for Pipe Diameter13-653
Correction for Flow Depth13-653
Correction for Relative Flow13-654
Correction for Plunging Flow13-654
Correction for Benching13-655
Headloss - AASHTO Method13-656
AASHTO Contraction Loss13-657
AASHTO Bend Loss13-657
AASHTO Bend Loss Original Equation13-658
AASHTO Expansion Loss13-659
AASHTO Correction For Non-Piped Flow13-660
AASHTO Correction for Shaping13-660
Minor Losses13-660
FITTING LOSS COEFFICIENTS13-661
Pump Theory13-662
Variable Speed Pumps13-663
Constant Horsepower Pumps13-666
Conservation of Mass and Energy13-667
CONSERVATION OF MASS13-667
CONSERVATION OF ENERGY13-668
The Gradient Algorithm13-668
Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm13-669
The Linear System Equation Solver13-671
Extended Period Simulations13-673
Extended Period Simulations Overview13-673
Routing Overview13-673
Convex Routing13-674
Weighted Translation Routing13-675
Contents-xv
Hydrologic and Hydraulic Time Steps13-676

Transitioning Between Gravity and Pressure Networks13-676
Identifying Gravity Pipes and Force Mains13-676
Direction of Flow in Gravity and Pressure Systems13-677
Transitioning From Gravity Pipes to Force Mains13-677
Transitioning From Force Mains to Gravity Elements13-678
Subnetworks13-682
Constraint Based Automatic Design13-683
Gravity Pipes and Structures Design13-683
Part Full Design13-683
Allow Multiple Sections13-684
Limit Section Size13-685
Pipe Matching13-685
Offset Matching13-686
Drop Structures13-686
Structure invert Elevations13-686
Design Priorities13-686
Automatic Design with Hydrograph and Pattern Loads13-689
Constraint Based Warning Messages13-690
Open and Closed Channel Weighting Methods13-690
Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO Users13-693
Energy Discontinuity13-693
Structure Energy Grade13-694
Design Considerations13-694
Reporting Flow Attributes13-694
Mannings n Coefficients13-695
Headloss Coefficients for Junctions13-698
Roughness ValuesMannings Equation13-699
Roughness ValuesDarcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White)
13-700
Appendix 14: References703

Chapter 15: About Bentley Systems705
Software15-705
CivilStorm15-706
SewerGEMS15-707
SewerGEMS15-707
WaterGEMS15-708
WaterCAD15-708
StormCAD15-709
Contents-xvi
PondPack15-709
FlowMaster15-709
CulvertMaster15-710
HAMMER15-710
GISConnect15-710
Bentley Institute Press15-711
Training15-712
Accreditations15-712
Contents-xvii
Contents-xviii
Chapter
Getting Started
Thank you for purchasing Bentley SewerCAD V8i. At Bentley Systems, we pride
ourselves in providing the very best engineering software available. Our goal is to
make software that is easy to install and use, yet so powerful and intuitive that it anticipates your needs without getting in your way.
When you first use Bentley SewerCAD V8i, use the intuitive interface and interactive
dialog boxes to guide you. If you need more information, use the online help by
pressing the F1 key or selecting Bentley SewerCAD V8i Help from the Help menu.
A help topic describing the area of the program in which you are working appears.
Documentation on page 1-4
Quick Start Lessons on page 1-5
Contacting Us on page 1-6
What is Bentley SewerCAD V8i?

SewerCAD V8i is an extremely powerful program for the design and analysis of
gravity flow and pressure flow through pipe networks and pumping stations. The
program can be run in Microstation and AutoCAD mode, giving you all the power of
Microstation and AutoCADs capabilities, or in Stand-Alone mode utilizing our own
graphical interface.
SewerCAD V8i allows you to construct a graphical representation of a pipe network
containing information such as pipe data, pump data, loading, and infiltration. You
have a choice of conveyance elements including circular pipes, arches, boxes and
more.
1-1
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

The gravity network is calculated using the built-in numerical model, which utilizes
both the direct step and standard step gradually varied flow methods. Flow calculations are valid for both surcharged and varied flow situations, including hydraulic
jumps, backwater, and drawdown curves. You also have the flexibility to mix gravity
and pressure components freely, building your systems in parallel or in series as they
exist in the field. Pressure elements can be controlled based on system hydraulics,
turning pumps on and off due to changes in flows and pressures.
SewerCAD V8is flexible reporting feature allows you to customize and print the
model results in both a report format and as a graphical plot.
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates

For instructions on installing, registering, activating, and updating the software please
refer to the Readme.pdf in the Program Files/Bentley/SewerCAD8 directory.
Municipal License Administrator Auto-Configuration

At the conclusion of the installation process, the Municipal License Administrator will
be executed, to automatically detect and set the default configuration for your product,
if possible. However, if multiple license configurations are detected on the license
server, you will need to select which one to use by default, each time the product
starts. If this is the case, you will see the screen below. Simply press OK to clear the
Warning dialog, then press Refresh Configurations to display the list of available
configurations. Select one and press Make Default, then exit the License Administrator. (You only need to repeat this step if you decide to make a different configuration the default in the future.)
1-2
Getting Started
Software Updates via the Web and Bentley SELECT

Note:
Your PC must be connected to the Internet to use the Check for

Updates button.
Bentley SELECT is the comprehensive delivery and support subscription program

that features product updates and upgrades via Web downloads, around-the-clock
technical support, exclusive licensing options, discounts on training and consulting
services, as well as technical information and support channels. Its easy to stay up-todate with the latest advances in our software. Software updates can be downloaded
from our Web site, and your version of Bentley SewerCAD V8i can then be upgraded
to the current version quickly and easily. Just click the Check for Updates button on
the toolbar to launch your preferred Web browser and open our Web site. The Web site
automatically checks to see if your installed version is the latest available, and if not, it
provides you with the opportunity to download the correct upgrade to bring it up-todate. You can also access our Knowledgebase for answers to your Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQs).
For more information, see Technical Support on page 1-6.
Troubleshooting
Because of the multitasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications
running in the background that make it difficult for software setup and installations to
determine the configuration of your current system. If you have difficulties during the
installation or uninstallation process, please try these steps before contacting our technical support staff:
1. Shut down and restart your computer.
2. Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications
currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Shift+Esc in Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
Exit any applications that are running.
3. Disable any antivirus software that you are running.
Caution:
After you install Bentley SewerCAD V8i, make certain that

you restart any antivirus software you have disabled. Failure
to restart your antivirus software leaves you exposed to
potentially destructive computer viruses.
4. Try running the installation or uninstallation again (without running any other
program first).
If these three steps fail to successfully install or uninstall the product, contact our
Technical Support staff. For more information, see Contacting Us on page 1-6.
1-3
Documentation
Updating Your SentinelLM Licenses if You Move Your License

Server
If you move your SentinelLM license manager to a different server, following these
steps to update the licenses:
1. Install the license file on the new server.
2. Replace the server name in the license.ini file on all client workstations with the
new server name (on the line containing Server=). Dont forget to save the file
on each workstation. The license.ini file is usually located in the Haestad Method
product directory.
Updating Your Bentley SELECT Server Licenses if you Move Your

License Server
If you move your Bentley SELECT Server license manager to a different server,
following these steps to update the licenses:
1. Obtain a new license file (license string) from Bentley Systems, then update the
license.lic file on the new server with the new license string.
2. Replace the server name in the license.lic file on all client workstations with the
new server name. Dont forget to save the file on each workstation. The license.lic
file is usually located in the Haestad Method product directory.
Checking Your Current Registration Status

After you have registered the software, you can check your current registration status
by opening the About... box from within the software itself.
To view your registration information
1. Select Help > About Bentley SewerCAD V8i Edition.
2. The version and build number for Bentley SewerCAD V8i Edition display in the
lower-left corner of the About Bentley Bentley SewerCAD V8i dialog box.
The current registration status is also displayed, including: user name and
company, serial number, license type and check-in status, feature level, expiration
date, and SELECT Server information.
Documentation
Bentley SewerCAD V8i documentation is available in two parts:
1-4
Getting Started
Online help:
The online help is accessible from the Help menu or

by pressing F1. Additionally, when you are using
Bentley SewerCAD V8i, you can call the online help
at any time by clicking a help button in any dialog
box or window.
The context-sensitive online help is designed to make
it easy for you to quickly find specific information
about a feature you are using in Bentley SewerCAD
V8i. The online help makes extensive use of
hyperlinks and provides a table of contents, index,
and keyword search to help you locate the
information you need.
Online PDF Book:
Note:
The content in the online help is also available in .pdf

format and is available at docs.bentley.com. This pdf
contains the same content as the online help, but
includes hypertext and is designed to be printed by
you from a local printing device. As well as being
more easily printable than the online help, the online
book also uses hypertext and is searchable.
On-screen display of graphics in .pdf files is dependent on the

zoom level you use. For more optimal viewing of graphics in
Adobe Acrobat Reader, try using 167% and 208% zoom.
Quick Start Lessons

The lessons quickly introduce you to specific features of Bentley SewerCAD V8i. To
access the lessons, select Quick Start Lessons from the Help menu. Run a lesson by
selecting one of the entries in the list.
1-5
Contacting Us
Contacting Us
Contact Bentley Systems if you want product information, to upgrade your software,
or need technical support.
Sales
Bentley Systems, Inc. professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Please
contact your sales representative for any questions regarding Bentley Systems, Inc.
latest products and prices.
Toll-free U.S. Phone:
800-727-6555
Worldwide Phone:
+1-203-755-1666
Fax:
+1-203-597-1488
Email:
sales@haestad.com
Technical Support
We hope that everything runs smoothly and you never have a need for our technical
support staff. However, if you do need support, our highly-skilled staff offers their
services seven days a week, and may be contacted by phone, fax, email, and the
Internet. For information on the various levels of support that we offer, contact our
sales team today and request information on our ClientCare program, or visit our Web
site.
When calling for support, in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your
problem, please be in front of your computer and have the following information
available:
1-6
Your computers operating system (Windows 2000 or Windows XP).
Name and build number of the Bentley Systems, Inc. software you are calling
about. The build number can be determined by clicking Help > About Bentley
SewerCAD V8i. The build number is the number in brackets located in the lowerleft corner of the dialog box that opens.
A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem.
Any error messages or other information displayed on your screen.
Getting Started
When emailing or faxing for support, please provide the following details, in addition
to the above, to enable us to provide a more timely and accurate response:
Company name, address, and phone number
A detailed explanation of your concerns
If you are emailing us, the Haestad Bentley SewerCAD V8i.log files located in the
product directory (e.g., C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Haestad\Bentley SewerCAD V8i\1)
Support Hours
:Technical Support is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
You can contact our technical support team at:
Phone:
+1-203-755-1666
Fax:
+1-203-597-1488
Email:
support@haestad.com
Addresses
Use this address information to contact us:
Internet:
http://www.haestad.com
Email:
support@haestad.com
sales@haestad.com
Toll-free U.S. Phone:
800-727-6555
Worldwide Phone:
+1-203-755-1666
Fax:
+1-203-597-1488
Mail:
Bentley Systems, Inc., Incorporated

Haestad Methods Solutions Center
Suite 200W
37 Brookside Road
Watertown, CT 06795
1-7
Contacting Us
Your Suggestions Count

Bentley Systems, Inc. strives to continually provide you with sophisticated software
and documentation. We are very interested in hearing your suggestions for improving
the Bentley SewerCAD V8i software, online help, and printed manual. Your feedback
guides us in developing products that make your work easier.
Please let us hear from you!
1-8
Chapter
Introducing the
Workspace
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
workspace.
The Workspace on page 2-9
Menus on page 2-11
Toolbars on page 2-25
Customizing the Toolbars on page 2-36
Dynamic Manager Display on page 2-37
The Workspace
You use Bentley SewerCAD V8i in one of these modes:
Stand-Alone Editor on page 2-9
Microstation Mode on page 2-10
AutoCAD Mode on page 2-11
Stand-Alone Editor
The Stand-Alone Editor is the workspace that contains the various managers, toolbars,
and menus, along with the drawing pane, that make up the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
interface. The Bentley SewerCAD V8i interface uses dockable windows and toolbars,
so the position of the various interface elements can be manually adjusted to suit your
preference.
2-9
The Workspace
By default, the Bentley SewerCAD V8i environment looks like this:
Microstation Mode
Microstation mode lets you create and model your network directly within your
primary drafting environment. This gives you access to all of Microstations drafting
and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley SewerCAD V8i
modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between
Bentley SewerCAD V8i and Microstation enables extremely detailed and accurate
mapping of model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation
features available in Microstation. This facility provides the most flexibility and the
highest degree of compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data
maintained at your organization.
Note:
2-10
For more information about runnning Bentley SewerCAD V8i in

Microstation mode, see MicroStation Environment on page 12702.
Introducing the Workspace
AutoCAD Mode
AutoCAD mode lets you create and model your network directly within your primary
drafting environment. This gives you access to all of AutoCADs drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley SewerCAD V8i modeling
tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between Bentley
SewerCAD V8i and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and accurate mapping of
model features, and provides the full array of output and presentation features available in AutoCAD. This facility provides the most flexibility and the highest degree of
compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data maintained at your
organization.
Note:
For more information about runnning Bentley SewerCAD V8i in

AutoCAD mode, see Working in AutoCAD Mode on page 13-711.
Menus
Menus are located at the top of Bentley SewerCAD V8i stand-alone editor window
and provide access to program commands, which are broken down by type of functionality.
The following menus are available:
File Menu on page 2-11
Edit Menu on page 2-15
Analysis Menu on page 2-17
View Menu on page 2-19
Tools Menu on page 2-22
Report Menu on page 2-24
Help Menu on page 2-24
File Menu
The File menu contains the following commands:
New
Creates a new project. When you select this

command, a new untitled project is created.
Open
Opens an existing project. When you select this

command, the Open dialog box appears, allowing
you to browse to the project to be opened.
2-11
Menus
2-12
Close
Closes the current project without exiting the

program.
Close All
Closes all currently open projects.
Save
Saves the current project.
Save As
Saves the current project under a new project name

and/or to a different directory location.
Save All
Saves all currently open projects.
ProjectWise
Opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
OpenOpen an existing SewerCAD V8i

project from ProjectWise. You are prompted to
log into a ProjectWise datasource if you are not
already logged in.
Note:
Save AsSaves the current project to a

ProjectWise datasource. You are prompted to
log into a ProjectWise datasource if you are not
already logged in.
Change DatasourceLets you connect to a

different ProjectWise datasource for future
Open and Save As operations.
ImportLets you import the following file types

into the ProjectWise project:
SewerCAD V8 DatabaseLets you import

a Bentley SewerCAD V8i project database
file.
SubmodelLets you import a SewerCAD

submodel file.
LandXMLLets you import a LandXML

file.
StormCAD V8 Lets you import a

StormCAD V8 file.
SewerGEMS V8 Lets you import a

SewerGEMS V8 file.
Note:
Only projects that were

originally saved into
ProjectWise from the SewerCAD
V8i application can be opened
For more information about

using SewerCAD V8i with
ProjectWise, see Considerations
for ProjectWise Users on page 4158
2-13
Menus
Import

commands:
Export
2-14
Bentley SewerCAD V8i DatabaseLets you

import a Bentley SewerCAD V8i project database file.
SubmodelLets you import a SewerCAD

submodel file.
LandXMLLets you import a LandXML

file.
StormCAD V8Lets you import a

StormCAD V8 file.
SewerGEMS V8 Lets you import a

SewerGEMS V8 file.

commands:
DXFLets you export the current network

layout as a DXF drawing.
SubmodelExports the currently selected

area of the network as a SewerCAD submodel
file.
LandXMLExports the current project as a

LandXML file.
Page Setup
Defines the print settings that will be used when the

current view is printed.
Print Preview
Opens the Print Preview window, displaying the

current view exactly as it will be printed. You can
select whether you want the print preview to be Fit
to Page or Scaled:
Fit to PageThe view will be zoomed in or out

so that the current view fits to a single page of
the default page size.
ScaledThe view will be scaled so that it

matches the user-defined drawing scale (this is
defined on the Drawing Tab of the Options
dialog: Tools > Options).
Print
Prints the current view. You can select whether you

want the print preview to be Fit to Page or Scaled:
Fit to PageThe view will be zoomed in or out

so that the current view fits to a single page of
the default page size.
ScaledThe view will be scaled so that it

matches the user-defined drawing scale (this is
defined on the Drawing Tab of the Options
dialog: Tools > Options).
Project Properties
Opens the Project Properties dialog box, allowing

you to specify project-level settings.
Recent Files
When the Recent Files Visible option is selected in

the Options dialog box, the most recently opened
files will appear in the File menu. See Options
Dialog Box - Global Tab on page 4-147 for more
information.
Exit
Closes the program.
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the following commands:
Undo
Cancels the last data input action on the currently

active dialog box. Clicking Undo again cancels
the second-to-last data input action, and so on.
Redo
Cancels the last undo command.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted element.
2-15
Menus
Select By Polygon
2-16
Lets you select elements in your model by

drawing a polygon in the drawing pane. Click in
the drawing pane to draw each side of the
polygon. After the polygon has been drawn, rightclick to select from the following options:
As Selected - All elements contained within

the polygon will be selected. Elements that
were selected before the Select By Polygon
opperation will be de-selected.
Add to Selection - All elements contained

within the polygon will be selected in addition
to any elements that were selected before the
Select By Polygon operation were performed.
Invert Selection - All elements contained

within the polygon that were selected before
the operation will be de-selected; all elements
contained within the polygon that were not
selected before the operation will be selected
Remove From Selection - All elements

contained within the polygon that were
selected before the operation will be deselected.
Select All
Selects all of the elements in the network.
Invert Selection
Selects all currently unselected elements and

deselects all currently selected ones.
Select by Element
Opens a submenu listing all available element

types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to select all elements of that type in the
model.
Select by Attribute
Opens a menu listing all available attribute types.

Select one of the attribute types from the menu
and the Query Builder dialog box opens.
Clear Selection
Deselects the currently selected element(s).
Clear Highlight
Removes Network Navigator highlighting for all

elements.
Find Element
Lets you find a specific element by entering the

elements label.
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu contains the following commands:
Scenarios
Opens the Scenario Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project scenarios.
Alternatives
Opens the Alternative Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage alternatives.
Calculation Options
Opens the Calculation Options Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage calculation
settings for the project.
Totalizing Flow
Meters
Opens the Totalizing Flow Meters manager where

you can create new meters.
System Head Curves
Opens the System Head Curves manager.
EPS Results Browser
Opens the EPS Results Browser dialog box, which

lets you manipulate the currently displayed time
step and to animate the drawing pane.
Calculation Summary
Opens the calculation summary report, which

reports the details of the calculations performed
on your model.
User Notifications
Opens the User Notifications Manager, allowing

you to view warnings and errors uncovered by the
validation process.
Validate
Runs a diagnostic check on the network data to

alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the manual
validation command, and it checks for input data
errors. It differs in this respect from the automatic
validation that SewerCAD V8i runs when the
compute command is initiated, which checks for
network connectivity errors as well as many other
things beyond what the manual validation checks.
Pressing CTRL+F7 also selects this command.
2-17
Menus
Compute
Calculates the network. Before calculating, an

automatic validation routine is triggered, which
checks the model for network connectivity errors
and performs other validation. For more
information, see Calculating Your Model on
page 8-433. Pressing F9 also selects this
command.
Components Menu
The Components menu contains the following commands:
2-18
Default Design
Constraints
Opens the Default Design Constraints dialog,

whiach allows you to specify constraints for pipes,
nodes, and inlets to be used during an automatic
design and while checking constraints for an
analysis calculation.
Controls
Opens the Controls manager where you can set

controls, conditions, actions, and logical control
sets.
Conduit Catalog
Opens the Conduit Catalog dialog box, which lets

you create, edit, and view catalog conduits.
Catalog conduits are an efficient way to reuse
common physical conduit definitions.
Flow Headloss Curves
Opens the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog.
Minor Loss
Coefficients
Opens the Minor Loss Coefficients Manager

dialog.
Unit Sanitary (Dry

Weather) Loads
Opens the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

dialog box, which lets you create, edit, and delete
unit sanitary loads. For more information, see
Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on
page 7-372.
Patterns
Opens the Pattern Manager where you can create

and edit diurnal loading patterns for use with
extended period simulations. For more
information, see Defining Patterns on page 7364.
Pattern Setups
Opens the Pattern Setup Manager where you can

associate diurnal patterns with the appropriate unit
sanitary loads for a given scenario. For more
information, see Defining Pattern Setups on
page 7-367.
Extreme Flows
Opens the Extreme Flows dialog.
Extreme Flow Setups
Opens the Extreme Flow Setups dialog.
Pump Definitions
Opens the Pump Definitions dialog box, which

lets you view, edit, and create pump curve
definitions. For more information, see Pump
Curve Definitions Dialog Box on page 6-235.
Time Series Field

Data
Opens the Time Series Field Data dialog.
Engineering Libraries
Opens the Engineering Libraries Manager.
View Menu
The View menu contains the following commands:
Element Symbology
Opens the Element Symbology Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage annotation and
color-coding in your project.
Background Layers
Opens the Background Layers Manager, which

lets you create, view, and manage the background
layers associated with the project.
Network Navigator
Opens the Network Navigator.
Selection Sets
Opens the Selection Sets Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage selection sets associated
with the project.
Queries
Opens the Query Manager, which lets you create

SQL expressions for use with selection sets and
FlexTables. For more information, see ADD
LINK
2-19
Menus
2-20
Prototypes
Opens the Prototypes Manager, which lets you

enter default values for elements in your model.
Prototypes can reduce data entry requirements
dramatically if a group of network elements share
common data. For more information, see ADD
LINK
FlexTables
Opens the FlexTables Manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage the tabular reports for
the project.
Graphs
Opens the Graph Manager, which lets you create,

view, and manage graphs for the project.
Profiles
Opens the Profile Manager, which lets you create,

view, and manage the profiles for the project.
Contours
Opens the Contours manager where you can create

and edit contour definitions.
Named Views
Opens the Named Views manager where you can

create, edit, and use Named Views.
Aerial View
Opens the Aerial View navigation window.
Properties
Turns the Properties Editor display on or off.
Customizations
Opens the Customization Manager dialog.
Auto-Refresh
Turns automatic updates to the main window view

on or off whenever changes are made to the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i datastore. When selected,
a check mark appears next to this menu command,
indicating that automatic updates are turned on.
Refresh Drawing
Updates the main window view according to the

latest information contained in the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i datastore.
Zoom

commands:
Zoom ExtentsSets the view so that the

entire network is visible in the drawing pane.
Zoom WindowActivates the manual zoom

tool, which lets you specify a portion of the
drawing to enlarge.
Zoom InEnlarges the size of the model in

the drawing pane.
Zoom OutReduces the size of the model in

the drawing pane.
Zoom RealtimeEnables the realtime zoom

tool, which lets you zoom in and out by
moving the mouse while holding down the left
mouse button.
Zoom CenterOpens the Zoom Center

dialog box, which lets you enter drawing coordinates that will be centered in the drawing
pane.
Zoom to SelectionZooms to the element(s)

that are currently selected in the drawing
pane.
Zoom PreviousResets the zoom level to

the last setting.
Zoom NextResets the zoom level to the

setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed.
Pan
Activates the Pan tool, which lets you move the

model within the drawing pane. When you select
this command, the cursor changes to a hand,
indicating that you can click and hold the left
mouse button and move the mouse to move the
drawing.
Toolbars
Opens a submenu that lists each of the available

toolbars. Select one of the toolbars in the submenu
to turn that toolbar on or off. For more
information, see Toolbars on page 2-25.
Reset Workspace
Resets the Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace so

that the dockable managers appear in their default
factory-set positions.
2-21
Menus
Tools Menu
The Tools menu contains the following commands:
2-22
Active Topology
Selection
Opens a Select dialog to select elements in the

drawing to make them Inactive or Active.
ModelBuilder
Opens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager, which

lets you create, edit, and manage ModelBuilder
connections to be used in the model-building/modelsynchronizing process. For more information, see
ModelBuilder Connections Manager on page 5-175.
TRex
Opens the TRex node elevation assignment tool.
LoadBuilder
Opens the LoadBuilder manager where you can assign

demands to model nodes using data from outside
sources.
Thiessen Polygon
Opens the Wizard used to create Thiessen polygons

for use with LoadBuilder.
Inflow Control Center
Opens the Inflow Control Center, allowing you to

create, edit, and delete sanitary inflow definitions.
Element Property
Inferencing
Opes the Element Property Inferencing dialog.
Hyperlinks
Lets you associate external files, such as pictures or

movie files, with elements. For more information, see
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements on page 6-326.
User Data Extensions
User Data ExtensionsOpens the User Data

Extension dialog box, which lets you add and define
custom data fields. For example, you can add new
fields such as the pipe installation date. For more
information, see User Data Extensions on page 6337.
Sanitary Load Control

Center
Opens the Sanitary Load Control Center, allowing you

to create, edit, and delete sanitary load definitions.
Database Utilities

commands:
Compact DatabaseWhen you delete data from

a Bentley SewerCAD V8i project, such as
elements or alternatives, the database store that
Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses can become fragmented, causing unnecessarily large data files,
which impact performance substantially.
Compacting the database eliminates the empty
data records, thereby defragmenting the datastore
and improving the performance of the file.
Note:
Every tenth time a file is saved,

Bentley SewerCAD V8i will
automatically prompt you to
compact the database. If you open
a file without saving it, the count
does not go up. If you open and
save a file multiple times in the
same session, the count only goes
up on the first save. If you open,
save, and close the file, the count
goes up. Click Yes to compact the
database, or no to close the prompt
dialog box without compacting.
Since compacting the database can
take time, especially for larger
models, you may want to postpone
the compact procedure until a later
time. You can modify how Bentley
SewerCAD V8i compacts the
database in the Options dialog box.
Synchronize DrawingSynchronizes the current

model drawing with the project database.
Update Database cacheUpdates the current

model to reflect any changes made in the database.
Update Results from Project DirectoryThis

command copies the model result files (if any) from the
project directory (the directory where the project .mdb
file is saved) to the custom result file directory. The
custom result directory is specified in
Tools>Options>Project tab. This allows you to make a
copy of the results that may exist in the model's save
directory and replace the current results being worked
on with them.
Copy Results to Project DirectoryThis

command copies the result files that are currently being
used by the model to the project directory (where the
project .mdb is stored).
Batch Update Conduit DescriptionsUpdates

the Conduit Description field to reflect any changes
2-23
made to the underlying attributes.
Menus
Layout
Opens a submenu that lists each of the available

element types. Select one of the element types in the
submenu to place that element in your model.
External Tools
Run an existing external tool or create a new one by

opening up the External Tools manager.
Options
Opens the Options dialog box, which lets you change

global settings such as display pane settings, drawing
scale, units, display precision and format used, and
element labeling.
Report Menu
The Report menu contains the following commands:
Element Tables
Opens a submenu that lets you display FlexTables

for any link or node element. These predefined
FlexTables contain most of the input data and
results for each instance of the selected element in
the model.
Element Details
Allows you to select one or more elements from

the drawing view. A report is generated containing
the details of the selected element(s).
Scenario Summary
Opens the Scenario Summary Report.
Project Inventory
Opens the Project Inventory Report, which

contains the number of each of the various
element types that are in the network.
Conduit and Pressure

Pipe Inventory
Opens the Conduit and Pressure Pipe Inventory

report.
Report Options
Opens the Report Options box where you can set

Headers and Footers for the predefined reports.
Help Menu
The Help menu contains the following commands:
2-24
Bentley SewerCAD V8i

Help
Opens the online help Table of Contents.
Quick Start Lessons
Opens the online help to the Quick Start Lessons

Overview topic.
Welcome Dialog
Opens the Welcome dialog box.
Check for Updates
Opens your Web browser to the our Web site,

allowing you to check for Bentley SewerCAD V8i
updates.
Bentley Institute
Training
Opens your browser to the Bentley Institute

Training web site.
Bentley Professional
Services
Opens your browser to the Bentley Professional

Services web site.
Online Support
Opens your browser to SELECTservices area of

the Bentley web site.
Discussion Groups
Opens your browser to Bentleys Haestad

Discussion Groups.
Bentley.com
Opens the home page on the Bentley web site.
About Bentley
SewerCAD V8i
Opens the About Bentley SewerCAD V8i dialog

box, which displays copyright information about
the product, registration information, and the
current version number of this release.
Toolbars
Toolbars provide access to frequently used menu commands and are organized by the
type of functionality offered. Many of the toolbars have additional buttons available
that are not displayed by default. You can display these additional buttons by
following the procedure in Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-36.
The following toolbars are available:
Layout Toolbar on page 2-27
Standard Toolbar on page 2-28
Edit Toolbar on page 2-30
View Toolbar on page 2-30
2-25
Toolbars
2-26
Scenarios Toolbar on page 2-32
Analysis Toolbar on page 2-32
Compute Toolbar on page 2-33
Tools Toolbar on page 2-33
Help Toolbar on page 2-34
Zoom Toolbar on page 2-34
Layout Toolbar
You use the Layout toolbar to lay out your model in the drawing pane. The Layout
toolbar contains the following buttons:
Select
Layout
Manhole
Transition
Wet Well
Changes your mouse cursor into a selection

tool. The selection tool behavior varies
depending on the direction in which the mouse
is dragged after defining the first corner of the
selection box, as follows:
If the selection is made from left-to-right, all
elements that fall completely within the
selection box that is defined will be selected.
If the selection is made from right-to-left, all
elements that fall completely within the
selection box and that cross one or more of the
lines of the selection box will be selected.
Changes your mouse cursor into a network
layout tool. Right-click to change the type of
element and the type of link.
Pressure PipeLets you place an

element through which water moves under
pressure. Pressure pipes typically
discharge from a pumping station located
upstream in the sewer collection system.
ConduitLets you place a closed section

element through which water moves. A
conduit has a constant roughness and
cross section shape along its entire length.
Available conduit shapes consist of both
open and closed cross sections.
Changes your mouse cursor into a manhole

element symbol. Clicking the left mouse button
while this tool is active causes a manhole
element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a transition
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a wet well
while this tool is active causes a wet well
mouse cursor.
2-27
Toolbars
Outfall
Pressure
Junction
Pump
Variable Speed
Pump Battery
Air Valve
Border
Text
Line
Changes your mouse cursor into an outfall

while this tool is active causes an outfall
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a pressure
junction element symbol. Clicking the left
mouse button while this tool is active causes a
manhole element to be placed at the location of
the mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a pump
while this tool is active causes a pump element
to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a variable
speed pump battery element symbol. Clicking
the left mouse button while this tool is active
causes a manhole element to be placed at the
location of the mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into an air valve
mouse cursor.
Changes your mouse cursor into a border
symbol. When the border tool is active, you can
draw a simple box in the drawing pane using
the mouse. For example, you might want to
draw a border around the entire model.
Changes your mouse cursor into a text symbol.
When the text tool is active, you can add
simple text to your model. Click anywhere in
the drawing pane to display the Text Editor
dialog box, which lets you enter text to be
displayed in your model.
Changes your mouse cursor into a line symbol.
When this tool is active, you can draw lines and
polygons in your model using the mouse.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar contains the following buttons:
2-28
New
Creates a new Bentley SewerCAD V8i project.

When you select this command, the Select File to
Create dialog box appears, allowing you to
define a name and directory location for the new
project.
Open
Opens an existing Bentley SewerCAD V8i

project. When this command is initialized, the
Select Bentley SewerCAD V8i Project to Open
dialog box appears, allowing you to browse to the
project to be opened.
Save
Saves the current project.
Print Preview
Opens the Print Preview window, displaying the

current view exactly as it will be printed.
Print
Prints the current view of the network as

displayed in the drawing pane.
2-29
Toolbars
Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains the following buttons:
Undo
Cancels your most recent action.
Redo
Lets you redo the last cancelled action.
Find Element
Lets you find a specific element by choosing it

from a menu containing all elements in the
current model.
View Toolbar
The View toolbar contains the following buttons, which give you easy access to many
of the managers in Bentley SewerCAD V8i.:
2-30
Element
Symbology
Opens the Element Symbology manager,

allowing you to create, view, and manage the
element symbol settings for the project.
Background
Layers
Opens the Background Layers manager,

allowing you to create, view, and manage the
background layers associated with the project.
Network
Navigator
Opens the Network Navigator dialog box.
Selection Sets
Opens the Selection Sets Manager, allowing you

to create, view, and modify the selection sets
associated with the project.
Queries
Opens and closes the Query Manager.
FlexTables
Opens the FlexTables manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the tabular reports for
the project.
Graphs
Opens the Graph manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the graphs for the
project.
Profiles
Opens the Profile manager, allowing you to

create, view, and manage the profiles for the
project.
Contours
Opens the Contours manager, where you can

create and edit contour definitions.
Aerial View
Opens the Aerial View navigation window.
Properties
Opens and closes the Property Editor.
Customization
s
Opens the Customizations Manager.
2-31
Toolbars
Scenarios Toolbar
The Scenario toolbar contains the following buttons:
Scenario List
Box
Lets you quickly change the current scenario.
Scenarios
Opens the Scenario manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project scenarios.
Alternatives
Opens the Alternative manager, which lets you

create, view, and manage project alternatives.
Calculation
Options
Opens the Calculation Options manager, which

lets you create different profiles for different
calculation settings.
Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis toolbar contains the following buttons:
2-32
Totalizing
Flow Meters
Opens the Totalizing Flow Meters manager

where you can create new meters.
System Head
Curves
Opens the System Head Curves manager.
Calculation
Summary
Opens the Calculation Summary to view results.
Compute Toolbar
The Compute toolbar contains the following buttons:
Validate
Runs a diagnostic check on the network data to

alert you to possible problems that may be
encountered during calculation. This is the
manual validation command, and it checks for
input data errors. It differs in this respect from
the automatic validation that SewerCAD V8i
runs when the compute command is initiated,
which checks for network connectivity errors as
well as many other things beyond what the
manual validation checks.
Compute
Calculates the network. Before calculating, an

automatic validation routine is triggered, which
checks the model for network connectivity
errors and performs other validation. For more
information, see Calculating Your Model on
page 8-433.
User
Notifications
Opens the User Notifications Manager, allowing

you to view warnings and errors uncovered by
the validation process. This button does not
appear in the toolbar by default, but can be
added. For more information, see Adding and
Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-36.
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar contains the following buttons:
Active
Topology
Selection
Opens a Select dialog to select elements in the

drawing to make them Inactive or Active.
ModelBuilder
Opens the ModelBuilder Connections Manager,

where you can create, edit, and manage
ModelBuilder connections to be used in the
model-building/model-synchronizing process.
2-33
Toolbars
Help Toolbar
The Help toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are available in
the Help menu. The Help toolbar contains the following buttons.
Check for
Updates
Opens your Web browser to our Web site,

allowing you to check for Bentley SewerCAD
V8i updates.
SewerCAD
Help
Opens the Bentley SewerCAD V8i online help.
Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom toolbar provides access to the zooming and panning tools. It contains the
following buttons:
2-34
Zoom Extents
Sets the view so that the entire model is visible in

the drawing pane.
Zoom Window
Activates the manual zoom tool, which lets you

specify a portion of the drawing to enlarge
Zoom In
Magnifies the current view in the drawing pane.
Zoom Out
Reduces the current view in the drawing pane.
Zoom
Realtime
Enables the realtime zoom tool, which lets you

zoom in and out by moving the mouse while the
left mouse button is depressed.
Pan
Activates the Pan tool, which lets you move the

model within the drawing pane. When you select
this command, the cursor changes to a hand,
indicating that you can click and hold the left
mouse button and move the mouse to move the
drawing.
Refresh
Drawing
Updates the main window view according to the

latest information contained in the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i datastore. If you click the arrow
a submenu will open offering the following
commands:
Auto-refresh: When this control is toggled on,

the drawing will automatically refresh.
Refresh Drawing: Updates the main window
view according to the latest information

contained in the datastore.
2-35
Customizing the Toolbars
Customizing the Toolbars

You can customize Bentley SewerCAD V8i toolbars in any of the following ways:
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-36
Controlling Toolbars on page 2-36
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons

Toolbar buttons represent Bentley SewerCAD V8i menu commands. You can remove
buttons from any toolbar, and add commands to any toolbar on the Commands tab of
the Customize dialog box.
To add or remove a button from a toolbar:
1. Click the down arrow on the end of the toolbar you want to customize. A series of
submenus appear, allowing you to select or deselect any button in that toolbar.
2. Click Add or Remove Buttons then move the mouse cursor to the right until all
of the submenus appear, as shown in the following figure:
3. Click the space to left of the toolbar button you want to add. A check mark
appears in the submenu and the button appears in the toolbar.
or
Click the check mark next to the toolbar button you want to remove. The button
will no longer appear in the toolbar.
Controlling Toolbars
You can control toolbars in Bentley SewerCAD V8i on the Toolbars tab of the
Customize dialog box. You can turn toolbars on and off, or move the toolbar to a
different location in the workspace.
2-36

To turn toolbars off:
Click View > Toolbars, then click the check mark next to the toolbar you want to turn
off.
To turn toolbars on:
Click View > Toolbars, then click in the space to the left of the toolbar you want to
turn on.
To move a toolbar to a different location in the workspace:
Move your mouse to the vertical dotted line on the left side of any toolbar, then drag
the toolbar to the desired location. If you move a toolbar away from the other toolbar,
the toolbar becomes a floating dialog box.
Related Topic
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-36
Dynamic Manager Display

You access most of the features in Bentley SewerCAD V8i through a system of
dynamic windows called managers. For example, the look of the elements is
controlled in the Element Symbology manager while animation is controlled in
the EPS Results Browser manager.
When you first start Bentley SewerCAD V8i, only two managers are displayed: the
Element Symbology and Background Layers managers. This is the default workspace.
You can display as many managers as you want and move them to any location in the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace.
To return to the default workspace:
Click View > Reset Workspace.
If you return to the default workspace, the next time you start Bentley SewerCAD
V8i, you will lose any customizations you might have made to the dynamic
manager display.
2-37
Opening Managers
To open a manager:
1. Do one of the following:
Select the desired manager from the View menu.
Click a managers button on one of the toolbars.
Press the keyboard shortcut for the desired manager.
2. If the manager is not already docked, you can drag it to the top, left- or right-side,
or bottom of the SewerCAD V8i window to dock it. For more information on
docking managers, see Customizing Managers on page 2-40.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Managers

The following table lists all the Bentley SewerCAD V8i managers, their toolbar
buttons, and keyboard shortcuts.

Toolbar
Button
2-38
Keyboard
Shortcut
Manager
Scenarioslets you build a model run
from alternatives. For more information,
see Scenario Manager on page 9-471.
ALT+1
Alternativeslets you create and manage

alternatives. For more information, see
Alternative Manager on page 9-475.
ALT+2
Calculation Optionslets you set

parameters for the numerical engine. For
more information, see Calculation Options
Manager on page 8-433.
ALT+3
Element Symbologycontrols how

elements look and what attributes are
displayed. For more information, see
Element Symbology Manager on
page 10-540.
CTRL+1
Background Layerslets you control the

display of background layers. For more
information, see Background Layer
CTRL+2
Toolbar
Button
Manager
Keyboard
Shortcut
Selection Setslets you create and

manage selection sets. For more
information, see Selection Sets Manager
on page 6-276.
CTRL+3
Network Navigatorhelps you find nodes

in your model. For more information, see
Using the Network Navigator on page 6283.
CTRL+4
Querieslets you create SQL expressions
CTRL+5
for use with selection sets and FlexTables.

For more information, see Using Queries
on page 6-329.
Prototypeslets you create and manage
prototypes. For more information, see
Using Prototypes on page 6-287.
CTRL+6
FlexTableslets you display and edit

tables of elements. For more information,
see FlexTables Manager on page 10559.
CTRL+7
Graphslets you create and manage

graphs. For more information, see Graph
CTRL+8
2-39
Toolbar
Button
Keyboard
Shortcut
Manager
Profiles lets you draw profiles of parts of
your network. For more information, see
Profiles Manager on page 10-551.
CTRL+9
Property Editordisplays properties of

individual elements or managers. For more
information, see Property Editor on
page 6-267.
F4
EPS Results Browsercontrols animated

displays. For more information, see
Animating Profiles on page 10-552.
F7
User Notificationspresents error and

warning messages resulting from a
calculation.
F8
Note:
Although the toolbar

button for this manager
does not appear by
default, you can add it to
the Compute toolbar.
Customizing Managers
When you first start Bentley SewerCAD V8i, you will see the default workspace, in
which a limited set of dockable managers are visible. You can decide which managers
will be displayed at any time and where they will be displayed. You can also return to
the default workspace any time.
There are four states for each manager:
FloatingA floating manager sits above the Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace like
a dialog box. You can drag a floating manager anywhere and continue to work.
You can also:
2-40
Resize a floating manager by dragging its edges.
Close a floating manager by clicking on the x in the top right-hand corner of the
title bar.
Change the properties of the manager by right-clicking on the title bar.
Switch between multiple floating managers in the same location by clicking the
managers tab.
Dock the manager by double-clicking the title bar.
Docked staticA docked static manager attaches to any of the four sides of the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i window. If you drag a floating manager to any of the four
sides of the Bentley SewerCAD V8i window, the manager will attach or dock itself to
that side of the window. The manager will stay in that location unless you close it or
make it dynamic. A vertical pushpin in the managers title bar indicates its static state;
click the pushpin to change the managers state to dynamic. When the push pin is
pointing downward (vertical push pin), the manager is docked.
You can also:
Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
Change a docked manager into a floating manager by double-clicking the title bar,
or by dragging the manager to the desired location (for example, away from the
side of the Bentley SewerCAD V8i window).
Change a static docked manager into a dynamically docked manager by clicking

the push pin in the title bar.
Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by clicking the
managers tab.
Docked dynamicA docked dynamic manager also docks to any of the four sides of
the Bentley SewerCAD V8i window, but remains hidden except for a single tab. Show
a docked dynamic manager by moving the mouse over the tab, or by clicking the tab.
When the manager is showing (not hidden), a horizontal pushpin in its title bar indicates its dynamic state.
You can also:
Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the
title bar.
Change a docked dynamic manager into a docked static manager by clicking the
push pin (converting it from vertical to horizontal).
Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by moving the
mouse over the managers tab or by clicking the managers tab.
ClosedWhen a manager is closed, you cannot view it. Close a manager by clicking
the x in the right corner of the managers title bar. Open a manager by selecting the
manager from the View menu (for example, View > Element Symbology), or by
selecting the button for that manager on the appropriate toolbar.
2-41
Using Customizations
Using Customizations
The Customization Manager allows you to turn on/off the visibility of properties in the
Properties Editor.
Customizations are created, removed, and modified in the Customization Manager
(see Customization Manager on page 2-42).
Customization Manager
The property grid Customization Manager allows you to turn on/off the visibility of
properties in the Properties Editor. The customization manager can be accessed by
selecting View > Customizations.
Customization Profiles can be created for a single project or shared across projects.
There are also a number of predefined profiles.
The Customization Manager consists of the following controls:
New
2-42
This button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
Folder: This command creates a new

folder under the currently highlighted
node in the list pane.
Customization: This command creates a

new customization profile under the
currently highlighted node in the list
pane.
Delete
This button deletes the currently highlighted

folder or customization profile.
Rename
This button allows you to rename the

currently highlighted folder or customization
profile.
Edit
Opens the Customization Editor dialog

allowing you to edit the currently highlighted
customization profile.
Help
Opens the online help.

Create a customization by highlighting Project (specific to this file), or Shared (available for other projects on your computer) customizations.
Pick New and name the new Customization (default name = Customization 1). Select
the elements for which you want to create customizations. (you cannot edit Predefined
customizations).
After you have selected the type of element for which you want to customize the property grid, you will see a tree view of all of the available properties. Uncheck those
which you do not want to see appearing in the grid. You may also hide entire categories. (The Calculation Options cannot be customized.)
A defined customization is applied after the automatic filter is applied. For example,
if you have a customization to show all design-related properties but a conduit does
not have the "Design Conduit?" property set to true then you will not see all the properties. You must first set the "Design Conduit?" property to true and then you will see
the design properties.
To use a customization, open a property grid, and select the drop down list near the
top. The default customization is <Default View> which displays every property. Any
customization created by the user is displayed in the drop down list, plus a predefined
customization called <minimal> which is intended for beginner users who do not need
to see more advanced items. It hides the following:
Tractive stress
Hyper links
Known flows
Design
User defined properties
Parsing
If you want to create a specific view of the property grid you can either start from
<Default View> and remove items, or from a previous customization using the Duplicate button.
Customizations are stored in xml files at the locations described below:
In Windows XP:
Predefined customizations are stored in C:\Documents and Setting \All users\ Application Data/Bentley\SewerCAD\<versionnumber>\Predefinedworkspaces.xml.
Shared customizations are stored in your C:\Document and Settings\<user
name>\Local Settings\Application Data/Bentley\SewerCAD\<version no>\Sharedworkspaces.xml.
2-43
Using Named Views

In Vista:
Predefined customizations are stored in C:\ProgramData\Bentley\SewerCAD\
versionnumber/Predefinedworkspaces.xml
Shared customizations are stored in your C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Bentley\SewerCAD\<versionumber> Sharedworkspaces.xml
Customization Editor Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to edit the customization profiles that are created in the
Customization Manager. In the Customization editor you can turn off the visibility of
various properties in the Property Grid.
You can turn off any number of properties and/or entire categories of properties in a
single customization profile.
To remove a property from the property grid:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.
2. Find the property you want to turn off by expanding the node of the category the
property is under.
3. Uncheck the box next to the property to be turned off.
4. Click OK.
To turn off all of the properties under a category:
1. Select the element type from the pulldown menu.
2. Uncheck the box next to the category to be turned off.
3. Click OK.
Using Named Views

The Named View dialog box is where you can store the current views X and Y coordinates. When you set a view in the drawing pane and add a named view, the current
view is saved as the named view. You can then center the drawing pane on the named
view with the Go To View command.
2-44

Choose View > Named Views to open the Named View dialog box.
The toolbar contains the following controls:

New
Contains the following commands:
Named ViewOpens a Named View

Properties box to create a new named
view.
FolderOpens a Named Views Folder

Properties box to enter a label for the
new folder.
Delete
Deletes the named view or folder that is

currently selected.
Rename
Rename the currently selected named view

or folder.
2-45
Copying and Pasting Data To and From Tables
Go to View
Centers the drawing pane on the named

view.
Shift Up and Shift

Down
Moves the selected named view or folder up

or down.
Expand All or
Collapse All
Expands or collapses the named views and

folders.
Help
Displays online help for Named Views.

This topic describes the best practices used to copy and paste data from and to the
various tables.
Copying data from a table
2-46

There are generally 3 ways to copy data from tables.
1. The first is to highlight (or select) the data by clicking in the top-left corner of the
table.
This will highlight all the data in the table including the column headers:
When you use the windows short combination, CTRL-C, it will copy the highlighted data to the windows clipboard. The data copied will include the column
headers (in this case Time (hours) and Flow (ft^3/s)) and the rows below it. This
also includes the last row which is blank.
It will not copy the row headers (numbered 1 - 5 in this case).
2-47

2. The second approach is to highlight the two columns (in this case).
This is similar to the first approach except it does not highlight the row headers.
When you use the CTRL-C combination it will again copy the header data along
with the row data including the last blank row.
3. The best approach for copying the data is to highlight just the rows you want to
copy without highlighting the column headers. To do this you can just click on
the first row (#1 here) and drag your mouse down while holding the left mouse
button. This will highlight the table as follows:
2-48

When you use the CTRL-C combination in this case it will copy only the data that
you want. The column and row headers will not be copied. You can also use the
CTRL-<left click> approach to copy non-consecutive rows.
Pasting data into a table

When you paste data into one of our tables you want to make sure you do not include
any header data. If you include any non-numerical data a row will be inserted and the
default values for the columns will be used in place of any text or non-numerical data
that was pasted.
For example, if you copy using the first approach described above, you will get the
following results:
The first row is the row that represents the column headers that were pasted into the
table. The last row of 0's is the blank row at the end of the table.
2-49

Note:
We advise that you delete any rows containing 0 values that

may be inadvertently created during a copy-paste operation.
If you used the 3rd approach described above by just highlighting the rows you want
to copy and then paste, you will get a more desirable result as follows:
As a result, the first row is exactly what you wanted along with the last row. There are
no unexpected values pasted into the grid.
2-50
Chapter
Quick Start Lessons
The purpose of this chapter is to provide step-by-step lessons to get you familiar with
some of the features and capabilities of SewerCAD. The lessons serve as a means to
get you started exploring and using the software. We have included sample files
located in your Bentley\SewerCAD8\Samples directory for you to explore and experiment with. If you need help, press F1 (or right click) to access the context sensitive
on-line help.
In order to follow these tutorials, you can either do them in sequence, since each tutorial uses the results of the previous ones, or start lesson 2, 3, 4, and 5 with the files
located in the Bentley\SewerCAD8\Lessons directory.
Lesson 1 - Creating a Schematic Network

SewerCAD is an extremely efficient tool for laying out a sanitary sewer model. It is
easy to prepare a schematic model and let SewerCAD take care of the link-node
connectivity.
You do not need to be concerned with assigning labels to pipes and nodes, because
SewerCAD will handle this internally. When creating a scaled drawing, pipe lengths
are automatically calculated from the position of the pipes' start and stop nodes on the
drawing pane. Since this example is a schematic (not scaled) layout, you will need to
enter the pipe lengths.
3-51

In this lesson we will layout and analyze the following schematic network.
Part 1 - Creating a New Schematic Project File

1. Start SewerCAD Stand-Alone. If the Welcome to SewerCAD dialog appears,
click the Create New Project button. If it does not appear, choose New from the
File pull-down menu. Enter a file name such as 'Lesson.swc' for your project and
click Save.
2. Enter information about the project in the project propeties dialog (optional). To
access Project Properties click the File menu and select Project properties. In this
dialog you can enter a Title, Filename, Engineers name, Company name, date,
and descriptive notes. When you are finished click OK
3-52
Quick Start Lessons

3. Choose your desired project options. To access project Options click the Tools
menu and select Options.
3-53

4. Click the Drawing tab in the Options dialog. The Drawing Mode should be set to
Schematic.
3-54
Quick Start Lessons

5. For this project we will use metric units. Click the Units tab. Change the Default
Unit System for New project value to SI. Click the OK button to accept the rest of
the default project options.
6. To draw the skeletonized sewer network shown previously, click the Layout tool
in the Layout toolbar and select Conduit from the submenu that appears.
7. Move the cursor onto the drawing space and click once to place a manhole to
represent the manhole labeled MH-1.
8. Right-click and select Wet Well from the context menu. Move the cursor to the
approximate location of the wet well, WW-1, and click once to place it. We will
change the default labels later so that your drawing reflects the one shown at the
beginning of this lesson.
Wet wells represent the transition point between the gravity system and the pressure system. Similarly, manholes and junction chambers can represent the transition from a pressure system to the gravity system. Conduits are used to connect
3-55

gravity elements, while Pressure Pipes are used to connect pressure elements.
WW-1 marks the transition between the gravity and pressure systems; the rest of
the elements in the network will be connected using Pressure Pipes.
9. Right-click and select Pressure pipe. Right-click again and select Pump. Place
PMP-1.
10. Place the pressure junction and the outlet by right clicking, selecting the appropriate element from the context menu, and then clicking once to place each
element.
11. Place manhole MH-2. Right-click and select Junction Chamber from the context
menu. SewerCAD allows you to split any pipe in two. To insert the junction
chamber, click the middle of pipe P-1. A dialog will pop up asking whether you
wish to split the pipe. Click Yes.
12. Right-click and select Done from the pop-up menu to terminate the pipe layout
command. Click JC-1 and drag it into position so your network matches the layout
shown below.
Part 2 - Entering Data

Element data can be entered in any of the following ways:
3-56
Properties EditorYou can use the Select tool and double-click an element to
bring up its Properties editor. In AutoCAD, click the element once with the Select
tool to open the elements editor.
Quick Start Lessons
FlexTablesYou can use FlexTables to bring up dynamic tables that allow you to
edit and display the model data in a tabular format. You can edit the data as you
would in a spreadsheet.
Alternative EditorsAlternatives are used to enter data for different What If?
situations used in Scenario Management.
User Data ExtensionsThe User Data Extensions feature allows you to import
and export element data directly from XML files.
Entering Data Through the Properties Editor

To access an elements dialog box in SewerCAD V8i mode, double-click the element.
In AutoCAD, first click the Select tool on the toolbar, then click the element whose
attributes you wish to modify.
1. Double-click the outlet, O-1. Enter the data including ground elevation, rim elevation, and sump elevation as outlined in the following Outlet Data table. Change
the label to match the model schematic as necessary. If the Set Rim to Ground
Elevation box is checked, SewerCAD will automatically set the rim elevation to
the ground elevation. Finally, select Free Outfall from the Tailwater Conditions
menu.
Table 3-1: Outlet Input Data
Label
Elevation
(Ground)
(m)
O-1
16
Elevation
(Rim) (m)
16
Elevation
(Invert) (m)
14
Tailwater
Condition
(m)
Free Outfall
2. Enter the data for the manholes, transition, and wet well as outlined in the
Manhole data, Transition data, and Wet Well data tables below. Select Standard
from the list of available headloss methods in the Headloss Method field. Then
enter the headloss coefficient for each structure.
Table 3-2: Manhole Input Data
Label
Elevation
(Ground)
(m)
Elevation
(Rim) (m)
Elevation
(Invert)
(m)
MH-1
11.1
11
MH-2
11.1
11.1
Diameter
(m)
Headloss
Method
Headloss
Coefficien
t
Standard
0.25
Standard
0.25
3-57

Table 3-3: Transition Input Data
Label
JC-1
Elevation
(Ground)
(m)
Elevation
(Top)(m)
Elevation
(Invert)
(m)
Transition
Length
(m)
Headloss
Method
Headloss
Coefficie
nt
12
11
9.2
Standard
0.5
Table 3-4: Wet Well Input Dialog

Label
WW-1
Elevation
(Base)
(m)
Elevation
(Minimu
m) (m)
Elevation
(Initial)
(m)
Elevation
(Maximu
m) (m)
10
Section
Circular
Diameter
(m)
Elevation
(Ground)
(m)
10.5
3. Pump curves are defined in the Pump Definitions dialog. Click the Components
menu and select Pump Definitions.
3-58
Quick Start Lessons

4. In the Pump Definitions dialog, click the New button. Change the label of the
newly created definition to PMP-1. Right-click the Flow column and select units
and Formatting. Change the unit to m3/s. Leave the Pump Definition Type set to
Standard (3 Point) and enter the following values: Close the Pump Definitions
Table 3-5: Pump Definition
Flow (m3/s)
Head (m)
Shutoff
0.00
53.33
Design
0.25
40
Max
Operating
0.5
0.00
dialog.
5. Double-click PMP-1 to enter data in the Properties editor. Enter the following
data:
Table 3-6: Pump Input Data
Label
PMP-1
Elevation
(Ground)
(m)
7.8
Elevation
(Invert) (m)
7.8
Pump
Definition
PMP-1
Note that the pump has an upstream pipe and a downstream pipe to define the
direction. The downstream pipe is indicated in the Downstream Link field of the
Properties editor. If the pump is going in the wrong direction, click the Reverse
command in this field to switch it. In this example the downstream link should be
FM-2.
6. Enter an Elevation of 13m and Elevation (Ground) of 14.2m for Pressure Junction
J-1.
Entering Data Through FlexTables

Often it is more convenient to enter data for similar elements into a tabular form rather
than to individually click every element, enter the data into the dialog, and then click
the next element.
1. Double-click P-1 and change the Set Invert to Start and Set Invert to Stop fields to
False. Change the Has User Defined length? field value to True. Repeat for P-2
and P-3. This will allow you to change these values in the Flextable.
2. To access the FlexTables click the View menu and select FlexTables.
3-59

3. In the Flextables manager dialog double-click Conduit table under the TablesPredefined category. Enter data as you would into a spreadsheet. The yellow fields
are not editable and the white fields are. For each of the three gravity pipes enter
the upstream and downstream inverts, the section size, the section type, and the
pipe material as outlined in the Gravity Pipe Data table below. Leave other data to
default values. The gravity pipes may not be in alphanumeric order in the table.
To sort the table by pipe label, right-click the Label column heading. Select Sort /
Ascending from the pop-up menu that appears. Use the data in the table below to
enter input data:
Table 3-7: Conduit Input Data
Label
Invert (Start)
(m)
Invert (Stop)
(m)
Conduit
Shape
Conduit
Material
Mannings n
Diameter
(mm)
Length
(User
Defined)
(m)
P-1
10
9.5
Circular
Pipe
Concrete
0.013
200
100
P-2
9.5
9.1
Circular
Pipe
Concrete
0.013
200
70
P-3
10
9.5
Circular
Pipe
Concrete
0.013
200
100
4. In the FlexTable Manager double-click the Pressure Pipe Table.

5. There are two things to keep in mind when entering information about pressure
pipes. First, invert elevations are calculated based on the elevations of upstream
and downstream nodes, so they are already pre-entered. Invert elevations are only
editable if the upstream or downstream node is a wet well or a gravity node.
Secondly, all pressure pipes in SewerCAD are circular, so only a diameter is
entered. Enter the data from the table below, then close the Pressure Pipe table.
Table 3-8: Pressure Pipe Input Data
Label
Invert (Start)
(m)
Invert (Stop)
(m)
Length
(User
Defined) (m)
Diameter
(mm)
Material
FM-1
7.8
200
Ductile iron
FM-2
7.8
13
200
200
Ductile iron
FM-3
13
14
100
200
Ductile iron
3-60
Quick Start Lessons

6. Double-click P-1 to open the Properties editor. Change Has User Defined Length?
to True. Enter a value of 100 m in the Length (User Defined) field. Repeat this
process for conduits P-2 and P-3, as well as pressure pipes FM-1, FM-2, and FM3 using the length values as specified in Tables 3-7 and 3-8.
Entering Infiltration Data for Gravity Pipes

To account for infiltration into the gravity pipe P-1, double-click P-1. Change the
Infiltration Load Type to Link Length. Change the Infiltration Loading Unit to m.
Change the Infiltration Rate per Loading Unit to 0.25. Repeat for P-2 and P-3 using
the data in the following table:
Table 3-9: Conduit Infiltration Data
Label
Infiltration
Type
Infiltration
Loading
Unit
Infiltration
Rate per
Loading
Unit (L/d)
P-1
Link Length
0.25
P-2
Link Length
0.05
P-3
Link Length
0.03
Steady State Loading

In SewerCAD, loading is categorized as either a sanitary load or a wet weather load.
Sanitary (dry weather) loads occur independent of the weather, such as wastewater
from a subdivision. Wet weather loads such as pipe infiltration and inflow at nodes
are directly related to the rainfall in the area. This part of the lesson deals with sanitary loads.
SewerCAD defines loads by Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load and the Loading Unit
Count. The Unit Load represents the amount of load per a given unit. For example, in
average income housing, each resident contributes 280 l/d to the sanitary sewer. The
Loading Unit Count would be the number of units. Say 40 residents live in a subdivision of average income housing. The total load would be the Unit Load multiplied by
the Loading Unit Count. Thus, the total load is 40 residents * 280 (l/d)/resident which
equals 11,200 l/d.
3-61

Loads can be applied to manholes, wet wells, and pressure junctions. Unit sanitary
loads are defined in the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog and then assigned
to individual nodes in the Sanitary Load Control Center.
1. Click the Components menu and select Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads.
2. There are a number of predefined unit loads in the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Load Engineering Library. Click the Synchronization Options button and select
Import from Library.
3. Expand the Unit Sanitary (dry Weather) Load Library and the Unit Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Loads.xml nodes. Check the following boxes, then click Select.:
3-62
Quick Start Lessons
Apartment
Home (Average)
Home (Better)
Hotel (Residential)
Resort
School (Medium)
Shopping Center Per Employee
Theater
3-63

4. Note that the new loads are created and the Population Unit and Unit Load fields
are filled in with the imported data. Close the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads
dialog.
5. Now that the unit loads have been defined, we can assign them to the nodes in the
model. Click the Tools menu and select Sanitary Load Control Center.
6. On the Manhole tab click the new button and select Initialize Unit Loads for All
Elements.
3-64
Quick Start Lessons

7. For MH-1, select Apartment in the Unit Sanitary Load menu. Enter 2,000 in the
Loading Unit Count column. For MH-2 select Resort in the Unit Sanitary Load
menu and enter 2,000 in the Loading Unit Count column.
8. Highlight the MH-1 row, click the New button, and select Add Unit Load to
Element (MH-1). Select Home (Average) in the Unit Sanitary Load menu. Enter
3,000 in the Loading Unit Count column. Assign Unit loads to the rest of the
elements using the data in the following table:
Table 3-10: Sanitary Load Assignments
Label
Unit Sanitary
Load
Loading Unit
Count
MH-1
Home (Better)
2,000
MH-2
Hotel (Residential)
1,000
WW-1
Theater
200
WW-1
Shopping Center Per

Employee
60
J-1
School (Medium)
500
9. Close the Sanitary Control Center dialog.
3-65
Extreme Flow Factors

After all loads have been applied you can specify how those average loads relate to the
peak load. Extreme flows are defined in the Extreme Flows dialog and then applied to
the loads in the model through the Extreme Flow Setups dialog.
1. Click the Components menu and select Extreme Flows.
2. In the Extreme Flows dialog, click the New button and select Insert EquationPopulation Factor.
3. Rename the factor to Babbit. Change the Population Unit in Equation to Capita x
103. Fill in the rest of the fields using the data below:
3-66
Cutoff Value: 5.000
c1: 0.000
c2: 5.000
c3: 0.000
e1: 1.000
e2: 0.200
Quick Start Lessons
m1: 0.000
m2: 1.000
4. Close the Extreme Flows dialog. Click the Components menu and select Extreme
Flow Setups. In the Extreme Flow Setup dialog you specify which Extreme Flow
method is applied and any associated constants and adjustment multipliers.
5. Click the New button. Rename the setup Base Extreme Flow Setup.
3-67

6. To apply an extreme flow method to a unit load check the associated Use box to
make the other fields editable. Right-click the Use column and select Global Edit.
In the Global Edit dialog put a check in the Value box and click OK.
7. Right-click the Extreme Flow Method column and select Global Edit. Change the
Value field to Babbit and click OK.
8. Close the Extreme Flow Setups dialog.
3-68
Quick Start Lessons
Part 3- Calculating the Model

1. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options. Double-click Base
Calculation Options. The Properties editor will display the settings used by this
calculation option.
2. Make sure the Time Analysis Type is set to Steady-State and that the Calculation
Type is set to Analysis.
3. Choose Base Extreme Flow Setup from the Extreme Flow Setups menu.
4. Close the Calculation Options dialog.
5. Click the Validate button to catch any data input errors.
6. Click the Compute button.
3-69

7. The Detailed Calculation Summary appears.
8. Although Convergence was acheived and the calculation was completed successfully, the yellow indicator in the bottom left shows that warnings were generated.
These warnings can be viewed in the User Notifications manager. Click the Analysis menu and select User Notifications.
9. You can double-click a warning in the User Notifications manager to zoom to the
element that generated the warning.
10. Close the user Notifications dialog.
3-70
Quick Start Lessons
Lesson 2 - Automatic Design

This lesson will illustrate how SewerCAD can automatically design all or parts of the
gravity portion of a sanitary sewer system within the design constraints set by the user.
After specifying parameters such as lengths, ground elevations, and boundary conditions, SewerCAD will work to find a satisfactory design. In this lesson, we will use
this feature to develop a new design to replace the undersized sanitary sewer system
created in Lesson 1.
This lesson is based on the project created in Lesson 1. If you have not completed
Lesson 1, open the Lesson2.swc project located in the Bentley\SewerCAD8\Lessons
directory.
Part 1: Specifying Design Constraints

SewerCAD requires parameters by which to measure the validity of a possible design.
These parameters, or design constraints, can either be set locally for each individual
element or they can be entered as default design constraints.
3-71

Default design constraints are specified in the Default Design Constraints dialog.
1. Click the Components menu and select Default Design Constraints.
2. On the Gravity Pipe tab, enter the minimum and maximum flow velocities, slopes,
and covers that the newly designed pipe's characteristics should fall between in
the Velocity, Cover, and Slope tabs respectively. These values are listed in the
table below.
Table 3-11: Design Constraint Data
Minimum
Maximum
Velocity
0.60 m/s
4.00 m/s
Cover
0.70 m
4.00 m
Slope
0.005 m/m
0.10 m/m
You could further hone the design with the Extended Design features on the right
side of the dialog by checking the box for one or more of the three extended
design criteria in their tabs and entering a constraining value to have SewerCAD
utilize the feature.
3. Click the Node tab to set constraints for gravity structures. Set the Pipe Matching
constraint to Inverts and the Matchline Offset to 0.0 m. From this, SewerCAD
knows to set the inverts of the incoming pipe at the same elevation as the invert of
the outgoing pipe for the same structure. Click Close to exit the dialog.
3-72
Quick Start Lessons

4. Consider that the downstream invert of conduit P-2, entering into the wet well,
WW-1, is at a known elevation and should not be adjusted by SewerCAD's automatic design process. In this situation, you can locally specify that SewerCAD
not design the downstream invert of P-2. Double-click P-2 to open the Properties
editor for that element. Change the value of the Design Stop Invert? field to False.
If you were to set the Specify Local Pipe Constraints? field to True, you would
then be able to fill in pipe design constraints specific to the currently highlighted
element.
5. When designing gravity pipes, SewerCAD will choose from among only the pipes
that are specified as available for design in the Conduit Catalog. Click the Components menu and select Conduit Catalog.
6. A large number of predefined pipes are stored in the Conduit Engineering Library.
Click the Synchronization Options button and select Import from library. Expand
the Conduit Catalog and Conduits Library - Metric.xml nodes.
3-73

7. Check the box next to Circular - Concrete to import all of the defined concrete
circular conduits. Click the Select button.
8. The Conduit Catalog is now populated with the imported conduits. Note that the
Available for Design? box is checked for each of them, indicating that SewerCAD
can consider these conduits as replacements for the existing ones during the
Design run. Close the Conduit Catalog.
3-74
Quick Start Lessons
Part 2: Design
To run an automatic design the Calculation Type calculation option must be changed
from Analysis to Design.
1. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options. Highlight Base Calculation Options. The Properties editor will display the settings used by this calculation option. Change the Calculation Type to Design.
2. Close the Calculation Options manager.

3. Click the Compute button.
4. A prompt appears, asking whether you would like to create a new Physical alternative to capture any modifications made by the design run.
Alternatives are groups of data that describe a specific part of your model such as
physical data, loading data, and infiltration data. Alternatives will be discussed
further in Lesson 3. By clicking Yes, the model remembers the initial design as
well as the new design for the sake of comparison. In this case click No and allow
the model to overwrite the current physical alternative.
5. Close the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog.
6. Note that SewerCAD has replaced the 200mm pipes for P-1, P-2, and P-3 with
larger diameter ones.
7. Save the project before proceeding to the next lesson.
This lesson introduced one possible application of the automatic design feature. This
is a powerful tool that will save you time and effort. Spend some time to learn more
about this feature by experimenting with the software, and if you have any questions
press the F1 key to access our context sensitive on-line help. See Lesson 3 for more
information on SewerCAD's scenario management feature.
3-75
Lesson 3 - Scenario Management

One of SewerCAD's many powerful and versatile project tools is Scenario Management. Scenarios allow you to calculate multiple "What If?" situations in a single
project file. You may wish to try several designs and compare the results, or analyze
an existing system using several different loading possibilities and compare the
resulting profiles. A scenario consists of a group of alternatives, which are groups of
actual model data. Both scenarios and alternatives are based on a parent/child relationship where child scenarios and alternatives inherit data from the parent scenarios
and alternatives.
In this lesson we will use Scenario Management to set up the scenarios needed to test
four "What If?" situations for the purpose of analyzing a new sanitary sewer system
design. At the end of the lesson, we will compare all of the results using the Scenario
Comparison tool.
Part 1 - Opening the Project File

For this lesson we will use the system designed in Lesson 2. Click the Open Existing
File button in the Welcome dialog, or select File / Open from the pull-down menus to
bring up the Open Project File dialog. Open the project you saved from Lesson 2, or
find Lesson3.swc in the Bentley\SewerCAD8\Lessons directory.
In Lesson 2 we designed the gravity portion of this system using the automatic design
tool. In this lesson, we will use scenario management to model different force main
designs.
Part 2 - Creating Alternatives

First, we need to set up the required data sets (alternatives). An alternative is a group
of data describing a specific part of the model. There are eleven alternatives: Active
Topology, Physical, Design, Headloss, Boundary Condition, Initial Settings, Sanitary
Loading, Infiltration and Inflow, System Flows, Operational, and User Data Extensions. In this example, we need to set up a different physical alternative for each
design trial we want to evaluate. Each physical alternative will contain different pressure pipe data.
1. Click the Analysis menu and select Alternatives to open the Alternatives manager.
Expand the Physical Alternative node.
In SewerCAD, we create families of alternatives. There are parent alternatives
(base alternatives) and there are child alternatives. A child alternative inherits
data from its parent. You can, however, override data inherited from the parent,
making it local to the child.
3-76
Quick Start Lessons

2. Currently, there is only one Physical Alternative listed. The Base Physical alternative contains the properties for the current undersized force mains. We would
like to add a child of the Base-Physical alternative so we can inherit most of the
data but change only the properties that we want to modify. Right-click the Base
Physical alternative and select New > Child Alternative. Rename the new alternative to have a descriptive name such as "Larger Pressure Pipes".
3. Double-click the Larger Pressure Pipes alternative to open the Physical alternative
editor.
4. Select the Pressure Pipe tab at the top of the dialog. Notice the legend at the
bottom describing the check boxes. It indicates, all of our data is inherited. If you
change any piece of data, the check box will automatically become checked
because that record is now local to this alternative and not inherited from the
3-77

parent. Set up this design trial by making the changes shown in the table below.
Click Close to exit the Physical Alternative Editor and return to the Alternatives
manager.
Table 3-12: Pressure Pipe Alternative Data
Change
From:
To:
Diameter
(mm)
Diameter
(mm)
FM-1
200
300
FM-2
200
300
FM-3
200
300
5. Next, we will add another physical alternative for another design trial. Right-click
the Base Physical alternative and select New > Child Alternative. Rename the
new alternative to Smaller Pump. Double-click the Smaller Pump Alternative to
open the alternative editor.
6. Select the Pump tab. For this trial, we will leave the existing system the same but
with a different size pump. To change the pump curve click the ellipsis (...) button
in the Pump Definition field.
3-78
Quick Start Lessons

7. In the Pump Definition dialog click the New button. Rename the new definition
Smaller Pump. Enter the pump data using the following information:
Table 3-13: Smaller Pump Alternative Data
Change From:
Discharge
(m3/s)
Head (m)
To:
Discharge
(m3/s)
Head (m)
Shutoff
0.00
53.33
0.00
48.00
Design
0.25
40.00
0.20
35.00
Max
Operating
0.50
0.00
0.40
0.00
8. Close the Pump Definition dialog. In the alternative editor, change the Pump Definition to Smaller Pump. Close the alternative editor.
3-79

9. Last, we will add a Physical alternative that combines the first two design trials in
the same alternative for a third design trial. Right-click the Larger Pressure Pipes
alternative and select New > Child Alternative. Rename the new alternative to
Larger FM-3. Double click Larger FM-3 to open the alternative editor.
10. Click the Pressure Pipe tab. As a child alternative, this alternative has inherited the
new pressure pipe data that we entered in the Larger Pressure Pipes alternative.
Change the diameter of FM-3 from 300 mm to 400 mm. Close the alternative
editor.
11. You now have four Physical Properties alternatives. The base alternative contains
the existing system's data, while the other three contain several changes for
different design trials. However, the rest of the data is the same. Close the Alternatives manager.
We must now create the scenarios that will contain the Physical Properties alternatives
we just created.
3-80
Quick Start Lessons
Part 3 - Editing Base Scenarios

1. Click the Analysis menu and select Scenarios to open the Scenarios manager.
2. There is always a default Base scenario that is comprised of the eleven base alternatives, currently listed in the Properties editor.
Only the Base is available initially, because we have not created any new
scenarios. Alternatives are the building blocks of a scenario. A scenario is a group
of the eleven alternatives and all of the calculation information needed to solve a
model.
For our example, if we wish to analyze the three different design trials for the
force main portion of our system, we must create a new scenario for each of the
Physical Properties alternatives we created.
3. The first step in this process is to rename the Base scenario to a more appropriate
name and set the correct calculation options. Select Base Scenario, click the
Rename button, and type Existing System as the new name for the Base scenario.
4. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options. Highlight Base Calculation Options. In the Properties editor, change the Calculation Type from Design to
Analysis. Close the Calculation Options dialog.
3-81
Part 4 - Creating Child Scenarios

The last step in setting up our scenarios is to create child scenarios. The new child
scenarios will contain the Physical Properties alternatives created earlier.
1. Highlight the base scenario entitled Existing System and click the New button,
then select Child Scenario. Rename the new scenario Design Trial #1.
Scenarios work in families just like alternatives, except scenarios do not inherit
data directly. A scenario is a group of alternatives, so a child scenario will inherit
the parent's alternatives. To change the new scenario you need to change one or
more of the alternatives.
Our new child scenario initially consists of the same alternatives as its parent
scenario. We want to set the Physical Properties alternative to the first alternative
we created, Larger Pressure Pipes.
3-82
Quick Start Lessons

2. With Design trial #1 highlighted in the Scenario manager, change the Physical
alternative to Larger Pressure Pipes in the Properties editor.
3. Making sure that the Existing System scenario is highlighted, create 2 more child
scenarios, one using the Smaller Pump Physical alternative, and one using the
Larger FM-3 Physical alternative. Name these new child scenarios Design Trial
#2 and Design trial #3 respectively.
Now we have four scenarios. The base scenario is our existing system. Each
child scenario contains a different physical alternative. The first design trial
resizes the pressure pipes, the second design trial resizes the pump, and the third
design trial considers a different combination of pipe sizes. In the next part of the
lesson we will calculate them.
3-83
Part 5 - Calculate and Compare

We are going to calculate all of the scenarios at the same time using the Batch Run
feature.
1. In the Scenarios manager click the drop down button attached to the Compute
Scenario button and select Batch Run.
2. In the Batch Run dialog, click the Select button and choose Select All.
3. Click the Batch button. In the confirmation prompt that appears click Yes. When
the Completed batch run... message appears click OK.
4. The current scenario is indicated by the red checkmark in the Scenarios manager
and in the Current Scenario menu of the Scenarios toolbar:
5. You can see results for individual elements for the current scenario in the Properties editor. You can compare results across scenarios by annotating them. Close
the Scenarios manager. Click the view menu and select Element Symbology.
3-84
Quick Start Lessons

6. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click on Pressure Pipe and select New,
then select Annotation from the context menu. In the Field name menu, select
velocity. In the Prefix field type Vel: . Click OK.
7. The calculated velocity is now displayed for all pressure pipes.
3-85
Lesson 4 - Presentation of Results

Change the current scenario and note how the values change.
8. Save this project before proceeding to Lesson 4.

An important feature in all modeling software is the ability to present results clearly.
This lesson outlines several of SewerCAD's reporting features, including:
Reports - Displays and prints values for any or all elements in the system.
Element Annotation - Dynamically presents the values of user-selected variables

on the drawing.
Profiles - Graphically shows how HGL and elevation vary throughout the gravity
portions of the sanitary sewer.
Color Coding - Assigns colors to values for a variable and applies them to the
appropriate locations on the plan view for a quick diagnostic on how the system is
working.
Part 1 - Reports
For this lesson we will use the system designed in Lesson 3.
1. Click the Open Existing File button in the Welcome dialog, or select File / Open
from the pull-down menus to bring up the Open Project File dialog. Open the
project you saved from Lesson 3, or find Lesson4.swc in the
Bentley\SewerCAD8\Lessons directory.
2. After opening the file, select the "Design Trial #2" scenario from the Scenario
toolbar. Click the Compute button to run a regular analysis.
3-86
Quick Start Lessons

3. When the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog appears, note that there is a
Report button in the upper left corner of the dialog. Click the Report button
4. The report that opens contains all of the information in the various tabs of the
Detailed Calculation Summary dialog, preformatted in a print-ready document.
Close the Preview dialog.
3-87

5. Close the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog. Note that the Detailed Calculation Summary is available at any time by clicking the Analysis menu and selecting
Calculation Summary.
6. Right-click on MH-1 and select Report. This produces an element detailed report.
Every element has a report with the same general format, which includes the name
of the calculated scenario and a series of tables describing the element's properties
and results in detail. Close the MH-1 detailed report.
7. To view the detailed reports for several elements at one time, click the Report
menu and select Element Details. A Selection toolbar appears. Using the toolbar,
select any number of elements, then click the Done button.
8. The Element Details dialog appears after you click Done. this dialog lists the
elements that will be in the report, and allows you to preview and/or print the
detailed report for each element in the list.
9. Close the Element Details dialog and any open report dialogs.
3-88
Quick Start Lessons

10. Click the Report menu and select Project Inventory.
11. The Project Inventory shows you the total number of each type of element and the
total length of pipe in the system. Close the project inventory report.
Part 2 - FlexTables
FlexTables are extremely powerful tools in SewerCAD. These reports are not only
good presentation tools; they are also very helpful in data entry and analysis. When
data must be entered for a large number of elements, clicking each element and
entering the data can be very tedious and time consuming. Using the tabular reports,
3-89

elements can be changed using the global edit tool, or filtered to display only the
desired elements. Values that are entered into the table will be automatically updated
in the model. The tables can also be customized. Columns can be added or removed,
or you can display duplicates of the same column with different units.
1. Open the FlexTables manager by clicking the View menu and selecting FlexTables.
2. Double-click the Conduit Table located under the Tables - Predefined node.
Tabular reports are dynamic tables of input values and calculated results. White
columns are input values and yellow columns are non-editable calculated values.
When data is entered into a table directly, the value in the model will be automatically updated. These tables can be printed or copied into a spreadsheet program.
Two very powerful features in these tables are Global Edits and Filtering.
Suppose we find that the downstream inverts of all 375 mm pipes needs to be 10
cm higher. It would be tedious to go through and re-enter every pipe invert elevation, particularly when dealing with a large system. Instead, we will use the filter
tool in this example to filter out the 375 mm pipes, and the global edit tool to add
10 cm of elevation to just those pipes.
3. Right-click the Section Size column and choose Filter / Custom from the context
menu. We want to filter to display only the 375 mm conduits. To do so, doubleclick Section Size in the Fields list to add it to the query. Click the = Operator
3-90
Quick Start Lessons

button. Click the Unique Values button above the Unique Values list to populate
the list with all of the available section sizes used in the model. Double-click the
value with a Referenced Label of 375 mm.
4. Click the OK button. As you can see, only conduits with a section size of 375 mm
are now displayed in the table. The indicators along the bottom of the table show
that the results are filtered: In the lower left is the message 2 of 3 elements
displayed and in the lower right is the FILTERED indicator.
3-91

5. We can now perform a Global Edit on just the filtered elements. Right-click the
Invert (Stop) column and select Global Edit. Select the Add Operation. Enter 0.1
in the Value field. Click OK.
6. Note that 0.1m has been added to the Invert (Stop) value for each of the 375 mm
conduits.
7. To reset the filter, right-click on any of the column headings and select Filter /
Reset. Click Yes in the confirmation that appears. Close the conduit table.
8. You may also wish to create a table that displays different or additional attribute
columns than those in the predefined Flextables. This can be done using the
FlexTables manager. Right-click the Conduit Table under Tables-Predefined and
select Duplicate / Project FlexTable.
3-92
Quick Start Lessons

9. Highlight the newly created table and click the Edit button to open the FlexTable
setup dialog.
10. The Available Columns list on the left displays all of the available attributes that
can be added to the FlexTable. The Selected Columns list on the right shows the
attributes that currently make up the FlexTable. Clicking the [<] and [>] buttons
allows you to move a single highlighted attribute between the Available and
Selected lists; clicking [<<] and [>>] will move all of them. The Up and Down
arrows below the Selected Columns list allow you to move attributes up and down
the list, affecting the order in which they are displayed in the FlexTable. Highlight
Depth (Normal) in the Available Columns list and click the [>] button to add it to
the Selected Columns list. Click OK.
11. Close the FlexTables manager dialog.
Part 3 - Element Annotation

1. Click the Compute button to update the results to reflect the changes in invert
elevations.
2. Click the View menu and select Element Symbology.
3. In this example, we will add annotation to the manholes and pressure pipes.
3-93

4. Right-click the Manhole node and select New / Annotation.
5. The Field Name is the attribute that the annotation will display. In this example
we will add annotation for the hydraulic grade line entering and exiting the
manhole. Select Hydraulic Grade Line (In) from the Field name list.
6. The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to add text to the annotation. Enter HGL In:
in the Prefix field. The Suffix is already set to %u, which will display the unit. the
X and Y offset control the placement of the annotation. The Height Multiplier
controls the size of the text. Click OK.
7. Right-click the Manhole node and select New / Annotation. Select Hydraulic
Grade Line (Out) from the Field Name list. Enter HGL Out: in the Prefix field.
Change the Y Offset Value to -5.4. This will prevent the annotations from overlapping one another. Click OK.
8. You can rearrange the labels by clicking on them to highlight the annotation and
then dragging the annotation to the desired loaction by the handle (the handle is
the square near the annotation).
3-94
Quick Start Lessons

9. Velocity annotation has already been added to pressure pipes in Lesson 3. Rightclick the Pressure Pipe node and select New / Annotation.
10. Choose Flow as the attribute, add a prefix of Flow: , and change the Y offset to 5.4. Click OK.
11. You can try changing the properties of an element and recalculating. The annotations will update automatically to reflect any changes in the system.
Part 4 - Create a Profile

1. To create a profile view click the View menu and select Profiles.
2. In the Profiles manager click the new button.
3. In the Profile Setup dialog click the Select From Drawing button.
3-95

4. Click P-3 and P-2. Note that the nodes at the end of the pipes are also selected.
Click the Done button.
5. In the Profile Setup dialog click the Open Profile button.

6. In the profile view you can zoom in and out, copy the profile view to the clipboard, and print the profile view. You can export the profile view as a DXF file by
clicking Chart Settings / Export to DXF. You can change the scale and direction of
the profile view by clicking Chart Settings and then Axis Options.
7. You can add a legend describing the various colored lines in the profile by
clicking Chart Settings / Legend.
8. You can add Annotation lablels by clicking Chart Settings and selecting Display
Annotation Labels. You can add a table displaying the values of various attributes
below the profile view by clicking Chart Settings / Profile Annotation Table.
Experiment with the various settings, then close the profile view and the Profiles
Manager.
9. Save the project before continuing.
3-96
Quick Start Lessons
Part 5 - Color Coding

Color coding allows you to assign colors to values for a variable and applies them to
the appropriate locations on the plan view for a quick diagnostic on how the system is
working.
Color coding is applied using the Element Symbology manager. You can set color
coding for links, nodes, or both. In this example we will color code links only.
1. Click the View menu and select Element Symbology.
2. Right-click the Conduit node and select New / Color Coding.
3. Change the Field Name to Flow. Click the Calculate Range button and select Full
Range. This will populate the Minimum and Maximum fields automatically with
the highest and lowest value for the selected Field Name. The Steps value is the
number of divisions in the range.
4. In the Color maps section of the dialog, click the Initialize button. Click the 3rd
row Color field and select yellow. Click the Ramp button. Click OK.
3-97
Lesson 5 - Running an Extended Period Simulation

5. You can also color code by size. Right-click the Conduit node and select New /
Color Coding.
6. Change the Field Name to Diameter. Click the Calculate Range button and select
Full Range. Change the Options setting to Size. Click the Initialize button. Click
OK.
7. Now the consuits are color coded according to both flow and diameter.
8. Save the project before continuing to the next lesson.

SewerCAD has the ability to analyze time-based or extended period simulations
(EPS). This lesson illustrates different aspects of setting-up and running an EPS
including:
Developing loading patterns and hydrographs
Calculating the model
Viewing time-based output
For this lesson we will use the system designed in Lesson 4.
3-98
Quick Start Lessons
Part 1 - Entering and Applying Loading Patterns

Loading patterns are a series of time-based multipliers that are applied to average
loads, which describe how the load varies over time. In this lesson, we are going to
create a loading pattern and apply it to the unit sanitary loads established with the
model in an earlier lesson, and to a new Pattern Load.
1. Click the Open Existing File button in the Welcome dialog, or select File / Open
from the pull-down menus to bring up the Open Project File dialog. Open the
project you saved from Lesson 4, or find Lesson5.swc in the
Bentley\SewerCAD8\Lessons directory.
2. To create a new loading pattern click the Components menu and select Patterns.
3. Highlight the Hydraulic node and click the New button.
4. Rename the pattern Lesson 5 Pattern. Leave the Start Time set to 12:00:00 AM
but change the Starting Multiplier to 0.4. Change the Pattern Format to Continuous. Fill in the pattern using the following data:
Table 3-14: Loading Pattern Data
Time from
Start
(hours)
Multiplier
0.8
1.2
1.7
12
1.4
15
1.2
18
1.3
21
0.6
24
0.4
3-99
5. Close the Patterns dialog.

6. To apply this pattern to the various unit dry weather labels used in the model, click
the Components menu and select Pattern Setups.
7. The Pattern Setup Manager works in a similar manner to the Extreme Flow Setup
Manger, as described in Lesson 1. In this case different patterns are applied to
unit sanitary loads as opposed to extreme flow methods. As with extreme flow
setups, you can create different pattern setups and associate them with different
scenarios. In the Pattern Setups dialog click the New button. Change the name of
the setup to Lesson 5.
3-100
Quick Start Lessons

8. In this lesson, for the sake of simplicity, we will apply the same pattern to all the
unit loads. To do so, right click on the Setup Pattern heading and select Global
Edit. In the Global Edit dialog change the value to Lesson 5 Pattern. Click OK.
9. Close the Pattern Setups dialog.

10. You can also apply loading patterns to base loads set at individual hydraulic
elements. Click the Tools menu and select Sanitary Load Control Center.
11. Highlight a MH-1 row, click the New button, and select Add Pattern load to
Element (MH-1). Change the Base Load of the new Pattern Load to 2,000 L/d.
Close the Sanitary Load Control Center.
12. Save the project.
Part 2 - Entering Hydrographs

SewerCAD also allows you to enter in hydrographs as a sanitary load (at manholes,
wet wells, and pressure junctions), or as inflows and infiltration (at manholes, pressure
junctions, wet wells and gravity pipes).
To illustrate the concept, we will enter in a single hydrograph as a wet-weather load at
manhole MH-2.
1. Click the Tools menu and select Sanitary Load Control Center.
2. Highlight one of the MH-2 rows and click the New button, then select Add Sanitary hydrograph to Element (MH-2).
3-101

3. Fill in the Time vs Flow table on the right side of the dialog using the data in the
following table (note the unit used in the table; you may have to change it by
right-clicking the Flow heading and selecting Units and Formatting):
Table 3-15: Hydrograph Data
Time
(Hours)
Flow (L/d)
2500
4800
7300
12
19500
15
7300
18
4900
21
2400
24
4. Close the Sanitary Load Control Center.
5. Save the project.
3-102
Quick Start Lessons
Part 3 - Running the Extended Period Simulation

To run an extended period simulation, you need to change the analysis type from
Steady State to EPS.
1. Change the current scenario to Design Trial #3.
2. Click the Analysis menu and select Calculation Options.

3. Highlight Base Calculation Options.
4. In the Properties editor change the Time Analysis Type from Steady State to EPS.
Leave the Duration, Hydraulic Time Step, and Hydrologic Time Step set to
24.000, 1.000, and 0.100 respectively. Change the Pattern Setups field to Lesson
5.
5. Close the Calculation Options dialog.
6. Click the Compute button. Close the Detailed Calculation Summary.
Part 4 - Time Based Graphs and Tables

In SewerCAD you have the capability of creating time based graphs and tables for the
comparison of hydrographs at multiple elements within the system.
For this example we will compare the hydrographs generated at manholes MH-1 and
MH-2, and see the combination of the two routed hydrographs as they exit JC-1.
1. Click the View menu and select Graphs.
2. In the Graph manager click the New button and select Line Series Graph. Use the
Selct toolbar to select MH-1, MH-2, and JC-1. Click Done.
3-103

3. in the Graph Series Options dialog uncheck Depth (Out) for transitions and
Manholes in the Fields list. Check Flow (Total Out) for Transitions and Manholes.
Click OK to open the graph.
4. In the Graph viewer you can print the graph, copy it to the clipboard, zoom in, and
use the time step controls to see the values at specific times.
3-104
Quick Start Lessons

5. Click the data tab to see the underlying data points that make up the graph. You
can copy the tabluar data to the clipboard or print it
6. Close the Graph viewer and the Graph manager.
Part 5 - Animations
SewerCAD's animation tool is a dramatic, effective way of presenting and analyzing
output data.
3-105

In this example, we will animate the color-coding on the main drawing pane, and the
hydraulic grade line on the profile plot.
1. Before we animate the drawing pane, we need to color code by attribute that
varies with time. In this case color code the links based on Total Flow attribute.
Use the same procedure described in Lesson 4 (you will need to delete the old
color coding and create a color coding definition for both conduits and pressure
pipes).
2. To animate the drawing pane click the Analysis menu and select EPS Results
Browser.
3. Click the Play button in the EPS Results Browser. The links change color over
time as flow increases and decreases. To stop the animation click the stop button
4. To increase or decrease the speed of the animation click Options and change the
Increment slider setting.
5. Open the Profile we created in Lesson 4. the profile viewer has its own animation
controls. Click the Play button.
3-106
Quick Start Lessons

From these five lessons, you have had a brief introduction to the capabilities of
SewerCAD. Feel free to continue to play with the program. Use this model to explore
and become familiar with all of the features. For additional help, click F1 to open the
context sensitive online help.
3-107
3-108
Chapter
Starting a Project
Welcome Dialog Box

When you first start Bentley SewerCAD V8i, the Welcome dialog box appears. The
Welcome dialog box contains the following controls:
Quick Start Lessons
Opens the online help to the Quick Start Lessons

Overview topic.
Create New Project
Creates a new Bentley SewerCAD V8i project.

When you click this button, an untitled Bentley
SewerCAD V8i project is created.
Open Existing Project
Opens an existing project. When you click this

button, the Windows Select Bentley SewerCAD
V8i Project to Open dialog box appears, allowing
you to browse to the project to be opened.
Open from
ProjectWise
Open an existing Bentley SewerCAD V8i project

from ProjectWise. You are prompted to log into a
ProjectWise datasource if you are not already
logged in.
Show This Dialog at

Start
When selected, the Welcome dialog box appears

whenever you start Bentley SewerCAD V8i. Clear
this box if you do not want the Welcome dialog
box to appear whenever you start Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
You can access the Welcome dialog box at any time from the Help menu in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
4-109
Projects
Projects
All data for a model are stored in Bentley SewerCAD V8i as a project. Bentley
SewerCAD V8i project files have the file name extension .swc. Bentley SewerCAD
V8i lets you open more than one project at a time. You can assign a title, date, notes
and other identifying information about each project using the Project Properties
dialog box. You can have up to five Bentley SewerCAD V8i projects open at one time.
Starting a New Project
To start a new project, select File > New or press Ctrl+N. An untitled project is
opened in the drawing pane.
Opening an Existing Project
To open an existing project, select File > Open or press Ctrl+O. A dialog box appears
allowing you to browse for the project you want to open.
Displaying Multiple Projects
To switch between multiple open projects, click the appropriate tab at the top of the
drawing pane. The file name of the project is displayed on the tab.
Setting Project Properties

The Project Properties dialog box let you enter project-specific information to help
identify the project. Project properties are stored with the project.
To set project properties:
Select File > Project Properties, enter information in the Project Properties dialog
box and click OK.
Project Properties Dialog Box

The dialog box contains the following text fields and controls:
4-110
Title
Lets you type a title for the project.
File Name
Displays the file name for the current project. If

you have not saved the project yet, the file name is
listed as Untitled.swc.
Engineer
Lets you type name of the project engineer.
Starting a Project
Company
Lets you type the name of your company.
Date
Click this field to display a calendar, which lets

you use your mouse to set a date for the project.
Notes
Lets you type additional information about the

project.
Setting Options
You can change global settings for Bentley SewerCAD V8i in the Options dialog box.
The Options dialog box contains six tabs, each of which lets you change a different
group of global settings.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Options dialog box:
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab on page 4-111
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab on page 4-114
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab on page 4-116
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab on page 4-117
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab on page 4-120
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab on page 4-121
Options Dialog Box - Global Tab

The Global tab lets you change general program settings for the Bentley SewerCAD
V8i stand-alone editor, including whether or not to display the status pane, as well as
window color and layout settings.
4-111
Setting Options
The Global tab contains the following controls:
General Settings
Backup Levels
Indicates the number of backup copies that

are retained when a project is saved. The
default value is 1.
Note:
4-112
The higher this number, the

more .BAK files (backup
files) are created, thereby
using more hard disk space
on your computer.
Show recently used

files
The checkbox turns the list of recently opened

files on and off. The File menu has the ability
to display a list of recently opened files,
providing shortcuts that let you quickly access
projects. When this check box is cleared,
these shortcuts are not available from the File
menu. When the box is checked, you can
specify a number of files between 1 and 15 to
show by typing the number in the adjacent
field.
Compact Database
After
When selected, the Bentley SewerCAD V8i

database is automatically compacted when
you save a particular file the specified number
of times.
Show Status Pane
When selected, activates the Status Pane

display at the bottom of the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i stand-alone editor. This check
box is selected by default.
Show Welcome
Page on Startup
When selected, activates the Welcome dialog

that appears when you first start Bentley
SewerCAD V8i. This check box is selected by
default.
Zoom Extents on
Open
When this box is checked a Zoom Extents

operation is performed upon file open, so that
the entire network is displayed in the drawing
pane.
Starting a Project
Use accelerated
redraw
Some video cards use triple buffering, which

we do not support at this time. If you see
anomalies in the drawing (such as trails being
left behind from the selection rectangle), then
you can shut this option off to attempt to fix the
problem. However, when this option is off, you
could see some performance degradation in
the drawing.
Window Color Settings
Background Color
Displays the color that is currently assigned to

the drawing pane background. You can
change the color by clicking the ellipsis button
(...) to open the Color dialog box.
Foreground Color

elements and labels in the drawing pane. You
can change the color by clicking the ellipsis
button (...) to open the Color dialog box.
Read Only
Background Color

data field backgrounds. You can change the
color by clicking the ellipsis button (...) to open
the Color dialog box.
Read Only
Foreground Color

data field text. You can change the color by
clicking the ellipsis button (...) to open the
Color dialog box.
Selection

elements that are selected in the drawing
pane. You can change the color by clicking the
ellipsis button (...) to open the Color dialog
box.
Layout Settings
Display Inactive
Topology
When selected, activates the display of

inactive elements in the drawing pane in the
color defined in the adjacent color box. When
not selected, inactive elements will not be
visible in the drawing pane. This check box is
selected by default.
4-113
Setting Options
Auto Refresh
Activates Auto Refresh. When Auto-Refresh is

active, the drawing pane automatically
updates whenever changes are made to the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i datastore. This check
box is selected by default.
Sticky Tool Palette
When selected, activates the Sticky Tools

feature. When Sticky Tools is activated, the
drawing pane cursor does not reset to the
Select tool after you create a node or finish a
pipe run in your model, allowing you to
continue dropping new elements into the
drawing without re-selecting the tool. When
Sticky Tools is not activated, the drawing pane
cursor resets to the Select tool after you
create a node. This check box is selected by
default.
Select Polygons by
Edge
When selected, lets you select polygons in

your model at their edges instead of anywhere
inside the polygon. This check box is cleared
by default.
Selection Handle
Size In Pixels
Specifies, in pixels, the size of the handles

that appear on selected elements. Enter a
number from 1 to 10.
Selection Line
Width Multiplier
Increases or decreases the size of pipes that

are selected in the drawing view by the factor
indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2 would
result in the line width being doubled.
Default Drawing
Style for New
Projects
Choose the style in which elements are

displayed in the drawing pane. Under GIS
style, the size of element symbols in the
drawing pane will remain the same regardless
of zoom level. Under CAD style, element
symbols will appear larger or smaller
depending on zoom level.
Options Dialog Box - Project Tab

Geospatial Settings
Spatial Reference
4-114
Used for integration with Projectwise Geospatial.

You can leave the field blank if there is no spatial
information.
Starting a Project
Element Labeling Options
Element Identifier
Format
Specifies the format in which reference fields are

used. Reference fields are fields that link to
another element or support object (pump
definitions, patterns, controls, zones, etc.).
Result Files
Specify Custom
Results File Path?
When checked, allows you to edit the results file

path and format by enabling the other controls in
this section.
Root Path
Allows you to specify the root path where results

files are stored. You can type the path manually or
choose the path from a Browse dialog by clicking
the ellipsis (...) button.
Path Format
Allows you to specify the path format. You can

type the path manually and use predefined
attributes from the menu accessed with the [>]
button..
Path
Displays a dynamically updated view of the

custom result file path based on the settings in the
Root Path and Path Format fields.
Pipe Length
Round Pipe Length to

Nearest
The program will round to the nearest unit

specified in this field when calculating scaled pipe
length
Calculate Pipe Lengths

Using Node Elevations
(3D Length)
When this box is checked, differences in Z

(elevation) between nodes is considered when
calculating conduit lengths.
Hydraulic Analysis
Friction Method
Select the friction method that will be used for the

gravity portion of the network during hydraulic
analysis.
4-115
Setting Options
Pressure Friction
Method
Select the friction method that will be used for the

pressure portion of the network during hydraulic
analysis.
Conduit Description
Options
Conduit Shape
Select the conduit shape you wish to modify in the

Conduit Description Format field.
Conduit Description
Format
This field displays the format of the conduit

description for the conduit shape currently
selected in the Conduit Shape list. The arrow
button next to this field provides access to the
preformatted variables available for the associated
conduit shape.
The text box below this control displays the
conduit description format string in a localized
format, primarily for non-English versions of the
software.
Options Dialog Box - Drawing Tab

This tab contains drawing layout and display settings. You can set the scale that you
want to use as the finished drawing scale for the plan view output. Drawing scale is
based upon engineering judgment and the destination sheet sizes to be used in the final
presentation. The Drawing tab contains the following controls:
Drawing Scale Settings
Drawing Mode
Drop-down list that lets you select either Scaled or

Schematic mode for models in the drawing pane.
Plot Scale Factor 1 in.

=:
Controls the scale of the plan view. This value

affects the text height when printing-to-scale and
does not affect the scaled length or area results.
Annotation Multipliers Settings
4-116
Starting a Project
Symbol Size Mulitplier
Increases or decreases the size of your symbols by

the factor indicated. For example, a multiplier of 2
would result in the symbol size being doubled.
The program selects a default symbol height that
corresponds to 4.0 ft. (approximately 1.2 m) in
actual-world units, regardless of scale.
Text Height Multiplier
Increases or decreases the default size of the text

associated with element labeling by the factor
indicated. The program automatically selects a
default text height that displays at approximately
2.5 mm (0.1 in) high at the user-defined drawing
scale. A scale of 1.0 mm = 0.5 m, for example,
results in a text height of approximately 1.25 m.
Likewise, a 1 in. = 40 ft. scale equates to a text
height of around 4.0 ft.
Text Options
Align Text with Pipes
Turns text alignment on and off. When this check

box is selected, labels are aligned to their
associated pipes. When the check box is cleared,
labels are displayed horizontally near the center of
the associated pipe.
Color Element
Annotations
When this box is checked, color coding settings

are applied to the element annotation.
Options Dialog Box - Units Tab

The Units tab lets you modify the unit settings for the current project. The Units tab
contains the following controls:
Save As
Lets you save the current unit settings as a separate

.xml file. This file allows you to reuse your Units
settings in another project. When the button is clicked,
a Windows Save As dialog box appears, allowing you
to enter a name and specify the directory location of
the .xml file.
4-117
Setting Options
4-118
Load
Lets you load a previously created Units project .xml

file, thereby transferring the unit and format settings
that were defined in the previous project. When the
button is clicked, a Windows Load dialog box appears,
allowing you to browse to the location of the desired
.xml file.
Reset Defaults - SI
Resets the unit and formatting settings to the original

factory defaults for the System International (Metric)
system.
Reset Defaults - US
Resets the unit and formatting settings to the original

factory defaults for the Imperial (U.S.) system.
Default Unit System

for New Project
Lets you specify the unit system that is used globally

across the project. Note that you can locally change
any number of attributes to use system other than the
one specified here.
Starting a Project
Units Table
The units table contains the following columns:
LabelDisplays the parameter measured by the

unit.
UnitDisplays the type of measurement. To

change the unit of an attribute type, click the
choice list and click the unit you want. This option
also allows you to use both U.S. customary and SI
units in the same worksheet.
Display PrecisionSets the rounding of

numbers and number of digits displayed after the
decimal point. Enter a negative number for
rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1) rounds to
10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to 1000, and so
on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to indicate the
number of digits after the decimal point.
Format MenuLets you select the display format

used by the current field. Choices include:
ScientificConverts the entered value to a

string of the form "-d.ddd...E+ddd" or "d.ddd...e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a
digit (0-9). The string starts with a minus sign
if the number is negative.
Fixed PointAbides by the display precision

setting, and automatically enters zeros after
the decimal place to do so. With a display
precision of 3, an entered value of 3.5
displays as 3.500.
GeneralTruncates any zeros after the

decimal point, regardless of the display precision value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed
Point format displays as 5.2 when using
General format. The number is also rounded.
So, an entered value of 5.35 displays as 5.4,
regardless of the display precision.
NumberConverts the entered value to a

string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...", where
each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The string
starts with a minus sign if the number is negative. Thousand separators are inserted
between each group of three digits to the left
of the decimal point.
4-119
Setting Options
Options Dialog Box - Labeling Tab

The Element Labeling tab is used to specify the automatic numbering format of new
elements as they are added to the network. You can save your settings to an .xml file
for later use. The Element Labeling tab contains the following controls:
4-120
Save As
Lets you save your element labeling settings to an

element label project file, which is an. xml file.
Load
Lets you open an existing element label project

file.
Reset
Fills in the Next column for each element based

on the labels already used in the model and the
increment value that has been set. So, for example,
if the model contains conduits CO-1, CO-2, and
CO-3 and the Increment value is 1, clicking Reset
will fill in the Next column with CO-4 for the
Conduit row.
Starting a Project
Labeling Table
The labeling table contains the following columns:
ElementShows the type of element to

which the label applies.
OnLets you turn automatic element labeling

on and off for the associated element type.
NextLets you enter the integer you want to

use as the starting value for the ID number
portion of the label. Bentley SewerCAD V8i
generates labels beginning with this number
and chooses the first available unique label.
IncrementLets you enter the integer that is

added to the ID number after each element is
created to yield the number for the next
element.
PrefixLets you enter the letters or numbers

that appear in front of the ID number for the
elements in your network.
DigitsLets you enter the minimum number

of digits that the ID number has. For instance,
1, 10, and 100 with a digit setting of two would
be 01, 10, and 100.
SuffixLets you enter the letters or numbers

that appear after the ID number for the
elements in your network.
PreviewLets you see what the label looks

like, based on the information you have
entered in the previous fields.
Options Dialog Box - ProjectWise Tab

Note:
These settings affect ProjectWise users only.
The ProjectWise tab contains options for using SewerCAD V8i with ProjectWise.
4-121
Setting Options
This tab contains the following controls:
Default Datasource
Displays the current ProjectWise datasource. If

you have not yet logged into a datasource, this
field will display <login>. To change the
datasource, click the Ellipses (...) button to open
the Change Datasource dialog box. If you click
Cancel after you have changed the default
datasource, the new default datasource is retained.
Update Server When

Saving
When this is checked, any time you save your

SewerCAD V8i project locally using the File >
Save menu command, the files on your
ProjectWise server will also be updated and all
changes to the files will immediately become
visible to other ProjectWise users. This option is
turned off by default.
Note:
This option, when turned on,

can significantly affect
performance, especially for
large, complex projects.
For more information about using SewerCAD V8i with ProjectWise, see Considerations for ProjectWise Users on page 4-123.
4-122
Starting a Project
Considerations for ProjectWise Users

Bentley ProjectWise provides managed access to SewerCAD V8i content within a
workgroup, across a distributed organization, or among collaborating professionals.
When ProjectWise is integrated with SewerCAD V8i, project files can be accessed
quickly, checked out for use, and checked back in directly from within SewerCAD
V8i.
If ProjectWise is installed on your system, SewerCAD V8i automatically installs all
the components necessary for you to use ProjectWise to store and share your
SewerCAD V8i projects.
To learn more about ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise online help.
To learn more about using ProjectWise with SewerCAD V8i, see the following topics:
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise on page 4-123
Performing ProjectWise Operations on page 4-124
General Guidelines for using ProjectWise

Follow these guidelines when using SewerCAD V8i with ProjectWise:
Use the File > ProjectWise commands to perform ProjectWise file operations,
such as Save, Open, and Change Datasource.
The first time you choose one of the File > ProjectWise menu commands in your
current SewerCAD V8i session, you are prompted to log into a ProjectWise datasource. The datasource you log into remains the current datasource until you
change it using the File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource command.
Use SewerCAD V8is File > New command to create a new project. The project is
not stored in ProjectWise until you select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
Use SewerCAD V8is File > Open command to open a local copy of the current
project.
Use SewerCAD V8is File > Save command to save a copy of the current project
to your local computer.
When you Close a project already stored in ProjectWise using File > Close, you
are prompted to select one of the following options:
Check InUpdates the project in ProjectWise with your latest changes and
unlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it.
UnlockUnlocks the project so other ProjectWise users can edit it but does
not update the project in ProjectWise. Note that this will abandon any changes
you have made since the last server update.
4-123
Leave OutLeaves the project checked out so others cannot edit it and
retains any changes you have made since the last server update to the files on
your local computer. Select this option if you want to exit Bentley SewerCAD
V8i but continue working on the project later.
In the SewerCAD V8i Options dialog box, there is a ProjectWise tab with the
Update server on Save check box. This option, when turned on, can significantly
affect performance, especially for large, complex projects. When this is checked,
any time you save your SewerCAD V8i project locally using the File > Save menu
command, the files on your ProjectWise server will also be updated and all
changes to the files will immediately become visible to other ProjectWise users.
This option is turned off by default.
In this release of SewerCAD V8i, calculation result files are not managed inside
ProjectWise. A local copy of results is maintained on your computer, but to ensure
accurate results you should recalculate projects when you first open them from
ProjectWise.
SewerCAD V8i projects associated with ProjectWise appear in the Most Recently
Used Files list (at the bottom of the File menu) in the following format:
pwname://PointServer:_TestDatasource/Documents/TestFolder/Test1.prj
Performing ProjectWise Operations

You can quickly tell whether or not the current SewerCAD V8i project is in ProjectWise or not by looking at the title bar and the status bar of the SewerCAD V8i
window. If the current project is in ProjectWise, pwname:// will appear in front of
the file name in the title bar, and a ProjectWise icon will appear on the far right side of
the status bar, as shown below.
You can perform the following ProjectWise operations from within SewerCAD V8i:
To save an open SewerCAD V8i project to ProjectWise:
1. In SewerCAD V8i, select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
2. If you havent already logged into ProjectWise, you are prompted to do so. Select
a ProjectWise datasource, type your ProjectWise user name and password, then
click Log in.
4-124
Starting a Project
3. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, enter the following information:
a. Click Change next to the Folder field, then select a folder in the current
ProjectWise datasource in which to store your project.
b. Type the name of your SewerCAD V8i project in the Name field. We recommend that you keep the ProjectWise name the same as or as close to the
SewerCAD V8i project name as possible.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
d. Click OK.
To open a SewerCAD V8i project from a ProjectWise datasource:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.
click Log in.
3. In the ProjectWise Select Document dialog box, perform these steps:
a. From the Folder drop-down menu, select a folder that contains SewerCAD
V8i projects.
b. In the Document list box, select a SewerCAD V8i project.
c. Keep the default entries for the rest of the fields in the dialog box
d. Click Open.
To copy an open SewerCAD V8i project from one ProjectWise datasource to
another:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open to open a project stored in ProjectWise.
2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, select a different ProjectWise datasource,
then click Log in.
4. Select File > ProjectWise > Save As.
5. In the ProjectWise Save Document dialog box, change information about the
project as required, then click OK.
To make a local copy of a SewerCAD V8i project stored in a ProjectWise datasource:
1. Select File > ProjectWise > Open.
click Log in.
4-125

3. Select File > Save As.
4. Save the SewerCAD V8i project to a folder on your local computer.
To change the default ProjectWise datasource:
1. Start SewerCAD V8i.
2. Select File > ProjectWise > Change Datasource.
3. In the ProjectWise Log in dialog box, type the name of ProjectWise datasource
you want to log into, then click Log in.
To use background layer files with ProjectWise:
Using File > ProjectWise > Save AsIf there are background files, you are
prompted with two options: you can copy the background layer files to the project
folder for use by the project, or you can remove the background references and
manually reassign them once the project is in ProjectWise to other existing
ProjectWise documents.
Using File > ProjectWise > OpenThis works the same as the normal ProjectWise > Open command, except that background layer files are not locked in
ProjectWise for the current user to edit. The files are intended to be shared with
other users at the same time.
To add a background layer file reference to a project that exists in Project Wise
The ProjectWise Select Document dialog box opens, and you can choose any
existing ProjectWise document. You must have previously added these background layer files as described in the first bullet above, or by using the ProjectWise Explorer.
When you remove a background layer file reference from a project that exists in
ProjectWise, the reference to the file is removed but the file itself is not deleted
from ProjectWise.
Using File > Save AsWhen you use File > Save As on a project that is already
in ProjectWise and there are background layer files, you are prompted with two
options: you can copy all the files to the local project folder for use by the project,
or you can remove the background references and manually reassign them after
you have saved the project locally.
Using ProjectWise with Bentley SewerCAD V8i for AutoCAD

Bentley SewerCAD V8i for AutoCAD maintains a one to one relationship between
the AutoCAD drawing (.dwg) and the Bentley SewerCAD V8i project file. When
using ProjectWise with this data, we recommend that you create a Set in the ProjectWise Explorer. Included in this set should be the AutoCAD drawing (example.dwg),
the Bentley SewerCAD V8i database (example.swc.mdb), the Bentley SewerCAD
V8i project file (example.swc), and optionally for stand-alone, the stand-alone
drawing setting file (example.swc.dwh).
4-126
Starting a Project
If you use the Set and the ProjectWise Explorer for all of your check-in / check-out
procedures, you will maintain the integrity of this relationship. We recommended that
you do not use the default ProjectWise integration in AutoCAD, as this will only work
with the .dwg file.
Using ProjectWise with Bentley SewerCAD V8i for MicroStation

When using ProjectWise with a MicroStation SewerCAD V8i project, we recommend
that you create a Set in the ProjectWise Explorer. Included in this set should be the
MicroStation drawing (example.dgn), the Bentley SewerCAD V8i database
(example.swc.mdb), the Bentley SewerCAD V8i project file (example.swc), and
optionally for stand-alone, the stand-alone drawing setting file (example.swc.dwh).
If you use the Set and the ProjectWise Explorer for all of your check-in / check-out
procedures, you will maintain the integrity of this relationship. We recommended that
you do not use the default ProjectWise integration in AutoCAD, as this will only work
with the .dgn file.
Importing Data From Other Models

Bentley SewerCAD V8i lets you import data from a variety of data sources, including
Bentley SewerCAD V8i, LandXML, SewerCAD, and StormCAD.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i lets you import data from EPA SWMM, CivilStorm, and
StormCAD.
Click one of the following links to learn more:
Importing Data from a SewerCAD V8 Database on page 4-128
Importing a Submodel on page 4-128
Importing from LandXML on page 4-129
Importing StormCAD V8 on page 4-130
Importing from SewerGEMS V8 on page 4-131
4-127
Importing Data from a SewerCAD V8 Database

You can import data from another SewerCAD V8i project by importing the
SewerCAD V8i database (.MDB) file. You might want to do this if you need to
rebuild your model, or if you want to open a SewerCAD V8i project sent to you by
another SewerCAD V8i user.
When you import a SewerCAD V8i database (.MDB) file, the model will notice that
the model does not have any element symbology definitions (annotations and colorcoding), project-level options, text customizations, or border and line customizations
that may have been associated with the project. These are stored in the projects .swc
and .DWH files, which are not imported.
Note:
SewerCAD V8i can only import SewerCAD V8i databases created

in SewerCAD V8i version 8.9.20.9 or later. If the database you
want to import was created in an older version, you will need to
open the file in a newer version of SewerCAD V8i before the
import into SewerCAD V8i will work.
To import data from a SewerCAD V8i project:

1. Select File > Import > SewerCAD V8i Database.
2. In the Select Database File to Import dialog box, select the SewerCAD V8i .mdb
file (database file). The data will display as a new project in SewerCAD V8i.
Importing a Submodel
Using the Submodel Import feature, you can import another model, or any portion
thereof, into your project. Input data stored in the Alternatives as well as any
supporting data (i.e. Patterns, etc) will also be imported. It is important to notice that
existing elements in the model you want to import the submodel into (i.e. the target
model) will be matched with incoming elements by using their label. Incoming input
data will override existing data in the target model for any element matched by its
label. That also applies to scenarios, alternatives, calculation options and supporting
data. Furthermore, any element in the incoming submodel that could not be matched
with any existing element by their label, will be created in the target model.
For example, the submodel you want to import contains input data that you would like
to transfer in two Physical Alternatives named "Smaller Conduits" and "Larger
Conduits". The target model contains only one Physical Alternative named "Larger
Conduits". In that case, the input data in the alternative labeled "Larger Conduits" in
the submodel will replace the alternative with the same name in the target model.
Moreover, the alternative labeled "Smaller Conduits" as well as its input data will be
4-128
Starting a Project
added to the target model without replacing any existing data on it because there is no
existing alternative with the same label. Notice that imported elements will be
assigned default values in those existing alternatives in the target model that could not
be matched.
Notice that regular models can be imported as a submodel of a larger model as their
file format and extension are the same.
For more information about input data transfer, see Exporting a Submodel.
The label-matching strategy used during submodel import will be applied to any set of
alternatives, including Active Topology alternatives. Therefore, if no Active Topology
alternative stored in the submodel matches the existing ones in the target model, the
imported elements will preserve their active topology values in the alternatives
created from the submodel, but they will be left as "Inactive" in those previously
existing alternatives in the target model. That is because the default value for the "Is
Active" attribute in active topology alternatives other than the one that is current is
"False".
Note:
User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and

export operations.
To import a submodel
1. Click the File menu and select Import...Submodel.
2. In the Select Submodel File to Import dialog box, select the submodel file to be
imported. Click the Open button.
Importing from LandXML

You can import a model from a LandXML format .xml file. LandXML is a nonproprietary data standard for the persistence of civil engineering and survey measurement data commonly used in the Land Development and Transportation Industries.
SewerCAD V8i utilizes the PipeNetworks functionality of the LandXML file.
SewerCAD V8i is primarily concerned with the overall physical structure and connectivity of the pipe network; hence some of the available hydrologic and hydraulic data
necessary for a hydraulic analysis is not transferred during export/import.
To import a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Import > LandXML.
2. In the Select LandXML File to Import dialog, browse to the LandXML file to be
imported, highlight it, and click Open.
4-129
Importing StormCAD V8
You can import a model created in StormCAD V8 into SewerCAD V8i. Note that,
unlike the StormCAD Exchange Database import, the StormCAD V8 import does not
require you to create an exchange database file in StormCAD first - SewerCAD V8i
handles the StormCAD V8 edition model files natively.
After importing the StormCAD model database, the model will notice that the model
does not have any element symbology definitions (annotations and color-coding),
project-level options, text customizations, or border and line customizations that may
have been associated with the project. These are stored in the project's .swc and .dwh
files, which are not imported.
Because of differences between StormCAD and SewerGEMS, some data will either
not be imported or will be imported using near-equivalent substitutes, including the
following:
Only Mannings roughness values will be imported.
AASHTO and Headloss Flow Curves from StormCAD will not be imported into
SewerCAD V8i.
Catalog Inlets and Percent Capacity Inlets' are converted to Inflow-Capture

curves.
For StormCAD gutters, SewerCAD V8i will set the shape as trapezoidal, set the
appropriate side slopes, leave the bottom width = 0 and set an appropriate
Manning's N. The depth value must be entered by the user. Additionally, gutters
are set to inactive automatically upon import. You will need to make the gutters
active and fill in missing data before the gutter can be included in the calculations.
When a StormCAD model is imported, an Inlet Flow Settings dialog will appear. The
data entered here is required to define the inlet flow-capture curves. The two pieces of
data required in this dialog are as follows:
4-130
Flow Increment: The flow increment value should be a value that will give the
flow-capture curves satisfactory resolution.
Maximum Flow: The value entered here should exceed the highest flow expected
at any inlet.
Starting a Project
Note:
The flow-capture curves are only for on-grade inlets Sag inlets
are set to "full capture".
To import a StormCAD V8 model

1. Click the File menu and select Import > StormCAD V8.
2. In the Select Database File to Import dialog, browse to the stc.mdb file for the
StormCAD model you are importing. Highlight the file and click the Open button.
3. In the Inlet Flow Settings dialog, enter vlaues for the Flow Increment and
Maximum Flow, then click OK.
Importing from SewerGEMS V8

You can import a SewerGEMS V8 model database (swg.mdb) file. Please note the
following:
Pumps: When importing a SewerGEMs pump into SewerCAD, each component

of the SewerGEMs pump collection is turned into a SewerCAD pump, with
appropriate connectivity. The on and off elevations of the SewerGEMs pump are
translated into two controls (pump on if node x HGL is greater than y, etc) on
the SewerCAD side.
SewerGEMs supports two pump definition types that are not supported by
SewerCAD, Volume-Flow and Depth Flow. This data will be imported but you
will have to either change these pump definitions to a supported type, or change
the references to these pump definitions to ones of a supported type for the model
to calculate.
Control Structures: SewerCAD does not support control structures on conduits

like SewerGEMS. This information is lost on import. You can approximate
control structures in SewerCAD by using diversions and creating an appropriate
rating curve which describes the relationship between inflow and flow diverted.
To import a SewerGEMS V8 model

1. Click the File menu and select Import > SewerGEMS V8.
2. In the Select Database File to Import dialog, browse to the swc.mdb file for the
SewerGEMS model you are importing. Highlight the file and click the Open
button.
4-131
Exporting Data
Exporting Data
You can export your SewerCAD V8i data as a submodel, export to LandXML, or
export the graphical representation of your model as a .DXF file.
Exporting a .DXF File on page 4-132
Exporting a Submodel on page 4-132
Exporting to LandXML on page 4-133
Exporting a .DXF File

You can export your SewerCAD V8i model as a .DXF file if you plan to edit the file in
AutoCAD or another program. When you export a .DXF file, you export only the
graphical (vector) representation of the model. The DXF file is an ASCII file.
To export the current project to a .DXF file:
1. Select File > Export > DXF.
2. Type the name of the DXF file, then click Save.
You may now open the DXF file in another program.
Exporting a Submodel
You can export any portion of a model as a submodel for import into other projects.
Input data is also stored in the file that is created in the process of Exporting a
Submodel. This input data will be imported following a label-matching strategy for
any element, alternative, scenario, calculation option or supporting data in the
submodel. For more information about input data transfer, see Importing Submodels.
User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and export operations.
To export a submodel
1. In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To
highlight multiple elements, hold down the Shift key while clicking elements.
2. Click the File menu and select Export...Submodel.
3. In the Select Submodel File to Export dialog box, specify the directory to which
the file should be saved, enter a name for the submodel and click the Save button.
4-132
Starting a Project
Exporting to LandXML
You can export a model to LandXML format. See Importing from LandXML on
page 4-129 for information about the data that will be exported.
To export the current project to a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Export > LandXML.
2. Type the name of the xml file , then click Save.
You may now open the .xml file in another program.
4-133
Exporting Data
4-134
Chapter
Using Modelbuilder
ModelBuilder lets you use your existing GIS asset to construct a new SewerCAD V8i
model or update an existing SewerCAD V8i model. ModelBuilder supports a wide
variety of data formats, from simple databases (such as Access and DBase), spreadsheets (such as Excel or Lotus), GIS data (such as shape files), to high end data stores
(such as Oracle, and SQL Server), and more.
Using ModelBuilder, you map the tables and fields contained within your data source
to element types and attributes in your SewerCAD V8i model. The result is that a
SewerCAD V8i model is created. ModelBuilder can be used in any of the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i platforms - Stand-Alone, MicroStation mode, or AutoCAD mode.
Note:
ModelBuilder lets you bring a wide range of data into your

model. However, some data is better suited to the use of the
more specialized SewerCAD V8i modules. For instance,
LoadBuilder offers many powerful options for incorporating
loading data into your model.
ModelBuilder is the first tool you will use when constructing a model from GIS data.
The steps that you take at the outset will impact how the rest of the process goes. Take
the time now to ensure that this process goes as smoothly and efficiently as possible:
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder on page 5-135
Reviewing Your Results on page 5-146
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder
Determine the purpose of your modelOnce you establish the purpose of your
model, you can start to make decisions about how detailed the model should be.
5-135
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder
Get familiar with your dataModelBuilder supports several data source types,
including tabular and geometric. Tabular data sources include spreadsheets, databases, and other data sources without geometric information. Some supported
tabular data source types include Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access.
Geometric data sources, while also internally organized by tables, include
geometric characteristics such as shape type, size, and location. Some supported
geometric data source types include the major CAD and GIS file types
If you obtained your model data from an outside source, you should take the time
to get acquainted with it in its native platform. For example, review spatial and
attribute data directly in your GIS environment. Do the nodes have coordinate
information, and do the pipes have start and stop nodes specified? If not, the best
method of specifying network connectivity must be determined.
Contact those involved in the development of the GIS to learn more about the GIS
tables and associated attributes. Find out the purpose of any fields that may be of
interest, ensure that data is of an acceptable accuracy, and determine units associated with fields containing numeric data.
Ideally, there will be one source data table for each SewerCAD V8i element type.
This isnt always the case, and there are two other possible scenarios:
Many tables for one element typeIn this case, there may be several tables in
the datasource corresponding to a single GEMS modeling element, component, or
collection. In this case each data source table must be individually mapped to the
SewerCAD V8i table type, or the tables must be combined into a single table from
within its native platform before running ModelBuilder.
One table containing many element typesIn this case, there may be entries
that correspond to several SewerCAD V8i table types in one datasource table. You
should separate these into individual tables before running ModelBuilder.
5-136
Preparing your dataWhen using ModelBuilder to get data from your data
source into your model, you will be associating rows in your data source to
elements in SewerCAD V8i. Your data source needs to contain a Key/Label field
that can be used to uniquely identify every element in your model. The data
source tables should have identifying column labels, or ModelBuilder will interpret the first row of data in the table as the column labels. Be sure data is in a
format suited for use in ModelBuilder. Note that while ModelBuilder allows
duplicate labels, they may cause ModelBuilder to give unexpected results when
two elements of the same type have the same label. Where applicable, use
powerful GIS and Database tools to perform Database Joins, Spatial Joins, and
Update Joins to get data into the appropriate table, and in the desired format.
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
When working with ID fields, the expected model input is the

SewerCAD V8i ID. After creating these items in your SewerCAD
V8i model, you can obtain the assigned ID values directly from
your SewerCAD V8i modeling file. Before synchronizing your
model, get these SewerCAD V8i IDs into your data source table
(e.g., by performing a database join).
Preparing your CAD DataIn previous versions of SewerCAD V8i, the Polyline-to-Pipe feature was was used to import CAD data into a SewerCAD V8i
model. In v8, CAD data is imported using ModelBuilder. When using ModelBuilder to import data from your CAD file into your model, you will be associating cells in your CAD drawing with elements in SewerCAD V8i.
Different CAD cells will be recognized as different element types and presented
as tables existing in your CAD data source. It is recommended that you natively
export your AutoCAD .dwg or Microstation .dgn files first as a .dxf file, then
select this .dxf as the data source in ModelBuilder. Your data source will most
likely not contain a Key/Label field that can be used to uniquely identify every
element in your model, so ModelBuilder will automatically generate one for you
using the default "<label>". This "<label>" field is a combination of an element's
cell type label, its shape type, and a numeric ID that represents the order in which
it was created.
Build first, Synchronize laterModelBuilder allows you to construct a new

model or synchronize to an existing model. This gives you the ability to develop
your model in multiple passes. On the first pass, use a simple connection to build
your model. Then, on a subsequent pass, use a connection to load additional data
into your model, such as supporting pattern or collection data.
Note:
Upon completion of your ModelBuilder run, it is suggested you

use the Network Navigator to identify any connectivity or
topological problems in your new model. For instance, Pipe Split
Candidates can be identified and then automatically modified
with the Batch Split Pipe Tool (see Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box on
page 4-262). See Using the Network Navigator on page 4-278 for
more information.
Going Beyond ModelBuilderKeep in mind that there are additional ways to

get data into your model. ModelBuilder can import loads if you have already
assigned a load to each node. If, however, this information is not available from
the GIS data, or if your loading data is in a format unrecognized by ModelBuilder
(meter data, etc.), use LoadBuilder; this module is a specialized tool for getting
this data into your model. In addition, with its open database format, SewerCAD
V8i gives you unprecedented access to your modeling data.
5-137
ModelBuilder Connections Manager

One area of difficulty in building a model from external data sources is the fact that
unless the source was created solely to support modeling, it most likely contains much
more detailed information than is needed for modeling. This is especially true with
regard to the number of piping elements. It is not uncommon for the data sources to
include every service line. Such information is not needed for most modeling applications and should be removed to improve model run time, reduce file size, and save
costs.

ModelBuilder can be used in any of the Bentley SewerCAD V8i platforms - StandAlone, MicroStation mode, or AutoCAD mode.
To access ModelBuilder: Click the Tools menu and select the ModelBuilder
command, or click the ModelBuilder button
The ModelBuilder Connections manager allows you to create, edit, and manage
ModelBuilder connections to be used in the model-building/model-synchronizing
process.
At the center of this window is the Connections List which displays the list of
connections that you have defined.
There is a toolbar located along the top of the Connections list.
5-138
Using Modelbuilder
The set of buttons on the left of the toolbar allow you to manage your connections:
New
Create a new connection using the

ModelBuilder Wizard.
Edit
Edit the selected connection using the

ModelBuilder Wizard.
Rename
Rename the selected connection.
Duplicate
Create a copy of the selected connection.
5-139
Delete
Permanently Remove the selected connection.
Build Model
Starts the ModelBuilder build process using the

selected connection. Excluding some spatial
option overrides, a build operation will update
your model with new elements, components,
and collections that already exist in the model.
Only table types and fields that are mapped will
be updated. If an element in your data source
does not already exist in your model, it will be
created. If the element exists, only the fields
mapped for that table type will be updated. It
will not override element properties not
specifically associated with the defined field
mappings. A Build Model operation will update
existing or newly created element values for the
current scenario/alternative.
Sync Out
Starts the ModelBuilder synchronize process

using the selected connection. Unless
specifically overridden, a Sync Out operation
will only work for existing and new elements.
On a Sync Out every element in your data
source that also exists in your model will be
refreshed with the current model values. If your
model contains elements that arent contained in
your data source, those data rows will be added
to your source. Only those attributes specified
with field mappings will be synchronized out to
the data source. A Sync Out operation will
refresh element properties in the data source
with the current model values for the current
scenario/alternative.
Help
Displays online help.
After initiating a Build or Sync command, ModelBuilder will perform the selected
operation. During the process, a progress-bar will be displayed indicating the step that
ModelBuilder is currently working on.
When ModelBuilder completes, you will be presented with a summary window that
outlines important information about the build process. We recommend that you save
this summary so that you can refer to it later.
5-140
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
ModelBuilder connection mappings are persisted. They are

saved by default in "C:\Documents and
Settings\username\Application Data\Bentley\ SewerCAD
V8i\8\ModelBuilder.xml". ModelBuilder connections are
preserved even after SewerCAD V8i is closed.
ModelBuilder Wizard
The ModelBuilder Wizard assists in the creation of ModelBuilder connections. The
Wizard will guide you through the process of selecting your data source and mapping
that data to the desired input of your model.
Tip:
The ModelBuilder Wizard can be resized, making it easier to

preview tables in your data source. In addition, Step 1 and Step 3
of the wizard offer a vertical split bar, letting you adjust the size
of the list located on the left side of these pages.
There are 4 steps involved:
Step 1Specify Data Source on page 5-141
Step 2Specify Spatial Options on page 5-142
Step 3Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class on page 5-144
Step 4Build Operation Confirmation on page 5-146
Step 1Specify Data Source

In this step, the data source type and location are specified. After selecting your data
source, the desired database tables can be chosen and previewed.
The following fields are available:
Data Source type (drop-down list)This field allows you to specify the type of
data you would like to work with.
5-141
ModelBuilder Wizard
Note:
If your specific data source type is not listed in the Data Source
type field, try using the OLE DB data source type. OLE DB can be
used to access many database systems (including ORACLE, and
SQL Server, to name a few).
FoxPro datasources are not explicitly supported in
ModelBuilder. FoxPro database users will need to install the
Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Visual FoxPro, and use an OleDB
datasource.
Data Source (text field)This read-only field displays the path to your data
source.
Browse (button)This button opens a browse dialog box that allows you to interactively select your data source.
Note:
Some Data Source types expect you to choose more than one
item in the Browse dialog box. For more information, see Multiselect Data Source Types on page 5-147.
Table/Feature Class (list)This pane lists the tables/feature classes that are
contained within the data source. Use the check boxes (along the left side of the
list) to specify the tables you would like to include.
Tip:
The list can be resized using the split bar (located on the right
side of the list).
Right-click to Select All or Clear the current selection in the list.
Preview PaneA tabular preview of the highlighted table is displayed in this

pane when the Show Preview check box is enabled.
Step 2Specify Spatial Options

In this step you will specify the spatial options to be used during the ModelBuilder
process. The spatial options will determine the placement and connectivity of the
model elements. The fields available in this step will vary depending on the data
source type.
5-142
Specify the Coordinate Unit of your data source (drop-down list)This field
allows you to specify the coordinate unit of the spatial data in your data source.
Create nodes if none found at pipe endpoint (check box)When this box is
checked, ModelBuilder will create a pressure junction at any pipe endpoint that:
a) doesnt have a connected node, and b) is not within the specified tolerance of an
existing node. This field is only active when the Establish connectivity using
spatial data box is checked. (This option is not available if the connection is
bringing in only point type geometric data.)
Using Modelbuilder
Establish connectivity using spatial data (check box)When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will connect pipes to nodes that fall within a specified
tolerance of a pipe endpoint. (This option is available if the connection is bringing
in only polyline type geometric data.)
Tolerance (numeric field)This field dictates how close a node must be to a pipe
endpoint in order for connectivity to be established. The Tolerance field is only
available when the Establish connectivity using spatial data box is checked.
(This option is available if the connection is bringing in only polyline type
geometric data.)
Note:
Pipes will be connected to the closest node within the specified

tolerance.
The unit associated with the tolerance is dictated by the Specify
the Coordinate Unit of your data source field.
For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in
ModelBuilder on page 5-149.
Create referenced element automatically (check box)When this box is

checked, ModelBuilder will create referenced start and stop node's automatically
at the pipe's start and stop locations.
Add objects to destination if present in source (check box)When this box is

not checked, ModelBuilder will not append the model with new element data
from the data source.
Prompt before adding objects (check box)When this box is checked, ModelBuilder will pause during model generation to present a confirmation message
box to the user each time an element is about to be created in the model.
Remove objects from destination if missing from source (check box)When

this box is checked, ModelBuilder will delete elements from the model if they do
not exist in the data source.
Prompt before removing objects (check box)When this box is checked,

ModelBuilder will pause during model generation to present a confirmation
message box to the user each time an element is about to be deleted from the
model.
5-143
ModelBuilder Wizard
Step 3Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class

In this step, data source tables are mapped to the desired modeling element types, and
data source fields are mapped to the desired model input attributes. You will assign
mappings for each Table/Feature Class that appears in the list; Step 1 of the wizard
can be used to exclude tables, if you wish.
Tables (list)This pane, located along the left side of the dialog box, lists the
data source Tables/Feature Classes to be used in the ModelBuilder process. Select
an item in the list to specify the settings for that item.
Tip:
The list can be resized using the split bar.
There are two toolbar buttons located directly above Tables list (these buttons can
be a great time saver when setting up multiple mappings with similar settings).
Copy Mappings (button)This button copies the mappings (associated with

the currently selected table) to the clipboard.
Paste Mappings (button)This button applies the copied mappings to the

currently selected table.
Settings TabThe Settings tab allows you to specify mappings for the selected
item in the Tables list.
The top section of the Settings tab allows you to specify the common data
mappings:
Table Type (drop-down list)This field allows you to specify the target
modeling element type that the source table/feature class represents. For
example, a source table that contains pipe data should be associated with the
Pressure Pipe element type.
There are three categories of Table Types: Element Types, Components, and
Collections. For geometric data sources, only Element Types are available.
However with tabular data sources all table types can be used. The categorized menu accessed by the [>] button assists in quicker selection of the
desired table type.
5-144
Element TypesThis category of Table Type includes elements symbolically represented in the drawing view such as pipes, junctions, tanks, etc.
ComponentsThis category of Table Type includes the supporting data

items in your model that are potentially shared among elements such as
patterns, pump definitions, and controls.
CollectionsThis category of Table Type includes table types that are

typically lists of 2-columned data. For instance, if one table in your
connection consists of a list of (Time From Start, Multiplier) pairs, use a
Pattern collection table type selection.
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
Each table in your data source can be assigned to a single

element type. For this reason, individual tables in your data
source should contain only data that will be assigned to items of
the same type. For instance, the source data table that will be
designated as the Pressure Junction element type should
contain only data that will be applied to Pressure Junctions, not
data relating to pressure valves, tanks, etc.
Key/Label Field (drop-down list)This required field allows you to associate a row in this table to a particular element in the model. The model references each element using a unique alphanumeric label. Your data source must
have a field that can be used to uniquely identify all elements in the model.
Note:
If you do not have a field that can be used to uniquely identify

each element, you may use the <label> field (which is
automatically generated by ModelBuilder for this purpose).
These optional fields are available for Pipe element types:
Start/StopSelect the fields in your pipe table that contain the Label of the
start and stop nodes. For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder on page 5-149. This field only applies to polyline
table types.
These fields are available for Node element types:
X/Y FieldThese fields are used to specify the node X and Y coordinate
data. This field only applies to point table types.
Note:
The Coordinate Unit setting in Step 2 of the wizard allows you to

specify the units associated with these fields.
These optional fields are available for Pump element types:
Downstream Edge (drop-down list)For tables that define pump or valve

data, select a pipe label or other unique identifier to set the direction of the
pump or valve.
The bottom section of the Settings tab allows you to specify additional data
mappings.
FieldField refers to a field in the selected data source. The Field list
displays the associations between fields in the database to attributes in the
model.
Attribute (drop-down list)Attribute refers to a Bentley SewerCAD V8i

attribute. Use the Attribute drop-down list to map the highlighted field to the
desired attribute.
Unit (drop-down list)This field allows you to specify the units of the values
in the datasource (no conversion on your part is required). This field only
applies if the selected attribute is unitized.
5-145
Reviewing Your Results

To map a field in your table to a particular SewerCAD V8i attribute:
1. In the Field list, select the item you would like to update.
2. In the Attribute drop-down list, select the desired SewerCAD V8i attribute. You
can also click the flyout button to access a submenu that categorizes attributes by
type.
3. If the attribute is unitized, specify the unit of this field in your data source in the
Unit drop-down list.
To remove the mapping for a particular field:
1. Select the field you would like to update.
2. In the Attribute drop-down list, select <none>.
Preview TabThe Preview tab displays a tabular preview of the currently

highlighted source data table when the Show Preview check box is checked.
Step 4Build Operation Confirmation

In this step, you are prompted to build a new model or update an existing model.
To build a new model, click the Yes radio button under Would you like to build the
model now?.
If you choose No, you will be returned to the ModelBuilder Manager dialog. The
connection you defined will appear in the list pane. To build the model from the
ModelBuilder Manager, highlight the connection and click the Build Model button.
Reviewing Your Results

At the end of the ModelBuilder process, you will be presented with statistics, and a list
of any warning/error messages reported during the process. You should closely review
this information, and be sure to save this data to disk where you can refer to it later.
5-146
Using Modelbuilder
Note:
Refer to the section titled ModelBuilder Warnings and Error

Messages on page 5-147 to determine the nature of any
messages that were reported.
Multi-select Data Source Types

When certain Data Source types are chosen in Step 1 of the ModelBuilder Wizard (see
Step 1Specify Data Source on page 5-141), multiple items can be selected for
inclusion in your ModelBuilder connection.
After clicking the Browse button to interactively specify your data source, use standard Windows selection techniques to select all items you would like to include in the
connection (e.g., Ctrl+click each item you would like to include).
The following are multi-select Data Source types:
Shape files
DBase, HTML Export, and Paradox.
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages

Errors and warnings that are encountered during the ModelBuilder process will be
reported in the ModelBuilder Summary.
For more information, see:
Warnings on page 5-147
Error Messages on page 5-148
Warnings
Warning messages include:
1. Some rows were ignored due to missing key-field values.
ModelBuilder encountered missing data (e.g., null or blank) in the specified Key/
Label field for rows in your data source table. Without a key, ModelBuilder is
unable to associate this source row with a target element, and must skip these
items. This can commonly occur when using a spreadsheet data source. To determine where and how often this error occurred, check the Statistics page for the
message <x> row(s) ignored due to missing key-field values.
2. Unable to create pipe <element>; start and/or stop node could not be found.
5-147
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages

Pipes can only be created if its start and stop nodes can be established. If you are
using Explicit connectivity, a node element with the referenced start or stop label
could not be found. If you are using implicit connectivity, a node element could
not be located within the specified tolerance. For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder on page 5-149.
3. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; (start or stop) node could not be
found.
This error occurs when synchronizing an existing model, and indicates that the
pipe connectivity could not be updated. For more information, see warning
message #2 (above).
4. The downstream edge for <element> could not be found.
ModelBuilder was unable to set a Pump direction because a pipe with the referenced label could not be found.
5. Directed Node <element> direction is ambiguous.
ModelBuilder was unable to set the direction of the referenced pump or valve
because direction could not be implied based on the adjacent pipes (e.g. there
should be one incoming and one outgoing pipe).
Error Messages
Note:
If you encounter these errors or warnings, we recommend that

you correct the problems in your original data source and re-run
ModelBuilder (when applicable).
Error messages include:

1. Unable to assign <attribute> for element <element>.
Be sure that the data in your source table is compatible with the expected
SewerCAD V8i format. For more information, see Preparing to Use ModelBuilder on page 5-135.
2. Unable to create <element type> <element>.
This message indicates that an unexpected error occurred when attempting to
create a node element.
3. Unable to create pipe <element> possibly due to start or stop connectivity
constraints.
This message indicates that this pipe could not be created, because the pump or
valve already has an incoming and outgoing pipe. Adding a third pipe to a pump
or valve is not allowed.
5-148
Using Modelbuilder
4. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; possibly due to start element connectivity constraints.
This error occurs when synchronizing. For more information, see error message
#3 (above).
5. Operation terminated by user.
You pressed the Cancel button during the ModelBuilder process.
6. Unable to create < element>; pipe start and stop must be different.
This message indicates that the start and stop specified for this pipe refer to the
same node element.
7. Unable to update <element> topology; pipe start and stop must be different.
This message indicates that the start and stop specified for this pipe refer to the
same node element.
8. Unable to update the downstream edge for <element>.
An unexpected error occurred attempting to set the downstream edge for this
pump or valve.
9. Nothing to do. Some previously referenced tables may be missing from your data
source.
This data source has changed since this connection was created. Verify that tables/
feature-classes in your data source have not been renamed or deleted.
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder

When importing spatial data (ArcGIS Geodatabases or shapefile data contain spatial
geometry data that ModelBuilder can use to establish network connectivity by
connecting pipe ends to nodes, creating nodes at pipe endpoints if none are found.),
ModelBuilder provides two ways to specify network connectivity:
Explicit connectivitybased on pipe Start node and Stop node (see Step 3
Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class on page 5-144).
Implicit connectivitybased on spatial data. When using implicit connectivity,

ModelBuilder allows you to specify a Tolerance, and provides a second option
allowing you to Create nodes if none found (see Step 2Specify Spatial
Options on page 5-142).
The method that you use will vary depending on the quality of your data. The possible
situations include (in order from best case to worst case):
You have pipe start and stop informationExplicit connectivity is definitely the
preferred option.
5-149
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder
You have some start and stop informationUse a combination of explicit and
implicit connectivity (use the Spatial Data option, and specify pipe Start/Stop
fields). If the start or stop data is missing (blank) for a particular pipe, ModelBuilder will then attempt to use spatial data to establish connectivity.
You do not have start and stop informationImplicit connectivity is your only
option. If your spatial data is good, then you should reduce your Tolerance
accordingly.
You do not have start and stop information, and you do not have any node data
(e.g., you have GIS data that defines your pipes, but you do not have data for
nodes)Use implicit connectivity and specify the Create nodes if none found
option; otherwise, the pipes cannot be created.
Note:
If pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes and Establish

connectivity using spatial data is not checked, the pipes will not
be connected to the nodes and a valid model will not be
produced.
Other considerations include what happens when the coordinates of the pipe ends do
not match up with the node coordinates. This problem can be one of a few different
varieties:
1. Both nodes and pipe ends have coordinates, and pipes have explicit Start/
Stop nodesIn this case, the node coordinates are used, and the pipe ends are
moved to connect with the nodes.
2. Nodes have coordinates but pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodesThe
nodes will be created, and the specified tolerance will be used to connect pipe
ends within this tolerance to the appropriate nodes. If a pipe end does not fall
within any nodes specified tolerance, a new node can be created using the Create
nodes if none found option.
3. Pipe ends have coordinates but there are no junctionsNew nodes must be
created using the Create nodes if none found option. Pipe ends are then
connected using the tolerance that is specified.
Another situation of interest occurs when two pipes cross but arent connected. If, at
the point where the pipes cross, there are no pipe ends or nodes within the specified
tolerance, then the pipes will not be connected in the model. If you intend for the pipes
to connect, then pipe ends or junctions must exist within the specified tolerance.
5-150
Using Modelbuilder
Sample Spreadsheet Data Source

Note:
Database formats (such as MS Access) are preferable to simple

spreadsheet data sources. The sample below is intended only to
illustrate the importance of using expected data formats.
Here are two examples of possible data source tables. The first represents data that is
in the correct format for an easy transition into ModelBuilder, with no modification.
The second table will require adjustments before all of the data can be used by ModelBuilder.
Table 5-1: Correct Data Format for ModelBuilder
Label
Roughness_C
Diam_in
Length_ft
Material_ID
Subtype
P-1
120
120
P-2
110
75
P-3
130
356
P-4
100
10
729
Table 5-2: Data Format Needs Editing for ModelBuilder

P-1
120
.5
120
PVC
Phase2
P-2
110
.66
75
DuctIron
Lateral
P-3
130
.5
356
PVC
Phase1
P-4
100
.83
729
DuctIron
Main
P-5
100
1029
DuctIron
Main
In Table 5-2, no column labels have been specified. ModelBuilder will interpret the
first row of data in the table as the column labels, which can make the attribute
mapping step of the ModelBuilder Wizard more difficult unless you are very familiar
with your data source setup.
Table 5-1 is also superior to Table 5-2 in that it clearly identifies the units that are used
for unitized attribute values, such as length and diameter. Again, unless you are very
familiar with your data source, unspecified units can lead to errors and confusion.
5-151
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder

Finally, Table 5-2 is storing the Material and Subtype attributes as alphanumeric
values, while ModelBuilder uses integer ID values to access this input. This data is
unusable by ModelBuilder in alphanumeric format, and must be translated to an
integer ID system in order to read this data.

ModeBuilder has the ability to import Collection and Curve data, such as pump
curves, hydrographs, and pattern curves, among others. In the model, these data types
are always associated to either Domain elements (pumps, pipes, ) or Components
(pump definitions, patterns, ). You can just import the collection data, and ModelBuilder will create a default domain/component element if it doesn't yet exist, and if
the creation option to automatically create referenced elements is enabled. But a better
technique would be to import the domain/component element from an external table,
and then import the collection data into those created domain/component elements.
This gives you the ability to import the most amount of detail.
The external tabular data for a collection curve must have a label field, where the label
field contains string values that match the label of the associated domain/component
element. For example, if two pattern curves are defined in an external table, the table
would look something like the following:
Table 5-3: Sample Tabular Data
Label
Time from Start
Multiplier
Order
Normal
1.2
.8
Normal
1.7
.7
Normal
12
.2
Normal
17
.5
High
1.0
High
19
.85
High
12
.65
This would assign 4 entries to the 'Normal' pattern, and 3 entries to the 'High' pattern.
The Order field is optional, and is discussed below. The same approach applies to
nodes, for such things as a variable area tank curve, or junction demands. In these
cases, the label field would contain the name of the node that collection entries are
being added into.
5-152
Using Modelbuilder
ModelBuilder also includes an advanced feature to allow precise ordering of the
collection records. For some collections, the order of the records does not matter and
this feature isn't needed. For other cases, order of the records is meaningful. For these
types of collections, there is a Sort By Field in the ModelBuilder mapping form. By
default, it uses the record order as the records exist in the external data source. If the
records are not ordered correctly in the data source, then the external table must have
an additional field that contains numeric values. These values will represent the order
that the records should be imported. So for the above example data, normally the
records would be imported in the order entered (5, 19, then 12 for the High pattern).
However the user can set the Sort By Field in the ModelBuilder form to use the 'Order'
external field, and this will import the records based on either Ascending 'Order'
values (5, 12, 19) or Descending 'Order' values (19, 12, 5).
The following topics provide examples of using ModelBuilder to import collection
data:
Importing Pump Definitions Using ModelBuilder on page 5-153
Using ModelBuilder to Import Pump Curves on page 5-158
Using ModelBuilder to Import Patterns on page 5-162
Importing Pump Definitions Using ModelBuilder

Pump definition information can be extracted from an external data source using
ModelBuilder.
Most of this importing is accomplished by setting up mappings under the Pump Definition Table Type. However, to import multipoint head, efficiency or speed vs. efficiency curves, the tabular values must be imported under Table Types: Pump
Definition - Pump Curves, Pump Definition - Flow-Efficiency Curve, and Pump
Definition - Speed-Efficiency Curve respectively.
The list of properties that can be imported under Pump Definition is given below. The
only property in the list that is required is a Key or Label. Most of the properties are
numerical values.
BEP Efficiency
BEP Flow
Define BEP Max Flow?
Design Flow
Design Head
GemsID (imported)
Inertia (Pump and Motor)
5-153
Is Variable Speed Drive?
Max Extended Flow
Max Operating Flow
Max Operating Head
Motor Efficiency
Notes
Pump Definition Type (ID)
Pump Definition Type (Label)
Pump Efficiency
Pump Efficiency (ID)
Pump Efficiency (Label)
Pump Power
Reverse Spin Allowed?
Specific Speed
Speed (Full)
Shutoff Head
User Defined BEP Max Flow
Those properties that are text such as Pump Efficiency and Pump Definition Type are
alphanumeric and must be spelled correctly. For example Standard (3 Point) must be
spelled exactly as shown in the Pump Definition drop down. Properties with a question mark above, require a TRUE or FALSE value. Those with ID next to the name
are internal IDs and are usually only useful when syncing out from a model.
To import data, create a table in a data source (e.g. spreadsheet, data base), and then
create columns/fields for each of the properties to be imported. In Excel for example,
the columns are created by entering column headings in the first row of a sheet for
each of the properties. Starting with the second row in the table, there will be one row
for each pump definition to be imported.
Once the table is created in the source file, the file must be saved before it can be
imported.
In the Specify your data source step in the wizard, the user indicates the source file
name and the sheet or table corresponding to the pump definition data. In the Specify
field mappings for each table step, the user selects Pump Definition as the table
type, indicates the name of the pump definition in the Key>Label field and then maps
each of the fields to be imported with the appropriate property in the Attribute drop
down.
5-154
Using Modelbuilder
When syncing out from the model to a data table, the table must contain column headings for each of the properties to be exported. The names of the columns in the source
table do not need to be identical to the property names in the model.
Importing can best be illustrated with an example. Given the data and graphs for three
pump definitions shown in the graph below, the table below the graph shows the
format for the pump curve definition import assuming that a standard 3 point curve is
to be used for the head curve and a best efficiency curve is to be used for the efficiency
curve. All three pumps are rated at 120 ft of TDH at 200 gpm.
Table 5-4: Format of Pump Definition Import Data

Q, gpm
H (red)
H (green)
H (blue)
180
200
160
200
120
120
120
400
40
20
BEPe
70
69
65
All three pumps have 95% motor efficiency and a BEP flow of 200.
5-155

The data source is created in an Excel spreadsheet.
Table 5-5: Excel Data Source Format
Label
Type
Motor
Eff
Desig
nQ
Desig
nH
Shutof
f Head
Max Q
H@
Max Q
BEP
Eff
BEP
Q
Eff
Type
Variab
le
Speed
Red
Stand
ard (3
Point)
95
200
120
180
400
40
70
200
Best
Efficie
ncy
Point
FALS
E
Green
Stand
ard (3
Point)
95
200
120
200
400
69
200
Best
Efficie
ncy
Point
FALS
E
Blue
Stand
ard (3
Point)
95
200
120
160
400
20
65
200
Best
Efficie
ncy
Point
FALS
E
The data source step in ModelBuilder wizard looks like this:
5-156
Using Modelbuilder
The field mappings should look like the screen below:
5-157

After the import, the three pumps are listed in the Pump Definitions. The curve for the
"Red" pump is shown below:
Using ModelBuilder to Import Pump Curves

While most pump definition information can be imported using the Pump Definition
Table Type, tabular data including
1. Multipoint pump-head curves,
2. Multipoint pump-efficiency curves and
3. Multipoint speed-efficiency curves
must be imported in their own table types.
To import these curves, first set up the pump definition type either manually in the
Pump Definition dialog or by importing the pump definition through ModelBuilder.
The Pump definition type would be Multiple Point, the efficiency type would be
Multiple Efficiency Points or the Is variable speed drive? box would be checked.
5-158
Using Modelbuilder
In the field mapping step of the ModelBuilder wizard, the user the Table Type, Pump
Definition - Pump Curve and would use the mappings shown below:
The example below shows an example of importing a Pump Head Curve. The process
and format are analogous for flow-efficiency and speed-efficiency curves.
5-159

For the pump curves shown in the figure below, the data table needed is given. Several
pump definitions can be included in the single table as long as they have different
labels.
Table 5-6: Pump Curve Import Data Format
5-160
Label
Flow (gpm)
Head (ft)
M5
350
M5
5000
348
M5
10000
344
M5
15000
323
M5
20000
288
M5
25000
250
M5
30000
200
H2
312
Using Modelbuilder
Table 5-6: Pump Curve Import Data Format
H2
2000
304
H2
4000
294
H2
6000
280
H2
8000
262
H2
10000
241
H2
12000
211
H2
14000
172
Small
293
Small
1000
291
Small
2000
288
Small
3000
276
Small
4000
259
Small
5000
235
Small
6000
206
5-161

Upon running ModelBuilder to import the table above, three pump definitions would
be created. The one called "Small" is shown below.
Using ModelBuilder to Import Patterns

Patterns can be imported into the model from external tables using ModelBuilder. This
is a two step process.
1. Description of the pattern
2. Import tabular data
In general, the steps of the import are the same as described in the ModelBuilder documentation. The only steps unique to patterns are described below. All the fields except
the Key/Label fields are optional
The source data files can be any type of tabular data including spreadsheets and data
base tables.
Alphanumeric fields such as those which describe the month or day of the week must
be spelled exactly as used in the model (e.g. January not Jan, Saturday not Sat).
The list of model attributes which can be imported are given below.
5-162
Label
MONTH [January, February,]
DAY [Sunday, Monday,]
Using Modelbuilder
Pattern category type (Label) [Hydraulic, Reservoir]
Pattern format (Label) [Stepwise , Continuous]
Start Time
Starting Gate Opening
Starting Multiplier
Starting Relative Closure
The month and day are the actual month or day of week, not the word "MONTH".
Labels must be spelled correctly.
To import patterns, start ModelBuilder, create a new set of instructions, pick the file
type, browse to the data file and pick the tables in that file to be imported. Checking
the Show Preview button enables you to view the data before importing.
5-163

Then proceed to the Field Mapping step of ModelBuilder to set up the mappings for
the Pattern in the Pattern Table Type. Fields refers to the name in the source table,
Attributes refers to the name in the model.
5-164
Using Modelbuilder
And the actual Pattern Curve in the Pattern Curve table type.
The tables below show the pattern definition data and the pattern curve for two stepwise curves labeled Commercial and Residential. These data must be stored in two
different tables although they may be and ideally should be in the same file.)
Table 5-7: Pattern Definition Import Data Format
Label
Category
Format
StartTime
StartMult
Residential
Hydraulic
Stepwise
12:00 PM
0.7
Commercial
Hydraulic
Stepwise
12:00 PM
0.8
5-165

Table 5-8: Pattern Curve Import Data Format
5-166
PatternLabel
TimeFromStart
Multiplier
Residential
0.65
Residential
0.8
Residential
1.3
Residential
12
1.6
Residential
15
1.4
Residential
18
1.2
Residential
21
0.9
Residential
24
0.7
Commercial
0.8
Commercial
0.85
Commercial
1.4
Commercial
12
1.6
Commercial
15
1.3
Commercial
18
0.9
Commercial
21
0.8
Commercial
24
0.8
Using Modelbuilder
One of the resulting patterns from this import is shown below:
5-167
5-168
Chapter
Creating Your Model
Click one of the following links to learn how to create your model using Bentley
SewerCAD V8i layout and editing tools:
Elements and Element Attributes on page 6-169
Adding Elements to Your Model on page 6-193
Connecting Elements on page 6-194
Manipulating Elements on page 6-195
Editing Element Attributes on page 6-199
Changing the Drawing View on page 6-223
Using Selection Sets on page 6-227
Network Navigator on page 6-236
Using Prototypes
Engineering Libraries on page 6-241
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements on page 6-251
Using Queries on page 6-254
User Data Extensions on page 6-280
Elements and Element Attributes

You use the Layout toolbar to add elements to your model and edit the attributes of
elements using the Property Editor, one of the dockable managers in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i stand-alone editor.
To learn about the different elements available in Bentley SewerCAD V8i, click one
of the following links:
Link Elements on page 6-170
Manholes on page 6-175
6-169
Transitions on page 6-178
Pumps on page 6-182
Outfalls on page 6-180
Pressure Junctions on page 6-182
Pumps on page 6-182
Variable Speed Pump Batteries on page 6-190
Air Valves on page 6-191
Other Tools on page 6-192
Link Elements
Layout tool
Link elements connect the other elements to form the sewer network. The link
elements are the conveyance elements that carry flow through the network to its eventual discharge point at an outlet. You can add any of the following link elements to
your model, depending on the link elements location within the network:
Pressure pipes
Conduits
When you click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar, you select the type of link
element to add (pressure pipe or conduit), then select an element. You can place
multiple elements with different kinds of connections using the Layout tool.
Entering Additional Data to Link Elements

There are several dialog boxes that are available from the Property Editors that let you
enter additional data for link elements.
6-170
Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe on page 6-171
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element on page 6-172
Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element on page 6-174
Creating Your Model

Adding a Minor Loss Collection to a Pressure Pipe
Pressure pipes can have an unlimited number of minor loss elements associated with
them. SewerCAD V8i provides an easy-to-use table for editing these minor loss
collections in the Minor Loss Collection dialog box.
Note:
For more information on minor losses, see Minor Losses on

page 13-660.
To add a minor loss collection to a pressure pipe:

1. Click a pressure pipe in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
pressure pipe and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical: Minor Losses section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses
(...) button next to the Minor Loss Coefficient field.
3. In the Minor Loss Collection dialog box, each row in the table represents a single
minor loss type and its associated headloss coefficient. For each row in the table,
perform the following steps:
a. Type the number of minor losses of the same type to be added to the
composite minor loss for the pipe in the Quantity column, then press the Tab
key to move to the Minor Loss column.
b. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Minor Loss column to display the Minor
Loss Libraries in the Engineering Libraries.
c. Click the plus signs to expand the Minor Loss Libraries, then select the
desired minor loss type and click the Select button. The minor loss type and
its associated headloss coefficient appears in the table in the Minor Loss
Collection dialog box. Note that the Headloss Coefficient column in the table
is not editable.
Note:
You can edit the values of a minor loss type in the Engineering
Libraries in the Editor pane.
4. When you are finished adding minor losses to the table, click Close. The
composite minor loss coefficient for the minor loss collection appears in the Property Editor.
5. Perform the following optional steps:
To delete a row from the table, select the row label then click Delete.
To view a report on the minor loss collection, click Report.
6. You can override the headloss coefficient for the minor loss collection by typing a
custom value in the Minor Loss Coefficient field of the Property Editor.
6-171

Minor Loss Collection Dialog Box
The Minor Loss Collection dialog box contains buttons and a minor loss table. The
dialog box contains the following controls:
New
This button creates a new row in the table.
Delete

row from the table.
Report
Opens a print preview window containing a

report that details the input data for this
dialog box.
The table contains the following columns:

Column
Description
Quantity
The number of minor losses of the same type to be

added to the composite minor loss for the pipe.
Minor Loss
The type of minor loss element. Clicking the

Ellipses button next to this field displays the
Minor Loss Engineering Libraries, where you
select an existing minor loss type to be included in
your minor loss collection.
Headloss Coefficient
The headloss coefficient for a single minor loss

element of the specified type.
Diversion Rating Curve Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the rating curve using Upstream Flow vs. Diverted
Flow points. The rating curve determines the flow into the associated conduit. At each
upstream flow point, you define how much of the flow is diverted.
Defining the Geometry of a Link Element
You define the geometry of a link element by entering the location and angle of bends
for the selected link element. You enter X vs. Y points that plot the shape of the
polyline that represents the element in the Polyline Vertices dialog box .
6-172
Creating Your Model

To define the geometry of a link element:
1. Click a link element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
link element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Geometry section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button next
to the Geometry field.
3. In the Polyline Vertices dialog box, click the New button to add a new row to the
table.
4. Type values for X and Y points for each row in the table.
5. To remove rows from the table, click the Delete button.
6. Click OK.
Polyline Vertices Dialog Box
This dialog box contains the X vs. Y table that allows you to define any number of
points that plot the shape of the polyline representing the selected link element.
The dialog box contains the following controls:
New
This button creates a new row in the table.
Delete

row from the table.
Irregular Channel Editor Dialog Box

The Irregular Channel editor dialog box contains buttons, a Station vs Depth table, and
a diagram window that plots the station-elevation curve defined by the points in the
table. The dialog box contains the following controls:
6-173
New
This button creates a new row in the Station

vs Depth table.
Delete

row from the Station vs Depth table.
Report

dialog box.
Help

Column
Description
Station
This field allows you to define the cross-sectional

distance at the current curve point. You can enter
these in any order that defines the channel (e.g.,
from left-to-right, from right-to-left, with an
upstream or downstream perspective).
Depth
This field allows you to define the depth at the

corresponding station for an irregular channel. The
depth value is relative to the invert of the channel
(a Depth value of 1.0 ft will be 1.0 ft above the
invert, a Depth value of -1.0 ft will be 1.0 ft below
the invert). This value can be a negative number.
Defining the Cross-Sectional Shape of a Link Element

You define the cross-sectional shapes of link elements in their respective Property
Editor as follows:
Define the cross-sectional shape of a conduit section by entering data in the Physical section of the elements Property Editor.
Define the circular shape of a pressure pipe by entering data in the Physical
section of the elements Property Editor.
You access the curve dialog boxes in the selected link elements Property Editor.
6-174
Creating Your Model
Sections Results Dialog Box

The Section Results dialog box shows the calculated flow variables at the start, middle
and end of a pipe, conduit, or channel section. You can view the data but you cannot
edit it while in the dialog.
The dialog box contains a table displaying the section results and the following
control:
Report

report of the sections results.
The table displays the following section results:
Section Distance
Section Velocity
Section Flow
Section Hydraulic Grade
Section Depth
Section Flow-Width
Section Flow-Area
Section Is Overflowing?
Section Froude Number
To open this dialog box, go to the Results section of the Property Editor for a pipe,
conduit, or a channel after the model has been calculated. Then click the Ellipsis ()
button in the Section Results field.
Manholes
Manhole element
Manholes are placed in a sewer system to provide access for inspection, maintenance,
and emergency service. Manholes should be placed at sewer junctions (i.e., tees, wyes,
and crosses), upstream terminal ends of sewers, and locations where there is a change
in sewer grade or direction. Manholes are locations where loads enter the gravity
portion of the sewer system.
6-175

When you click the manhole element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a manhole element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a manhole element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Flow (Downstream Conduit)

The calculated manhole result Flow (Downstream Conduit) is obtained using the
following formula:
Flow (Total Out) - Flow (Diverted Out)
Flow Headloss Curves Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter flow vs. headloss data for a manhole or transition
element.
The dialog box contains the Flow vs. Headloss table along with the following
controls:
New: This button creates a new Flow-Headloss Curve.
Duplicate: Creates a copy of the currently selected Flow-Headloss Curve.
Delete: This button deletes the currently highlighted Flow-Headloss Curve.
Rename: This button allows you to rename the currently highlighted Flow-Headloss Curve.
Report: Opens a print preview window containing a report that details the input
data for this dialog box.
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
Browse Engineering LibraryOpens the Engineering Library manager

dialog, allowing you to browse the Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a flow-headloss curve previously imported from a Flow-Headloss Curve Library. The updates reflect
changes that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryLets you update an existing Flow-Headloss Curve

Library using current flow-headloss curves that were initially imported but
have since been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a flow-headloss curve from an

existing Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
Export To LibraryLets you export the current flow-headloss curve to an

existing Flow-Headloss Curve Library.
6-176
Creating Your Model
Flow: This field allows you to define the flow at the current curve point.
Headloss: This field allows you to define the headloss for the current curve point.
The tab section is used to define the settings for the flow-headloss curve that is
currently highlighted in the flow-headloss curve list pane. The following controls are
available:
Data Tab
This tab consists of input data fields that allow you

to define the points that make up the flowheadloss curve.
Flow
Enter the flow data point.
Headloss
Headloss at the associated flow data point value.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the flowheadloss curve that is currently highlighted in the
flow-headloss curve list pane. If the curve is
derived from an engineering library, the
synchronization details can be found here. If the
curve was created manually for this project, the
synchronization details will display the message
Orphan (local), indicating that the curve was not
derived from a library entry.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that is used to type

descriptive notes that will be associated with the
flow-headloss curve that is currently highlighted
in the flow-headloss curve list pane.
To assign a Flow-Headloss curve to a node element:

1. Double-click the node element in your model to display the Property Editor, or
right-click a node and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical (Structure Losses) section of the Property Editor, select FlowHeadloss Curve as the Headloss Method. The Flow-Headloss Curve field
becomes available.
3. Click the <Select...> list item in the Flow-Headloss Curve field.
4. In the Flow-Headloss Curves Dialog Box, all of the Flow-Headloss Curves that
have been created for the model are listed in the left pane. Create a new Curve by
clicking the New button.
6-177

5. The data for each Flow-Headloss Curve is displayed in the table on the right. Each
row in the table represents a data point on the Flow-Headloss Curve curve. Type
values for the Flow and Headloss for each row. Click the New button to add a row
or press the Tab key to advance to the next field in the table.
a. To delete a row from the table, select the row then click Delete.
b. To view a report on the curve, click Report.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your curve data in the Property Editor.
Drop Manholes
Drop manholes occur at the intersection points of pipes with large changes in elevation. More specifically, the downstream invert elevation of incoming pipes into a drop
manhole is higher than the invert elevation of the manhole. This results in a drop in
water surface elevation from upstream to downstream. By default, the start and stop
invert elevation of connecting pipes are set to be equal to the connecting node. The
main advantage in designing a sanitary system with drop manholes is to reduce the
slopes in order to minimize the scouring effect of potentially high velocities and to
reduce turbulence within the manhole itself. However, due to potential blockage problems drop manholes should be used sparingly.
The calculation of headloss within a drop manhole is challenging for methods dependent on an iterative solution process. AASHTO (Headloss - AASHTO Method on
page 13-656) and HEC-22 (Headloss-HEC-22 Energy Method on page 13-651)
methods calculate headloss when the incoming and outgoing velocities balance
resulting in a headloss that is the delta between the hydraulic grade upstream and
downstream of the manhole. A drop manhole adds additional complexity in that as
upstream hydraulic grade increases, incoming pipes with varying invert elevations
contribute additional incoming velocities to consider during the iteration. Also note
that the resulting calculated headloss may result in invalid downstream control depths
for incoming pipes. In these cases, gradually varied flow analysis continues upstream
by assuming minimal applicable control depths.
Transitions
Transition element
6-178
Creating Your Model

Transition elements, also known as junction chambers in SewerCAD v5.6 and earlier,
are locations where upstream flows in a gravity system combine (see Transition
Diagrams). Transition elements are useful for intersections of open channels where no
manhole is located.
No loads enter the sewer/open channel at transition elements.
Transition elements have the same head loss methods as manhole elements although
some of them are meaningless for open channel transitions.
When you click the transition element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a transition element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a transition element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
While transition elements, like manhole elements, can be used as the transition from
pressure to gravity systems, they are primarily intended as the transition between
gravity conduits for which manhole elements are not appropriate.
Wet Wells
Wet well element
Wet wells are required at a pumping station to store wastewater before it is pumped.
Wet wells represent boundary conditions between pressure and gravity portions of a
sewer network. They serve as collection points for gravity systems, and as an HGL
boundary node for the pressure system. Dry loads can also enter the sewer network at
these locations.
Wet wells serve as collection points in gravity systems.
When you click the wet well element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a wet well element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool
is active causes a wet well element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
Percent Full
The Percent Full (Calculated) value is obtained using the following equation:
Percent Full = (Hydraulic Grade Line (Calculated) - Elevation (Minimum)) / (Elevation (Maximum) - Elevation (Minimum))
6-179
Inflow (Wet) Collection Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the local inflows for the currently highlighted wet
well. It consists of controls that allow you to add and delete inflows to the table, and to
generate a report for the inflow collection.
New
Opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
Fixed Load: Creates a new Fixed

Load. Enter the fixed load value in
the Fixed Load field that appears.
Hydrograph Load: Creates a new

Hydrograph Load. Define the
hydrograph by entering time vs. flow
data points in the table that appears.
Pattern Load: Creates a new pattern

load. Enter the base flow and choose
the pattern that modifies the base
flow value. Click the ellipsis button
(...) to open the Pattern manager to
create a new pattern.
Delete
Deletes the entry that is currently

highlighted in the Inflow Collection list.
Report
Lets you generate a preformatted report

that contains the input data associated
with the inflow collection.
Outfalls
Outfall element
Outfalls represent the ultimate termination points in a sanitary sewer network.

When you click the outfall element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes
into a outfall element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active
causes a outfall element to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor.
6-180
Creating Your Model
Adding Elevation vs. Flow Data to an Outfall

You can add an Elevation-Flow (E-Q-T) curve to an outfall in SewerCAD V8i.
To add an Elevation vs. Flow (E-Q-T) curve to an outfall:
1. Click an outfall in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click an
outfall and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Boundary Condition section of the Property Editor, select Elevation-Flow
Curve in the Boundary Condition Type field. The Elevation-Flow Curve field
becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Elevation-Flow Curve field.
4. In the Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box, each row in the table represents a point
on the Elevation-Flow curve. Type values for Elevation and Outlet Flow for each
row. Click the New button to add a row or press the Tab key to advance to the
next field in the table.
To delete a row from the table, select the row then click Delete.
To view a report on the curve, click Report.
To view a plot of the curve, click Graph.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your curve data in the Property Editor.
Elevation-Flow Curve Dialog Box

The dialog box contains the elevation vs. flow table and the following buttons:
New
This button creates a new row in the EQ-TW curve table.
Delete
This button deletes the currently

highlighted row from the E-Q-TW curve
table.
Report
This button opens a print preview

window containing a report that details
the input data for this dialog box.
Graph
This button opens a graph window

plotting the elevation-volume curve
defined by the points in the table.
6-181
Column
Description
Outlet Elevation
This field allows you to define the elevation of the

E-Q-TW curve point.
Outlet Flow
This field allows you to define the flow for the EQ-TW curve point.
Pressure Junctions
Pressure junction element
Pressure junctions are connections between two or more pressure pipes of varying
characteristics. Loads may enter a pressure portion of a network through a pressure
junction.
When you click the pressure junction on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor
changes into a pressure junction element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while
this tool is active causes a pressure junction element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.
Pumps
Pump element
In a wastewater collection system, pumps are placed where the hydraulic grade line
must be raised. Since sewage primarily flows by gravity, a pump transports sewage
from a low elevation to a higher elevation. The sewage then flows again by gravity to
the next pumping station or until it reaches its destination.
This dialog box allows you to create pump curve definitions. There are two sections:
the Pump Curve Definition Pane on the left and the tab section on the right. The Pump
Curve Definition Pane lets you create, edit, and delete pump curve definitions.
6-182
Creating Your Model
Defining Pump Settings

You define the settings for each pump in your model in the Pump Definitions dialog
box. You can define a collection of pump settings for each pump.
To define pump settings
1. Click a pump in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a pump
and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Physical section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button next to
the Pump Definitions field. The Pump Definitions dialog box opens.
3. In the Pump Definitions dialog box, each item in the list represents a separate
pump definition. Click the New button to add a new definition to the list.
4. For each definition in the list, perform these steps:
a. Type a unique label for the pump definition.
b. Define a new pump definition by entering Head, Efficiency, and Motor data.
5. Click OK to close the Pump Definitions dialog box and save your data in the
Property Editor.
Pump Definitions Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to create pump definitions. There are two sections: the pump
definition pane on the left and the tab section on the right. The pump definition pane is
used to create, edit, and delete pump definitions.
6-183

The following controls are available in the pump definitions dialog box:
New
Creates a new entry in the pump definition

Pane.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the currently highlighted

pump definition.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted entry in the

pump definition Pane.
Rename
Renames the currently highlighted entry in

the pump definition Pane.
Report
Generates a pre-formatted report that contains

the input data associated with the currently
highlighted entry in the pump definition Pane.
Synchronization
Options
Clicking this button opens a submenu

containing the following commands:
Browse Engineering LibraryOpens

the Engineering Library manager dialog,
allowing you to browse the Pump Definition Libraries.
Synchronize From LibraryUpdates a

set of pump definition entries previously
imported from a Pump Definition Engineering Library. The updates reflect
changes that have been made to the
library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryUpdates an
existing Pump Definition Engineering
Library using current pump definition
entries that were initially imported but
Import From LibraryImports pump

definition entries from an existing Pump
Definition Engineering Library.
Export To LibraryExports the current

pump definition entries to an existing
Pump Definition Engineering Library.
The tab section includes the following controls:
6-184
Creating Your Model
Head Tab
This tab consists of input data fields that allow you to

define the pump head curve. The specific fields vary
depending on which type of pump is selected in the
Pump Definition type field.
Pump Definition
Type
A pump is an element that adds head to the system as water passes

through it. This software can currently be used to model eight
different pump types:
Constant PowerWhen selecting a Constant Power

pump, the following attribute must be defined:
Pump PowerRepresents the water horsepower,

or horsepower that is actually transferred from the
pump to the water. Depending on the pump's efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary.
Design Point (One-Point)When selecting a Design

Point pump, the following flow vs. head points must be
defined:
ShutoffPoint at which the pump will have zero

discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on
a pump curve. This value is automatically calculated for Design Point pumps.
DesignPoint at which the pump was originally

intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency
point (BEP) of the pump. At discharges above or
below this point, the pump is not operating under
optimum conditions.
Max OperatingHighest discharge for which the

pump is actually intended to run. At discharges
above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly. This
value is automatically calculated for Design Point
pumps.
Standard (Three-Point)When selecting a Standard

Three-Point pump, the following flow vs. head points
must be defined:

a pump curve.

optimum conditions.

above this point, the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly.
6-185
Pump Definition
Type (contd)
6-186
Standard ExtendedWhen selecting a Standard

Extended pump, the following flow vs. head points must
be defined:

a pump curve.

optimum conditions.

Max ExtendedAbsolute maximum discharge at

which the pump can operate, adding zero head to
the system. This value may be computed by the
program, or entered as a custom extended point.
This value is automatically calculated for Standard
Extended pumps.
Custom ExtendedWhen selecting a Custom

Extended pump, the following attributes must be
defined:

a pump curve.

optimum conditions.

Max ExtendedAbsolute maximum discharge at

which the pump can operate, adding zero head to
the system. This value may be computed by the
program, or entered as a custom extended point.
Multiple PointWhen selecting a Multiple Point pump,

an unlimited number of Flow vs. Head points may be
defined.
Volume vs FlowWhen selecting a Volume vs Flow

pump, an unlimited number of Volume vs. Flow points
may be defined.
Depth vs FlowWhen selecting a Depth vs Flow

pump, an unlimited number of Depth vs. Flow points
may be defined.
Creating Your Model
Efficiency Tab
This tab allows you to specify efficiency settings for

the pump that is being edited.
Pump Efficiency
Allows you to specify the pump efficiency type for the

pump that is being edited. The following efficiency
types are available:
Constant EfficiencyThis efficiency type maintains the efficiency determined by the input value
regardless of changes in discharge. When the
Constant Efficiency type is selected, the input field
is as follows:
Best Efficiency PointThis efficiency type

generates a parabolic efficiency curve using the
input value as the best efficiency point. When the
Best Efficiency Point type is selected, the input
fields are as follows:
BEP FlowThe flow delivered when the

pump is operating at its Best Efficiency point.
BEP EfficiencyThe efficiency of the pump

when it is operating at its Best Efficiency
Point.
Define BEP Max FlowWhen this box is

checked the User Defined BEP Max Flow field
is enabled, allowing you to enter a maximum
flow for the Best Efficiency Point.
User Defined BEP Max FlowAllows you to

enter a maximum flow value for the Best Efficiency Point.
Multiple Efficiency PointsThis efficiency type

generates an efficiency curve based upon two or
more user-defined efficiency points. These points
are linearly interpolated to form the curve. When
the Multiple Efficiency Points type is selected, the
input field is as follows:
Pump EfficiencyThe Pump Efficiency

value is representative of the ability of the
pump to transfer the mechanical energy
generated by the motor to Water Power.
Efficiency Points TableThis table allows

you to enter the pump's efficiency at various
discharge rates.
6-187
Motor Tab
This tab allows you to define the pump's motor

efficiency settings. It contains the following controls:
Motor
Efficiency
The Motor Efficiency value is representative of the

ability of the motor to transform electrical energy to
rotary mechanical energy.
Is Variable
Speed Drive?
This check box allows you to specify whether or not

the pump is a Variable Speed Pump. Toggling this
check box On allows you to input points on the
Efficiency Points table.
Efficiency
Points Table
This table allows you to enter speed/efficiency points

for variable speed pumps. This table is activated by
toggling the "Variable Speed Drive" check box On.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the pump that is

currently highlighted in the Pump Curves Definition
Pane. If the pump is derived from an engineering
library, the synchronization details can be found here.
If the pump was created manually for this project, the
synchronization details will display the message
Orphan (local), indicating that the pump was not
derived from a library entry.
Notes Tab

descriptive notes that will be associated with the pump
that is currently highlighted in the Pump Curves
Definition Pane.
To create a pump definition

1. Select Components > Pump Definitions.
2. Click New to create a new pump definition.
3. For each pump definition, perform these steps:
a. Select the type of pump definition in the Pump Definition Type menu.
b. Type values for Pump Power, Shutoff, Design point, Max Operating, and/or
Max Extended as required. The available table columns or fields change
depending on which definition type you choose.
6-188
Creating Your Model

c. For Multiple Point pumps, click the New button above the curve table to add a
new row to the table, or press the Tab key to move to the next column in the
table. Click the Delete button above the curve table to delete the currently
highlighted row from the table.
d. Define efficiency and motor settings in the Efficiency and Motor tabs.
4. You can save your new pump definition in SewerCAD V8i Engineering Libraries
for future use. To do this, perform these steps:
a. Click the Synchronization Options button, then select Export to Library.
The Engineering Libraries dialog box opens.
b. Use the plus and minus signs to expand and collapse the list of available
libraries, then select the library into which you want to export your new unit
sanitary load.
c. Click Close to close the Engineering Libraries dialog box.
To delete a pump definition, select the curve label then click Delete.
To rename a pump definition, select the label of the pump definition you want
to rename, click Rename, then type the new name.
To view a report on a pump definition, select the label for the pump definition,
then click Report.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Submersible Pumps
Wastewater collection systems frequently use submersible pumps. The pressure solver
in SewerCAD needs a suction pipe (pressure pipe) connecting the pump to a suction
node (a wet well for submersible pumps). To simulate a submersible pump in
SewerCAD, you should connect the wet well to the pump with a short piece of pressure pipe (about 1 ft) to move the water into the pump with negligible head loss.
The Elevation (Invert) for the submersible pump should be the low point of the pump
inlet.
6-189
Variable Speed Pump Batteries
Variable Speed Pump Battery element
A Variable Speed Pump Battery element represents multiple variable speed pumps
that meet the following criteria:
1. the VSPs are parallel with each other (not in-line)
2. the VSPs are sharing common upstream (inflow) and downstream (outflow) nodes
3. the VSPs are identical (have the same pump definition)
4. the VSPs are controlled by the same target node and the same target head.
Parallel variable speed pumps (VSPs) are operated as one group and led by a single
VSP, the so-called lead VSP, while the other VSPs at the same battery are referred as
to as lag VSPs. A lag VSP turns on and operates at the same speed as the lead VSP
when the lead VSP is not able to meet the target head and turns off when the lead VSP
is able to deliver the target head. If the variable speed pumps in the battery are not
identical or do not maintain the same speeds as they ramp up and down, it may be
better to model them as a individual variable speed pumps with control statements.
From the standpoint of input data, Variable Speed Pump Batteries are treated exactly
the same as single pump elements that are defined as variable speed pumps of the
Fixed Head Type with one exception: the number of Lag Pumps (maximum that can
run in parallel) must be defined in the Lag Pump Count field.
VSP Batteries cannot be assigned a pattern, be included in a condition in a control
statement, or be included in an action in a simple control statement. If the controlling
node is not a storage node, the user can specify the target hydraulic grade. If the
controlling node is a storage node the target hydraulic grade is the initial hydraulic
grade. Furthermore, control nodes on the suction side may only be storage nodes
which means that if the control node is on the suction side it must be wet-well and the
Control Node on Suction Side? field for the VSP Battery must be set to true.
6-190
Creating Your Model
Air Valves
Air Valve element
Air valves are installed at local high points to allow air to come into the system during
periods when the head drops below the pipe elevation and expels air from the system
when fluid columns begin to rejoin. The presence of air in the line limits subatmospheric pressures in the vicinity of the valve and for some distance to either side, as
seen in profiles. Air can also reduce high transient pressures if it is compressed
enough to slow the fluid columns prior to impact.
There are essentially two ways in which an active air valve can behave:
1. Pressure below atmospheric - air valve is open and acts to maintain pressure to 0
on the upstream end and maintains the same flow on the upstream and downstream side.
2. Pressure above atmospheric - air valve is closed and acts as any junction node.
When the air valve is open, the hydraulic grade on the downstream side may be less
than the pipe elevation. This can be displayed as the hydraulic grade line drawn below
the pipe. This should be interpreted as a pressure pipe that is not flowing full. Full
flow resumes at the point where the hydraulic grade line crosses back above the pipe.
Because air valves have the possibility to switch status, they can lead to instability in
the model especially if there are many air valves in the system. To improve the
stability of the model, it is desirable to force some of the valves closed. This can be
done by setting the property "Treat air valve as junction" to True for those valves that
are expected to be closed anyway.
If all of the pumps upstream of an air valve are off, the pressure subnetwork is disconnected in that area and the model will issue warning messages for all nodes in that
vicinity indicating that they are disconnected.
In addition, the profile between the air valve and the pumps that are Off will be inaccurate. To make the profile view accurate, you can place an imaginary wet well on a
short branch with a tiny diameter pipe at an Elevation (Initial) equal to the air valve
elevation. This tank (which will not contribute significant flow) can eliminate the
disconnected system message and correctly represent the fluid in the upstream pipe
when the pump is off
6-191
Other Tools
Although Bentley SewerCAD V8i is primarily a modeling application, some additional drafting tools can be helpful for intermediate calculations and drawing annotation. Microstation and AutoCAD, of course, provide a tremendous number of drafting
tools. Bentley SewerCAD V8i provides the following tools:
Border tool
Text tool
Line tool
Border Tool
Border tool
The Border tool lets you add rectangles to the drawing pane.
Text Tool
Text tool
The Text tool lets you add text to the drawing pane.
Line Tool
Line tool
The Line tool lets you add lines and polylines (multisegmented lines) to the drawing
pane.
6-192
Creating Your Model
Adding Elements to Your Model

Bentley SewerCAD V8i provides several ways to add elements to your model. They
include:
Adding individual elements
Adding elements using the layout tool
Replacing an element with another element
To add individual elements to your model:

1. Click an element symbol on the Layout toolbar. The mouse cursor changes to the
element symbol you selected.
2. Click in the drawing pane to add the element to your model.
3. Click again to add another element of the same type to your model.
4. To add a different element, click on the desired element symbol in the Layout
toolbar, then click in the drawing pane.
5. To stop adding an element, right-click in the drawing pane to display a shortcut
menu, then click Done.
To add elements using the layout tool:
The layout tool lets you quickly add new elements to your model without having to
select a new element button on the Layout toolbar. When the layout tool is active, you
can right-click in the drawing pane to select different elements and pipes to add to the
model.
Layout Tool
1. Click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar. A shortcut menu appears.
2. Click the type of pipe you want to use to connect your elements in the model.
3. Right-click in the drawing pane, then select the type of element you want to add
from the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu displays only those element types that
are compatible with your pipe selection.
4. Click in the drawing pane to add the element.
5. Click again to add another of the same element type. The elements you add will
automatically be connected by the type of pipe you selected earlier.
6-193
Connecting Elements
6. To change the type of pipe, right-click and select a different type from the shortcut
menu.
7. To change the element, right-click and select a different element from the shortcut
menu.
8. To stop adding elements using the Layout tool, right-click anywhere in the
drawing pane and click Done.
Note:
In AutoCAD, you must hold down the mouse button to keep the
submenu open while selecting an element from the layout
toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click
menu to select elements or using the command line.
Modeling Curved Pipes

You can model curved pipes in SewerCAD V8i by using the Bend command, which is
available by right-clicking in the Drawing Pane when placing a link element.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i does not account for any additional head loss due to the
curvature because in most cases the increased head loss is negligible. If you feel the
extra head loss is significant, it is possible to increase the Manning's n value to
account for such losses.
To model a curved pipe:
1. Select the desired link element using the Layout button on the Layout
toolbar.
2. Place the first segment of the curved pipe in your model, then right click and
select Bend from the shortcut menu.
3. Repeat Step 2 for each segment in the curved pipe. Be sure to insert bends to
clearly show the curved alignment.
4. When the curved pipe is complete, right click and select the next downstream
element (for a conduit, this is usually a manhole).
Connecting Elements
When building your model, you must consider these rules of connectivity:
What Is A Virtual Conduit? on page 6-195
Connecting a Pump to a Wet Well on page 6-195
6-194
Creating Your Model
What Is A Virtual Conduit?

Virtual links have slightly different uses in other Bentley products (SewerGEMs and
CivilStorm), virtual links in StormCAD and SewerCAD are solely used as the shape
of the conduits which are set up as diversion links. This behavior is meant to maintain fidelity with older versions of SewerCAD v5.6 which directly transfers diverted
flow to the diversion target without worrying about any type of Gradually Varied Flow
or Capacity analysis. The older versions established diversions at the nodes,
SewerCAD (and StormCAD) allow the user to more accurately depict the diversions
as a conduit. The profiles in the virtual links are established by the hydraulic grade at
the bounding node.
If importing a SewerGEMs model containing conduits of virtual shape, you will either
have to remove the conduit, change its shape to something else, or establish a diversion on it in order for the model to calculate.
Connecting a Pump to a Wet Well

Bentley SewerCAD V8i assumes that either the pump is a submersible pump in the
wet well or the pump is connected to the wet well through a short piece of pressure
pipe with negligible head loss.
Do not connect a conduit or channel between the wet well and pump.
Pumps can also use ponds or manholes as suction elements. If a pressure pipe is used
as the suction element, it is assumed that the distance is so short that the head loss is
negligible. If head loss is significant in determining pump flow, then add pipe length
or minor loss to the discharge pipe.
To specify the relationship between a wet well and a pump:
1. Double-click the pump in your model to open the Property Editor for the pump.
2. Select Select Suction Element as the Suction Side Node.
SewerCAD V8i prompts you to select the suction side node or link from your
model (which can be a wet well, pressure pipe, or manhole).
3. Select the appropriate node in your model. A dashed line appears to connect the
two elements. If a manhole is used as a suction line, it cannot be the most downstream end of a gravity network.
Manipulating Elements
You can manipulate elements in your model in any one of the following ways:
6-195
6-196
Select elementsmanually select individual elements, manually select multiple

elements, select all elements, or select all elements of a single element type
Move elements
Delete elements
Split pipes
Creating Your Model

To manually select an element:
Click the element. Selected elements appear in red.
Note:
You can change the selection color in the Options dialog box,
which is accessible by selecting Tools > Options.
To manually select multiple elements:

Click the first element, then click additional elements while holding down Shift or
Ctrl.
To select all elements:
To select all of the elements in your model, select Edit > Select All.
To select all elements of the same type:
To select all elements of the same type (for example, all junction chambers), select
Edit > Select by Element, then click the desired element type.
All elements of the selected type appear in red, including connecting pipes.
To clear selected elements:
Click the Select tool then click any blank space in the drawing pane.
or
Click Edit > Clear Selection.
or
Press the Esc key.
You can also clear a selected element by clicking a different element.
To move an element in the model:
1. Click the Select tool on the Layout toolbar.
2. Select the element(s) you want to move, then drag it to its new location. Pipe
connections move with the element.
6-197
To delete an element:
Select the element, then press Delete.
or
Select Edit > Delete.
Splitting Pipes
You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new element in the middle
of an existing pipe. For example, you may want to insert a new manhole to maintain
maximum access hole spacing.
To split an existing pipe:
1. Select the desired element symbol on the Layout toolbar.
2. In the drawing pane, place the cursor over the pipe you want to split and click.
3. You are prompted to confirm that you want to split the pipe.
If you choose to split the pipe, the element will be inserted and two new pipes
will be created with the same characteristics as the original pipe (lengths are
split proportionally).
If you choose not to split the pipe, the new element will be placed on top of
the pipe without connecting to anything.
If you accidentally split a pipe, this action can be undone by selecting Edit > Undo.
You can also split an existing pipe with an existing element:
To do this in the Stand-Alone version, drag the element into position along the pipe to
be split, then right-click the node and select Split <Pipe Label> from the shortcut
menu (where <Pipe Label> is the name of the pipe to be split).
To do this in the Microstation version, drag the element into position along the pipe to
be split. Hold down the Shift key, then right-click the node and select Split <Pipe
Label> from the shortcut menu (where <Pipe Label> is the name of the pipe to be
split).
6-198
Creating Your Model
Disconnecting and Reconnecting Pipes

In certain circumstances, you may wish to disconnect a pipe from a node without
deleting and redrawing the pipe in question. For example, if the model was built from
a database and the Establish By Spatial Data option was used to determine pipe
connectivity, a pipe may have been connected to the wrong node.
To disconnect and reconnect a pipe:
1. Right-click the pipe to be disconnected close to the end of the pipe nearest the end
you want to disconnect.
2. Pick Reconnect from the menu.
3. One end of the pipe is now connected to the node it will remain connected to and
the other end is connected to your mouse cursor. Hover the mouse cursor over the
node to which you would like to connect the pipe and click the left mouse button.
The pipe will now be connected to this node.
You must reconnect a pipe to an existing node. The Reconnect command will not split
a pipe or create a new node in an open area. If you want to reconnect along an existing
pipe, you must first split the pipe with a new node.
Editing Element Attributes

You edit element properties in the Property Editor, one of the dockable managers in
Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
To edit element properties:
Double-click the element in the drawing pane. The Property Editor displays the
attributes of the selected element.
or
Select the element whose properties you want to edit, then select View > Properties
or click the Properties button on the Analysis toolbar.
Property Editor
The Property Editor is a contextual dialog box that changes depending on the status of
other dialog boxes. For example, when a network element is highlighted in the
drawing pane, the Property Editor displays the attributes and values associated with
that element. When one of the manager dialog boxes is active, the Property Editor
displays the properties pertaining to the currently highlighted manager element.
6-199

Attributes displayed in the Property Editor are grouped into categories. An expanded
category can be collapsed by clicking the plus (+) button next to the category heading.
A collapsed category can be expanded by clicking the minus (-) button next to the
category heading.
For the most efficient data entry in Text Box style fields, instead of clicking on the
Field, click on the label to the left of the field you want to edit, and start typing. Press
Enter to commit the value, then use the Up/Down keyboard arrows to navigate to the
next field you want to edit. You can then edit the field data without clicking the label
first; when you are finished editing the field data, press the Enter key, and proceed to
the next field using the arrow keys, and so on.
Find Element
The top section of the Property Editor contains the Find Element tool. The Find
Element tool lets you:
Quickly find a recently-created or added element in your model. The Element

menu contains a list of the most recently-created and added elements. Click an
element in the Element menu to center the drawing pane around that element and
highlight it.
Find an element in your model by typing the element label or ID in the Element
menu then clicking the Find button or pressing Enter. The drawing pane centers
around the highlighted element.
Find all elements of a certain type by using an asterisk (*) as a wild-card character. For example, if you want to find all of the conduits in your model, you type
co* (this is not case-sensitive) then click the Find button. The drawing pane
centers around and highlights the first instance of a conduit in your model, and
lists all conduits in your model in the Element menu. Once the Element menu is
populated with a list of elements, you can use the Find Next and Find Previous
buttons to quickly navigate to the next or previous element in the list.
Note:
6-200
See the Using the Like Operator topic for more information about
wildcard symbols.
Creating Your Model

The following controls are included:
Element
Type an element label or ID in this field then

click the Find button to quickly locate it in
your model. The element selected in this menu
will be centered in the drawing pane when the
Zoom To command is initiated, at the
magnification level specified by the Zoom
Level menu. The drop-down menu lists
recently-created or added elements, elements
that are part of a selection set, and that are part
of the results from a recent Find operation.
Find Previous
This button allows you to find the previous

element in the list of results from a recent Find
operation.
Find
Zooms the drawing pane view to the element

typed or selected in the Element menu at the
magnification level specified in the Zoom
Level menu.
Find Next
This button allows you to find the next

element in the list of results from a recent Find
operation.
Help
Displays online help for the Property Editor.
Zoom Level
Allows you to specify the magnification level

at which elements are displayed in the drawing
pane when the Zoom To command is initiated.
Alphabetic
Displays the attribute fields in the Property

Editor in alphabetical order.
Categorized
Displays the attribute fields in the Property

Editor in categories. This is the default.
Relabeling Elements
You can relabel elements from within the Property Editor.
6-201

To relabel an element:
1. Select the element in the Drawing Pane then, if the Property Editor is not already
displayed, select View > Properties.
2. In the General section of the Property Editor, click in the Label field, then type a
new label for the element.
Set Field Options Dialog Box

The Set Field Options dialog box lets you set the units for a specific attribute without
affecting the units used by other attributes or globally.
To use the Set Field Options dialog box, right-click any numerical field that has units,
then select Units and Formatting.
6-202
Value
Displays the value of the currently selected item.
Unit
Displays the type of measurement. To change the

unit, select the unit you want to use from the dropdown list. This option also lets you use both U.S.
customary and S.I. units in the same worksheet.
Display Precision
Sets the rounding of numbers and number of digits

displayed after the decimal point. Enter a negative
number for rounding to the nearest power of 10: (-1)
rounds to 10, (-2) rounds to 100, (-3) rounds to
1000, and so on. Enter a number from 0 to 15 to
indicate the number of digits after the decimal point.
Creating Your Model
Format
Lets you select the display format used by the

current field.
Choices include:
ScientificConverts the entered value to a

string of the form "-d.ddd...E+ddd" or "d.ddd...e+ddd", where each 'd' indicates a digit
(0-9). The string starts with a minus sign if the
number is negative.
Fixed PointAbides by the display precision

setting, and automatically enters zeros after the
decimal place to do so. With a display precision
of 3, an entered value of 3.5 displays as 3.500.
GeneralTruncates any zeros after the

decimal point, regardless of the display precision value. With a display precision of 3, the
value that would appear as 5.200 in Fixed Point
format displays as 5.2 when using General
format. The number is also rounded. So, an
entered value of 5.35 displays as 5.4 regardless
of the display precision.
NumberConverts the entered value to a

string of the form "-d,ddd,ddd.ddd...", where
each 'd' indicates a digit (0-9). The string starts
with a minus sign if the number is negative.
Thousand separators are inserted between
each group of three digits to the left of the
decimal point.
What Length is Used for Conduits and Pressure Pipes When I Don't
Enter a User-defined Length?
If you do not enter a user-defined length in the attributes for conduits and pressure
pipes, the length used in Bentley SewerCAD V8i is the plan view distance between
the coordinates at each end of the link element. This length is used as the actual length
in hydraulic calculations. However, as the slope increases, the difference between the
plan length and the actual length also increases as shown below.
The table below shows the difference between the actual and plan length as a function
of slope. Note that for most reasonable slopes, the difference between the actual and
plan view length is less than one percent. (100% slope is 1:1 slope.) As the slope
approaches vertical, you must enter the actual length.
6-203
Automatic Design
Table 6-1: Actual and Plan Length as a Function of Slope
Slope, % *
Actual/Plan Length
1.000
10
1.005
20
1.020
30
1.044
* The models generalized friction formulation is only valid for slopes less than 10%.
If you are not satisfied with the plan view length, you can enter a user-defined length,
which you can determine using the following equation:
Actual = Plan 2 (1 + (% s lope / 100) 2 )
Automatic Design
This program allows you to automatically design gravity piping and structures. The
design is flexible enough to allow you to specify the elements to be designed, from a
single pipe size to the entire system, or anything in between.
The design algorithm adjusts invert elevations and the section size of the pipe to meet
several constraints, such as allowable ranges of slope, velocity and cover. In general,
the design algorithm attempts to minimize pipe size and excavation, which is typically
the most expensive part of installing sewer piping and structures.
Some of the other things that are considered include:
Pipe Matching
Offset Matching
Drop Structures
Structure Sump Elevations
The designed pipe will be the smallest available section size from the Engineering
Library that meets the constraints and has a capacity greater than its discharge. In a
situation where there are no pipe sizes with adequate capacity, the largest available
size will be used.
6-204
Creating Your Model
Default Design Constraints

The Default Design Constraints dialog allows you to edit the pipe and node
constraints governing the design of the system. It also allows you to specify which
gravity elements you want designed, and the extent to which you want them designed.
For example, you may want to design a particular pipe. However, you may also want
to design the downstream invert elevation to meet a particular velocity, cover, and
slope constraint.
The tabbed dialog for each particular type of element follows the same general format.
The top of the dialog box contains several fields where the design constraints can be
entered. The constraints entered in these fields are applied to every element of that
type.
The following attributes are available in this section:
Pipe diameters, invert elevations, and node structures can be all designed with the
same set of design constraints. You also have the option to adjust these values individully for each pipe or node.
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the following tabs:
Gravity Pipe
Node
Gravity Pipe Tab

The Gravity Pipe tab allows you to enter default constraints to be used for the design
of pipes when performing a calculation run in design mode. The dialog is divided into
the following sections:
Default Constraints
Extended Design
Default Constraints Section

In this section, there is a Velocity tab, a Cover tab, and a Slope tab. You can specify
the following default constraints to be used for the design of gravity pipes:
Velocity Tab: The Velocity tab consists of the following controls:
Velocity Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Velocity value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Velocity (Minimum) vs Velocity (Maximum) points in
tabular format.
6-205
Automatic Design
Velocity (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable velocity value. This

control is only available when the Velocity Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Velocity (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable velocity value. This

Cover Tab: The Cover tab consists of the following controls:
Cover Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Cover value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Cover (Minimum) vs Cover (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
Cover (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable cover value. This

control is only available when the Cover Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Cover (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable cover value. This

Slope Tab: The Slope tab consists of the following controls:
Slope Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Slope value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Slope (Minimum) vs Slope (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
Slope (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable slope value. This control

is only available when the Slope Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Slope (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable slope value. This control

Extended Design Section

This section lets you specify if the following design parameters are to be used. If they
are to be used, you can also specify the associated default value. The Extended Design
section is split into three tabs:
6-206
Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following
controls:
Is Part Full Design?When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full
target to be used by the design algorithm.
Percent Full Constraint TypeAllows you to specify how the Percent Full
constraints are defined. When Simple is chosen, a single Percentage Full
value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs
Percent Full points in tabular format.
Creating Your Model
Percentage FullSpecify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part
Full Design? box is checked. This control is only available when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Rise vs Percent Full TableThis table becomes available when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Table. Enter any number of Rise vs Percent Full
points to describe a range of values. Values not explicity listed will be linearly
interpolated by the software.
Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following
controls:
Allow Multiple Barrels?When checked, allows the design algorithm to use

more than one identical section in parallel, up to the specified Maximum
Number of Barrels.
Maximum Number of BarrelsThe maximum number of identical sections

allowed to be used in parallel when the Allow Multiple Barrels? box is
checked.
Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
Limit Section Size?When checked, limits the pipe section height to the
specified Maximum Rise value during the design process.
Maximum RiseThe maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in

the design when the Limit Section Size? box is checked.
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity
structures when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design,
the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to the structure according
to the structure's matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and
Crowns. Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by
a specified amount. This value is called the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program
supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures can minimize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
6-207
Minor Loss Coefficients
Minor Loss Coefficients

The Minor Loss Coefficients dialog box allows you to create, edit, and manage minor
loss coefficient definitions.
The following management controls are located above the minor loss coefficient list
pane:
6-208
New
Creates a new Minor Loss Coefficient.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the currently highlighted

minor loss coefficient.
Creating Your Model
Delete
Deletes the minor loss coefficient that is

currently highlighted in the list pane.
Rename
Renames the minor loss coefficient that is

Report
Opens a report of the data associated with

the minor loss coefficient that is currently
highlighted in the list pane.
Synchronization
Options
Browses the Engineering Library,

synchronizes to or from the library, imports
from the library or exports to the library.
The tab section is used to define the settings for the minor loss that is currently highlighted in the minor loss list pane. The following controls are available:
Minor Loss Tab
This tab consists of input data fields that allow you

to define the minor loss.
Minor Loss Type
General type of fitting or loss element. This field

is used to limit the number of minor loss elements
available in choice lists. For example, the minor
loss choice list on the valve dialog box only
includes minor losses of the valve type. You
cannot add or delete types.
Minor Loss Coefficient
Headloss coefficient for the minor loss. This

unitless number represents the ratio of the
headloss across the minor loss element to the
velocity head of the flow through the element.
6-209
Using the Totalizing Flow Meters
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the minor loss

that is currently highlighted in the minor loss list
pane. If the minor loss is derived from an
engineering library, the synchronization details
can be found here. If the minor loss was created
manually for this project, the synchronization
details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the minor loss was not derived
from a library entry.
Notes Tab

descriptive notes that will be associated with the
minor loss that is currently highlighted in the
minor loss list pane.

Totalizing flow meters allow you to view results of the total volume going through
your model for a specific selection of elements.
Note:
Totalizing Flow Meters can only be applied to pressure elements.

If no pressure elements are selected in the drawing when the
Totalizing Flow Meter dialog is opened, you will be prompted to
choose elements initially.
Totalizing Flow Meters Manager Dialog

The Totalizing Flow Meter manager consists of the following controls:
6-210
New
Create a new totalizing flow meter.
Delete
Delete the selected totalizing flow meter.
Rename
Rename the label for the current totalizing flow

meter.
Edit
Open the totalizing flow meter editor.
Refresh
Recompute the volume of the current totalizing

flow meter.
Help
Opens the online help for totalizing flow meter.
Creating Your Model
To create a new Totalizing Flow Meter

1. Click Compute. (EPS settings must be on in order to utilize this feature.)
2. From the Analysis Menu click Totalizing Flow Meters.
3. Click New which will open up the Select box.

4. Select the elements to be calculated or click the Query box then click Done.
You can also create a totalizing flow meter by simply right-clicking a pressure pipe
and selecting the Totalizing Flow Meter command from the context menu that
appears.
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor Dialog

The Totalizing Flow Meter editor allows you to:
Define settings for new or existing flow meters
6-211

Display the calculated results for the current flow meter settings.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Summary tab displays the totals for each element type.
The Totalizing Flow Meter Details tab displays results for each individual element.
Note:
Totalizing flow meters can only be created for pressure

elements; if no pressure elements are selected, you will be
prompted to choose pressure elements using the Select toolbar
when creating a new meter.
To define flow meter settings

1. Set Start and Stop times. Once selected, the results are automatically updated.
2. Click the Report button to run a report or click Close.
To remove elements from the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
Highlight the element to be removed in the list and click the Delete button above the
list pane.
To add elements to the Totalizing Flow Meter definition
1. Click the Select From Drawing button above the element list pane.
2. In the Drawing View, click the element or elements to be added.
3. Click the Done button in the Select dialog.
6-212
Creating Your Model
System Head Curves

The purpose of a pump is to overcome elevation differences and head losses due to
pipe friction and fittings. The amount of head the pump must add to overcome elevation differences is dependent on system characteristics and topology (and independent
of the pump discharge rate), and is referred to as static head. Friction and minor losses,
however, are highly dependent on the rate of discharge through the pump. When these
losses are added to the static head for a series of discharge rates, the resulting plot is
called a system head curve.
Pumps are designed to lift water from one elevation to another, while overcoming the
friction and minor losses associated with the piping system. To correctly size a pump,
one must understand the static head (elevation differences) and dynamic head (friction
and minor losses) conditions under which the pump is expected to operate. The static
head will vary due to changes in reservoir or tank elevations on both the suction and
discharge sides of the pump, and the dynamic head is dependent on the rate of
discharge through the pump.
System head curves are a useful tool for visualizing the static and dynamic head for
varying rates of discharge and various static head conditions. The system head curve
is a graph of head vs. flow that shows the head required to move a given flow rate
through the pump and into the distribution system.
System Head Curves Manager Dialog

The System Head Curves manager allows you to create, edit, and manager system
head curves. It consists of the following controls:
New
Create a new system head curve.
Delete
Delete the selected system head curve.
Rename
Rename the label for the current system head

curve.
Edit
Open the system head curve editor.
Help
Open the online help for system head curves.
6-213
System Head Curves
System Head Curve Editor Dialog

The System Head Curve editor allows you to define and calculate a graph of head vs.
flow that shows the head required to move a given flow rate through the selected
pump and into the distribution system.
To create a new System Head Curve Definition

1. Click Compute. (EPS settings must be on in order to utilize this feature.)
2. From the Analysis Menu click System Head Curves.
3. Click New which will open the System Head Curve editor.
The System Head Curves Editor is where you can specify the settings of System
Head Curve Definition. You can also compute and view the system head curve for
timestep 0.00.
4. Choose the pump that will be used for the system head curve from the Pump pulldown menu, or click the ellipsis and click the pump to be used in the drawing
pane.
5. Type a value for Maximum Flow and Number of Intervals.
6. Click Compute to calculate the results for time step 0.00.
6-214
Creating Your Model

7. View the results as a graph or data.
8. Click Report to view the report.
9. Click Close to exit the System Head Curve editor.
Element Property Inferencing

In building a model, a user occasionally runs into situations where there are gaps in
the modeling data for which it is difficult to fill in the information. For example elevation data may be missing form a manhole or some property may be missing from a
pipe. In such cases, it is desirable to let the model draw "inferences" about those
values from property values from nearby elements. For example, elevations from
upstream and downstream manholes can be used to interpolate values for manhole
elevations between those with known properties or the diameter or material from the
downstream conduit can be used to fill in the diameter and material for conduits for
which those properties are missing.
SewerCAD fills in elevation data such that the slopes of pipes being inferred are
constant along a reach and uses the downstream pipes as the basis for inferring
missing values for pipe properties. In the drawing below, the elevations are interpolated between the known elevations and the physical properties of the downstream
pipe are used to fill in the properties of the missing pipes. However, if the user has
manually entered some of the physical properties manually, these values will not be
overridden. Loading information (sanitary load/infiltration rate) and head loss type
(AASHTO, HEC-22) are not inferred but are taken from the manhole prototype.
Where:
6-215
Gu = upstream ground
Gd = downstream ground
Zu = upstream invert
Zd = downstream invert
N = number of additional manholes
D = diameter (rise) of downstream pipe
In SewerCAD V8i, element property inferencing is only available for gravity

elements.
There are two general cases for this tool
1. Layout new manholes - In this case, the user knows the elevations of the manholes
at the beginning and end of a run and the physical properties of the downstream
conduit but has not yet placed the intervening manholes and pipes. The user indicates the number of manholes that will be places in the gap and they will automatically be inserted. This is useful in laying out new systems.
2. Follow existing path - In this case, the user has laid out the manholes and the
conduits between them. The user employs this tool to assign properties to the
elements between the upstream and downstream nodes. This is more useful in
filling in details of the system when the path is already determined whether for a
new or existing run of conduits.
6-216
Creating Your Model
Element Property Inferencing Dialog

To use the inferencing tool, click the Tools menu and select the Element Property
Inferencing command.
The dialog consists of the following controls:
Layout Type: Identify whether the inferencing tool should Layout New Elements
or Follow Existing path.
6-217
Upstream Node and Downstream node: Pick the upstream and downstream
nodes between which element properties are to be inferred. Click on the Ellipse
() button to select the element from the drawing. Picking the element automatically returns control to this dialog. It is important that all data for the upstream and
downstream elements already be entered when opening this dialog. If for example
ground elevations are missing from a node, then the user should close this dialog
and enter that data before opening this dialog.
Downstream pipe: Field is automatically filled in when the user picks the Downstream Node. If the user has attached more than a single downstream conduit to
the downstream node, an error is generated.
Interpolate ground elevations, Interpolate invert elevations and Overwrite

pipe properties: If checked, the inference tool will overwrite default values in the
nodes and pipes between the upstream and downstream nodes. However, if the
user has manually assigned properties to these elements, those properties will be
retained. These check boxes are only available when Follow Existing Path has
been selected because for new elements (Layout New Elements), the user has no
choice but to accept inferred values. The SewerCAD default elevation is 0 and
default pipe size is 12 in. (300 mm). If the ground elevation has been set to 512 ft
(156 m) and the pipe size set to 18 in. (450 mm), then the inference tool will only
interpolate invert elevations for those elements.
Number of New Nodes: This field is only available when the user has selected
"Layout New Elements." If the user sets this value to N, the inference tool will
place N nodes and N+1 conduits (of equal length) in a straight line between the
upstream and downstream nodes. For example, if the distance is 1376 ft (419 m)
and the user wants 2 new elements, then the inferencing tool will add two
manholes and three pipes each 459 ft (140 m) long.
Create new scenario: If the user checks this box, the tool will prompt for the
name and the parent scenario for the scenario being created. If the user does not
check this box, then the new elements and properties will be placed in the current
scenario.
When a new scenario is created and the Parent Scenario is set to None, the alternatives that make up the scenario are selected based on the first scenario listed in the
Scenario Manager, usually the Base scenario. After the Element Property Inferencing tool creates a scenario, ensure that the other alternatives in the new
scenario are set up properly (double-check active topology, inflows, initial setting,
etc.).
6-218
Parent scenario: Name of parent scenario if new scenario is being created.
New scenario label: Name of new scenario if new scenario is being created.
Override alternative label: When a new scenario is being created, the user can
check this box if the user wants to control the name of the new physical alternative
being created. If not, then the default new name is used.
New alternative label: if the "Override alternative label" box is checked, then the
user provides the new name here.
Creating Your Model
Interpolate: Starts the inferencing calculations.
Close: Closes this dialog. Inferencing settings are saved for the project session.
Once the project is closed, all settings are lost. However, the user can open the
dialog, setup the reach and close this dialog if additional input information is
required. When the user reopens the dialog (as long as the project was not
closed), the settings will be restored.
Help: Opens this Help.

Note:
Note that no new Active Topology alternative is created by this

tool. This is not an issue for the Follow Existing Path option
since no new elements are created, but can be for the Layout
New Elements options. In the latter case, the user should
consider whether it is more desirable to create a new active
topology alternative before running the inferencing tool.
It is advisable to have all elements created and property data
entered before opening this tool. New data cannot be entered
when this dialog is open.
Example
Given the system below, and the values in the inferencing dialog, two new manholes
are created between MH-3 and MH-5.
6-219
6-220
Creating Your Model

The following summary is displayed after the run.
The resulting model looks like this:
If on the other hand, the system was already laid out with no elevation data for MH-7
and MH-8 and only default pipe sizes (12 in., 300 mm) for CO-6, CO-7 and CO-8, the
6-221

profile would initially look like this.
After running, Follow Existing Path, the profile looks like this with correct elevations
and pipe size set to 20 in. based on the downstream conduit properties.
6-222
Creating Your Model
New Element Layout Summary Dialog

This dialog appears after an interpolation operation has completed. After a a
successful run the Statistics tab will display the results of the operation, including
how many nodes and pipes were created. The Messages tab displays any warnings or
errors.
Click the Save button to save the summary as a text file.

Click the Copy button to copy the summary to the clipboard.
Click the Help button to open the online help.
Changing the Drawing View

You change the drawing view of your model by using the pan tool or one of the zoom
tools:
Panning on page 6-223
Zooming on page 6-224
Panning
You can change the position of your model in the drawing pane by using the Pan tool.
6-223
Pan tool
To use the Pan tool:

1. Click the Pan button on the Tools toolbar.
The mouse cursor changes to the Pan icon.
2. Click anywhere in the drawing, hold down the mouse button and move the mouse
to reposition the current view.
or
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you can pan by simply holding down
the mousewheel and moving the mouse to reposition the current view.
or
Select View > Pan, then click anywhere in the drawing, hold down the mouse button
and move the mouse to reposition the current view
Zooming
You can enlarge or reduce your model in the drawing pane using one of the following
zoom tools:
Zoom In and Out
The simple Zoom In and Zoom Out commands allow you to increase or decrease,
respectively, the zoom level of the current view by one step per mouse click.
Zoom In
Zoom Out
To use Zoom In or Zoom Out, click the desired button on the Tools toolbar, or select
View > Zoom > Zoom In or View > Zoom > Zoom In.
6-224
Creating Your Model

If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you zoom in or out by simply moving
the mousewheel up or down respectively.
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window command lets you zoom in on an area of your model defined by a
window that you draw in the drawing pane.
To use Zoom Window, select View > Zoom > Zoom Window button, then click and
drag the mouse inside the drawing pane to draw a rectangle. The area of your model
inside the rectangle will appear enlarged.
Note:
If you use the Zoom Window command frequently, you might

find it more convenient to add them to the Tools toolbar. See
Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-38 for more
information.
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Extents command automatically sets the zoom level such that the entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
Zoom Extents
To use Zoom Extents, click the Zoom Extents button on the Tools toolbar. The entire
model is displayed in the drawing pane.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Extents.
Zoom Realtime
The Zoom Realtime command lets you dynamically scale up and down the zoom
level. The zoom level is defined by the magnitude of mouse movement while the tool
is active.
Zoom Realtime
Zoom Previous and Zoom Next
6-225
Zoom Previous
Zoom Previous returns the zoom level to the most recent previous setting. To use
Zoom Previous, click the Zoom Previous button on the Tools toolbar.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Previous.
Zoom Next returns the zoom level to the setting that was active before a Zoom
Previous command was executed. To use Zoom Previous, click View > Zoom >
Zoom Next.
Note:
If you use the Zoom Next command frequently, you might find it
more convenient to add them to the Tools toolbar. See Adding
and Removing Toolbar Buttons on page 2-38 for more information.
Using the Zoom Center Command

The Zoom Center command lets you enter drawing coordinates that will be centered
in the drawing pane.
To use the Zoom Center command:
1. Select View > Zoom > Zoom Center. The Zoom Center dialog box appears.
2. Enter the X and Y coordinates.
3. Select the zoom factor from the Zoom drop-down, then click OK.
Zoom Center Dialog Box

The Zoom Center dialog box contains the following options:
X
Defines the X coordinate of the point at which the

model will be centered.
Defines the Y coordinate of the point at which the

model will be centered.
Zoom Factor
Defines the zoom level that will be applied
when the zoom center command is initiated.

Available zoom levels are listed in percentages
of 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 and 400.
6-226
Creating Your Model
Using Selection Sets

Selection sets are user-defined groups of network elements. They allow you to
predefine a group of network elements that you want to manipulate together. You
manage selection sets in the Selection Sets Manager.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i contains powerful features that let you view or analyze
subsets of your entire model. You can find these elements using the Network Navigator (see Network Navigator on page 6-236). The Network Navigator lets you
choose a selection set, then view the list of elements in the selection set or find individual elements from the selection set in the drawing.
In order to use the Network Navigator, you must first create a selection set. There are
two ways to create a selection set:
From a selection of elementsYou create a new selection set in the Selection Sets
Manager, then use your mouse to select the desired elements in the drawing pane.
From a queryCreate a query in the Queries Manager, then use the named query
to find elements in your model and place them in the selection set.
The following illustration shows the overall process.
You can perform the following operations with selection sets:
Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets on page 6-230
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection on page 6-231
Creating a Selection Set from a Query on page 6-231
6-227
Adding Elements to a Selection Set on page 6-233
Removing Elements from a Selection Set on page 6-234
Selection Sets Manager

The Selection Sets Manager allows you to create, edit, and navigate to selection sets.
The Selection Sets Manager consists of a toolbar and a list pane, which displays all of
the selection sets that are associated with the current project.
6-228
Creating Your Model

The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Delete
Create from SelectionCreates a new

static selection set from elements you
select in your model.
Create from QueryCreates a new

dynamic selection set from existing
queries.
Deletes the selection set that is currently

highlighted in the list pane. This command
is also available from the short-cut menu,
which you can access by right-clicking an
item in the list pane.
6-229
Edit
When a selection-based selection set is

highlighted when you click this button,
opens the Selection Set Element
Removal dialog box, which lets you edit
the selection set. This command is also
available from the short-cut menu,
which you can access by right-clicking
an item in the list pane.
When a query-based selection set is

highlighted when you click this button,
opens the Selection By Query dialog
box, which lets you add or remove
queries from the selection set. This
command is also available from the
short-cut menu, which you can access
by right-clicking an item in the list pane.
Rename
Lets you rename the selection set that is

currently highlighted in the list pane. This
command is also available from the shortcut menu, which you can access by rightclicking an item in the list pane.
Select In Drawing
Lets you quickly select all the elements in

the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted selection set. Once you
have selected the elements in a selection set
using Select In Drawing, you can delete
them all at once or create a report on them.
This command is also available from the
short-cut menu, which you can access by
right-clicking an item in the list pane.
Help
Displays online help for the Selection Sets

Manager.
You can view the properties of a selection in the Property Editor by right-clicking the
selection set in the list pane and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.
Viewing Elements in a Selection Sets

You use the Network Navigator to view the elements that make up a selection set.
6-230
Creating Your Model

To view the elements that make up a selection set:
1. Open the Network Navigator by selecting View > Network Navigator or clicking
the Network Navigator button on the View toolbar.
2. Select a selection set from the Selection Set drop-down list. The elements in the
selection set appear in the Network Navigator.
Tip:
You can double-click an element in the Network Navigator to

select and center it in the Drawing Pane.
Creating a Selection Set from a Selection

You create a new selection set by selecting elements in your model.
To create a new selection set from a selection:
1. Select all of the elements you want in the selection set by either drawing a selection box around them or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in
turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Create
Selection Set.
3. Type the name of the selection set you want to create, then click OK to create the
new selection set. Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
4. Alternatively, you can open the Selection Set Manager and click the New button
and select Create from Selection. Bentley SewerCAD V8i prompts you to select
one or more elements.
Create Selection Set Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you create a new selection set. It contains the following
field:
New selection set name
Lets you type the name of the new selection set.
Creating a Selection Set from a Query

You create a dynamic selection set by creating a query-based selection set. A querybased selection set can contain one or more queries, which are valid SQL expressions.
6-231

To create a new selection set from a query:
1. In the Selection Sets Manager, click the New button and select Create from
Query. The Selection by Query dialog box appears.
2. Available queries appear in the list pane on the left; queries selected to be part of
the selection set appear in the list pane on the right. Use the arrow buttons in the
middle of the dialog to add one or all queries from the Available Queries list to the
Selected Queries list, or to remove queries from the Selected list.
You can also double-click queries on either side of the dialog box to add them
to or remove them from the selection set.
Selection by Query Dialog Box

The Selection by Query dialog box lets you create selection sets from available
queries. The dialog box contains the following controls:
6-232
Available Queries
Contains all the queries that are available for your

selection set. The Available Columns list is
located on the left side of the dialog box.
Selected Queries
Contains queries that are part of the selection set.

To add queries to the Selected Queries list, select
one or more queries in the Available Queries list,
then click the Add button [>].
Creating Your Model
Query Manipulation
Buttons
Lets you select or clear queries to be used in the

selection set:
[ > ] Adds the selected items from the Available Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
[ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available

Queries list to the Selected Queries list.
[ < ] Removes the selected items from the

Selected Queries list.
[ << ] Removes all items from the Selected

Queries list.
Note:
You can select multiple queries

in the Available Queries list by
holding down the Shift key or
the Control key while clicking
with the mouse. Holding down
the Shift key provides group
selection behavior. Holding
down the Control key provides
single element selection
behavior.
Adding Elements to a Selection Set

You can add a single or multiple elements to a static selection set.
To add an element to a static selection set:
1. Right-click the element to be added, then select Add to Selection Set from the
shortcut menu.
2. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
To add a group of elements to a static selection set all at once:
1. Select all of the elements to be added by either drawing a selection box around
them, or by holding down the Ctrl key while clicking each one in turn.
2. When all of the desired elements are highlighted, right-click and select Add to
Selection Set.
6-233

3. In the Add to Selection Set dialog box, select the selection set to which you want
to add the element.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the element to the selected selection set.
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without creating the selection set.
Add To Selection Set Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select the Add to Selection Set command. It
contains the following field:
Add to:
Drop-down menu that lets you select the selection

set to which the currently highlighted element or
elements will be added.
Removing Elements from a Selection Set

You can easily remove elements from a static selection set in the Selection Set
Element Removal dialog box.
To remove an element from a static selection set:
1. Display the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or
clicking the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, select the desired selection set then click the Edit
button.
3. In the Selection Set Element Removal dialog box, find the element you want to
remove in the table. Select the element label or the entire table row, then click the
Delete button.
4. Click OK.
Selection Set Element Removal Dialog Box

This dialog appears when you click the edit button from the Selection Set Manager. It
allows you to remove elements from the selection set that is highlighted in the Selection Sets Manager when the Edit button is clicked.
Performing Group-Level Operations on Selection Sets

SewerCAD V8i lets you perform group-level deletions on elements in a selection set
using the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager.
6-234
Creating Your Model

Note:
While it is not possible to directly edit groups of elements in a

selection set, you can use the Next button in the Network
Navigator to quickly navigate through each element in the
selection set and edit its properties in the Property Editor.
To delete multiple elements from a selection set:

1. Open the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or clicking
the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, highlight the selection set that contains elements
you want to delete.
3. Click the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager to highlight all
of the selection sets elements in the drawing pane.
If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Set Manager, you dont
have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to delete.
5. Right-click and select Delete. The highlighted elements in the selection set are
deleted from your model.
To create a report on a group of elements in a selection set:
1. Open the Selection Sets Manager by selecting View > Selection Sets or clicking
the Selection Sets button on the View toolbar.
2. In the Selection Sets Manager, highlight the selection set that contains elements
you want to report on.
3. Click the Select In Drawing button in the Selection Sets Manager to highlight all
of the selection sets elements in the drawing pane.
If there is only one selection set listed in the Selection Set Manager, you dont
have to highlight it before clicking the Select In Drawing button.
4. Shift-click (hold down the Shift key and click the left mouse button) any selected
elements that you do not want to include in the report.
5. Right-click and select Report. A report window displays the report.
6-235
Network Navigator
Network Navigator
The Network Navigator consists of a toolbar and a table that lists the Label and ID of
each of the elements contained within the current selection. The selection can include
elements highlighted manually in the drawing pane, elements contained within a
selection set, or elements returned by a query. It can be used to search through the
model to find potential problems or to simply execute queries on input or results.
Network navigator works by running queries that have been either
1. predefined by Bentley Systems or
2. created by the user in the Query manager.
You cannot edit predefined queries. Queries must be created in the query manager
before running them in the network navigator.
To open the Network Navigator, click the View menu and select the Network Navigator command, press <Ctrl+3>, or click the Network Navigator button
View toolbar.
on the
The following controls are included in Network Navigator:
6-236
Creating Your Model
Query Selection
List
Choose the element sets to use in the query.

Once a query is selected, it can be executed
when you click the Execute icon.
If there is already a Query listed in the list

box, it can be run when the Execute icon is
clicked.
Execute
Click to run the selected query.
Previous
Zooms the drawing pane view to the

element prior to the currently selected one in
the list.
Zoom To

selected element in the list.
Next

element below the currently selected
element in the list.
Copy
Copies the elements to the Windows

clipboard.
Remove
Removes the selected element from the list.
6-237
Network Navigator
Select In Drawing
Selects the elements in the drawing pane and

performs a zoom extent based on the
selection.
Highlight
When this toggle button is on, elements

returned by a query will be highlighted in
the drawing pane to increase their visibility.
Refresh Drawing
Refreshes the current selection.
Help
Opens SewerCAD V8i Help.
Predefined Queries
The Network Navigator provides access to a number of predefined queries grouped
categorically, accessed by clicking the [>] button. Categories and the queries
contained therein include:
Element types - finds all elements of a specified type (e.g. all pumps).
Network review - finds potential problems in the model (e.g. finding disconnected
elements). This is a very powerful tool for model cleanup.
Network trace - finds elements with specific relationships between them (e.g. trace
downstream to outfall)
Input - finds elements in model with specified properties (e.g. find elliptical pipes)
Results - finds elements in model with results that meet the query criteria (e.g.
conduits that are surcharged in this time step)
User Defined Queries
In addition to predefined queries, you can create your own queries in the Queries
Manager. These queries can be saved with the project or in a shared file.
6-238
Creating Your Model
Using Prototypes
Prototypes allow you to enter default values for elements in your network. These
values are used while laying out the network. Prototypes can reduce data entry
requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common data.
For example, if a section of the network contains all three foot-diameter manholes ,
use the manhole prototype to set the Diameter field to 3.00 ft. When you create a new
manhole in your model, its diameter attribute will default to 3.00 ft.
Note:
Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect
any elements created prior to the change.
If a section of your system has distinctly different
characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your
prototypes before laying out that section. This will save time
when you edit the properties later.
For instructions on how to create prototypes, see Creating Prototypes on page 6239.
Creating Prototypes
Prototypes contain default values for Bentley SewerCAD V8i elements. You create
prototypes in the Prototypes Manager.
To create a prototype:
1. Open your Bentley SewerCAD V8i project or start a new project.
2. Select View > Prototypes or press Ctrl+6.
The Prototypes Manager opens. All Bentley SewerCAD V8i element types are
displayed in an expanding and collapsing list.
3. Select the element type for which you want to create a prototype, then click the
New button.
The element type in the list expands to display all the prototypes that exist for that
element type.
Each element type contains a default prototype, which is not editable, and any
prototypes that you have created. The current set of default values for each
element type is identified by the Make Current icon.
4. Double-click the prototype you just created. The Property Editor for the element
type opens.
5. Edit the attribute values in the Property Editor as required.
6-239
Using Prototypes
6. To make the new prototype the default, click the Make Current button in the
Prototypes Manager.
The icon next to the prototype changes to indicate that the values in the prototype
will be applied to all instances of that element type that you add to your current
project.
To rename a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Rename
button.
To delete a prototype, select the prototype in the list and click the Delete
button.
To view a report of the default values in the prototype, select the prototype in
the list and click the Report button.
Prototypes Manager
The Prototypes Manager allows you to create prototypes, which contain default
common data for each element type. The Prototypes Manager consists of a toolbar and
a list pane, which displays all of the elements available in Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
The list of elements in the Prototypes Manager list pane is expandable and collapsible.
Click on the Plus sign to expand an element and see its associated prototypes. Click on
the Minus sign to collapse the element.
Each element in the list pane contains a default prototype; you cannot edit this default
prototype. The default prototypes contains common values for each element type; if
you add elements to your model without creating new prototypes, the data values in
the default prototypes appear in the Property Editor for that element type.
6-240
Creating Your Model
New
Creates a new prototype of the selected

element.
Delete
Deletes the prototype that is currently

Rename
Lets you rename the prototype that is

Make Current
Lets you make the prototype that is currently

highlighted in the list pane the default for
that element type. When you make the
current prototype the default, every element
of that type that you add to your model in
the current project will contain the same
common data as the prototype.
Report
Lets you view a report of the data associated

with the prototype that is currently
Help
Displays online help for the Prototypes

Manager.
Engineering Libraries are powerful and flexible tools that you use to manage specifications of common materials, objects, or components that are shared across projects.
Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering libraries include pipe
materials, storm events, and unit sanitary loads. You can modify engineering libraries
and the items they contain by using the Engineering Libraries command in the Tools
menu, or by clicking the ellipsis () buttons available next to the fields in dialog
boxes that make use of engineering libraries.
6-241
Note:
The data for each engineering library is stored in an XML file in

your Bentley SewerCAD V8i program directory. We strongly
recommend that you edit these files only using the built-in tools
available by selecting Tools > Engineering Libraries.
You work with engineering libraries and the items they contain in the Engineering
Libraries dialog box, which contains all of the projects engineering libraries. Individual libraries are compilations of library entries, along with their attributes. For
more information about working with engineering libraries, see Working with Engineering Libraries on page 6-242.
By default, each project you create in SewerCAD V8i uses the items in the default
libraries. In special circumstances, you may wish to create custom libraries to use with
one or more projects. You can do this by copying a standard library or creating a new
library.
When you change the properties for an item in an engineering library, those changes
affect all projects that use that library item. At the time a project is loaded, all of its
engineering library items are synchronized to the current library. Items are synchronized based on their label. If the label is the same, then the items values will be made
the same.
The default libraries that are installed with Bentley SewerCAD V8i are editable. In
addition, you can create a new library of any type, and can then create new entries of
your own definition.
Library types are displayed in the Engineering Library manager in an expanding/

collapsing tree view.
Library types can contain categories and subcategories, represented as folders in

the tree view.
Individual library entries are contained within the categories, subcategories, and
folders in the tree view.
Libraries, categories, folders, and library entries are displayed in the tree view
with their own unique icons. You can right-click these icons to display submenus
with different commands.
Working with Engineering Libraries

When you select a library entry in the tree view, the attributes and attribute values
associated with the entry are displayed in the editor pane on the right side of the dialog
box.
Working with Libraries
6-242
Creating Your Model

Right-clicking a Library icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Create Library
Creates a new engineering library of the currently

highlighted type.
Add Existing Library
Lets you add an existing engineering library that

has been stored on your hard drive as an .xml file
to the current project.
6-243
Working with Categories
Right-clicking a Category icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item
Creates a new entry within the current library.
Add Folder
Creates a new folder under the currently

highlighted library.
Save As
Lets you save the currently highlighted category

as an .xml file that can then be used in future
projects.
Remove
Deletes the currently highlighted category from

the library.
Working with Folders

Right-clicking a Folder icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing the
following commands:
Add Item
Creates a new entry within the current folder.
Add Folder
Creates a new folder under the currently

highlighted folder.
Rename
Lets you rename the currently highlighted folder.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted folder and its

contents.
Working with Library Entries

Right-clicking a Library Entry icon in the tree view opens a shortcut menu containing
the following commands:
6-244
Rename
Lets you rename the currently highlighted entry.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted entry from the

library.
Creating Your Model
Engineering Libraries Dialog Box

The Engineering Libraries dialog box contains an explorer tree-view pane on the left,
a library entry editor pane on the right, and the following buttons above the explorer
tree view pane:
New

commands:
Create LibraryCreates a new engineering library.
Add Existing LibraryLets you add an

existing engineering library that has
been stored on your hard drive as an
.xml file to the current project.
Delete
Removes the currently highlighted

engineering library from the current project.
Rename
Lets you rename the currently highlighted

engineering library.
Sharing Engineering Libraries On a Network

You can share engineering libraries with other SewerCAD V8i users in your organization by storing the engineering libraries on a network drive. All users who will have
access to the shared engineering library should have read-write access to the network
folder in which the library is located.
To share an engineering library on a network, open the Engineering Libraries in
SewerCAD V8i and create a new library in a network folder to which all users have
read-write access.
Converting Legacy Engineering Library Files

You can convert your legacy format engineering library files (.hlb) to the .xml format
used in SewerCAD V8i using the WaterObjects.Net.EngineeringLibraryConverter.exe utility. This utility can be found in your Bentley/SewerCAD8 folder.
The utility consists of the following controls:
Product: Select whether the .hlb file to be converted is a SewerGEMS, WaterGEMS, StormCAD, or SewerCAD engineering library file.
Library Type: Select the type of engineering library you are converting.
6-245
HLB Library File: Enter the path of the .hlb file to be converted, or click the
Browse button to find it using a Windows browse dialog.
Material Library: Enter the path of the material.hlb file. This control is only
available when the Library Type being converted is a Section Size library.
Use SI Label: Check this box if the library being converted uses System International (SI) units.
Destination Root: Enter the path where the converted .xml file should be created,
or click the Browse button to browse to the location.
Convert: Click this button to perform the conversion.
Close: Closes the utility dialog.
To convert an .hlb Engineering Library file to an .xml Engineering Library file

1. Double-click the WaterObjects.Net.EngineeringLibraryConverter.exe utility
found in the Bentley/SewerCAD8 folder.
2. In the Classic Engineering Library Converter Utility dialog that appears, select
SewerCAD from the Product menu.
3. Choose the Library Type that is stored in the .hlb file to be converted.
4. Click the Browse button next to the HLB Library File field and find the .hlb file
to be converted.
5. If the Library Type you are converting is a Section Size library:
a. Click the Browse button next to the Material Library field and find the
material.hlb file associated with the Section Size .hlb file to be converted.
b. Place a check in the Use SI Label box if the Section Size library file uses SI
units.
6. Click the Browse button next to the Destination Root field and browse to the
directory where you want the new .xml engineering library file to be created.
7. Click the Convert button.
To import the converted .xml Engineering Library file
1. Click the Components menu and select Engineering Libraries.
2. In the Engineering Libraries dialog, highlight the library type associated with
the .xml file to be imported.
3. Click the New button and select Add Existing Library.
4. Browse to the directory you specifed during step 6 of the conversion process
above, select the .xml file, and click Open.
6-246
Creating Your Model
Conduit Catalog Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to create, edit, and view catalog conduits. Catalog conduits
are an efficient way to reuse common physical conduit definitions.
6-247
The dialog box contains a toolbar, a Conduit Catalog list pane, and two tabs. The
toolbar contains the following buttons:
6-248
New
Creates a new entry in the Conduit

Catalog List Pane.
Delete

highlighted in the Conduit Catalog List
Pane.
Rename
Lets you rename the entry that is

currently highlighted in the Conduit
Catalog List Pane.
Report

with the entry that is currently
highlighted in the Conduit Catalog List
Pane.
Synchronize

Browse Engineering LibraryThis

command opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to browse
the Conduit Catalog Library.
Synchronize From LibraryThis

command allows you to update a conduit
catalog that was previously imported
from a Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library to reflect changes that have been
made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryThis
command allows you to update an
existing Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library using current Conduit Catalog
entries that were initially imported but
Import From LibraryThis command

allows you to import catalog entries from
an existing Conduit Catalog Engineering
Library.
Export To LibraryThis command

allows you to export the current catalog
entries to an existing Conduit Catalog
Engineering Library.
Creating Your Model

The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Conduit Catalog dialog
box.
Conduit Catalog List
Pane
Located on the left side of the dialog box, displays

a list of all of the catalog conduits that have been
defined in the current project. Highlighting a
catalog conduit in this list causes the Cross
Section Shape and Roughness Sections to
display the associated information with the
highlighted conduit.
Cross Section Shape
Located in the top-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, contains controls that allow you to
define the size and shape of the catalog conduit
currently highlighted in the List Pane. The controls
that appear change according to the Cross
Section Type that is selected.
Cross Section Type
Lets you define the type of cross section for the

currently highlighted catalog conduit.
The following conduit cross section types are only
available in the catalog conduit to support import
from SewerGEMS:
Basket Handle
Horseshoe
Egg
Semi-Elliptical
They can be created in the conduit catalog but can

not be referenced by a conduit in the model.
Diameter
Lets you define the diameter of the conduit. This

field is only available for Circular catalog conduits.
<Section Type> Rise
Lets you define the rise (height) of the catalog

conduit. This field is available for all cross section
types except Circular.
<Section Type> Span
Lets you define the span (width) of the catalog

conduit. This field is available for all cross section
types except Circular.
Roughness
Located in the bottom-right corner of the Conduit

Catalog tab, lets you define the roughness
attributes of the catalog conduit currently
highlighted in the List Pane. The controls that are
available change depending on the Roughness
Type selected.
6-249
6-250
Roughness Type
Lets you specify which of the available roughness

methods to be applied to the catalog conduit
currently highlighted in the List Pane. The other
controls available in section are dependent on the
selection made in this box.
Material
Lets you enter a material label. This field is

informational only, and will not affect the
roughness properties of the associated catalog
entry.
Mannings n
Lets you define the roughness value for the

catalog conduit. This field is available only when
the Roughness Type is Single Mannings n.
Depth vs. Mannings

Table
Lets you define a depth vs. roughness curve for

the catalog conduit. This field is available only
when the Roughness Type is Mannings n-Depth
Curve.
Mannings vs.
Discharge Table
Lets you define a flow vs. roughness curve for the

catalog conduit. This field is available only when
the Roughness Type is Mannings n-Flow.
Library Tab
Displays information pertaining to the catalog

entry that is currently highlighted in the List Pane,
including:
ID
Label
Modified Date
Library Source
Library Modified Date
Synchronization Status
Creating Your Model
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements

The Hyperlinks feature lets you associate external files, such as pictures or movie
files, with elements. To use hyperlinks, select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink
dialog box opens.
The hyperlink tool enables the user to associate a photo, word processign document,
spreadsheet or otehr file with a given model element. Opening the hyperlink opens the
file using its associated program (Picture Manager, Word, Excel, etc.).
The hyperlink can also be opened from the Property grid by picking the Hyperlink
property from the grid and clicking the ellipse button which will open the hyperlink
tool.
If a model file is moved to a different computer, the hyperlink will no longer work
unless the associated file is moved to a comparable path on the same computer.
Hyperlinks Dialog Box

The Hyperlinks dialog contains a toolbar and a tabular view of all your existing hyperlinks.
6-251
Adding Hyperlinks to Elements
New
Lets you create a new hyperlink.

Launches the Add Hyperlink dialog box.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlight hyperlink.
Edit
Lets you edit the currently highlighted

hyperlink. Launches the Edit Hyperlink
dialog box.
Launch
Launches the external file associated

with the currently highlighted hyperlink.

Column
Description
Element Type
Displays the element type of the element

associated with the hyperlink.
Element
Displays the label of the element associated with

the hyperlink.
Link
Displays the complete path of the hyperlink.
Description
Displays a description of the hyperlink, which you

can optionally enter when you create or edit the
hyperlink.
Adding a Hyperlink
To add a hyperlink:
Note:
You can add more than one associated file to an element using
the hyperlink feature, but you must add the associations one at a
time.
1. Select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens.

2. Click Add to add a hyperlink. The Add Hyperlink dialog box opens.
3. Select the element to which you want to associate an external file.
4. Browse to the external file you want to use. This might be something like a picture
of the element or a movie about the element.
6-252
Creating Your Model

Add Hyperlink Dialog Box
You create new hyperlinks in the Add Hyperlink dialog box. The dialog box contains
the following controls:
Element Type
Lets you select an element type from the dropdown list.
Element
Lets you select an element from a drop-down list

of specific elements from your model. Only those
element types selected in the Element Type dropdown list are displayed.
Link
Lets you enter the complete path of the external

file you want to associate with the selected
element. You can type the path yourself or click
the Ellipsis (...) button to search your computer
for the file.
Once you have selected the file, you can
test the hyperlink by clicking the Launch
button.
Description
Lets you type a description of the hyperlink.
Editing a Hyperlink
You can edit existing hyperlinks using the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.
To edit a hyperlink:
2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
3. Click Edit to modify a hyperlink. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4. Select the element you want to edit.
5. Edit the hyperlink by adding or deleting an associated file.
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box
You edit existing hyperlinks in the Edit Hyperlink dialog box. The dialog box contains
6-253
Using Queries
Link
Lets you edit the complete path of the external file

associated with the selected hyperlink. You can
type the path yourself or click the Ellipsis (...)
button to search your computer for the file.
Once you have selected the file, you can
test the hyperlink by clicking the Launch
button.
Description
Lets you edit an existing description of the

hyperlink or type a new description.
Deleting a Hyperlink
To delete a hyperlink:
2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
3. Click Edit to modify a hyperlink. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box opens.
4. Select the element you want to delete.
5. Click Delete.
Using Queries
A query in Bentley SewerCAD V8i is a user-defined SQL expression that applies to a
single element type. You use the Queries Manager to create and store queries; you use
the Query Builder dialog box to construct the actual SQL expression.
You can create the following types of queries:
Project queriesQueries you define that are available only in the Bentley
SewerCAD V8i project in which you define them.
Shared queriesQueries you define that are available in all Bentley SewerCAD
V8i projects you create. You can edit shared queries.
Predefined queriesFactory-defined queries included with Bentley SewerCAD

V8i that are available in all projects you create. You cannot edit predefined
queries.
You can also use queries in the following ways:
6-254
Creating Your Model
Create dynamic selection sets based on one or more queries. For more information, see Creating a Selection Set from a Query on page 6-231.
Filter the data in a FlexTable using a query. For more information, see Sorting
and Filtering FlexTable Data on page 10-568.
For more information on how to construct queries, see Creating Queries on page 6257.
Queries Manager
The Queries Manager is a docking manager that displays all queries in the current
project, including predefined, shared, and project queries. You can create, edit, or
delete shared and project queries from within the Queries Manager, as well as use it to
select all elements in your model that are part of the selected query.
Queries created with the query manager can be saved with the current project (Project
query) or saved in a file that can be shared with other projects (Shared query).
Queries are not executed in the query manager but are executed in the Network navigator or used in FlexTables to filter the table.
The Queries Manager consists of a toolbar and a tree view, which displays all of the
queries that are associated with the current project. The toolbar contains the following
buttons:
6-255
Using Queries
New
QueryLets you create a new SQL

expression as either a project or shared
query, depending on which item is highlighted in the tree view.
FolderCreates a folder in the tree

view, allowing you to group queries. You
can right-click a folder and create
queries or folders in that folder.
Delete
Deletes the currently-highlighted query or

folder from the tree view. When you delete a
folder, you also delete all of its contents (the
queries it contains).
Rename
Lets you rename the query or folder that is

currently highlighted in the tree view.
Edit
Opens the Query Builder dialog box,

allowing you to edit the SQL expression that
makes up the currently-highlighted query.
Expand All and

Collapse All

folders.
Select in Drawing
Lets you quickly select all the elements in

the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted query. Once you have
selected the elements in a selection set using
Select In Drawing, you can delete them all
at once.
Help
Displays online help for the Queries

Manager.
Query Parameters Dialog Box

Some predefined queries require that a parameter be defined. When one of these
queries is selected, the Query Parameters dialog box will open, allowing you to type
the parameter value that will be used in the query. For example, when the Pipe Split
Candidates query is used the Query Parameters dialog will open, allowing the Tolerance parameter to be defined.
6-256
Creating Your Model
Creating Queries
A query is a valid SQL expression that you construct in the Query Builder dialog box.
You create and manage queries in the Queries Manager. You also use queries to filter
FlexTables and as the basis for a selection set.
To create a query from the Queries Manager:
1. Open the Queries Manager by selecting View > Queries, clicking the Queries
button on the View toolbar, or by pressing CTRL+5.
6-257
Using Queries
2. Perform one of the following steps:
To create a new project query, highlight Queries - Project in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
To create a new shared query, highlight Queries - Shared in the list pane,
then click the New button and select Query.
Note:
You can also right-click an existing item or folder in the list pane
and select New > Query from the shortcut menu.
3. In the Select Element Type dialog box, select the desired element type from the
drop-down menu. The Query Builder dialog box appears.
4. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. Note that the Refresh button is
disabled after you use it for a particular field (because the unique values do
not change in a single query-building session).
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
Note:
You can also manually edit the expression in the preview pane.
e. Check the Validate on OK box above the preview pane to validate your SQL
expression when you click the OK button. If the expression is valid, the query
will be created. If the query is invalid, a message to that effect will appear.
f.
Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If you
didnt validate the expression, the Apply button validates it before executing
it.
g. Click OK.
6-258
Creating Your Model
Double-click the
desired field to add it
to the preview pane
Click the desired operator

or keyword button to add it
to the SQL expression in
Click the Refresh

button to display the
list of available
unique values
Double-click the
desired unique
value to add it to
the SQL
expression in the
preview pane
Apply button
Preview pane
Validate on OK
checkbox
5. Perform these optional steps in the Queries Manager:
To create a new folder in the tree view, highlight the existing item or folder in
which to place the new folder, then click the New button and select Folder.
You can create queries and folders within folders.
To delete an existing query or folder, click the Delete button. When you delete
a folder, you also delete all of its contents (the queries it contains).
To rename an existing query or folder, click the Rename button, then type a
new name.
To edit the SQL expression in a query, select the query in the list pane, then
click the Edit button. The Query Builder dialog box appears.
To quickly select all the elements in the drawing pane that are part of the
currently highlighted query, click the Select in Drawing button.
Query Builder Dialog Box

You construct the SQL expression that makes up your query in the Query Builder
dialog box. The Query Builder dialog box is accessible from the Queries Manager and
from within a FlexTable.
6-259
Using Queries
The top part of the dialog box contains all the controls you need to construct your
query: a list pane displaying all available attributes for the selected element type, a
SQL control panel containing available SQL keywords and operators, and list view
that displays all the available values for the selected attribute. The bottom part of the
dialog box contains a preview pane that displays your SQL expression as you
construct it.
All the dialog box controls are described in the following table.
6-260
Fields
Lists all input and results fields

applicable to the selected element type.
This list displays the labels of the
fields, while the underlying database
column names of the fields become
visible in the preview pane when you
add them to the expression. Doubleclick a field to add it to your SQL
expression.
SQL Controls
These buttons represent all the SQL

operators and controls that you can use
in your query. They include =, >, <, _,
?, *, <>, >=, <=, [ ], Like, And, and
Or. Click the appropriate button to add
the operator or keyword to the end of
your SQL expression, which is
displayed in the preview pane.
Unique Values
When you click the Refresh button,

this list displays all the available
unique values selected field. Doubleclick a value in the list to add it to the
end of your SQL expression, which is
displayed in the preview pane. If you
select a different field, you must click
the Refresh button again to update the
list of unique values for the selected
field. When you first open the Query
Builder dialog box, this list is empty.
Refresh
Updates the list of unique values for

the selected field. This button is
disabled after you use it for a particular
field.
Copy
Copies the entire SQL expression

displayed in the preview pane to the
Windows clipboard.
Creating Your Model
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the preview pane at the
location of the text cursor. For
example, if your cursor is at the end of
the SQL expression in the preview
pane and you click the Paste button,
the contents of your clipboard will be
added to the end of the expression.
Validate on Ok
Validates the SQL expression in the

preview pane when you click the OK
button. If the expression is not valid, a
message appears.
Apply
Executes the query. The results of the

query are displayed at bottom of the
Query Builder dialog box in the form
x of x elements returned.
Preview Pane
Displays the SQL expression as you

add fields, operators and/keywords,
and values to it.
Using the Like Operator

The Like operator compares a string expression to a pattern in an SQL expression.
Syntax
expression Like pattern
The Like operator syntax has these parts:
Part
Description
expression
SQL expression used in a WHERE clause .
pattern
String or character string literal against which expression is

compared.
You can use the Like operator to find values in a field that match the pattern you
specify. For pattern, you can specify the complete value (for example, Like
Smith), or you can use wildcard characters to find a range of values (for example,
Like Sm*).
6-261
Controls
In an expression, you can use the Like operator to compare a field value to a string
expression. For example, if you enter Like C* in an SQL query, the query returns
all field values beginning with the letter C. In a parameter query , you can prompt the
user for a pattern to search for.
The following example returns data that begins with the letter P followed by any letter
between A and F and three digits:
Like P[A-F]###
The following table shows how you can use Like to test expressions for different
patterns.
Kind of match
Pattern
Match
(returns True)
No match
(returns False)
Multiple characters
a*a
aa, aBa, aBBBa
aBC
*ab*
abc, AABB, Xab
aZb, bac
Special character
a[*]a
a*a
aaa
Multiple characters
ab*
abcdefg, abc
cab, aab
Single character
a?a
aaa, a3a, aBa
aBBBa
Single digit
a#a
a0a, a1a, a2a
aaa, a10a
Range of characters
[a-z]
f, p, j
2, &
Outside a range
[!a-z]
9, &, %
b, a
Not a digit
[!0-9]
A, a, &, ~
0, 1, 9
Combined
a[!b-m]#
An9, az0, a99
abc, aj0
Controls
Controls give you a way to specify an action for virtually any element based on almost
any property of the system. Controls are included in a scenario when they are specified in the Operational Alternative. The controls become part of an Operational Alternative when you specify the name of a Control Set to use in a given Operational
Alternative.
6-262
Creating Your Model

The Control Manager is the main work center for controls. The Control Manager
manages all controls, conditions, actions, and control sets in the system. The Control
manager allows you to define controls using advanced IF, AND, and OR condition
logic, which can trigger any number of THEN or optional ELSE actions.
Choose Components > Controls to open the Control Manager.
The Controls manager consists of the following tabs:
ControlsManage all controls defined in the system. See Controls Tab on

page 6-264.
ConditionsDefine the condition that must be met prior to taking an action. See
Conditions Tab on page 6-269.
ActionsDefine what should be done to an element in the system in response to

an associated control condition. See Actions Tab on page 6-275.
Control SetsAssign groups of controls to Control Sets. See Control Sets Tab
on page 6-279.
6-263
Controls
Controls Tab
The Controls tab allows you to manage all controls defined in the system. Controls
can be one of two types: simple or logical. Simple controls are made up of an IF
condition and a THEN action statement. Logical controls are made up of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action, and can be assigned a priority for
resolving potential conflicts between logical controls.
Controls, Conditions, and Actions are assigned a non-editable application-provided
ID (e.g., LC01).
The Controls tab is divided into sections:
The pane in the center of the dialog box is the Controls List. This list displays a list of
all Logical Controls defined in the system.
6-264
Located above the Controls List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
NewCreates a new control.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted control.
DuplicateCreates a copy of the highlighted control.
RefreshRefreshes the highlighted control.
Control WizardOpens the Control Wizard dialog.
ReportGenerates a summary of the selected control, listing the ID, conditions, actions, and elements incorporated into the control.
Creating Your Model
HelpOpens the online help.
Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that
meet criteria defined by the filter settings. The following filters are available:
TypeWhen a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only controls of that
type will be displayed in the Controls list.
PriorityWhen a Priority filter other than <All> is specified, only controls

of that priority will be displayed in the Controls list.
Condition ElementWhen a Condition filter other than <All> is specified,

only controls containing the selected Condition element will be displayed in
the Controls list.
Action ElementWhen an Action filter other than <All> is specified, only

controls containing the selected Action element will be displayed in the
Controls list.
You can edit or create controls consisting of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an
optional ELSE action. The lower pane is split into sections:
Evaluate as Simple ControlTurn on in order to evaluate the condition as a

simple control.
IF ConditionThe drop-down list allows you to choose from a list of conditions that have already been created in the Conditions tab.
THEN ActionThe drop-down list allows you to choose from a list of

actions that have already been created in the Actions tab.
ELSE Action (optional)The ELSE action is used when the conditions for
the control are not met. To specify an ELSE action, click the check box to
activate the drop-down list. The drop-down list allows you to choose from a
list of actions that have already been created in the Actions tab.
PriorityThis area of the dialog box is optional. To set a priority for the control
being created, turn on to activate the priority drop-down list. You can set a priority
of 1-5, 5 being the highest priority. If multiple controls meet a certain condition
and they have conflicting actions, the control with the highest priority will be
used.
6-265
Controls
Note:
At calculation time, the priority is used to determine the logical

control to apply when multiple controls require that conflicting
actions be taken. Logical controls with identical priorities will be
prioritized based on the order they appear in the Logical Control
Set alternative. A rule without a priority value always has a lower
priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same
priority value, the rule that appears first is given the higher
priority.
Relative speed pump patterns take precedence over any
controls (simple or logical) that are associated with the pump.
Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a
tooltip which displays the conditions and actions that make up
that control.
When creating a new condition or action for a new control, the
condition and action input fields will be initialized with the data
used in the last condition or action that was created.
Once created, the Logical Control will be assigned an
application generated ID (e.g., LC04).
DescriptionThis area is preset with a default description. There is an option to

change the default description. To do so, turn on to activate the description field,
and enter your description in the text box.
SummaryThis area of the dialog box displays a description of the control.
Status PaneWhen one or more filters are active, the lower left corner of the
dialog will show the number of controls currently displayed out of the number of
total controls. Additionally, a FILTERED flag is displayed in the lower right
corner.
Logical, or rule-based controls allow far more flexibility and control over the behavior
of your network elements than is possible with simple controls. This is accomplished
by allowing you to specify one or more conditions and then link these to one or more
Actions by using logical IF, AND, THEN, OR, and ELSE statements.
Note:
Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.
Logical controls consist of any combination of simple conditions and simple actions.
Controls are defined as:
6-266
IF:
Condition 1 AND condition 2 OR condition 3 AND

condition 4, etc., where condition X is a a condition
clause.
THEN:
Action 1 AND action 2, etc. where action X is an

action clause.
Creating Your Model

ELSE (Optional):
Action 3 AND action 4, etc. where action X is an

action clause.
Priority (Optional):
Priority where priority is a priority value (1 to 5, 5

being the highest priority).
In addition to the high level of flexibility provided by allowing multiple conditions

and actions, the functionality of Logical controls is also enhanced by the range of
Condition types that are available. You can activate the stated actions based on
element demands, element hydraulic grade or pressure, system demand, clock time,
time from start, tank level, or time to fill or drain a tank.
You can also create composite conditions and actions. You can cause actions to be
performed when multiple conditions are met simultaneously, or when one or the other
conditions are met. You can also activate multiple actions when a single condition is
met.
EXAMPLE:
To create a logical control in which a pump (PMP-1) is turned on when the level in a
tank (T-1) falls below a specified value (5 ft.) or when the system demands exceed a
certain level (5000 gpm):
ConditionsBecause this control needs to be triggered by multiple conditions, a Composite Condition is chosen. In this instance, the operator OR is
chosen to link the conditions, because the pump should be turned on if either
condition is true.
IF condition{T-1 Level < 5 ft.}
OR condition{System Demand > 5000 gpm}
ActionsBecause this control has a single desired outcome if one of the

conditions is met, a simple action is chosen. The first action in a logical
control is always linked to the conditions by a logical THEN statement. In this
instance, an ELSE action will also be used, to keep the pump off if neither of
the conditions is true.
THEN action{PMP-1 Status = On}
ELSE action{PMP-1 Status = Off}
The finished logical control looks like this:

IF {T-1 Level < 5 ft.} OR {System Demand > 5000 gpm} THEN {PMP-1 Status
= On} ELSE {PMP-1 Status = Off}
6-267
Controls
This example illustrates the power of using logical controls. To achieve the same functionality using simple controls, you would need to create four separate controlsone
to turn the pump on if the tank level is below the specified value, one to turn the pump
off if the tank level is above a specified value, one to turn the pump on if the system
demand is greater than the specified value, and one to turn the pump off if the system
demand is less than the specified value.
Tip:
Use the optional ELSE field to cause actions to be performed

when the conditions in the control are not being met. For
example, if you are creating a control that states, If the level in
Tank 1 is less than 5 ft., Then turn Pump 1 On, use an ELSE
action to turn the pump off if the tank level is above 5 ft.
Note:
Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.

When defining a logical control, you have the option to share
conditions and/or actions. In other words, more than one control
can reference the same condition or action. Keep in mind that
when you change an underlying condition or action, it will affect
all controls that reference that condition or action.
Control Wizard
The Control Wizard allows you to quickly create pump controls based on wet well
HGL.
Click the New button to create a new row in the controls list.
Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted control.
Choose the controlled pump from the list box in the Pump column.
Choose the controlling wet well from the list box in the Wet Well column. Choose the
desired On and Off Operators and enter the HGL values that will turn the pump On
and Off.
6-268
Creating Your Model

Click the Create button to generate the control(s), or click the Cancel button to close
the wizard without creating a control.
Conditions Tab
Conditions allow you to define the condition that must be met prior to taking an
action. The Conditions tab provides a list of all conditions defined in the system.
There are two types of conditions: simple conditions and composite conditions.
The Conditions tab is divided into sections:
The pane in the middle of the dialog box is the Conditions List. The Conditions
List displays a list of all logical conditions defined in the system. The list contains
four columns: ID (the application defined id, e.g., C01 for simple, CC01 for
composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
NewCreate a simple or composite condition.
DuplicateCopy the selected condition.
DeleteDeletes the selected condition.
RefreshRefreshes the selected condition.
ReportGenerates a summary of the selected condition.
6-269
Controls
Control SetWhen a control set is specifed, only conditions that are a

component of that control set are displayed in the Conditions list.
TypeWhen a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only conditions of

that type will be displayed in the Conditions list.
Condition ElementWhen a Condition filter other than <All> is specified,

only conditions containing the selected Condition element will be displayed
in the Conditions list.
The controls used to create or edit a condition vary depending on whether the
condition is simple or composite:
Simple Conditions
The input fields for a simple condition change depending on the condition type that is
selected in the condition Type field. The Simple Condition Types and the corresponding input data are as follows:
ElementThis will create a condition based on specified attributes at a selected
element. The fields available when this condition type is selected are as follows:
ElementThe Element field allows you to specify which element the condition
will be based upon, and provides three methods of choosing this element. The
drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis () button, which opens the Single Element Selection dialog box, and the
Select From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the
graphical Drawing view.
AttributeThis field displays the available attributes for the element type currently
specified in the Element field.
6-270
Pressure JunctionsThe following attributes are available for use when a Junction is chosen in the Element field:
DemandThis attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified

demand at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a demand).
Hydraulic GradeThis attribute is used to create a condition based on a

specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a
hydraulic grade of).
PressureThis attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified

pressure at the corresponding junction (e.g., If J-1 has a pressure of).
PumpsThe following attributes are available for use when a Pump is chosen in
the Element field:
Creating Your Model
DischargeThis attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified

rate of discharge at the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 has a discharge
of).
SettingThis attribute is used to create a condition based on the Relative

Speed Factor of the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 has a relative speed
factor of 1.5).
StatusThis attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (On or

Off) of the corresponding pump (e.g., If PMP-1 is On).
Note:
Relative Speed Pump patterns take precedence over any

controls (Simple or Logical) that are associated with the pump.
TanksThe following attributes are available for use when a Tank is chosen in
the Element field:

demand at the corresponding tank. For tanks, this demand can represent an
inflow or outflow (e.g., If T-1 has a demand).

specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding tank (e.g., If T-1 has a

pressure at the corresponding tank (e.g., If T-1 has a pressure of).
LevelThis attribute is used to create a condition based on a specified water

level at the corresponding tank (e.g., If the water in T-1 is at a level of).
Time to DrainThis attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of

time required for the tank to drain (e.g., If T-1 drains in X hours).
Time to FillThis attribute is to create a condition based on the amount of

time required for the tank to fill (e.g., If T-1 fills in X hours).
ReservoirsThe following attributes are available for use when a Reservoir is

chosen in the Element field:

demand at the corresponding reservoir. For reservoirs, this demand can represent an inflow or outflow (e.g., If R-1 has a demand).

specified hydraulic grade at the corresponding reservoir (e.g., If R-1 has a

pressure at the corresponding reservoir (e.g., If R-1 has a pressure of).
PipesThe following attributes are available for use when a Pipe is chosen in the
Element field:
6-271
Controls

rate of discharge at the corresponding pipe (e.g., If P-1 has a discharge of).
StatusThis attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Open

or Closed) of the corresponding pipe (e.g., If P-1 is Open).
ValvesThe following attributes are available for use when a valve is chosen in
the Element field:

rate of discharge at the corresponding valve (e.g., If PRV-1 has a discharge
of).
Note:
The Setting attribute is not available when a GPV is selected in

the Element field.
SettingThis attribute is used to create a condition based on the setting of the

corresponding valve. The type of setting will change depending on the type of
valve that is chosen. The valves and their associated setting types are as follows:
PRVChoosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a

condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PRV-1 has a pressure of).
PSVChoosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a

condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PSV-1 has a pressure of).
PBVChoosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a

condition based on a specified pressure at the PRV (e.g., If PBV-1 has a pressure of).
FCVChoosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a

condition based on a specified rate of discharge at the PRV (e.g., If FCV-1 has
a discharge of).
TCVChoosing the Setting attribute in conjunction with a PRV will create a

condition based on a specified headloss coefficient at the PRV (e.g., If TCV-1
has a headloss of).
StatusThis attribute is used to create a condition based on the status (Closed or

Inactive) of the corresponding valve (e.g., If PRV-1 is Inactive).
System DemandThis will create a condition based on the demands for the entire
system. The fields available when this condition type is selected are: xxxx checkout
this
6-272
Creating Your Model
OperatorThis field allows you to specify the relationship between the Attribute
and the target value for that attribute. The choices include Greater Than (>),
Greater Than Or Equal To (>=), Less Than (<), Less Than Or Equal To (<=),
Equal To (=), or Not Equal To (<>).
System DemandThis field lets you set a system-wide demand.
Clock TimeThis will create a condition based on the clock time during an extended
period simulation. If the extended period simulation is for a period longer than 24
hours, this condition will be triggered every day at the specified time.
Time From StartThis will create a condition based on the amount of time that has
passed since the beginning of an extended period simulation. The following fields are
available when this condition type is selected:
xxxx is target value okay?

Target ValueThis fields label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. The value entered here is used in conjunction with the operator that is chosen
to determine if the condition has been met.
DescriptionThis area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is
an option to change the default description. To do so, click the check box to activate
the description field, and enter your description in the text box. Additionally, the
description field supports the following expandable masks:
%#
ID
%e
Element
%a
Attribute
%o
Operator
%v
Value
%u
Unit
6-273
Controls
Note:
Click the description list box to select one of the predefined

masks.
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically updating the corresponding information when changes
are made to the various condition components.
Summary This area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of
the expanded description.
Composite Conditions
When a Composite Condition is being defined or edited, the lower part of the dialog
box is comprised of a two column table and two buttons. The buttons are as follows:
InsertAdds a new row to the Condition list.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted row from the Condition list.
RefreshUpdates the referenced conditions.
The table contains two columns, as follows:
OperatorThis column allows you to choose the way in which the related
Condition logic will be evaluated. The available choices are If, And, and Or.
Note:
The first condition in the list will use the If operator. Any
additional conditions will allow you to choose between AND and
OR.
Any combination of AND and OR clauses can be used in a rule.
When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher
precedence than AND. Therefore, IF A or B and C is equivalent
to IF (A or B) and C. If the interpretation was meant to be IF A
or (B and C), this can be expressed using two Logical Controls:
Logical Control 1: IF A THEN... and Logical Control 2: IF B
AND C THEN...
ConditionThe drop-down list allows you to choose a condition that was

already created beforehand.
6-274
%#
ID
%v
Value
Creating Your Model

are made to the various condition components.
Note:

masks.
SummaryThis area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of

Actions Tab
Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in
response to an associated control condition. The Actions tab provides a list of all
actions defined in the system. There are two types of actions: simple actions and
composite actions. Actions have an application-provided non-editable ID (e.g., A01
for simple, AA01 for composite).
The Actions tab is divided into sections:
The Actions List displays a list of all logical actions defined in the system. The list
contains four columns: ID (the application defined ID, e.g., A01 for simple, AA01
for composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and references (logical
control references).
6-275
Controls
Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
NewOpens the New Logical Action dialog box, where you can create a
new logical action.
EditDepending on whether a simple or composite action is highlighted,

this button opens the Simple Logical Action or Composite Logical Action
dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted action.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted action. You will be prompted to confirm

this action.
FindOpens the Find Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to
find a particular action based on a variety of criteria.
ReportGenerates a summary of the highlighted action.
-
Control SetWhen a control set is specifed, only actions that are a

component of that control set are displayed in the Actions list.
TypeWhen a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only actions of

that type will be displayed in the Actions list.
Action ElementWhen an Action Element filter other than <All> is

specified, only actions containing the selected Element will be displayed
in the Actions list.
The controls used to create or edit an action vary depending on whether the action
is simple or composite:
Simple Actions
The following controls are used to define or edit Simple Actions:
ElementThe Element field allows you to specify which element the action will
be based upon and provides three methods of choosing this element. The dropdown list displays elements that have been used in other logical controls, the
Ellipsis () button, which opens the Single Element Selection box, and the Select
From Drawing button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical
Drawing view.
AttributeThis field displays the available attributes for the element type specified in the Element field. Not all attributes are available for all element types. The
available attributes include:
6-276
Status This attribute is used to change the status of a pipe, pump, or valve
when the related conditions are met. The available choices are dependant on
the element type.
Creating Your Model
SettingThis attribute is used to change the settings of a pump or valve

when the related conditions are met. The setting type varies depending on the
type of element.
Note:
Pipes can only utilize the Status Attribute, Pumps and all Valves
except for the GPV can utilize either the Status or Setting
Attribute. GPVs can only use the Status Attribute.
For all valves except for the GPV, there is no explicit Active
status with which to base a control uponthe status choices are
Inactive or Closed. After a control sets a valve to Inactive or
Closed, to reactivate the valve another control must be created
with a Setting attribute. This is because a valve cannot be set to
Active, but must have specific input data to work with.
For GPVs, there is no Inactive setting. GPVs can only be set to
Active or Closed. If the GPV is not closed, the valve will always
produce the headlosses associated with it through the HeadDischarge Points table.
OperatorThe operator for logical actions is always EQUAL TO (=).
Attribute ValueThis fields label will change depending on the attribute that is
chosen. Depending on the element type and the attribute that was chosen, the
input field may also change to a drop-down list, which contains the possible
settings for that element. Not all settings are available for all element types.
Note:
Pipes can be set to Open or Closed, Pumps can be set to On, Off,
or have their relative speed factors increase or decrease. GPVs
can be set to Active or Closed. All other valves can be set to
Inactive, Closed, or have their respective settings changed,
depending on the Valve type.
%#
ID
%e
Element
%a
Attribute
%o
Operator
%v
Value (and Unit, if applicable)
6-277
Controls
are made to the various control components.
Note:

masks.
SummaryThis area of the dialog displays an automatically updated preview of the

expanded description.
Composite Actions
When a Composite Action is being defined or edited, the lower section of the dialog
box is comprised of a single column table and two buttons. The Table contains a list of
the Actions to be used. Each row is a drop-down list that allows you to choose an
action that was already created beforehand.
InsertAdds a new row to the Action list
DeleteDeletes the highlighted row from the Action list.
%#
ID
%v
Value
are made to the various control components.
Note:

masks.
Composite logical actions consist of multiple simple logical
actions. These actions are linked with an AND statement.
SummaryThis area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of

6-278
Creating Your Model
Control Sets Tab

The Control Sets tab allows you to create, modify and manage control sets. Control
sets are a way to organize your controls, and also provide the means to use different
controls in different scenarios.
A Control Set is made up of one or more control statements (called Controls) of the
form: If (condition) then (action) else (action). The actions and conditions are
defined under the Conditions or Actions tab under control.
The following options are available in this dialog box:
NewOpens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box. From this window, you
can add previously created logical controls to the new control set.
EditOpens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to edit
the highlighted control set.
DuplicatePrompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to
allow you to add or remove controls from the control set.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this
action.
RenameAllows you to rename the highlighted control set.
ReportGenerates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID,

conditions, actions, and elements for all of the logical controls contained within
the control set.
6-279
Logical Control Sets Dialog Box

The Logical Control Set Editor is divided into two panes.
The left pane, labeled Available Items, contains a list of all of the logical controls that
have been created in the current project. To add controls to the Selected Items pane on
the right, highlight the desired controls and click the [>] button under Add. To add all
of the controls to your Logical Control set, click the [>>] button under Add. To
remove a control from the Selected Items pane, highlight it and click the [<] button
under Remove. To remove all controls from the Selected Items pane, click the [<<]
button under Remove.
Note:
Priority is based upon the order that the controls appear in this
dialog box. The first control in the control set has the highest
priority, and so on. Any control with a set priority will overrule
any control with no set priority.

User data extensions are a set of one or more attribute fields that you can define to
hold data to be stored in the model. User data extensions allow you to add your own
data fields to your project. For example, you can add a field for keeping track of the
date of installation for an element, or the type of area serviced by a particular element.
6-280
Creating Your Model

Note:
The user data does not affect the hydraulic model calculations.
However, their behavior concerning capabilities like editing,
annotating, sorting and database connections is identical to any
of the standard pre-defined attributes.
User data extensions exhibit the same characteristics as the predefined data used in
and produced by the model calculations. This means that user data extensions can be
imported or exported through database and shapefile connections, viewed and edited
in the Property Editor or in FlexTables, included in tabular reports or element detailed
reports, annotated in the drawing, color coded, and reported in the detailed element
reports.
Note:
The terms user data extension and field are used

interchangeably here. In the context of the User Data Extension
feature, these terms mean the same thing.
You define user data extensions in the User Data Extensions dialog box.
To define a user data extension:
1. Select Tools > User Data Extensions.
2. In the list pane on the left, select the element type for which you want to define a
new attribute field.
3. Click the New button to create a new user data extension. A user data extension
with a default name appears under the element type. You can rename the new field
if you wish.
4. In the Property Editor for the new field, enter the following:
Type the name of the new field. This is the unique identifier for the field. The
name field in the Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
Type the label for the new field. This is the label that will appear next to the
field for the user data extension in the Property Editor for the selected element
type. This is also the column heading if the data extension is selected to
appear in a FlexTable.
Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Category field, then use the drop-down
menu in the Select Category dialog box to select an existing category in which
the new field will appear in the Property Editor. To create a new category,
simply type the category name in the field.
Type a number in the Field Order Index field. This is the display order of
fields within a particular category in the Property Editor. This order also
controls the order of columns in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the
new field will be displayed first within the specified category.
Type a description for the field. This description will appear at the bottom of
the Property Editor when the field is selected for an element in your model.
You can use this field as a reminder about the purpose of the field.
6-281
Select an alternative from the drop-down menu in the Alternative field. This is
the alternative that you want to extend with the new field. Need more information on this.
Select a data type from the drop-down menu in the Data Type field.
-
If you select Enumerated, an Ellipses (...) button appears in the Default

Value field. Enumerated user data extensions are fields that present
multiple choices.
Enter the default value for the new field. If the data type is Enumerated, click
the Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor dialog box, where
you define enumerated members.
To import an existing User Data Extension XML File, click the Import
button, then select the file you want to import. User Data Extension XML
Files contain the file name extension .xml or .udx.xml.
To export existing user data extensions, click the Export to XML button, then
type the name of the udx.xml file. All user data extensions for all element
types defined in the current project are exported.
To share the new field among two or more element types, select the user data
extension in the list pane, then click the Sharing button or right-click and
select Sharing. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check
box next to the element or elements that will share the user data extension.
The icon next to the user data extension changes to indicate that it is a shared
field. For more information, see Sharing User Data Extensions Among
Element Types on page 6-287.
To delete an existing user data extension, select the user data extension you
want to delete in the list pane, then click the Delete button, or right-click and
select Delete.
To rename a the display label of an existing user data extension, select the
user data extension in the list pane, click the Rename button or right-click and
select Rename, then type the new display label.
To expand the list of elements and view all user data extensions, click the
Expand All button.
To collapse the list of elements so that no user data extensions are displayed,
click the Collapse All button.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box and save your user data extensions. The new
field(s) you created will appear in the Property Editor for every instance of the
specified element type in your model.
6-282
Creating Your Model
User Data Extensions Dialog Box

The User Data Extensions dialog box displays a summary of the user data extensions
associated with the current project. The dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane
displaying all available Bentley SewerCAD V8i element types, and a property editor.
Import
Lets you merge the user data

extensions in a saved User Data
Extension XML file (.udx.xml or
.xml) into the current project.
Importing a User Data Extension
XML file will not remove any of the
other data extensions defined in your
project. User data extensions that
have the same name as those already
defined in your project will not be
imported.
Export to XML
Lets you save existing user data

extensions for all element types in
your model to a User Data Extension
XML file (.udx.xml) for use in a
different project.
New
Lets you create a new user data

extension for the currently
highlighted element type.
Sharing
Lets you share the current user data

extension with another element type.
When you click this button, the
Shared Field Specification dialog
box opens. For more information,
see Sharing User Data Extensions
Among Element Types on page 6287.
6-283
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted

user data extension
Rename
Lets you rename the display label of

the currently highlighted user data
extension.
Expand All
Expands all of the branches in the

hierarchy displayed in the list pane.
Collapse All
Collapses all of the branches in the

The Property Editor contains the following controls:

Alphabetized
Displays the attribute fields in the

Property Editor in alphabetical
order.
Categorized
Displays the attribute fields in the

Property Editor in categories. This
is the default.
and the following fields, which define your new user data extension:
Table 6-2:
Attribute
Description
General
6-284
Name
The unique identifier for the field. The name field in the
Property Editor is the name of the column in the data source.
Label
The label that will appear next to the field for the user data
extension in the Property Editor for the selected element type.
This is also the column heading if the data extension is
selected to appear in a FlexTable.
Category
The section in the Property Editor for the selected element

type in which the new field will appear. You can create a new
category or use an existing category. For example, you can
create a new field for manholes and display it in the Physical
section of that elements Property Editor.
Creating Your Model

Table 6-2:
Attribute
Description
Field Order
Index
The display order of fields within a particular category in the

Property Editor. This order also controls the order of columns
in Alternative tables. An entry of 0 means the new field will be
displayed first within the specified category.
Field
Description
The description of the field. This description will appear at the

bottom of the Property Editor when the field is selected for an
element in your model. You can use this field as a reminder
about the purpose of the field.
Alternative
Lets you select an existing alternative to extend with the new

field.
Referenced
By
Displays all the element types that are using the field. For
example, if you create a field called "Installation Date" and you
set it up to be shared, this field will show the element types that
share this field. So for example, if you set up a field to be
shared by manholes and transitions, the Referenced By field
would show "Manhole, Transition".
Units
Data Type
Lets you specify the data type for the user data extension.
Click the down arrow in the field then select one of the
following data types from the drop-down menu:
IntegerAny positive or negative whole number.
RealAny fractional decimal number (for example, 3.14).

It can also be unitized with the provided options.
TextAny string (text) value up to 255 characters long.
Long TextAny string (text) up to 65,526 characters long.
Date/TimeThe current date. The current date appears

by default in the format month/day/year. Click the down
arrow to change the default date.
BooleanTrue or False.
EnumeratedWhen you select this data type, an Ellipses

button appears in the Default Value field. Click the
Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor
dialog box, where you can add enumerated members and
their associated values. For more information, see
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box on page 6-289.
6-285

Table 6-2:
6-286
Attribute
Description
Default Value
The default value for the user data extension. The default
value must consistent with the selected data type. If you chose
Enumerated as the data type, click the Ellipses (...) button to
display the Enumeration Editor.
Dimension
Lets you specify the unit type. Click the drop-down arrow in the
field to see a list of all available dimensions. This field is
available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Storage Unit
Lets you specify the storage units for the field. Click the dropdown arrow in the field to see a list of all available units; the
units listed change depending on the Dimension you select.
This field is available only when you select Real as the Data
Type.
Numeric
Formatter
Lets you select a number format for the field. Click the dropdown arrow in the field to see a list of all available number
formats; the number formats listed change depending on the
Dimension you select. For example, if you select Flow as the
Dimension, you can select Flow, Flow - Pressurized Condition,
Flow Tolerance, or Unit Load as the Numeric Formatter. This
field is available only when you select Real as the Data Type.
Creating Your Model
User Data Extensions Import Dialog Box

The Import dialog box opens after you initiate an Import command and choose the
xml file to be imported. The Import dialog displays all of the domain elements
contained within the selected xml file. Uncheck the boxes next to a domain element to
ignore them during import.
Sharing User Data Extensions Among Element Types

You can share user data extensions across multiple element types in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i. Shared user data extensions are displayed in the Property Editor for
all elements types that share that field.
The icons displayed next to the user data extensions in the User Data Extensions
dialog box change depending on the status of the field:
Indicates a new unsaved user data extension.
Indicates a user data extension that has been saved to the data source.
Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types
but has not been applied to the data source.
Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types
and that has been applied to the data source. Fields with this icon appear in
the Property Editor for any elements of the associated element types that appear in
your model.
6-287

Observe the following rules when sharing user data extensions:
You can select any number of element types with which to share the field. The list
is limited to element types that support the Alternative defined for the Field. For
example, the Physical Alternative may only apply to five of the element types. In
this case, you will only see these five items listed in the Alternative drop-down
menu.
You cannot use the sharing feature to move a field from one element type to
another. Validation is in place to ensure that only one item is selected and if it is
the same as the original, default selection. If it is not, a message appears telling
you that when sharing a field, you must select at least two element types, or select
the original element type.
To unshare a field that is shared among multiple element types, right-click the user
data extension you want to keep in the list pane, then select Sharing. Clear all the
element types that do not want to share the field with and click OK. If you leave
only one element type checked in the Shared Field Specification dialog box, it
must be the original element type for which you created the user data extension.
The fields that were located under the manhole and conduit element type root
nodes will be removed completely.
You can also unshare a field by using the Delete button or right-clicking and
selecting Delete. This will unshare and delete the field.
To share a user data extension:

1. Open the User Data Extensions dialog box by selecting Tools > User Data Extensions.
2. In the list pane, create a new user data extension to share or select an existing user
data extension you want to share, then click the Sharing button.
3. In the Shared Field Specification dialog box, select the check box next to each
element type that will share the user data extension.
4. Click OK.
5. The icon next to the user data extension in the list pane changes to indicate that it
is a shared field.
Shared Field Specification Dialog Box

You select element types to share a user data extension in the Shared Field Specification dialog box. The dialog box contains a list of all possible element types with check
boxes.
6-288
Creating Your Model

Select element types to share the current user data extension by selecting the check
box next to the element type. Clear a selection if you no longer want that element type
to share the current field.
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box

The Enumeration Editor dialog box appears when you select Enumerated as the Data
Type for a user data extension, then click the Ellipses (...) button in the Default Value
field. Enumerated fields are fields that contain multiple selections - you define these
as members in the Enumeration Editor dialog box.
For example, suppose you want to identify conduits in a model of a new subdivision
by one of the following states: Existing, Proposed, Abandoned, Removed, and
Retired. You can define a new user data extension with the label Pipe Status for
conduits, and select Enumerated as the data type. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the
Default Value field in the Property Editor for the user data extension to display the
Enumeration Editor dialog box. Then enter five members with unique labels (one
member for each unique pipe status) and enumeration values in the table. After you
close the User Data Extensions dialog box, the new field and its members will be
available in the Property Editor for all conduits in your model. You will be able to
select any of the statuses defined as members in the new Pipe Status field.
You can specify an unlimited number of members for each user data extension, but
member labels and values must be unique. If they are not unique, an error message
appears when you try to close the dialog box.
The dialog box contains a table and the following controls:
NewLets you add a new row to the table. Each row in the table represents a
unique enumerated member of the current user data extension.
DeleteDeletes the current row from the table. The enumerated member defined
in that row is deleted from the user data extension.
You define enumerated members in the table, which contains the following columns:
Enumeration Member Display LabelThe label of the member. This is the

label you will see in Bentley SewerCAD V8i where ever the user data extension
appears (Property Editor, FlexTables, etc.).
Enumeration ValueA unique integer index associated with the member label.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses this number when it performs operations such as
queries.
6-289
Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box
Batch Pipe Split Dialog Box

The Batch Pipe Split dialog allows you to split pipes with neighboring nodes that are
found within the specified tolerance.
Choose Features to Process: Allows you to specify which pipes to include in the
split operation. The following options are available:
All: All pipes in the model that have a neighboring node within the specified
tolerance will be split by that junction.
Selection: Only the pipes that are currently selected in the drawing pane will
be split by a neighboring junction that lies within the specified tolerance.
Selection Set: Only those pipes that are contained within the selection set
specified in the drop down list or pipes that lie within the tolerance of a node
that is contained in the selection set will be split by a neighboring junction
that lies within the specified tolerance.
Allow splitting with inactive nodes: When this box is checked, nodes that are
marked Inactive will not be ignored during the split operation.
Tolerance: This value is used to determine how close a pipe must be to a node in
order for the pipe to be split by that junction.
Pipes will be split by every node that falls within the specified tolerance. To
prevent unwanted pipe splits, first use the Network Navigator's "Network Review
> Pipe Split Candidates" query to verify that the tolerance you intend to use for
the Batch Split operation will not include nodes that you do not want involved in
the pipe split operation.
To use the Network Navigator to assist in Batch Pipe Split operations

1. Open the Network Navigator.
2. Click the [>] button and select the Network Review...Pipe Split Candidates query.
3. In the Query Parameters dialog box, type the tolerance you will be using in the
pipe split operation and click OK.
4. In the Network Navigator, highlight nodes in the list that you do not want to be
included in the pipe split operation and click the Remove button.
5. Open the Batch Pipe Split dialog.
6. Click the Selection button.
7. Type the tolerance you used in the Network Review query and click OK.
6-290
Creating Your Model
External Tools
Use the External Tool Manager to manage custom menu commands, which are then
located in the Tools menu for quick accessibility.
Click Tools>External Tools to create a custom menu command from any executable
file. Executable file types include:
.exe
.com
.pif
.bat
.cmd
The External Tool Manager consists of the following elements:
External Tool List PaneThis pane lists the external tools that have been
created. All of the tools listed in this pane will be displayed in the Tools >
External Tools menu.
NewCreates a new external tool in the list pane.
DeleteDeletes the currently highlighted tool.
RenameAllows you to rename the currently highlighted tool.
CommandThis field allows you to enter the full path to the executable file that
the tool will initiate. Click the ellipsis button to open a Windows Open dialog to
allow you to browse to the executable.
ArgumentsThis optional field allows you to enter command line variables that
are passed to the tool or command when it is activated. Click the > button to open
a submenu containing predefined arguments. Arguments containing spaces must
be enclosed in quotes. The available arguments are:
Project DirectoryThis argument passes the current project directory to the

executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjDir).
Project File NameThis argument passes the current project file name to the
executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjFileName).
Project Store File NameThis argument passes the current project datastore
file name to the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is
%(ProjStoreFileName).
Working DirectoryThis argument passes the current working directory to

the executable upon activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjWorkDir).
6-291
External Tools
Initial DirectorySpecifies the initial or working directory of the tool or

command. Click the > button to open a submenu containing predefined directory
variables. The available variables are:
Project DirectoryThis variable specifies the current project directory as

the Initial Directory. The variable string is %(ProjDir).
Working DirectoryThis variable specifies the current working directory as

the Initial Directory. The variable string is %(ProjWorkDir).
TestThis button executes the external tool using the specified settings.
External Tools Workflow

Access External Tools from Tools->External Tools->Customize.
If there are any existing tools they will appear as menu items above Customize with a
separator.
1. In the External Tools dialog, click the new button to create a new external tool.
2. The command field should contain the entire path and filename to execute. Use
the [] button to browse to the program or file that will execute. This can be any
file with the following extensions:
a. exe
b. com
c. pif (shortcut file)
d. bat
e. cmd
3. The arguments field is optional. If the program you selected can receive arguments you have a number to choose from.
a. Project Directory - this is the directory to the currently open project.
Displayed as %(ProjDir)
b. Project Filename - this is the filename of the currently open project (what you
see in the project file tab near the top of the drawing window). Displayed as
%(ProjFileName)
c. Project Store Filename - this is the temporary filename that is used and is
stored in the user's temporary directory. Displayed as %(ProjStoreFileName)
d. Working Directory - this is normally the temporary folder location (the user's
temporary folder) where the project store file is located. Displayed as %(ProjWorkDir)
6-292
Creating Your Model

4. The initial directory is also optional. This is used to set a working directory if one
is required by the program you selected. Normally it is not required. You have the
choice between the following:
a. Project Directory - the directory where the project file is located. Displayed as
%(ProjDir)
b. Working Directory - the directory where the project store file is located.
Displayed as %(ProjWorkDir)
TRex Wizard
The TRex Wizard steps you through the process of automatically assigning elevations
to specified nodes based on data from a Digital Elevation Model or a Digital Terrain
Model.
6-293
TRex Wizard
Step 1: File Selection
The DEM, DTM, DDF, or SHP (contour shapefile) file, the SewerCAD V8i model,
and the features to which elevations will be assigned are specified.
6-294
Data Source TypeThis menu allows you to choose the type of file that contains
the input data you will use.
FileThis field displays the path where the DXF, XML, or SHP file is located.
Use the browse button to find and select the desired file.
Spatial Reference Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this field to open the Spatial
Reference Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify the spatial reference
being used by the elevation data file.
Select Elevation FieldSelect the elevation unit.
X-Y UnitsThis menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated with the X and Y coordinates of the elevation data file.
Z UnitsThis menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated
with the Z coordinates of the elevation data file.
Clip Dataset to ModelIn some cases, the data source contains elevation data
for an area that exceeds the dimensions of the area being modeled. When this box
is checked, TRex will calculate the models bounding box, find the larger dimension (width or height), calculate the Buffering Percentage of that dimension, and
increase both the width and height of the model bounding box by that amount.
Then any data point that falls outside of the new bounding box will not be used to
generate the elevation mesh. If this box isnt checked, all the source data points
are used to generate the elevation mesh. Checking this box should result in faster
calculation speed and use less memory.
Buffering PercentageThis field is only active when the Clip Dataset to Model
box is checked. The percentage entered here is the percentage of the larger dimension (width or height) of the models bounding box that will be added to both the
bounding box width and height to find the area within which the source data
points will be used to build the elevation mesh.
Spatial Reference (ArcGIS Mode Only)Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this
field to open the Spatial Reference Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify
the spatial reference being used by the SewerCAD V8i model file.
Also update inactive elementsCheck this box to include inactive elements in

the elevation assignment operation. When this box is unchecked, elements that are
marked Inactive will be ignored by TRex.
AllWhen this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to all
nodes within the SewerCAD V8i model.
SelectionWhen this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to

all currently highlighted nodes.
Creating Your Model
Selection SetWhen this is selected, the Selection Set menu is activated. When
the Selection Set button is selected, TRex will assign elevations to all nodes
within the selection set that is specified in this menu.
Note:
If the SewerCAD V8i model (which may or may not have a spatial
reference explicitly associated with it) is in a different spatial
reference than the DEM/DTM (which does have a spatial
reference explicitly associated with it), then the features of the
model will be projected from the models spatial reference to the
spatial reference used by the DEM/DTM.
6-295
TRex Wizard
Step 2: Completing the TRex Wizard
The results of the elevation extraction process are displayed and the results can be
applied to a new or existing physical alternative.
6-296
Results Preview PaneThis tabular pane displays the elevations that were
calculated by TRex. The table can be sorted by label by clicking the Label column
heading and by elevation by clicking the Elevation column heading. You can filter
the table by right-clicking a column in the table and selecting the Filter...Custom
command. You can also right-click any of the values in the elevation column to
change the display options.
Use Existing AlternativeWhen this is selected, the results will be applied to

the physical alternative that is selected in the Use Existing Alternative menu. This
menu allows the selection of the physical alternative to which the results will be
applied.
New Alternative When this is selected, the results will be applied to a new
physical alternative. First, the currently active physical alternative will be duplicated, then the results generated by TRex will be applied to the newly created
alternative. The name of this new alternative must be supplied in the New Alternative text field.
Parent AlternativeSelect an alternative to duplicate from the menu, or select

<None> to create a new Base alternative.
Export ResultsThis exports the results generated by TRex to a tab or commadelimited text file (.TXT). These files can then be re-used by SewerCAD V8i or
imported into other programs.
Click Finish when complete, or Cancel to close without making any changes.
Chapter
Loading
Click one of the following links to learn how to add loading data to your Bentley
SewerCAD V8i model:
Loading on page 7-297
Types of Loads on page 7-299
Composite Hydrographs on page 7-318
Inflows on page 7-319
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections on page 7-332
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data on page 7-335
Pipeline Infiltration on page 7-360
Loading
The word "loading" is used in Bentley SewerCAD V8i to describe flow entering the
sewer system. Depending on the type of system, available data and level of detail,
there are numerous ways of loading Bentley SewerCAD V8i models. Some of the
distinctions relate to whether the system is a combined or sanitary system, whether the
loads are existing with flow data or proposed loads with only land use descriptions,
whether the flow refers to dry weather sanitary flows or wet weather flow.
Note:
For more information on loading, see Chapter 6 "Dry weather

wastewater flows" and Chapter 7 "Wet weather wastewater
flows" in the book Wastewater Collection System Modeling and
Design" by Haestad Press.
With the exception of known fixed flows, the loading to the model consists of a table
of flow or pattern values vs. time. The generic word "collection" is used to describe
inputs to Bentley SewerCAD V8i that are not a single value but are some type of table.
For example, you will see Inflow Collections, which are simply a table of inflow vs.
time.
7-297
Loading
Methods for Entering Loads

There are several methods for entering loads into Bentley SewerCAD V8i. In general,
most of the methods described can be applied to any node type element (i.e., manhole,
pressure junction, but not outfalls). Some such as stormwater loading must be applied
to catchments and conduit infiltration can only be applied to conduits. They are
summarized below and described in more detail later in this chapter.
Inflow consists of data which may be:
Known constant flow
Hydrograph - flow vs. time
Pattern Load - baseline flow times multiplier
In general, the hydrograph input is used for wet weather events while pattern
loads are used for sanitary flows which repeat from one day to the next. For more
information, see Inflows on page 7-319.
Sanitary loading consists of data which may be
Know constant flow
Hydrograph - flow vs. time
Pattern Load - baseline flow times multiplier
Unit loads - number of units (e.g. houses) times unit load (e.g. flow/house/
day)
Sanitary loads are generally used to describe dry weather contribution to flow
from domestic, commercial and industrial customers. For more information, see
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections on page 7-332.
Load Builder consists of using the LoadBuilder model to place loads on nodes
using ArcGIS functions. Unlike the methods above which are applicable when the
loads are already known for each node, LoadBuilder is used when the loading data
is not yet associated with individual nodes. For example, the data can be in the
form of:
Customer water use billing data
Area-wide flow measurement
Load (e.g. population or land use assigned to polygons) times unit loading
factors (e.g. flow/day/area)
This method must be started from ArcMap or ArcCatalog. For more information,
see Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data on page 7-335.
7-298
Loading
Conduit infiltration can be used to model infiltration into pipes along the length of
the pipe. This can be specified as:
Known unit flow based on Length, Area, Diameter-length, or Count.
Hydrograph
Pattern
For more information, see Pipeline Infiltration on page 7-360.

Summary
In general:
Dry weather load can be entered using Inflow, Sanitary Loading and LoadBuilder.
Wet weather flow in sanitary systems can be entered using inflow, RDII or conduit
infiltration.
Wet weather flow in stormwater and combined systems can be entered using
Inflow, Stormwater flow or Conduit infiltration.
Types of Loads
Within each of the loading methods available in Bentley SewerCAD V8i, there are
several ways to enter (add) data. For example, under the method Inflow for loading
the model, there are two types of inflow - fixed and hydrograph. For example, under
the method Inflow for loading the model, there are three types of inflow - fixed,
hydrograph and pattern load. These loading types may be used by several methods.
For example, pattern loading is used by the Inflow, Sanitary and Pipeline Infiltration
methods. The dialogs for each of these types are the same regardless of the method
being used.
7-299
Types of Loads
The following table illustrates which types of loads are available in each method.
Modified Rational
SWMM
SCS
X
SWMM
SCS
Stormwater
Inflow
Sanitary Load
Unit Load
Pattern Load
Hydrograph
RDII Inflow
Method
Fixed
RTK Method
Unit Hydrograph
Modified Rational
Table 7-1: Types of Loads
LoadBuilder *
Conduit infiltration *
RTK Method
X
Stormwater
Inflow
Unit Load
Hydrograph
RDII Inflow
Method
Fixed
Unit Hydrograph
Table 7-2: Types of Loads
LoadBuilder *
Conduit infiltration *
7-300
Loading
*LoadBuilder used GIS based calculations described in [hot link].
*Conduit infiltrations uses fixed flows on a per length or area basis.
Adding Fixed Loads

A fixed load can be entered as a:
Known flow under sanitary loading
Pattern load with the multiplier set to 1
Hydrograph inflow with "fixed" specified
Hydrograph vs. Pattern Loads

Hydrographs and pattern loads are two distinct ways to describe how flow varies over
time. Ultimately, you can attain the same results using either type but there are some
behavioral and semantic differences that should be noted.
Pattern loads consists of a single average base load and a series of dimensionless
multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over time. A hydrograph, simply, is
a time-discharge series.
Hydrographs are usually applied as wet weather loads, and are generated using hydrologic methods, while patterns are more typically applied to sanitary loads. Pattern
multipliers are usually developed based on flow monitoring data for the system under
consideration. The multipliers are used to account for time-of-day variations in sewer
loads. Usually a handful of patterns are developed (e.g. residential area, commercial
area, large industry) and these patterns are assigned to the appropriate nodes. These
statements represent typical usage of both loading types; they do not represent hard
and fast rules.
During an extended period simulation if the duration of the simulation exceeds the
duration of a pattern then the pattern will repeat itself. If the duration of the simulation exceeds the duration of a hydrograph the last point of the hydrograph will remain
constant for the extent of the remaining time.
The following figure shows the difference between a hydrograph and pattern load.
7-301
Types of Loads
Figure 7-1:
Difference between a Hydrograph and Pattern Load
Adding User Defined Hydrographs

You can directly associate a user-defined unit hydrograph to a node element (e.g.
manhole, wet well) for runoff calculations.
To add a user defined hydrograph to a node:
1. Click a node in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a node
and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Inflow (Sanitary Loading) or Inflow (Wet) section of the Property Editor,
click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Sanitary Loads or the Inflow (Wet)
Collection field.
3. In the Sanitary Loads dialog click the New button and select Hydrograph - Flow
vs. Time. In the Inflow (Wet)) Collection dialog click the New button and select
Hydrograph Load.
4. Click the New button to add a row to the Time vs. Flow table.
5. Enter Time vs. Flow data into the table. Press Enter after typing a value to add a
new row to the table (or click the New button to add a new row).
To insert a row at a time in between two other times, simply insert at the bottom of
the table. When you close the table then reopen it, the row will be in the correct
position.
7-302
Loading
Note:
Time and flow units must be consistent with time and flow units
used throughout the model.
6. Click the Graph button to view a plot of the Time vs. Flow data.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the hydrograph to the Property Editor
for the node.
Pattern Loads
A pattern load consists of a base flow and a pattern, which is a set of multipliers used
to adjust base flow over the course of a day (or some other period). Patterns can also
be used with unit loads by assigning a pattern setup for a particular scenario.
Working with Patterns

A dynamic analysis is actually a series of Steady State analyses run against time-variable loads such as sewer inflows, demands, or chemical constituents. Patterns allow
you to apply automatic time-variable changes within the system. The most common
application of patterns is for residential or industrial loads. Diurnal curves are patterns
that relate to the changes in loads over the course of the day, reflecting times when
people are using more or less water than average. Most patterns are based on a multiplication factor versus time relationship, whereby a multiplication factor of one represents the base value (which is often the average value).
Using a representative diurnal curve for a residence as illustrated below, we see that
there is a peak in the diurnal curve in the morning as people take showers and prepare
breakfast, another slight peak around noon, and a third peak in the evening as people
arrive home from work and prepare dinner. Throughout the night, the pattern reflects
the relative inactivity of the system, with very low flows compared to the average.
7-303
Types of Loads
Note:
This curve is conceptual and should not be construed as

representative of any particular network.
There are two basic forms for representing a pattern: stepwise and continuous. A stepwise pattern is one that assumes a constant level of usage over a period of time, and
then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady until the next
jump. A continuous pattern is one for which several points in the pattern are known
and sections in between are transitional, resulting in a smoother pattern. For the
continuous pattern in the figure above, the multiplication factor and slope at the start
time and end times are the same. This is a continuity that is recommended for patterns
that repeat.
Because of the finite time steps used for calculations, this software converts continuous patterns into stepwise patterns for use by the algorithms. In other words for a
time step a multiplier is interpolated from the pattern curve. That multiplier is then
used for the duration of the time step, until a new multiplier is selected for the next
time step.
Patterns provide a convenient way to define the time variable aspects of system loads.
7-304
Loading
Pattern Manager
A pattern is a series of time step values, each having an associated multiplier value.
During an extended period analysis, each time step of the simulation uses the multiplier from the pattern corresponding to that time. If the duration of the simulation is
longer than the pattern, the pattern is repeated. The selected multiplier is applied to
any baseline load that is associated with the pattern. You can also define daily and
monthly multipliers for any pattern.
Patterns provide an effective means of applying time-variable system demands to the
distribution model. The Pattern Manager allows you to create the following types of
patterns:
HydraulicThis type of pattern can be applied to Junctions or Tanks. Use this

pattern type to describe demand or inflow patterns over time.
PumpThis type of pattern can be applied to Variable Speed Pumps only. Use
this pattern type to describe changes in the pumps Relative Speed Factor. In the
Property dialog box for the pump, Is Variable Speed Pump needs to be set to True
and the VSP type needs to be Pattern Based.
The following management controls are located above the pattern list pane:
New
Creates a new pattern of the highlighted

type.
Copy
Creates a copy of the pattern that is currently

7-305
Types of Loads
Delete
Deletes the pattern that is currently

Rename
Renames the pattern that is currently

Report
Opens a report of the data associated with

the pattern that is currently highlighted in
the list pane.
Synchronization
Options
Browse the Engineering Library,

synchronize to or from the library, import
from the library or export to the library.
Tip:
Use the Report button to view or print a graph or detailed report

of your pattern.
The right half of the dialog consists of controls that allow you to define the settings for
the pattern that is currently selected in the list of patterns on the left side of the dialog.
Start TimeThe first time step in the pattern. The start time format is a standard
24-hour clock. The format is Hour:Minute:Second AM or PM (e.g., 12:45:30
PM).
Starting MultiplierThe multiplier value of the first time step point in your
pattern. Any real number can be used for this multiplier (it does not have to be
1.0).
Pattern FormatThe following pattern formats are available:
StepwiseThe multiplier values are considered to be the average value for

the interval between the specified time and the next time. Patterns using this
format will have a staircase appearance. Multipliers are set at the specified
time and held constant until the next point in the pattern.
ContinuousThe multipliers are considered to be the instantaneous values at

a particular time. Patterns using this format will have a curvilinear appearance. Multipliers are set at the specified time, and are linearly increased or
decreased to the next point in the pattern.
Hourly patterns consist of a number of time step points, defined in the table below the
Pattern Format control on the Hourly tab.
7-306
Loading
Time From StartThe amount of time from the Start Time of the pattern to the
time step point being defined.
MultiplierThe multiplier value associated with the time step point.
Daily and Monthly factors are defined in the same way as hourly ones, the difference
being that rather than defining time steps you enter multipliers for each day of the
week (for Daily patterns) or for each month of the year (for monthly patterns).
A graph of the currently selected pattern is displayed in the lower right corner of the
dialog.
Note:
Patterns must begin and end with the same multiplier value. This
is because patterns will be repeated if the duration of the
Extended Period Analysis is longer than the pattern duration. In
other words, the last point in the pattern is really the start point
of the patterns next cycle.
An Extended Period Analysis is actually a series of Steady State
analyses for which the boundary conditions of the current time
step are calculated from the conditions at the previous time
step. This software will automatically convert a continuous
pattern format to a stepwise format so that the demands and
source concentrations remain constant during a time step.
An individual node can support multiple hydraulic demands.
Furthermore, each load can be assigned any hydraulic demand
pattern. This powerful functionality makes it easy to combine
two or more types of demand patterns (such as residential and
institutional) at a single loading node.
Defining Pattern Setups

A pattern setup allows you to match unit sanitary (dry weather) loads with appropriate
loading patterns. A pattern setup is associated with each scenario as specified in the
Calculation Options Manager. Each scenario can use a different pattern setup, thus
allowing you to model different loading alternatives for different extended period
simulations.
7-307
Types of Loads
Note:
You must have at least one unit sanitary (dry weather) load set
up in your model and at least one pattern defined before you can
define a pattern setup.
To define a pattern setup:

1. Define at least one unit sanitary (dry weather) load in your current project. For
more information, see Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on page 7311.
2. Define at least one pattern in your current project.
3. Select Analysis > Pattern Setups or click the Pattern Setups button on the Analysis toolbar.
4. In the Pattern Setups dialog box, click the New button to create a new pattern
setup.
5. The table on the right side of the dialog box displays all of the unit sanitary (dry
weather) loads currently associated with your current project. For each unit load
in the table, select an existing pattern from the Setup Pattern submenu.
To delete an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in the list
pane, then click the Delete button.
To rename an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in the list
pane, then click the Rename button and type the new name of the pattern
setup.
To view a report on an existing pattern setup, select the pattern setup label in
the list pane, then click the Report button.
7. Click Close.
Pattern Setups Dialog Box

The Pattern Setups dialog box lets you define a list of pattern setups. The dialog box
contains a list pane on the left and a table on the right:
7-308
Loading
The dialog box contains the following controls above the list pane:
New
Creates a new pattern setup in the list pane.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted pattern

setup.
Rename

pattern setup.
Report

that contains the input data associated with
the currently highlighted pattern setup.
The right side of the dialog contains a table with the following fields:
Column
Description
Unit Load
Each row displays a unit sanitary (dry weather)

load in the current project.
Set Pattern
Lets you select an existing pattern to apply to the

unit load.
Unit Sanitary Loading

A unit loading consists of a unit (person, building, area) multiplied by a unit load (gal/
capita/day, litres/sq m/day, cfs/acre). The units are assigned to individual nodes
elements (manholes, pressure junctions) while the unit loads are created using the Unit
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box.
Unit loads are calculated as: Load (flow Units) = Unit load (flow/number) x number
of Loading units. For example: 100 gallons/capita/day x 40 people = 4000 gallons per
day.
If the unit loads are not assigned to nodes but to polygons in a GIS, then it is best to
use LoadBuilder to import the loads. For more information, see Using LoadBuilder
to Assign Loading Data on page 7-335.
For more information, see Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on page 7311 and Types of Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads on page 7-310.
7-309
Types of Loads
Unit loads correspond to a baseline load and time of day patterns can be assigned to
scenarios. For more information, see Defining Pattern Setups on page 7-307.
Default unit load information is not stored with the project but with a library that can
be shared between projects. Default values are provided in the library called "HMI
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads.xml"
Types of Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

The following types of unit sanitary loads are supported in Bentley SewerCAD V8i:
Population-based
The most common way of specifying sanitary loads to a sewer system is to make them
proportional to the contributing population. Population-based unit sanitary loads
define loads as a function of adjusted contributing population. You can select the
population loading units that will be used and the unit load per population unit. For
example, the unit sanitary load, Home (Average), specifies Resident as the population
loading unit, and 280 l/d per Resident as the unit load per population unit.
Non-population-based
Non-population-based unit sanitary loads can be area-based (function of contributing
area), discharge-based (function of direct discharge), or count-based (function of a
user-defined count).
Area-based
Area-based unit sanitary loads are commonly used to specify industrial loads and
steady inflows. Use these unit sanitary loads whenever your load is specified as a
function of contributing area. For example, you may use "area residential" (in hectare)
as a property of each node and 400 L/day/hectare as the unit loading.
Discharge-based
Discharge-based unit sanitary loads are used to directly specify loads without specifying them on the basis of some other count, such as population or area.
There are two general ways to use discharge based loads:
7-310
Loading
Specify 1.0 discharge unit (e.g. l/day, gpd, cfs, etc.) as the unit load. Then, when
using the load, specify the total desired load for the loading unit count. For
example, you can create a load called Liter per Day whose loading unit type is
Discharge, loading unit is l/day, and unit load is 1.0. When you use this load at a
manhole, a wet well, or a pressure junction, you specify 50.0 as the loading unit
count. This yields a base load of 50 l/day.
Specify total desired load as the unit load. Then, when using the load, only
specify 1.0 as the loading unit count. For example, you can create a load called
Industry XYZ whose loading unit type is Discharge, loading unit is l/day, and unit
load is 2000.0. When you use this load at the manhole, wet well, or pressure junction, you would specify 1.0 as the loading unit count. This yields a base load of
2000 l/day.
In other words, you can specify a unit load of 1.0 in the Unit Sanitary Load Library
and determine the total load at each node through the loading unit count, or you can
specify the total load in the Unit Sanitary Load Library and then have a loading unit
count of 1.0.
Count-based
Count-based unit sanitary loads should be used for any load that is not area, population, nor discharge-based. These loads allow you to specify any loading unit such as
loading per vehicle, machine, or anything else.
Loading units in user-defined counts are treated only as labels. Conversion between
these units is always 1 to 1.
Adding Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

Bentley SewerCAD V8i defines unit sanitary loads in editable Engineering Libraries,
allowing you to edit predefined unit sanitary loads and insert new ones. A unit sanitary
load is used to specify loads to a sewer system for a user-selected loading unit. Unit
sanitary loads can be either population-based or non-population-based. Populationbased unit sanitary loads specify a load to the sewer system as a function of the
contributing population. Non-population-based loads specify loads based on service
area, discharge, or user-defined counts.
You add unit sanitary loads using the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box or
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Engineering Libraries.
7-311
Types of Loads
To add a unit sanitary (dry weather) load:
1. Select Component > Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads, or click the Unit
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads button on the Analysis toolbar.
2. In the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box, click the New button, then
select the type of unit sanitary load you want to create from the submenu (Area,
Count, Discharge, or Population).
3. On the Unit Sanitary Load tab, enter the following data:
For area-based loads, select the desired unit from the Area Unit drop-down
menu.
For discharge-based loads, select the desired unit from the Discharge Units
drop down menu.
For count-based loads, type the base unit used to define the count-based load
in the Count Load Unit field. You can specify any unit you want, such as
loading per vehicle, machine, or anything else.
For population-based loads, select the desired unit from the Population Units
drop-down menu.
Type the amount of flow contributed per loading unit in the Unit Load field.
Type the count of adjusted population per loading unit in the Population
Equivalent field. For area based loads, this is essentially a population density,
or population per unit area.
Check the Report Adjusted Population check box to report the adjusted population with other populations. If you clear this check box, the adjusted population will be not be reported as part of the total population.
4. You can save your new load in Bentley SewerCAD V8i Engineering Libraries for
future use. To do this, perform these steps:
a. Click the Synchronization Options button, then select Export to Library.
The Engineering Libraries dialog box appears.
b. Use the plus and minus signs to expand and collapse the list of available
libraries, then select the library into which you want to export your new unit
sanitary load.
c. Click Close to close the Engineering Libraries dialog box.
7-312
To delete a load, select the load label then click Delete.
Loading
To rename an load, select the load label you want to rename, click Rename,
then type the new name for the load.
To view a report on a load, select the load label for which you want a report
then click Report.
6. Click Close to close the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads dialog box.
To add a unit sanitary load in the Engineering Library:
1. Select Tools > Engineering Libraries to display the Engineering Libraries dialog
box.
2. Click the plus sign next to the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads Library to
expand the list of items (categories and folders) included in that library. This
library includes a category entitled Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads.
Note:
You can add new items to a category or a folder, add new folders
to categories, and add new categories to libraries. For more
information, see Engineering Libraries on page 6-290.
3. Right-click the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads category (or a different category or folder) and select New Item.
4. Define the new unit sanitary load in the Editor pane on the right as described in
the following steps:
a. Type the unit load in the Unit Load field.
b. Select the load type from the Loading Unit Type drop-down (Area Based,
Count Based, Discharge Based, or Population Based).
c. Select the load units from the Sanitary Unit Load Units drop-down. For countbased loads, you can specify any unit you want, such as loading per vehicle or
machine.
d. For area-, count-, and discharge-based loads, type the count of adjusted population per loading unit in the Pop.Equivalent (Capita) field. For area based
loads, this is essentially a population density, or population per unit area.
e. For area-, count-, and discharge-based loads, select True from the Report
Adjusted Population drop down to report the adjusted population with other
populations. Select False if you dont want to report the adjusted population
as part of total population.
5. Click Close. Your new unit sanitary load is now part of the Engineering Libraries
and can be re-used any time.
7-313
Types of Loads
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to create unit sanitary (dry weather) loads. There are two
sections: the list pane on the left and the tab section on the right. The list pane lets you
create, edit, and delete unit sanitary loads and the tab section contains entry fields for
each type of unit sanitary load.
7-314
Loading
The following controls are available in the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load dialog
box:
New
Creates a new unit sanitary load that uses

an automatically created label.
AreaAdds a new area-based unit

sanitary load to the list pane. An areabased unit sanitary load is a function of
contributing service area.
CountAdds a new count-based unit

sanitary load. A count-based unit sanitary load is a function of a user-defined
count. Count-based unit sanitary loads
should be used for any load that is not
area-, discharge-, or population-based.
DischargeAdds a new dischargebased unit sanitary load. A dischargebased unit sanitary load is a function of
direct discharge.
PopulationAdds a new populationbased unit sanitary load. A populationbased unit sanitary load is a function of
adjusted contributing population.
7-315
Types of Loads
7-316
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted unit

sanitary load.
Rename

unit sanitary load.
Report

that contains the input data associated with
the currently highlighted unit sanitary load.
Synchronization
Options

Browse Engineering Library

Opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to
browse the Unit Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Load Engineering Libraries.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you

update a set of unit sanitary loads
previously imported from a Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load Engineering
Library. The updates reflect changes
that have been made to the library
since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryLets you

update an existing Unit Sanitary (Dry
Weather) Load Engineering Library
using current unit sanitary loads that
were initially imported but have since
been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you

import a unit sanitary load from an
existing Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Load Engineering Library.
Export To LibraryLets you export

the current unit sanitary load to an
existing Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather)
Load Engineering Library.
Loading
The tab section includes the following controls:
Unit Sanitary Load Tab
Area Unit
Lets you specify the base unit used to define the

area-based load.
Unit Load
Lets you specify the amount of flow contributed

per loading unit.
Population Equivalent
Lets you specify the count of adjusted population

per loading unit. For area based loads, this is
essentially a population density, or population per
unit area. The Population equivlant field is
optional and simply converts area or count into
equivalent popultion, based on the Population
equivalent value.
Report Adjusted
Population
If this option is toggled ON, the adjusted

population will be reported with other
populations. If the option is OFF, adjusted
population will be not be reported as part of the
total population.
Count Load Unit

count-based load. You can specify any unit you
want, such as loading per vehicle, machine, or
anything else.
Discharge Units

discharge-based load.
Population Units

unit load.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the unit

sanitary load that is currently highlighted in the
list pane. If the load is derived from an
engineering library, the synchronization details
can be found here. If the load was created
manually for this project, the synchronization
details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the pump was not derived from a
library entry.
7-317
Composite Hydrographs
Composite Hydrographs
A composite hydrograph graphs the total flow over time from multiple defined fixed/
unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads and hydrographs.
You can access the composite hydrograph and its corresponding data table from the
Inflow Collection dialog box, which is and the Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box, both of which are available from the Property Editor for
selected elements. For example, a manhole has properties for Inflow Collection and
Sanitary Loading.
This graph is dynamic and is generated automatically each time it is requested.
The time step in a composite hydrograph is determined by going from time 0 to the
Total Simulation Time divided by Calculation Time Step. You can define the Total
Simulation Time and Calculation Time Step values in the Calculation Options
Manager. For more information, see Calculation Options Manager on page 8-433.
Composite Hydrograph Window

This window displays the composite hydrograph from multiple fixed/unit loads,
hydrographs, and pattern loads defined in either the Inflow Collection dialog box or
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box.
This window displays the composite hydrograph from multiple fixed/unit loads and
hydrographs, defined in the Inflow Collection dialog box.
You access the Composite Hydrograph window by clicking the Graph button in the
Inflow Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog
box. If you have only one load or hydrograph defined, the graph displays the data for
that single load or hydrograph.
The Composite Hydrograph window contains the following button:
Chart Settings
Opens the Chart Options dialog box,

allowing you to change graph display
settings.
Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window

IDH_CompositeHydrographDataTableWindow 40008
7-318
Loading
This window displays a table of all the data points in a composite hydrograph from
multiple fixed/unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads defined in either the Inflow
Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box.
The data table displays the same data used in the composite hydrograph in numerical
form. The table contains two columns: the first column displays the time steps and the
second column displays the flows. The values in this table can not be edited.
You access the Data Table window by clicking the Data Table button in the Inflow
Collection dialog box or Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box. If
you have only one load or hydrograph defined, the Data Table displays the data for
that single load or hydrograph.
The Composite Hydrograph Data Table window contains the following buttons:
Copy
Copies the contents of the data table to the

Windows clipboard. You can then paste the
data into a different application or document.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Windows clipboard

into the data table. This is useful if youve
got the data defined in a different document
or application and want to simply copy and
paste it into a composite hydrograph.
Report

dialog box.
Inflows
The word "inflow" is used in two ways in sewer modeling. It is used first to describe
wet weather flows to sewer systems that do not infiltrate through the ground [inflow
and infiltration loading] and it is used in Bentley SewerCAD V8i to describe any flow
which enters a node element whether it is a fixed inflow, hydrograph or pattern load.
The type of load available depends on the element type. The descriptions below, refer
to the Bentley SewerCAD V8i definition of inflow.
The following diagrams describe the various types of flow used in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
7-319
Inflows
Table 7-3: Flow Attributes and Definitions

Flow Attribute
Definition
MH-1
MH-2
MH-3
Flow (Total In)
Flow piped In from upstream links
18
5.5
Flow (Locally Injected)
Flow injected into system at node.
15
Flow (Total Out)
Flow (Total In) + Flow (Locally Injected) or

Flow (Non-Diverted Out) + Flow (Diverted
Out)
15
22
5.5
Flow (System Wet Well Collection)
Portion of the Flow (Total Out) derived from

Inflow (Wet) Collection
10
10
2.5
Flow (System Known)
Portion of the Flow (Total Out) derived from

Known Flows
Flow (Total Diverted In)
Flow (Local Diverted In Same Subnetwork) +

Flow (Diverted In Outside Subnetwork)
5.5
Flow (Local Diverted In Same Subnetwork)
Portion of Flow (Total In) which is diverted in

from an element in the same subnetwork.
Flow (Diverted In Outside Subnetwork)
Portion of Flow (Total In) which is diverted in

from an element outside the subnetwork.
5.5
Flow (System Sanitary)
Portion of Flow (Total Out) which is derived

from Sanitary Loads
2.25
7-320
Loading
Table 7-3: Flow Attributes and Definitions
Flow Attribute
Definition
MH-1
MH-2
MH-3
Flow (Non-Diverted Out)
Portion of Flow (Total Out) which exits via

physical conduits.
15
16.5
4.5
Flow (Diverted Out)
Portion of Flow (Total Out) which exits via

diversion links
5.5
Infiltration (System Additional)
Portion of Flow (Total Out) derived from Flow

(Additional Infiltration) on conduits
0.25
Infiltration (System Non-Additional)
Portion of Flow (Total Out) derived from

computed infiltration on conduits.
0.5
Infiltration (System Total)
Infiltration (System Additional) + Infiltration

(System Non-Additional)
0.75
Flow (System Total Wet Weather)
Flow (System Wet Weather Collection) +

Infiltration (System Total)
10
13
3.25
7-321
Inflows
Note:
The calculated manhole result Flow (Downstream Conduit) is

obtained using the following formula:
Flow (Total Out) - Flow (Diverted Out)
The following diagram describes flows at a wet well:
Table 7-4: Wet Well Flows

Attribute
Definition
Flow (cfs)
Load (Calculated)
Loads from gravity system +

locally injected flow
6 + 5 + 1 = 12
Flow (Total Out)
Flow exiting the wet well into the

pressure network
Flow (Out net)
Net flow exiting the wet well
4 - 1 - 1.5 - 6 - 5 = -9.5
Flow (In net)
Net flow entering the wet well
5 + 6 + 1.5 + 1 - 4 = 9.5
Defining Inflow Collections

You can define an inflow collection for any node element in SewerCAD V8i. An
inflow collection can contain any combination of fixed, hydrograph, or pattern
inflows. An inflow collection can contain any combination of fixed and hydrograph
inflows.
7-322
Loading
To define an inflow collection:
1. Click a node element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click a
node element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Inflow Collection section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...)
button. The Inflow Collection Editor appears.
3. Click the New button, then select the type of inflow you want to create from the
submenu (Fixed Inflow, Hydrograph Inflow, Pattern Inflow).
4. For a Hydrograph Inflow, enter the data points in the hydrograph table. For Fixed
and Pattern Inflows, enter the data in the appropriate fields.
Note:
For a hydrograph, if the last time in the table is less than the total
simulation time, the simulation time and last flow will be
appended to the hydrograph table.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each inflow you want to add to the collection.
6. Click the Composite Hydrograph button to see a graph of the composite
hydrograph.
7. Click the Composite Hydrograph Data Table button to see a tabular view of all
the data points in the composite hydrograph.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the collection data to the Property
Editor.
Inflow Collection Editor

This dialog box lets you define fixed loads, hydrograph loads, and pattern inflows for
any node element. A node may have any combination of fixed loads, hydrograph
loads, and pattern inflows.
The dialog box contains an Inflow list pane and the following controls:
7-323
Inflows
New
7-324

options:
Fixed InflowAdds a new Fixed Load

inflow to the Inflow list pane.
Hydrograph InflowAdds a new

Hydrograph inflow to the Inflow list pane.
Pattern LoadAdds a new Pattern

Load to the inflow list pane.
Delete
Lets you delete the currently highlighted

load.
Report

dialog box.
Composite
Graph
Opens a graph window plotting a curve of a

selected single sanitary load or the composite
hydrograph of all loads.
Composite
Hydrograph
Opens a window listing all the data points in

the curve of a selected single sanitary load or
in the composite hydrograph of all loads.
Loading
The Inflow Collection Editor also contains the following controls:
Hydrograph Table
Lets you define the hydrograph by entering Time

vs. Flow points. This table is available only when
a Hydrograph Load inflow is highlighted in the
Inflow list pane. If the last time in the table is less
than the total simulation time, the simulation time
and last flow will be appended to the hydrograph
table.
Fixed Load
Lets you define a fixed load value. This field is

available only when a Fixed Load inflow is
highlighted in the Inflow list pane. Set the fixed
flow that affects the manhole.
Base Inflow
Lets you enter the average inflow over the

duration of the simulation.
Inflow Pattern
Lets you select the pattern for the selected pattern

inflow. Patterns are selected, edited, and created in
the Pattern Manager, which you access by clicking
the ellipsis (...) button next to this field.
Inflow Control Center

The Inflow Control Center is an editor for manipulating all the inflows in your model.
Using the Inflow Control Center, you can add new inflows, delete existing inflows, or
modify the values for existing inflows using standard SQL select and update queries.
The Inflow Control Center provides demand editing capabilities which can:
open on all inflow nodes, or subset of inflow nodes,
sort and filter based on inflow criteria,
7-325
Inflows
7-326
add, edit, and delete individual inflows,
globally edit inflows.
Loading
The Inflow Control Center consists of a pane consisting of tabs for each element type
that list all of the inflows for all of the elements in the model and a pane that displays
Hydrograph Load collections for the currently highlighted element.
It also contains the following controls:
7-327
Inflows
New
Clicking the New button opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Add Fixed Load to ElementAdds a new Fixed Load to the element

currently selected in the list pane.
Add Hydrograph Load to ElementAdds a new Hydrograph Load to

the element currently selected in the list pane.
Add Pattern Load to ElementAdds a new pattern load to the

element currently selected in the list pane.
Add InflowsReturn the view to te drawing pane, allowing you to

select an element from the drawing. After an element has been
selected, the Apply Inflow Type to Selection dialog opens, allowing
you to enter a Fixed or Hydrograph Load to the element you selected.
Initialize Fixed Loads for All ElementsAdds a Fixed Load to each

element of the current type in the model that does not currently have
an inflow defined. The loads added by this command have an initial
value of 0.0.
Initialize Hydrograph Loads for All ElementsAdds a Hydrograph

Load to each element of the current type in the model that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The hydrographs added by this
command are intially blank.
Initialize Pattern Load for All ElementsAdds a Pattern Load to each

element of the current type in the model that does not currently have
an inflow defined. The loads added by this command have an initial
value of 0.0.
Initialize Fixed Load for SelectionAdds a Fixed Load to each

element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this command
have an initial value of 0.0.
Initialize Hydrograph Load for SelectionAdds a Hydrograph Load to

each element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The hydrographs added by this
command are intially blank.
Initialize Pattern Load for SelectionAdds a Pattern Load to each

element that is currently selected in the list pane that does not
currently have an inflow defined.The loads added by this command
have an initial value of 0.0.
Note:
You can only use one type of Initialize operation

in any given element. For example, if you
perform an Initialize Fixed Loads for All
Elements operation, you will not then be able to
then perform an Initialize Hydrograph Loads for
All Elements on the model.
If you wish to add another inflow of a different
type than the one that was Initialized, you must
do so for each individual element.
7-328
Delete
Deletes the currently selected row from the list. Delete commands can not
be undone.
Report
Opens a report containing the inflow information displayed in each tab of

the list pane.
Create or Add to
a Selection Set
Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Create Selection SetCreates a new selection set

consisting of the currently highlighted elements.
Add to Selection SetAdds the currently selected elements

to an existing selection set.
Remove from Selection SetRemoves the currently

selected elements from an existing selection set.
Loading
Zoom To
Centers the drawing pane view on the currently selected element.
Find
Opens the Find Element dialog, allowing you to search for a

specific element.
Options
Allows you to sort and/or filter the contents of the list pane.
Help
Apply Sanitary Inflow Type to Selection Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign an inflow to the currently selected element or
elements. The dialog appears after you have used the Add Inflows command in the
Inflow Control Center. To add an inflow, choose the inflow type, then enter inflow
data and click OK for a Fixed Inflow or just click OK for a Hydrograph Inflow. If a
Hydrograph Inflow is selected, the hydrograph must then be defined in the hydrograph
pane of the Inflow Control Center.
Sanitary Load Control Center

The Sanitary Load Control Center consists of a pane consisting of tabs for each
element type that list all of the loads for all of the elements in the model and a pane
that displays Hydrograph Load collections for the currently highlighted element,
along with the following controls:
7-329
Inflows
7-330
Loading
New
Clicking the New button opens a submenu containing the

following commands:
Add Unit Load to ElementAdds a new Unit Load to the

element currently selected in the list pane.
Add Sanitary Hydrograph to ElementAdds a new sanitary

hydrograph to the element currently selected in the list pane.
Add Pattern Load to ElementAdds a new pattern load to

the element currently selected in the list pane.
Add Sanitary LoadsReturn the view to te drawing pane,

allowing you to select an element from the drawing. After an
element has been selected, the Apply Sanitary Load to
Selection dialog opens, allowing you to enter a Sanitary
Hydrograph, Unit Load, or Pattern Load to the element you
selected.
Initialize Unit Loads for All ElementsAdds a Unit Load to

each element of the current type in the model that does not
currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
command have an initial value of 0.0.
Initialize Hydrograph Loads for All ElementsAdds a

Hydrograph Load to each element of the current type in the
model that does not currently have an inflow defined. The
hydrographs added by this command are intially blank.
Initialize Pattern Load for All ElementsAdds a Pattern Load

to each element of the current type in the model that does
not currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
Initialize Unit Loads for SelectionAdds a Unit Load to each

element that is currently selected in the list pane that does
not currently have an inflow defined. The loads added by this
Initialize Hydrograph Load for SelectionAdds a

Hydrograph Load to each element that is currently selected
in the list pane that does not currently have an inflow defined.
The hydrographs added by this command are intially blank.
Initialize Pattern Load for SelectionAdds a Pattern Load to

each element that is currently selected in the list pane that
does not currently have an inflow defined.The loads added
by this command have an initial value of 0.0.
Note:
You can only use one type of Initialize

operation for any given element. For
example, if you perform an Initialize
Hydrograph Loads for All Elements
operation, you will not then be able to
then perform an Initialize Pattern Load for
All Elements on the model.
If you wish to add another load of a
different type than the one that was
Initialized, you must do so for each
individual element.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected row from the list. Delete commands
can not be undone.
7-331
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections
Report
Opens a report containing the load information displayed in each

tab of the list pane.
Create or
Add to a
Selection
Set
Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following

commands:
Create Selection SetCreates a new selection set

consisting of the currently highlighted elements.
Add to Selection SetAdds the currently selected elements

to an existing selection set.
Remove from Selection SetRemoves the currently

selected elements from an existing selection set.
Zoom To
Centers the drawing pane view on the currently selected element.
Find
Opens the Find Element dialog, allowing you to search for a

specific element.
Options
Allows you to sort and/or filter the contents of the list pane.
Help
Apply Sanitary Load to Selection Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign a sanitary load to the currently selected element or
elements. The dialog appears after you have used the Add Sanitary Loads command in
the Sanitary Load Control Center. To add a load, choose the load type, then enter load
data and click OK for a Sanitary Unit Load or Sanitary Pattern Load. Click OK for a
Sanitary Hydrograph. If a Sanitary Hydrograph is selected, the hydrograph must then
be defined in the hydrograph pane of the Sanitary Load Control Center.

You can define a sanitary (dry weather) flow collection for any node element in your
model. A sanitary flow collection can contain any combination of hydrograph, unit, or
pattern loads.
7-332
Loading
To define a sanitary (dry weather) flow collection:
1. Click an element in your model to display the Property Editor, or right-click an
element and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. In the Sanitary Loads section of the Property Editor, click the Ellipses (...) button.
The Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor appears.
3. Click the New button, then select the type of sanitary load you want to create from
the submenu (Hydrograph - Flow vs. Time, Unit Load - Unit Type and Count, or
Pattern Load - Base Flow and Pattern).
4. For a Hydrograph, enter the data points in the hydrograph table. For Unit and
Pattern Loads, enter the data in the appropriate fields.
Note:
For a hydrograph, if the last time in the table is less than the total
simulation time, the simulation time and last flow will be
appended to the hydrograph table.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each load you want to add to the collection.
6. Click the Composite Hydrograph button to see a graph of the composite
hydrograph.
7. Click the Composite Hydrograph Data Table button to see a tabular view of all
the data points in the composite hydrograph.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the collection data to the Property
Editor.
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor

This dialog box lets you define collections of sanitary (dry weather) loads for the
selected element in your model. Sanitary loads correspond to loads produced by residential, commercial, recreational, and industrial activity. A sanitary load represents
the base load to the sewer system.
7-333

The dialog box contains a list pane and the following controls:
New

options:
Hydrograph - Flow vs. TimeAdds a

new hydrograph load to the list pane.
This is a flow vs. time distribution.
Unit Load - Unit Type and Count

Adds a new unit load to the list pane.
Unit Type refers to the type of Unit Load
and Count refers to the number of units
associated with the unit load. For
example, 5000 passengers at an airport.
Pattern Load - Base Flow and

PatternAdds a new pattern load to the
list pane. A pattern load is a direct,
known sanitary load with a set pattern.
Delete
Lets you delete the currently highlighted

load.
Report

dialog box.
Composite
Hydrograph
Opens a graph window plotting a curve of a

selected single sanitary load or the composite
hydrograph of all loads.
Composite
Hydrograph
Data Table
Opens a window listing all the data points in

the curve of a selected single sanitary load or
in the composite hydrograph of all loads.
Depending on the type of sanitary load you select in the list pane, the following
controls appear:
Hydrograph Table
7-334
Lets you define the hydrograph by entering Time

From Start vs. Sanitary Flow points. This table is
available only when a hydrograph load is
highlighted in the list pane. If the last time in the
table is less than the total simulation time, the
simulation time and last flow will be appended to
the hydrograph table.
Loading
Unit Sanitary Load
Lets you select the type of the load (for example

Apartment or Airport). Unit sanitary loads are
selected, edited, and created in the Unit Sanitary
(Dry Weather) Load dialog box, which you access
by clicking the ellipsis () button next to this
field.
Loading Unit Count
Lets you enter the local count of loading units for

the selected unit sanitary load.
Base Flow
Lets you enter the average inflow over the

duration of the simulation.
Pattern
Lets you select the pattern for the selected pattern

load. Pattern loads are selected, edited, and
created in the Pattern Manager, which you access
by clicking the ellipsis (...) button next to this
field.
Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data

LoadBuilder is a tool used to assign flows to elements in Bentley SewerCAD V8i. If
you already know what flows to assign to an element, then you should use the other
methods such as inflow, sanitary loads, or stormwater loading. The power of LoadBuilder is that it can take loading information from a variety of Loadbuilder based
sources such as customer meter data, system flow meter or polygons with known
population or land use and assign those flows to elements. LoadBuilder is oriented to
the types of data available to describe dry weather flows and other methods in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i are more amenable to wet weather flows.
The consumption of water is the driving force behind the hydraulic dynamics occurring in water distribution systems. When simulating these dynamics in your water
distribution model, an accurate representation of system demands is as critical as
precisely modeling the physical components of the model.
To realize the full potential of the model as a master planning and decision support
tool, you must accurately allocate demands while anticipating future demands.
Collecting the necessary data and translating it to model loading data must be
performed regularly to account for changes to the network conditions. Due to the difficulties involved in manually loading the model, automated techniques have been
developed to assist the modeler with this task.
Spatial allocation of demands is the most common approach to loading a water distribution model. The spatial analysis capabilities of Loadbuilder make these applications
a logical tool for the automation of the demand allocation process.
7-335

LoadBuilder leverages the spatial analysis abilities of your Loadbuilder software to
distribute demands according to geocoded meter data, demand density information,
and coverage polygon intersections.
LoadBuilder greatly facilitates the tasks of demand allocation and projection. Every
step of the loading process is enhanced, from the initial gathering and analysis of data
from disparate sources and formats to the employment of various allocation strategies.
The following are descriptions of the types of allocation strategies that can be applied
using LoadBuilder.
Allocation
This uses the spatial analysis capabilities of Loadbuilder to assign geocoded
(possessing coordinate data based on physical location, such as an x-y coordinate)
customer meters to the nearest demand node or pipe. Assigning metered demands to
nodes is a point-to-point demand allocation technique, meaning that known point
demands (customer meters) are assigned to network demand points (demand nodes).
Assigning metered demands to pipes is also a point-to-point assignment technique,
since demands must still be assigned to node elements, but there is an additional step
involved. When using the Nearest Pipe meter assignment strategy, the demands at a
7-336
Loading
meter are assigned to the nearest pipe. From the pipe, the demand is then distributed to
the nodes at the ends of the pipe by utilizing a distribution strategy. Meter assignment
is the simplest technique in terms of required data, because there is no need for service
polygons to be applied (see Figure below).
Meter assignment can prove less accurate than the more complex allocation strategies
because the nearest node is determined by straight-line proximity between the demand
node and the consumption meter. Piping routes are not considered, so the nearest
demand node may not be the location from which the meter actually receives its flow.
In addition, the actual location of the service meter may not be known.
The geographic location of the meter in the Loadbuilder is not necessarily the point
from which water is taken from the system, but may be the centroid of the land parcel,
the centroid of building footprint, or a point along the frontage of the building. Ideally,
these meter points should be placed at the location of the tap, but the centroid of the
building or land parcel may be all that is known about a customer account.
7-337

Note:
In LoadBuilder, the Nearest Node and Nearest Pipe strategies

are also in the Allocation loading method.
Billing Meter Aggregation

Billing Meter aggregation is the technique of assigning all meters within a service
polygon to a specified demand node (see Figure below). Service polygons define the
service area for each of the demand nodes.
Meter Aggregation is a polygon-to-point allocation technique, because the service

areas are contained in a Loadbuilder polygon layer, while again, the demand nodes are
contained in a point layer. The demands associated with the meters within each of the
service area polygons is assigned to the respective demand node points.
Due to the need for service polygons, the initial setup for this approach is more
involved than the meter assignment strategy, the trade-off being greater control over
the assignment of meters to demand nodes. Automated construction of the service
polygons may not produce the desired results, so it may be necessary to manually
adjust the polygon boundaries, especially at the edges of the drawing.
7-338
Loading
Note:
In LoadBuilder, the Billing Meter Aggregation strategy falls into

the meter aggregation category of loading methods.
Distribution
This strategy involves distributing lump-sum area water use data among a number of
service polygons (service areas) and, by extension, their associated demand nodes.
The lump-sum area is a polygon for which the total (lump-sum) water use of all of the
service areas (and their demand nodes) within it is known (metered), but the distribution of the total water use among the individual nodes is not. The water use data for
these lump-sum areas can be based on system meter data from pump stations, treatment plants or flow control valves, meter routes, pressure zones, and traffic analysis
zones (TAZ). The lump sum area for which a flow is known must be a Loadbuilder
polygon. There is one flow rate per polygon, and there can be no overlap of or open
space between the polygons.
The known flow within the lump-sum area is generally divided among the service
polygons within the area using one of two techniques: equal distribution or proportional distribution:
The equal flow distribution option simply divides the known flow evenly
between the demand nodes. The equal flow distribution strategy is illustrated in
the diagram below. The lump-sum area in this case is a polygon layer that represents meter route areas. For each of these meter route polygons, the total flow is
known. The total flow is then equally divided among the demand nodes within
each of the meter route polygons (See Figure).
The proportional distribution option (by area or by population) divides the

lump-sum flow among the service polygons based upon one of two attributes of
the service polygons-the area or the population. The greater the percentage of the
lump-sum area or population that a service polygon contains, the greater the
percentage of total flow that will be assigned to that service polygon.
Note:
In addition to the distribution options listed above, LoadBuilder

allows Nearest node and Farthest node strategies as well.
Each service polygon has an associated demand node, and the flow that is calculated
for each service polygon is assigned to this demand node. For example, if a service
polygon consists of 50 percent of the lump-sum polygons area, then 50 percent of the
flow associated with the lump-sum polygon will be assigned to the demand node associated with that service polygon. This strategy requires the definition of lump-sum
area or population polygons in the Loadbuilder, service polygons in the model, and
their related demand nodes. Sometimes the flow distribution technique must be used
7-339

to assign unaccounted-for-water to nodes, and when any method that uses customer
metering data as opposed to system metering data is implemented. For instance, when
the flow is metered at the well, unaccounted-for-water is included; when the customer
meters are added together, unaccounted-for-water is not included.
Note:
In LoadBuilder, the Equal Flow Distribution, Proportional

Distribution by Area, and Proportional Distribution by
Population strategies fall within the flow distribution category of
loading methods.
In the following figure, the total demand in meter route A may be 55 gpm (3.48 L/s)
while in meter route B the demand is 72 gpm (4.55 L/s). Since there are 11 nodes in
meter route A, if equal distribution is used, the demand at each node would be 5 gpm
(0.32 L/s), while in meter route B, with 8 nodes, the demand at each node would be 9
gpm (0.57 L/s).
Point Demand Assignment
7-340
Loading
A point demand assignment technique is used to directly assign a demand to a demand
node. This strategy is primarily a manual operation, and is used to assign large (generally industrial or commercial) water users to the demand node that serves the
consumer in question. This technique is unnecessary if all demands are accounted for
using one of the other allocation strategies.
Projection
Automated techniques have also been developed to assist in the estimation of
demands using land use and population density data. These are similar to the Flow
Distribution allocation methods except that the type of base layer that is used to intersect with the service layer may contain information other than flow, such as land use
or population.
This type of demand estimation can be used in the projection of future demands; in
this case, the demand allocation relies on a polygon layer that contains data regarding
expected future conditions. A variety of data types can be used with this technique,
including future land use, projected population, or demand density (in polygon form),
with the polygons based upon traffic analysis zones, census tracts, planning districts,
or another classification. Note that these data sources can also be used to assign
current demands; the difference between the two being the data that is contained
within the source. If the data relates to projected values, it can be used for demand
projections.
Many of these data types do not include demand information, so further data conversion is required to translate the information contained in the future condition polygons
into projected demand values. This entails translating the data contained within your
data source to flow, which can then be applied using LoadBuilder.
After an appropriate conversion method is in place, the service layer containing the
service areas and demand nodes is overlaid with the future condition polygon layer(s).
A projected demand for each of the service areas can then be determined and assigned
to the demand nodes associated with each service polygon. The conversion that is
required will depend on the source data that is being used. It could be a matter of
translating the data contained within the source, such as population, land area, etc. to
flow, which can then be used by LoadBuilder to assign demands.
Depending on how the layers intersect, service areas may contain multiple demand
types (land uses) that are added and applied to the demand node for that service
polygon.
7-341

LoadBuilder simplifies and expedites the process of assigning loading data to your
model, using a variety of source data types.
Note:
The loading output data generated by LoadBuilder is a Base

Flow, i.e., a single value that remains constant over time.
After running LoadBuilder and exporting the results, you may
need to modify your data to reflect changes over time by
applying patterns to the base flow values.
LoadBuilder Manager
The LoadBuilder manager provides a central location for the creation, storage, and
management of Load Build templates.
Go to Tools > Loadbuilder or click
7-342
Loading
The following are available from this dialog box:
New
Opens the LoadBuilder Wizard.
Delete
Deletes an existing LoadBuilder template.
Rename
Renames an existing LoadBuilder template.
Edit
Opens the LoadBuilder Wizard with the

settings associated with the currently
highlighted definition loaded.
Help
Opens the context-sensitive online help.
LoadBuilder Wizard
The LoadBuilder wizard assists you in the creation of a new load build template by
stepping you through the procedure of creating a new load build template. Depending
on the load build method you choose, the specific steps presented in the wizard will
vary.
Note:
The loading output data generated by LoadBuilder is a Base

Flow, i.e., a single value that remains constant over time.
After running LoadBuilder and exporting the results, you may
need to modify your data to reflect changes over time by
applying patterns to the base flow values.
7-343

Step 1: Available LoadBuilder Methods
In this step, the Load Method to be used is specified. The next steps will vary
according to the load method that is chosen. The load methods are divided into three
categories; the desired category is selected by clicking the corresponding button. Then
the method is chosen from the Load Demand types pane.
The available load methods are as follows:

Allocation
7-344
Billing Meter AggregationThis loading method assigns all meters within a

service polygon to the specified demand node for that service polygon.
Nearest NodeThis loading method assigns customer meter demands to the

closest demand junction.
Loading
Nearest PipeThis loading method assigns customer meter demands to the

closest pipe, then distributes demands using user-defined criteria.
Flow Monitoring DistributionThis loading method assigns loads to nodes

based on a user-supplied flow monitoring layer.
Distribution
Equal Flow DistributionThis loading method equally divides the total flow
contained in a flow boundary polygon and assigns it to the nodes that fall within
the flow boundary polygon.
Proportional Distribution by AreaThis load method proportionally distributes a lump-sum flow among a number of demand nodes based upon the ratio of
total service area to the area of the nodes corresponding service polygon.
7-345
Proportional Distribution by PopulationThis load method proportionally

distributes a lump-sum demand among a number of demand nodes based upon the
ratio of total population contained within the nodes corresponding service
polygon.
Projection
7-346
Projection by Land UseThis method allocates demand based upon the density
per land use type of each service polygon.
Load Estimation by PopulationThis method allocates demand based upon

user-defined relationships between demand per capita and population data.
Loading
Step 2: Input Data
The available controls in this step will vary according to the load method type that was
specified as follows:
Billing Meter AggregationInput DataThe following fields require data to be

specified:
Service Area LayerSpecify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

defines the service area for each demand node.
Node ID FieldSpecify the source database field that contains identifying

label data.
Note:
ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always

unique to any given element.
Billing Meter LayerSpecify the point feature class or shapefile that

contains the geocoded billing meter data.
Load Type FieldSpecify the source database field that contains load type
data. Load Type is an optional classification that can be used to assign
composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors, multipliers, and
patterns to be applied in various situations. For example, possible load types
may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
Load Type classification, your source database must include a column that
contains this data.
Usage FieldSpecify the source database field that contains usage data. The
usage field in the source database must contain flow data. Also, use to select
the unit associated with the usage field value.
Nearest NodeInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Node LayerSpecify the feature class or shapefile that contains the nodes
that the loads will be assigned to.
Node ID FieldSpecify the feature class database field that contains the
unique identifying label data.
Note:
ElementID is the preferred node ID value because it is always

Billing Meter LayerSpecify the feature class or shapefile that contains the
geocoded billing meter data.
7-347
Load Type FieldSpecify the source database field that contains load type
data. Load Type is an optional classification that can be used to assign
composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors, multipliers, and
patterns to be applied in various situations. For example, possible load types
may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
contains this data.
Use Previous RunLoadBuilders most time-consuming calculations when

using the Nearest Node strategy are the spatial calculations that are performed
to determine proximity between the meter elements and the node elements.
When this box is checked, the proximity calculations that were generated
from a previous run are used, thereby increasing the overall calculation
performance.
Nearest PipeInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Pipe LayerSpecify the line feature class or shapefile that contains the pipes
that will be used to determine meter-to-pipe proximity. Note that the pipes in
this layer must connect to the nodes contained in the Node Layer.
Pipe ID FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the unique
identifying label data.
Note:
7-348
ElementID is the preferred Pipe ID value because it is always

Load AssignmentSpecify the method that will be used to distribute the

metered loads that are assigned to the nearest pipe to the end nodes of said
pipe. Options include:
-
Equal DistributionThis method assigns an equal portion of the total

load assigned to a pipe to each of the pipes end nodes.
Distance WeightedThis method assigns a portion of the total load

assigned to a pipe based on the distance between the meter(s) and the
nodes at the pipe ends. The closer a meter is to the node at the end of the
pipe, the more load will be assigned to it.
Closest NodeThis method assigns the entire total load assigned to the
pipe end node that is closest to the meter.
Farthest NodeThis method assigns the entire total load assigned to the
pipe end node that is farthest from the meter.
Node LayerSpecify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the
nodes that will be used to determine node-to-pipe proximity. Note that the
nodes in this layer must connect to the pipes contained in the Pipes Layer.
Loading
Node ID FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the unique
Note:

Use Previous RunLoadBuilders most time-consuming calculations when

using the Nearest Pipe strategy are the spatial calculations that are performed
to determine proximity between the meter elements, the pipe elements, and
the node elements. When this box is checked, the proximity calculations that
were calculated from a previous run are used, thereby increasing the overall
calculation performance.
Billing Meter LayerSpecify the point or polyline feature class or shapefile

that contains the geocoded billing meter data.
Billing Meter ID FieldBilling Meter ID is used to identify the unique

meter. When polylines are used to represent water consumption meters,
multiple polylines (multiple records) may designate one actual meter, but each
(record in the attribute Table) of the polylines contains the same consumption
data with the same billing meter ID.
Load Type FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field
that contains load type data. Load Type is an optional classification that can
be used to assign composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors,
multipliers, and patterns to be applied in various situations. For example,
possible load types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To
make use of the Load Type classification, your source database must include a
column that contains this data.
Polyline DistributionWhen a polyline meter layer is selected, this field

will be activated. When multiple pipes are associated with (overlapped by) a
polyline meter, the option chosen in this field determines the method that will
be used to divide the polyline meter load among them. The available options
are:
Equal DistributionThis option will distribute the load equally among

the pipes associated with (overlapping) the meter.
Proportional DistributionThis option will divide the load proportionally according to the ratio of the length of pipe that is associated with
(overlapping) the meter to the total length of the meter.
7-349
Equal Flow DistributionInput DataThe following fields require data to be

specified:
Node LayerSpecify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the
nodes that the flow will be assigned to.

label data.
Note:
Flow Boundary LayerSpecify the polygon feature class that contains the
flow monitoring meter data.
Flow FieldSpecify the source database field that contains usage data. The
Proportional Distribution by AreaInput DataThe following fields require

data to be specified:

defines the service area for each node.
Note:
7-350
ElementID is the preferred Node ID value because it is always


Flow Boundary LayerSpecify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains the flow boundary data.
Boundary FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the

boundary label.
Proportional Distribution by PopulationInput DataThe following fields

require data to be specified:

Loading
Note:
Flow Boundary LayerSpecify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains the flow boundary data.
Boundary FieldSpecify the source database field that contains the

boundary label.
Population LayerSpecify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains population data.
Population Count FieldSpecify the source database field that contains

population data.
Land Type FieldSpecify the source database field that contains land use
type.
Projection by Land UseInput DataThe following fields require data to be

specified:

Note:


Land Use LayerSpecify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains the land use data.
Land Type FieldSpecify the source database field that contains land use
type.
Load Type and Load DensityUse this table to assign load density values
to the various load types contained within your land use layer.
Load Estimation by PopulationInput DataThe following fields require data

to be specified:


label data.
7-351

Note:

Population LayerSpecify the polygon feature class or shapefile that

contains the population data.
Population Density Type FieldSpecify the source database field that

contains the population density type data.
Population Density FieldSpecify the source database field that contains

population density data.
Load Type and Load DensityUse this table to assign load density values
to the various load types contained within your population density layer.
Step 3: Calculation Summary

This step displays the Results Summary pane, which displays the total load, load
multiplier, and hydraulic pattern associated with each load type in a tabular format.
The number of entries listed will depend on the load build method and data types
selected in Step 1.
Note:
Different types of shapefiles may need to be created based on

the loadbuilder method selected.
The Results Summary pane contains the following columns:
Load TypeThis column contains an entry for each load type contained within
the database column specified in step one. (Examples include Residential,
Commercial, Industrial, etc.)
ConsumptionThis column displays the total load associated with each load
type entry.
MultiplierThis column displays the multiplier that is applied to each load type
entry. Multipliers can be used to account for peak loads, expected future loads, or
to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. This field can be edited.
PatternThis column displays the hydraulic pattern associated with each

demand type entry. A different pattern can be specified using the menu contained
within each cell of this column. New patterns cannot be created from this dialog
box; see the Pattern manager help topic for more information regarding the
creation of new patterns.
In addition to the functionality provided by the tabular summary pane, the following
controls are also available in this step:
7-352
Loading
Global MultiplierThis field allows you to apply a multiplier to all of the

entries contained within the Results Summary Pane. Any changes are automatically reflected in the Total Load text field. Multipliers can be used to account for
peak loads, expected future loads, or to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. The Global
Multiplier should be used when the conditions relating to these considerations are
identical for all usage types and elements.
Total LoadThis field displays an updated total of all of the entries contained
within the Results Summary Pane, as modified by the local and global multipliers
that are in effect.
Step 4: Results Preview

This step displays the calculated results in a tabular format. The table consists of the
following information:
Node IDThe unique identifying label assigned to all geodatabase elements by

the Loadbuilder.
LabelThe unique identifying label assigned by Bentley SewerCAD V8i

Modeler.
Load TypeAn optional classification that can be used to assign different behaviors, multipliers, and patterns in various situations. For example, possible load
types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the
contains this data.
PatternThe type of pattern assigned to the node. The source database must
include a column that contains this data.
7-353
Generating Thiessen Polygons

Step 5: Completing the LoadBuilder Wizard
In this step, the load build template is given a label and the results are exported to an
existing or new load alternative. This step contains the following controls:
LabelThis field allows a unique label to be assigned to the load build template.
Override an Existing AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to overwrite the loads contained within the existing load alternative
that is selected.
Append to an Existing AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to be appended to the loads contained within the existing load alternative that is selected. Loads within the existing alternative that are assigned to a
specific node will not be overwritten by newly generated loads assigned to the
same node; the new loads will be added to them.
New AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to be

applied to a new load alternative. Enter your text into this field. The Parent Alternative field will only be active when this option is selected.
LoadBuilder Run Summary

The LoadBuilder Run Summary dialog box details important statistics about the
results of a completed LoadBuilder run, including the number of successfully added
loads, file information, and informational and/or warning messages.

A Thiessen polygon is a Voronoi Diagram that is also referred to as the Dirichlet
Tessellation. Given a set of points, it defines a region around each point. A Thiessen
polygon divides a plane such that each point is enclosed within a polygon and assigns
the area to a point in the point set. Any location within a particular Thiessen polygon
is nearer to that polygons point than to any other point. Mathematically, a Thiessen is
constructed by intersecting perpendicular bisector lines between all points.
Thiessen polygon has many applications in different location-related disciplines such
as business planning, community services, transportation and hydraulic/hydrological
modeling. For water distribution modeling, the Thiessen Polygon Creator was developed to quickly and easily define the service areas of demand nodes. Since each
customer within a Thiessen polygon for a junction is nearer to that node than any
others, it is assumed that the customers within a particular Thiessen polygon are
supplied by the same demand node.
7-354
Loading
The following diagrams illustrate how Thiessen polygons would be generated manually. The Thiessen Polygon Creator does not use this method, although the results
produced by the generator are consistent with those that would be obtained using this
method.
The first diagram shows a pipe and junction network.
In the second diagram, the circles are drawn around each junction.
7-355
In the third diagram, bisector lines are added by drawing a line where the circles interjoin.
7-356
Loading
In the final diagram, the network is overlaid with the polygons that are created by
connecting the bisector lines.
Thiessen Polygon Creator Dialog Box

The Thiessen Polygon Creator allows you to quickly create polygon layers for use
with the LoadBuilder demand allocation module. This utility creates polygon layers
that can be used as service area layers for the following LoadBuilder loading strategies:
Billing Meter Aggregation
Proportional Distribution By Area
Proportional Distribution By Population
Projection by Land Use
Load Estimation by Population.
7-357
The Thiessen Polygon Creator dialog box consists of the following controls:
The Thiessen Polygon Creator dialog box consists of the following controls:
7-358
Node Data SourceSelect the data source to use.
Node LayerThis lists the valid point feature classes and shapefiles that
Thiessen Polygon Creator can use.
Current SelectionClick if the current feature data set contains a previously

created selection set.
Include active elements onlyClick to activate.
SelectionThis option allows you to create a selection on the fly for use with
the Thiessen Polygon Creator. To use this option, use the ArcMap Select
Features tool to select the point features that you want before opening the
Thiessen Polygon Creator.
Buffering PercentageThis percentage value is used for calculating the

boundary for a collection of points. In order to make the buffer boundary big
enough to cover all the points, the boundary is enlarged based upon the value
entered in this field as it relates to the percentage of the area enclosed by drawing
a polygon that connects the outermost nodes of the model.
Polygon Boundary LayerSelect the boundary polygon feature class or shapefile, if one has already been created. A boundary is specified so that the outermost
polygons do not extend to infinity.
Output FileSpecify the name of the shapefile that will be created.
Loading
Note:
The Thiessen Polygon Creator is flexible enough to generate

Thiessen polygons for unusual boundary shapes, such as
borders with cutouts or holes that Thiessen polygons should not
be created inside. To accomplish this, the boundary polygon
must be created as one complex (multi-part) polygon. For more
information about creating boundary polygon feature classes,
see your ArcGIS documentation.
Creating Boundary Polygon Feature Classes

The Thiessen Polygon Creator requires a boundary to be specified around the area in
which Thiessen Polygons will be created. This is to prevent the outside edge of the
polygons along the perimeter of this area from extending to infinity. The generator can
automatically create a boundary using the Buffering Percentage value, or it can use a
previously created polygon feature class as the boundary.
A border polygon feature class can be created in ArcCatalog and edited in ArcMap.
To create a border feature class, you will need a Bentley SewerCAD V8i model that
has had at least one scenario published as an ESRI feature data set. Then, follow these
steps:
1. In the directory structure pane of ArcCatalog, right-click the Bentley SewerCAD
V8i feature data set and select New > Feature Class.
2. A dialog box will open, prompting you to name the new feature class. Enter a
name and click Next.
3. In the second step, you are prompted to select the database storage configuration.
Do so, and click Next.
4. In the third step, click the Shape cell under the Field Name column, and ensure
that the Geometry Type is Polygon. Click Finish.
5. In ArcMap, click the Add Data button and select your Bentley
SewerCAD V8i feature dataset.
6. Click the Editor button and select Start Editing. Ensure that the border
feature class is selected in the Target drop-down list.
7. Draw a polygon around the point features (generally junctions) that you wish to be
used to generate the polygons. When you are finished drawing the polygon, click
Editor...Stop Editing. Choose Yes when prompted to save your edits.
The polygon feature class you just created can now be used as the boundary during
Thiessen polygon generation. For more information about creating and editing feature
classes, see your ArcGIS documentation.
7-359
Pipeline Infiltration
Pipeline Infiltration
To model infiltration along a pipeline, it is possible to specify infiltration as:
Pipe length
Pipe area
Pipe diameter-length
Count
Hydrograph
Pattern load
The first four types of infiltration are constant rates while the last two are time varying
inflows. For more information on entering data for each type of infiltration, see
ConduitInfiltration on page 15-829.
Note:
Conduit infiltration flow is added after the upstream section of

the conduit by the calculation engine. Therefore, when viewing
flow results,you will see the infiltration flow in the middle section
and the downstream section of the conduit.
Hydrograph Curve Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to enter Hydrograph Time vs. Flow data to create Hydrographs for use with the Hydrograph Infiltration Load type.
The dialog box contains the Hydrograph Time vs. Flow table along with the following
controls:
7-360
New
This button creates a new row in the timeflow table.
Delete

row from the time-flow table.
Report

dialog box.
Graph
Opens a graph window plotting the

hydrograph curve defined by the points in the
table
Loading
Column
Description
Hydrograph Time
This field allows you to define time of the

hydrograph curve point.
Flow
This field allows you to define flow at the

specified time for the hydrograph curve point.
Extreme Flows
Extreme flow factors are generally used for computing peak discharges, and therefore
are typically referred to as peaking factors or peaking equations. However, since they
can also be used to compute minimum discharges, the term extreme flow factor is
more accurate and will be used throughout the program and documentation.
SewerCAD defines tabular and equation extreme flow factor methods in the editable
Engineering Libraries, thus allowing you to edit predefined methods and insert new
ones. The extreme flow factor can be user-defined with either of the following:
Equation extreme flow factor method
Table extreme flow factor method
In both cases, the extreme flow factor method can be a function of either of the
following:
Contributing population
Base Load
Discharge based extreme flow methods can be used with any unit dry load. Population
based extreme flow methods can be used only with population-based unit sanitary and
non-population based unit sanitary loads that have population equivalents specified.
Note:
For tabular extreme flow factors, values above the maximum

specified value and below the minimum specified value are
linearly extrapolated by the software.
Extreme Flows Dialog

This dialog box allows you to create, edit, and view extreme flow factors.The dialog
box contains a toolbar, an Extreme Flows list pane, and two tabs. The toolbar contains
the following buttons:
7-361
Extreme Flows
7-362
New
Creates a new entry in the Extreme

Flows List Pane.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the currently

highlighted entry in the Extreme Flows
List Pane.
Loading
Delete

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List
Pane.
Rename

currently highlighted in the Extreme
Flows List Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List
Pane.
Synchronize

Browse Engineering LibraryThis

command opens the Engineering Library
manager dialog, allowing you to browse
the Extreme Flow Factor Methods
Library.
Synchronize From LibraryThis

command allows you to update a
Extreme Flow Factor Method that was
previously imported from a Extreme Flow
Factor Methods Engineering Library to
reflect changes that have been made to
the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryThis
command allows you to update an
existing Extreme Flow Factor Methods
Engineering Library using current
Extreme Flow Factor Method entries that
were initially imported but have since
been modified.
Import From LibraryThis command

allows you to import catalog entries from
an existing Extreme Flow Factor
Methods Engineering Library.
Export To LibraryThis command

allows you to export the current catalog
entries to an existing Extreme Flow
Factor Methods Engineering Library.
The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Extreme Flows dialog box.
7-363
Extreme Flows
7-364
Extreme Flows List

Pane
Located on the left side of the dialog box, displays

a list of all of the extreme flow factors that have
been defined in the current project. Highlighting an
extreme flow factor in this list causes the Table or
Equation sections to display the data associated
with the highlighted extreme flow factor.
Table Section
When a Table-based Extreme Flow factor is

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List Pane, this
section contains the following controls. Extreme
flow factor values that fall outside of the range of
boundary values will be assigned the closest inrange value, either the first (lowest) or last
(highest) value.
New button
Adds a new row to the table.
Delete button
Removes the currently highlighted row from the

table.
Contributing
Population column
Thecontributing population for theassociated

extreme flow factor value. This column is only
available for population-based extreme flow
factors.
Base Load column
The base load for the associated extreme flow

factor value. This column is only available for loadbased extreme flow factors.
Extreme Flow Factor

column
The extreme flow factor value associated with the

base load or population value.
Equation Section
When an Equation-based Extreme Flow factor is

highlighted in the Extreme Flows List Pane, this
section contains the following controls.
Population Unit in
Equation
The unit in which population is defined. The

coefficients in the equation are based on this unit.
This column is only available for population-based
extreme flow factors.
Flow Unit
The unit in which flow is defined. The coefficients

in the equation are based on this unit. This column
is only available for load-based extreme flow
factors.
Loading
Cutoff Value
The maximum possible extreme flow factor for

peaking methods. This is used to
prevent unrealistically high values for small
populations or land areas.
c1
Equation coefficient.
c2
c3
e1
e2
m1
m2
Library Tab
Displays information pertaining to the catalog

entry that is currently highlighted in the List Pane,
including:
ID
Label
Modified Date
Library Source
Library Modified Date
Synchronization Status
SewerCAD uses a generic exponential equation to define any extreme flow factor
method. For population based extreme flow factor methods, the generic equation is:
e1
c2 + ( m1 P )
EFF = c 1 + -------------------------------e2
c3 + ( m2 P )
where P is population and c1, c2, c3, m1, m2, e1, and e2, are constants.
For discharge-based extreme flow factor methods the generic equation is:
7-365
Extreme Flows
e1
c2 + ( m1 Q )
EFF = c 1 + -------------------------------e2
c3 + ( m2 Q )
where Q is total sanitary (base) load and c1, c2, c3, m1, m2, e1, and e2, are constants.
Extreme Flow Setups Dialog

The Extreme Flow Setup dialog lets you define a list of Extreme Flow Setups. An
Extreme Flow Setup allows you to match unit sanitary loads with appropriate extreme
flow factor methods.
Each scenario can use a different Extreme Flow Setup, thus allowing you to model
different load alternatives (average, minimum daily, maximum daily, etc).
The dialog box contains a toolbar, an Extreme Flow Setups list pane, and a table
where the setup data is edited. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Creates a new entry in the Extreme Flow

Setups List Pane.
Duplicate
Creates a copy of the currently

highlighted entry in the Extreme Flow
Setups List Pane.
Delete

highlighted in the Extreme Flow Setups
List Pane.
Rename

currently highlighted in the Extreme
Flow Setups List Pane.
Report

highlighted in the Extreme Flow Setups
List Pane.
The table on the right contains the following columns:
7-366
Loading
Use
When the box is checked the associated unit

sanitary loads will be used during calculations. If
the box is not checked the associated loads will be
ignored.
Unit Load
The sanitary load to be associated with an

Extreme Flow Method.
Extreme Flow Method
Lists the currently defined Extreme Flow factors.

Click the ellipsis button to open the Extreme Flows
dialog. You can also select a Constant method, in
which the unit load is multiplied by the userdefined Constant value.
Constant
Available only for the Constant Extreme Flow

Method, it simply multiplies the unit load
by that constant.
Adjustment Multiplier
Used to adjust an existing Extreme Flow Method.

The following formula is used:
EFF (new) = EFF (original) x AM
The Adjustment Multiplier does not change the
Extreme Flow Method, but changes the extreme
flow factor for the selected unit sanitary load.
None and Constant Extreme Flow Methods
cannot be adjusted.
7-367
Extreme Flows
7-368
Chapter
Calculating Your Model
Steady State/Extended Period Simulation

Bentley SewerCAD V8i gives the choice between performing a steady-state analysis
of the system or performing an extended-period simulation over any time period.
Steady State Simulation

Steady-state analyses determine the operating behavior of the system at a specific
point in time or under steady-state conditions (flow rates and hydraulic grades remain
constant over time). This type of analysis can be useful for determining pressures and
flow rates under minimum, average, and peak flows.
For this type of analysis, the network equations are determined and solved with wet
wells being treated as fixed grade boundaries. The results that are obtained from this
type of analysis are instantaneous values and may or may not be representative of the
values of the system a few hours, or even a few minutes, later in time.
Extended Period Simulation

When the variation of the system attributes over time is important, an extended period
simulation is appropriate. This type of analysis allows you to model wet wells filling
and draining, regulating valves opening and closing, and pressures and flow rates
changing throughout the system in response to varying load conditions and automatic
control strategies formulated by the SewerCAD V8i.
While a steady-state model may tell whether the system has the capability to route
calculated loads, an extended period simulation indicates whether the system has the
ability to provide acceptable levels of service over a period of minutes, hours, or days.
Data requirements for extended period simulations are greater than for steady-state
runs. In addition to the information required by a steady-state model, you also need to
determine load patterns and operational rules for pumps and valves.
8-369

The following additional information is required only when performing Extended
Period Simulation, and therefore is not enabled when Steady-State Analysis has been
specified.
Start TimeSelect the clock time at which the simulation begins.
DurationSpecify the total duration of an extended period simulation.
Hydraulic Time StepSelect the length of the calculation time step.
Override Reporting Time Step?Set to true if you want the Reporting Time
Step to differ from the Hydraulic Time Step.
Reporting Time StepData will be presented at every reporting time step. The
reporting time step should be a multiple of the hydraulic time step.
Note:
If you run an Extended Period Simulation, you can generate

graphs of the domain elements in the results by right-clicking an
element and selecting Graph.
Note:
Each of the parameters needed for an extended period analysis

has a default value. You will most likely want to change the
values to suit your particular analysis.
Occasionally the numerical engine will not converge during an
extended period analysis. This is usually due to controls
(typically based on tank elevations) or control valves (typically
pressure regulating valves) toggling between two operational
modes (on/off for pump controls, open/closed for pipe controls,
active/closed for valves). When this occurs, try adjusting the
hydraulic time step to a smaller value. This will minimize the
differences in boundary conditions between time steps, and may
allow for convergence.
EPS Results Browser

The EPS Results Browser dialog box is where you can change the currently displayed
time step and animate the main drawing pane.
8-370

Choose Analysis > EPS Results Browser to open the dialog box.
The dialog box contains the following controls:

Time Display
Shows the current time step that is displayed

Increment
This control lets you choose which time step

type to display in the EPS Results Browser.
The following options are available:
Time Slider
Hydraulic / Reporting: When this Increment is selected, only the Hydraulic time
steps are displayed in the EPS Results
Browser. The hydraulic time step is
defined in the Hydraulic Time Step field of
the Calculation Options.
Hydrologic: When this Increment is

selected, only the Hydrologic time steps
are displayed in the EPS Results Browser.
The hydrologic time step is defined in the
Hydrologic Time Step field of the Calculation Options.
All / Pressure: When this Increment is

selected, all Hydraulic, Hydrologic, and
Pressure time steps are displayed in the
EPS Results Browser.
Manually moves the slider representing the

currently displayed time step along the bar,
which represents the full length of time that
the scenario encompasses.
8-371
Go to start
Sets the currently displayed time step to the

beginning of the simulation.
Play backward
Sets the currently displayed time step from the

end to the beginning.
Step backward
Returns the currently displayed time step to

the previous time step.
Pause/Stop
Stops the animation. Restarts it again with

another click.
Step
Advances the currently displayed time step to

the following time step.
Play
Advances the currently displayed time step

from beginning to end.
Go to end
Sets the currently displayed time step to the

end of the simulation.
Speed Slider
Controls the length of the delay between time

steps during animations.
Options
Opens the EPS Results Browser Options

dialog box where Increments and Looping
Options can be set.
Help
Opens online help.
Time Step Pane
Lists each time step in the simulation.

Clicking a time step sets it as current.
EPS Results Browser Options

This dialog box is where you define the animation settings that are applied when the
drawing pane is animated. Click Options from EPS Results Browser.
8-372

It contains the following controls:
Frame Options
Increment
Controls the smoothness of the animation.

Each time step in a scenario counts as one
animation frame. Use this slider to specify the
number of frames that are skipped for each
step in the animation. For example, if there are
time steps every 3 minutes in the scenario and
the slider is set at 3 frames, each step in the
animation represents 9 minutes of scenario
time when you click the Play button.
Looping Options
No Loop
Stops the animation at the end of the

simulation, if selected.
Loop Animation
Restarts the animation automatically, if

selected. When this option is selected, the
animation reaches the end of the simulation
and then restarts from the beginning.
Rocker Animation
Restarts the animation automatically in

reverse. When this option is selected, the
animation reaches the end of the simulation
and then plays the simulation in reverse.
When the beginning of the simulation is
reached, the animation advances towards the
end again and will do so continually.
Calculation Options Manager

You create calculation profiles in the Calculation Options Manager. The Calculation
Options Manager consists of a list pane that displays all of the calculation profiles
associated with the current project, and a toolbar that contains some common
commands.
To display the Calculation Options Manager, select View > Calculation Options.
The Calculation Options manager allows you to create option profiles that contain
various calculation settings. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the
option profiles currently contained in the project, along with a toolbar.
8-373
Creating Calculation Options

New
Creates a new calculation profile. Define

the attributes for the profile in the
Property Editor.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted option

profile.
Rename
Lets you rename the currently

highlighted calculation profile.
Help
Displays online help for the Calculation

Options manager.
If the Property Editor is open, highlighting a option profile in the list causes the
settings that make up the profile appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you
can display the settings that make up the profile by highlighting the desired profile and
clicking the Properties button in the Calculation Options Manager.

Calculation options contain attributes that define how your model is calculated in
Bentley SewerCAD V8i. You create calculation options in the Calculation Options
Manager. You can create several calculation options with different attributes
depending on the requirements of your project.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i contains a default calculation option called Base Calculation
Options. If you do not create additional calculation options, Bentley SewerCAD V8i
will use this default option whenever you calculate your model.
Creating a Calculation Option
To create a calculation option:
1. Open the Calculation Options Manager by selecting View > Calculation
Options.
2. Click the New button. A new option appears in the list with a default name.
3. Type a new name for the option.
4. Double-click the new option to display its attributes in the Property Editor. Edit
the attributes as required.
8-374

Editing a Calculation Option
You edit the attributes of a calculation option in the Property Editor.
If you select a calculation option while the Property Editor is open, the attributes for
that option appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the
attributes of the calculation option by double-clicking the option in the Calculation
Options Manager.
Deleting a Calculation Option
To delete a calculation option:
Options.
2. Select the option you want to delete.
3. Press the Delete key, click the Delete button in the Calculation Options Manager,
or right-click the option and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
8-375

Renaming a Calculation Option
To rename a calculation option:
Options.
2. Select the option you want to rename.
3. Click the Rename button or right-click and select Rename from the shortcut
menu.
4. Type a new name for the option, then press Enter.
Calculation Option Attributes

A Calculation Option contains the information described in the following table.
Table 8-1: Calculation Option Attributes
Attribute
Description
General
8-376
Label
Lets you specify a name for the options option.
Notes
Lets you enter descriptive text to be associated with the

current calculation option.
Time Analysis Type
Select whether the analysis is extended period or steadystate.
Calculation Type
Select whether to perform an analysis of the current model

or to perform an automatic design calculation. This field is
only available when the EPS Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Start Time
Displays the clock time at which the simulation begins.

This field is not editable. This field is only displayed when
the EPS Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Base Date
Select the calendar date on which the simulation begins.

This field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis
Type is chosen.
Duration
Lets you specify the duration of the simulation. This field is

only available when the EPS Time Analysis Type is chosen.

Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Time
Step
Lets you specify the computational time step in hydraulic

calculations. This field is only available when the EPS
Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Hydrologic Time
Step
Lets you specify the computational time step in hydrology

runoff calculations. This field is only available when the
EPS State Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Reporting Time
Step
Output data will be presented at every reporting time step.

Type is chosen.
Reporting Time
Steps
Edit this collection to specify a custom definition for results

ouput, including periods where you want all time steps
saved (<All>), a constant reporting period (Constant), or no
results at all (None). This field is only available when the
Reporting Time Step value is set to Variable.
Tractive Stress
(Global Minimum)
The global minimum allowable tractive stress in a conduit.
Report Hydrologic
Time Step?
If True, hydrographs will be reported in the hydrologic

increment.
Convex Routing
Peak Flow Ratio
Used when selecting a representative flow rate from the

hydrograph to be routed when calculating the C parameter
used to perform the routing calculations.
Gravity Hydraulics
Maximum Network
Transversals
This is the maximum number of iterations that will be

performed to achieve the closest approximation of the
desired network results.
Flow Convergence
Test
This value is taken as the maximum relative change in

discharge occurring at the system outlet between two
successive network solutions. In rational hydrology, system
discharge is a function of travel time and hydraulics
through the system. Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until
the system balances, or a maximum number of trials has
occurred.
8-377

8-378
Attribute
Description
Flow Profile
Method
Allows you to choose between a backwater and capacity

analysis flow option method.
Number of Flow
Profile Steps
The gradually varied flow option divides each pipe into

internal segments prior to calculation of the hydraulic
grade. The default value of option steps is five, and it is
recommended that the value entered here be at least five for
accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy
of the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the
calculation time.
Hydraulic Grade
Convergence Test
The value entered here is taken as the maximum absolute

change between two successive iterations of hydraulic
grade at any junction or inlet in the system. For a given
discharge, the upstream propagation of headlosses through
pipes will continue until two successive calculations
change by an absolute difference of less than this test value.
The Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test value is used in the
standard step gradually varied flow profiling algorithm.
The calculations is assumed to converge to the solution
when the two successive depth iterations are within this
absolute test value.
Minimum Structure
Headloss
This section allows you to specify a minimum structure

headloss. If the system calculates a structure headloss that
is lower then this value, the value specified in the Minimum
Headloss field will be used.
This option applies to all structure headloss methods except
for the Absolute Method. Absolute headlosses will not be
overridden, even if they are less then the value specified in
this option.
Average Velocity
Method
This section allows you to pick the method used to

calculate the average travel time velocity. The following
four options are available:
Actual Uniform Flow Velocity
Full Flow Velocity
Simple Average Velocity
Weighted Average Velocity

Attribute
Description
Structure Loss
Mode
Choose either Hydraulic Grade or Energy Grade as the

basis for the hydraulic calculations.
Save Detailed
Headloss Data?
If True, the detailed headloss data will be saved after

computation. If False, the detailed headloss data (the
AASHTO results for manholes) used in the computations
will not be saved, resulting in a smaller results file.
Gravity Pressure Interface Options
Extreme Flow Setup
Select an Extreme Flow Setup for the current calculation.
Pattern Setup
Select the Pattern Setup for the current calculation.
Pressure Hydraulics
Use Controls
During Steady
State?
When this box is checked, controls will be active during

Steady State analyses.
Wet Well Increment
Unless a wet well is set to Fixed Level, this is the increment

that is used to attempt to balance the wet well level such
that the total flow out is greater than the total flow in.
Use Pumped Flows?
In a steady state run, in pressure subnetworks, the flow

from the network is calculated using pressure equations, the
characteristics of the system and number of pumps running.
For that flow rate to be passed to the downstream gravity
system, the user should set this property to "True".
In some cases, the user will not want to use that flow but
would rather pass a loading to the downstream system
based on upstream loads and appropriate extreme flow
factors similar to the way flows are handled in the gravity
system. To pass those flows on to the downstream gravity
system, the user sets this property to "False".
In general, using pumped flows (True) is used when the
user wants to look at the peak flows when the pumps are
running, while using the loadings (False) gives more of a
true picture as one moves far downstream from the pressure
system and the effects of pump cycling become diminished.
8-379

Attribute
Description
Accuracy
Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for

the iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations.
When the sum of the absolute flow changes between
successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the
absolute flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy
value, the solution is said to have converged. The default
value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value is 1.0e-5.
Trials
Unitless number that defines the maximum number of

iterations to be performed for each hydraulic solution.
Use Linear
Interpolation for
Multipoint Pumps?
If set to true, the engine will use linear interpolation to

interpret the pump curve as opposed to quadratic
interpolation.
Steady State
Hydrograph
Equivalent
Specify how the program should handle hydrographs

during a steady state analysis.
Headloss Options (AASHTO)
8-380
Bend Angle vs.

Bend Loss Curve
Opens the Bend Angle vs Bend Loss Curve dialog,

allowing you to modify the default curve.
Expansion, Ke
Adjustment coefficient used in AASHTO equation to

account for expansion of the flow on the exit from
incoming pipe.
Contraction, Kc
Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation to

account for contraction of the flow on the entrance in the
outlet pipe.
Shaping
Adjustment, Cs
Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation for

junction headloss calculation to account for partial diameter
inlet shaping (equivalent to Half and Full in HEC-22). If
inlet shaping is used then the headloss is decreased by this
factor (50% default).

Attribute
Description
Non-Piped Flow
Adjustment, Cn
If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total

structure outflow, a correction factor is applied to the total
loss. By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss (a
factor of 1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but
can be changed by the user.
Headloss Options (HEC-22)
Elevations
Considered Equal
Within
The maximum elevation distance that pipes entering a node

can be separated by and still be considered to be at the same
elevation.
Consider Non-Piped
Plunging Flow
If this value is set to True, plunging correction factor for

non-piped flow will be applied during the calculation.
Flat Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a flat submerged

transition structure.
Flat Unsubmerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a flat

unsubmerged transition structure.
Depressed
Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a depressed

submerged transition structure.
Depressed
Unsubmerged

Half Bench
Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a half bench

Half Bench
Unsubmerged

8-381

Attribute
Description
Full Bench
Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a full bench

Full Bench
Unsubmerged

Headloss Options (Generic)
Governing
Upstream Pipe
Selection Method
Select the method for selecting the upstream pipe when

computing the headloss for a structure using the Generic
Headloss Method.
Flow Profile Method

There are two methods used in SewerCAD for converting flows into hydraulic
profiles (i.e. determining water surface and hydraulic grade). The Backwater Analysis
method is the more theoretically correct gradually varied flow backwater curve but is
somewhat slower (Backwater Analysis on page 13-642) while the Capacity Analysis method uses a somewhat simpler method since flow in most sewers approaches
normal depth (except where flows back up from downstream). The run time for
caapcity analysis is slightly faster and the results are virtually the same in most cases.
Controlling Results Output

You can limit the output data that is written to the result file from the SewerCAD V8i
engine. Limiting the reported results in this way will produce a smaller result file,
thereby improving performance when copying results files during open and save operations. It also conserves hard disk space.
By default, the Reporting Time Step Type calculation option is set to <All>. Under
this setting, all results for all time steps are written to the results file.
To limit the output results to a specific interval (such as every 2 hours, every 4 hours,
etc) set the Reporting Time Step Type calculation option to Constant. The Reporting
Time Step calculation option will become available. Enter the constant interval at
which output results should be written to the results file in this field.
To limit the output results to specific time steps, set the Reporting Time Step Type
calculation option to Variable. The Reporting Time Steps calculation option will
become available. Click the elipsis (...) button in this field to open the Reporting Time
Steps dialog.
8-382
Reporting Time Steps Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to specify whether the output results for different time steps
during an extended period simulaton will or will not be written to the results file.
You do this by specifying ranges of time during which:
All of the time steps are reported on and written to the results file.
None of the time steps are reported on and written to the results file.
Time steps that fall within the specificed constant interval are reported on and written
to the results file.
The first row in this dialog will always be 0.00 hours, which is the beginning of the
first time range. To specify the first range of time, enter the end time step in the second
row, for example 24 hours. Specify the type in the first row, for example <All>. In this
example, all time steps between hour 0 (the start of the simulation) and hour 24 will be
written to the results file. To specify further ranges of time, add new rows with the
New button. Remove rows with the Delete button. The last range in the dialog will
start at the time specified in the last row and end at the end of the simulation.
Check Data/ Validate

This feature allows you to validate your model against typical data entry errors, hard
to detect topology problems, and modeling problems. When the Validate box is
checked, the model validation is automatically run prior to calculations. It can also be
run at any time by clicking Validate
. The process will produce either a dialog
box stating No Problems Found or a Status Log with a list of messages.
The validation process will generate two types of messages. A warning message
means that a particular part of the model (i.e., a pipes roughness) does not conform to
the expected value or is not within the expected range of values. This type of warning
is useful but not fatal. Therefore, no corrective action is required to proceed with a
calculation. Warning messages are often generated as a result of a topographical or
data entry error and should be corrected. An error message, on the other hand, is a
fatal error, and the calculation cannot proceed before it is corrected. Typically, error
messages are related to problems in the network topology, such as a pump or valve not
being connected on both its intake and discharge sides.
8-383
Detailed Calculation Summary Dialog Box

Note:
In earlier versions of the software, it was possible to create a

topological situation that was problematic but was not checked
for in the network topology validation. The situation could be
created by morphing a node element such as a junction, tank, or
reservoir into a pump or valve. This situation is now detected
and corrected automatically, but it is strongly recommended that
you verify the flow direction of the pump or valve in question. If
you have further questions or comments related to this, please
contact Bentley Support.
Warning messages related to the value of a particular attribute
being outside the accepted range can often be corrected by
adjusting the allowable range for that attribute.
The check data algorithm performs the following validations:
Network TopologyChecks that the network contains at least one boundary

node, one pipe, and one junction. These are the minimum network requirements.
It also checks for fully connected pumps and valves and that every node is reachable from a boundary node through open links.
Element ValidationChecks that every element in the network is valid for the
calculation. For example, this validation ensures that all pipes have a non-zero
length, a non-zero diameter, a roughness value that is within the expected range,
etc.

The Detailed Calculation Summary dialog box provides a detailed reports of the
calculations performed on your model. You can see this report by clicking Analysis >
Calculation Summary.
Click the tabs in the Detailed Calculation Summary dialog box to review the details of
the report:
Executive Summary Tab on page 8-384
Calculation Options Tab on page 8-385
Pressure Summary Tab on page 8-391
Pipe Report Tab on page 8-392
Node Report Tab on page 8-392
Executive Summary Tab

The Executive Summary tab displays the following information:
8-384
Scenario Label: Displays the name of the currently selected scenario.
Computation Results: Displays information about the computed results such as

the number of gravity and pressure subnetworks and where they are draining to,
and whether convergence was achieved.
Calculation Options Tab

The Calculation Options tab displays the calculation options as they were set for the
previous calculation. Note that the fields are not editable from this tab. The tab
contains the following information:
Attribute
Description
General
Label
Lets you specify a name for the options option.
Notes
Lets you enter descriptive text to be associated with the

current calculation option.
Time Analysis Type
Select whether the analysis is extended period or steadystate.
Calculation Type
Select whether to perform an analysis of the current model

or to perform an automatic design calculation. This field is
only available when the EPS Analysis Type is chosen.
Start Time
Select the clock time at which the simulation begins. This

field is only available when the EPS Time Analysis Type is
chosen.
Base Date
Select the calendar date on which the simulation begins.

Type is chosen.
Duration
Lets you specify the duration of the simulation. This field is

only available when the EPS Analysis Type is chosen.
Hydraulic Time
Step
Lets you specify the computational time step in hydraulic

calculations. This field is only available when the EPS
Time Analysis Type is chosen.
8-385

Attribute
Description
Hydrologic Time
Step
Lets you specify the computational time step in hydrology

runoff calculations. This field is only available when the
EPS Time Analysis Type is chosen.
Reporting Time
Step
Output data will be presented at every reporting time step.

Type is chosen.
Reporting Time
Steps
Edit this collection to specify a custom definition for results

ouput, including periods where you want all time steps
saved (<All>), a constant reporting period (Constant), or no
results at all (None). This field is only available when the
Reporting Time Step value is set to Variable.
Tractive Stress
(Global Minimum)
The global minimum allowable tractive stress in a conduit.
Report Hydrologic
Time Step?
If True, hydrographs will be reported in the hydrologic

increment.
Convex Routing
Peak Flow Ratio
Used when selecting a representative flow rate from the

hydrograph to be routed when calculating the C parameter
used to perform the routing calculations.
Gravity Hydraulics
8-386
Maximum Network
Transversals
This is the maximum number of iterations that will be

performed to achieve the closest approximation of the
desired network results.
Flow Convergence
Test
This value is taken as the maximum relative change in

discharge occurring at the system outlet between two
successive network solutions. In rational hydrology, system
discharge is a function of travel time and hydraulics
through the system. Therefore, it is necessary to iterate until
the system balances, or a maximum number of trials has
occurred.
Flow Profile
Method
Allows you to choose between a backwater and capacity

analysis flow option method.

Attribute
Description
Number of Flow
Profile Steps
The gradually varied flow option divides each pipe into

internal segments prior to calculation of the hydraulic
grade. The default value of option steps is five, and it is
recommended that the value entered here be at least five for
accuracy. Increasing this number will increase the accuracy
of the hydraulic grade calculation, but will increase the
calculation time.
Hydraulic Grade
Convergence Test
The value entered here is taken as the maximum absolute

change between two successive iterations of hydraulic
grade at any junction or inlet in the system. For a given
discharge, the upstream propagation of headlosses through
pipes will continue until two successive calculations
change by an absolute difference of less than this test value.
The Hydraulic Grade Convergence Test value is used in the
standard step gradually varied flow profiling algorithm.
The calculations is assumed to converge to the solution
when the two successive depth iterations are within this
absolute test value.
Minimum Structure
Headloss
This section allows you to specify a minimum structure

headloss. If the system calculates a structure headloss that
is lower then this value, the value specified in the Minimum
Headloss field will be used.
This option applies to all structure headloss methods except
for the Absolute Method. Absolute headlosses will not be
overridden, even if they are less then the value specified in
this option.
Average Velocity
Method
This section allows you to pick the method used to

calculate the average travel time velocity. The following
four options are available:
Structure Loss
Mode
Actual Uniform Flow Velocity
Full Flow Velocity
Choose either Hydraulic Grade or Energy Grade as the

basis for the hydraulic calculations.
8-387

Attribute
Description
Save Detailed
Headloss Data?
If True, the detailed headloss data will be saved after

computation. If False, the detailed headloss data (the
AASHTO results for manholes) used in the computations
will not be saved, resulting in a smaller results file.
Gravity Pressure Interface Options
Extreme Flow Setup
Select an Extreme Flow Setup for the current calculation.
Pattern Setup
Select the Pattern Setup for the current calculation.
Pressure Hydraulics
Use Controls
During Steady
State?
When this box is checked, controls will be active during

Steady State analyses.
Wet Well Increment
Unless a wet well is set to Fixed Level, this is the increment

that is used to attempt to balance the wet well level such
that the total flow out is greater than the total flow in.
Use Pumped Flows?
In a steady state run, in pressure subnetworks, the flow

from the network is calculated using pressure equations, the
characteristics of the system and number of pumps running.
For that flow rate to be passed to the downstream gravity
system, the user should set this property to "True".
In some cases, the user will not want to use that flow but
would rather pass a loading to the downstream system
based on upstream loads and appropriate extreme flow
factors similar to the way flows are handled in the gravity
system. To pass those flows on to the downstream gravity
system, the user sets this property to "False".
In general, using pumped flows (True) is used when the
user wants to look at the peak flows when the pumps are
running, while using the loadings (False) gives more of a
true picture as one moves far downstream from the pressure
system and the effects of pump cycling become diminished.
8-388

Attribute
Description
Accuracy
Unitless number that defines the convergence criteria for

the iterative solution of the network hydraulic equations.
When the sum of the absolute flow changes between
successive iterations in all links is divided by the sum of the
absolute flows in all links, and is less than the Accuracy
value, the solution is said to have converged. The default
value is 0.001 and the minimum allowed value is 1.0e-5.
Trials
Unitless number that defines the maximum number of

iterations to be performed for each hydraulic solution.
Use Linear
Interpolation for
Multipoint Pumps?
If set to true, the engine will use linear interpolation to

interpret the pump curve as opposed to quadratic
interpolation.
Steady State
Hydrograph
Equivalent
Specify how the program should handle hydrographs

during a steady state analysis.
Headloss Options (AASHTO)
Bend Angle vs.

Bend Loss Curve
Opens the Bend Angle vs Bend Loss Curve dialog,

allowing you to modify the default curve.
Expansion, Ke
Adjustment coefficient used in AASHTO equation to

account for expansion of the flow on the exit from
incoming pipe.
Contraction, Kc
Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation to

account for contraction of the flow on the entrance in the
outlet pipe.
Shaping
Adjustment, Cs
Adjustment coefficient used in the AASHTO equation for

junction headloss calculation to account for partial diameter
inlet shaping (equivalent to Half and Full in HEC-22). If
inlet shaping is used then the headloss is decreased by this
factor (50% default).
8-389

Attribute
Description
Non-Piped Flow
Adjustment, Cn
If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total

structure outflow, a correction factor is applied to the total
loss. By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss (a
factor of 1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but
can be changed by the user.
Headloss Options (HEC-22)
8-390
Elevations
Considered Equal
Within
The maximum elevation distance that pipes entering a node

can be separated by and still be considered to be at the same
elevation.
Consider Non-Piped
Plunging Flow
If this value is set to True, plunging correction factor for

non-piped flow will be applied during the calculation.
Flat Submerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a flat submerged

transition structure.
Flat Unsubmerged
Benching correction coefficient used for a flat

Depressed
Submerged

Depressed
Unsubmerged

Half Bench
Submerged

Half Bench
Unsubmerged


Attribute
Description
Full Bench
Submerged

Full Bench
Unsubmerged

Headloss Options (Generic)
Governing
Upstream Pipe
Selection Method
Select the method for selecting the upstream pipe when

computing the headloss for a structure using the Generic
Headloss Method.
The list of calculation options can be sorted by either of two methods. You can switch
between the two sorting methods by clicking the Categorized or Alphabetical
buttons above the list pane.
Pressure Summary Tab

The Pressure Summary displays a table of data about the pressure subnetworks in the
model. Click the Copy button to copy the Pressure Summary to the clipboard. Click
the Report button to generate a preformatted Pressure Summary report.
The table displays whteher the flow is balanced, the number of trials, and the relative
flow change at a particular time step for the pressure subnetwork that is currently
selected in the Pressure Subnetwork menu:
Click the Highlight button
currently selected.
to visually distinguish the pressure subnetwork that is
If you click on a time step in the table more detailed information is displayed in the
tabs at the bottom of the dialog:
Information tab: This tab displays any element messages for the currently
selected time step.
Status Messages tab: This tab displays any status messages for the currently
selected time step.
Trials tab: This tab displays the relative flow change for each of the trials for the
currently selected time step.
8-391
Pipe Report Tab

The Pipe Report displays information about selected calculated results of the pipes in
the various subnetworks in the model in a tabular format. The table contains the
following columns:
Label: The label of the associated pipe.
Time (Maximum Flow): The time (measured from the start of the simulation)
when the maximum flow occurs in the associated pipe.
Flow (Maximum): The maximum flow that occurs in the associated pipe over the
course of the simulation.
Velocity (Maximum Calculated): The maximum velocity that occurs in the associated pipe over the course of the simulation.
Depth (Average End) / Rise (Maximum): The maximum ratio of depth to rise
that occurs in the associated pipe over the course of the simulation.
The pipes listed in the column are categorized according to the subnetwork they are
part of. To change the currently displayed subnetwork, choose another subnetwork
from the Subnetwork pulldown menu.
Node Report Tab

The Node Report displays information about selected calculated results of the nodes
in the various subnetworks in the model in a tabular format. The table contains the
following columns:
Label: The label of the associated node.
Time (Maximum Hydraulic Grade Line): The time (measured from the start of
the simulation) when the maximum hydraulic grade line occurs in the associated
node.
Hydraulic Grade Line (Maximum): The maximum hydraulic grade that occurs
in the associated node over the course of the simulation.
Depth (Maximum): The maximum outgoing depth that occurs in the associated
node over the course of the simulation.
Pressure (Maximum): The maximum pressure that occurs in the associated node
over the course of the simulation.
The nodes listed in the column are categorized according to the subnetwork they are
part of. To change the currently displayed subnetwork, choose another subnetwork
from the Subnetwork pulldown menu.
8-392
User Notifications
User notifications are messages about your model. These messages can warn you
about potential issues with your model, such as slopes that might be too steep or
elements that slope in the wrong direction. These messages also point you to errors in
your model that prevent Bentley SewerCAD V8i from solving your model.
To see user notifications:
1. Compute your model.
2. If needed, open the User Notification manager by clicking View > User
Notifications (F8).
3. Or, if the calculation fails to compute because of an input error, when your model
is finished computing, Bentley SewerCAD V8i prompts you to view user notifications to validate the input data.
You must fix any errors identified by red circles before Bentley SewerCAD V8i
can compute a result.
Errors identified by orange circles are warnings that do not prevent the computation of the model.
4. In the User Notifications manager, if a notification pertains to a particular
element, you can double-click the notification to magnify and display the element
in the center of the drawing pane.
5. As needed, use the element label to identify the element that generates the error
and use the user notification message to edit the elements properties to resolve
the error.
User Notifications Manager

The User Notifications Manager displays warnings and error messages that are turned
up by Bentley SewerCAD V8is validation routines. If the notification references a
particular element, you can zoom straight to that element by either double-clicking the
notification, or right-clicking it and selecting the Zoom To command.
Informational messages are denoted by a blue icon and do not prevent the
model from calculating successfully.
Warnings are denoted by a yellow icon and do not prevent the model from
calculating successfully.
Errors are denoted by a red icon, and the model will not successfully calculate if errors are found.
The User Notifications Manager consists of a toolbar and a tabular view containing a
list of warnings and error messages. The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
8-393
User Notifications
Details
Displays the User Notification Details

dialog box, which includes information
about any warning or error messages. For
more information, see User Notification
Details Dialog Box on page 8-395.
Save
Saves the user notifications as a commadelimited .csv file. You can open the .csv
file in Microsoft Excel or Notepad.
Report
Displays a User Notification Report.
Copy
Copies the currently highlighted warning or

error message to the Windows clipboard.
Zoom To
If the warning or error message is related to

a specific element in your model, click this
button to center the element in question in
the drawing pane.
Help
Displays online help for the User

Notification Manager.
The User Notification Manager displays warnings and error messages in a tabular
view. The table includes the following columns:
8-394
Message ID
This column displays the message ID associated

with the corresponding message.
Scenario ID
This column displays the scenario associated with

the corresponding message. This column will
display Base unless you ran a different scenario.
Element Type
This column displays the element type associated

Element ID
This column displays the element ID associated

Label
If the notification is caused by a specific element,

this column displays the label of the element
associated with the corresponding message.
Message
This column displays the description associated

Time
If the user notification occurred during a specific

time step, this column displays the time step.
Otherwise, this column is left blank.
Source
This column displays the validation routine that

triggered the corresponding message.
User Notification Details Dialog Box

This dialog lists the elements that are referred to by a time-sensitive user notification
message. In the User Notification dialog, there is a time column that displays the timestep during which time-sensitive messages occur. These messages will say during
this time-step or for this time-step, and do not display information about the referenced element or elements. Double-clicking one of these messages in the User Notifications dialog opens the User Notification Details dialog, which does provide
information about the referenced element(s).
You can double-click messages in the User Notification Details dialog to zoom the
drawing pane view to the referenced element.
8-395
8-396
Chapter
Using Scenarios and

Alternatives
Scenarios and alternatives let you create, analyze, and recall an unlimited number of
variations of your model. In Bentley SewerCAD V8i powerful two-level design,
scenarios contain alternatives to give you precise control over changes to the model.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using scenarios and alternatives:
Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives on page 9-397
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System on page 9-407
Scenarios on page 9-412
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs) on page 9-414
Alternatives on page 9-417
Calculation Options on page 9-452
Understanding Scenarios and Alternatives

Scenario management in Bentley SewerCAD V8i can dramatically increase your
productivity in the "What If?" areas of modeling, including calibration, operations
analysis, and planning.
If youve never used scenarios and alternatives before, we recommend reading all of
the topics in this section to gain a complete understanding of how they work. By
investing a little time now to understand management, you can avoid unnecessary
editing and data duplication. Take advantage of scenario management to get a lot more
out of your model, with much less work and expense.
Topics in this section include:
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management on page 9-398
A History of What-If Analyses on page 9-398
The Scenario Cycle on page 9-400
Scenario Attributes and Alternatives on page 9-402
9-397
A Familiar Parallel on page 9-402
Inheritance on page 9-403
Local and Inherited Values on page 9-405
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance on page 9-405
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance on page 9-406
Advantages of Automated Scenario Management

In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), automated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of "What

If?" conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files
and separate results.
Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a

new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
A History of What-If Analyses

The history of what-if analyses can be divided into two periods:
Before Haestad Methods - Distributed Scenarios on page 9-398
With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios on page 9-400
Before Haestad Methods - Distributed Scenarios

Traditionally, there have only been two possible ways of analyzing the effects of
change on a software model:
9-398
Using Scenarios and Alternatives
Change the model, recalculate, and review the results
Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results
Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the
data duplication, editing, and re-editing becomes very time-consuming and errorprone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions increase. Also,
comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output must be
stored in physically separate data files.
Figure 9-1:
Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios
9-399
With Haestad Methods: Self-Contained Scenarios

Effective scenario management tools need to meet these objectives:
Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally).
Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input
and output data, and direct comparisons.
Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data
from existing scenarios (data reuse)
Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions

that have a lot in common
The scenario management feature in Bentley SewerCAD V8i successfully meets all of
these objectives. A single project file enables you to generate an unlimited number of
What If? conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and quickly generate
direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.
The Scenario Cycle

The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying
and editing data, but without the disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome
file management. This process lets you cycle through any number of changes to the
model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important information.
Of course, it is possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an audit trail of
scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a calibration series or for understanding a group of master plan updates.
Figure 9-2:
9-400
Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios
9-401
Scenario Attributes and Alternatives

Before we explore scenario management further, a few key terms should be defined:
AttributeAn attribute is a fundamental property of an object, and is often a

single numeric quantity. For example, the attributes of a pipe include diameter,
length, and roughness.
AlternativeAn alternative holds a family of related attributes so pieces of data

that you are most likely to change together are grouped for easy referencing and
editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical data for the
network's elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.
ScenarioA scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the

attributes), and combines these alternatives to form an overall set of system conditions that can be analyzed. This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily
generate system conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been
previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually hold any attribute data
the referenced alternatives do.
A Familiar Parallel
Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has
eaten at a restaurant should be able to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is
comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an entre,
and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entre may have a
meat, a vegetable, and a starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in
the following figure:
Figure 9-3:
9-402
A Restaurant Meal Scenario

The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combination of courses) that could be ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what
the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1, Entre 1, and Dessert 2 might
then be combined to define a complete meal.
Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario references one alternative from
each category to create a big picture that can be analyzed. Note that different types of
alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and any category can
have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.
Figure 9-4:
Generic Scenario Anatomy
Inheritance
The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the
basic goals of scenario management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can
develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two other primary goals have
also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and
calculated results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical
interface.
But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be
duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set
of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two change?
The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance.
9-403

In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include
such traits as eye-color, hair color, and bone structure. There are two significant differences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the way inheritance is
implemented in software:
Overriding Inheritance on page 9-404
Dynamic Inheritance on page 9-404
Overriding Inheritance
Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override
inherited characteristics at any time by specifying a new value for that characteristic.
These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore considered local to
the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to
its inherited state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only
in local attributes.
For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent.
Now the child puts on a pair of green- tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye
color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is overridden
locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye
color instantly reverts to blue, as inherited from his parent.
Dynamic Inheritance
Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent's
characteristic is changed, existing children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color
example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye color from blue to
brown, and the children's eyes instantly inheriting the brown color also. Of course, if
the child has already overridden a characteristic locally, as with the green lenses, his
eyes will remain green until the lenses are removed. At this point, his eye color will
revert to the inherited color, now brown.
This dynamic inheritance has remarkable benefits for applying wide-scale changes to
a model, fixing an error, and so on. If rippling changes are not desired, the child can
override all of the parent's values, or a copy of the parent can be made instead of a
child.
9-404
Local and Inherited Values

Any changes that are made to the model belong to the currently active scenario and
the alternatives that it references. If the alternatives happen to have children, those
children will also inherit the changes unless they have specifically overridden that
attribute. The following figure demonstrates the effects of a change to a mid-level
alternative. Inherited values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black
text.
Figure 9-5: A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change
Minimizing Effort through Attribute Inheritance

Inheritance has an application every time you hear the phrase, "just like x except for
y." Rather than specifying all of the data from x again to form this new condition, we
can create a child from x and change y appropriately. Now we have both conditions,
with no duplicated effort.
We can even apply this inheritance to our restaurant analogy as follows. Inherited
values are shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text.
Note:
Salad 3 could inherit from Salad 2, if we prefer: "Salad 3 is just

like Salad 2, except for the dressing."
"Salad 2 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."
"Salad 3 is just like Salad 1, except for the dressing."
9-405

Note:
If the vegetable of the day changes (say from green beans to

peas), only Entre 1 needs to be updated, and the other entres
will automatically inherit the vegetable attribute of "Peas"
instead of "Green Beans."
"Entre 2 is just like Entre 1, except for the meat and the starch."
"Entre 3 is just like Entre 2, except for the meat."

Note:
Dessert 3 has nothing in common with the other desserts, so it

can be created as a "root" or base alternative. It does not inherit
its attribute data from any other alternative.
"Dessert 2 is just like Dessert 1, except for the topping."
Minimizing Effort through Scenario Inheritance

Just as a child alternative can inherit attributes from its parent, a child scenario can
inherit which alternatives it references from its parent. This is essentially still the
phrase just like x except for y, but on a larger scale.
Carrying through on our meal example, consider a situation where you go out to
dinner with three friends. The first friend places his order, and the second friend orders
the same thing except for the dessert. The third friend orders something totally
different, and you order the same meal as hers except for the salad.
The four meal scenarios could then be presented as follows (inherited values are
shown as gray text, local values are shown as black text):
9-406
"Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert." The salad and entre alternatives are inherited from Meal 1.
"Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2." A totally new base or root is created.
"Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad." The entre and dessert alternatives are inherited from Meal 3.
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution

System
Let us consider a fairly simple water distribution system: a single reservoir supplies
water by gravity to three junction nodes.
Figure 9-6:
Example Water Distribution System
Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial
settings, operational controls, water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the
two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands and physical properties.
Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands
and pipe diameters.
9-407
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System
Building the Model (Average Day Conditions)

During model construction, probably only one alternative from each category is going
to be considered. This model is built with average demand calculations and preliminary pipe diameter estimates. At this point we can name our scenario and alternatives,
and the hierarchies look like the following (showing only the items of interest):
Analyzing Different Demands (Maximum Day Conditions)

In our example, the local planning board also requires analysis of maximum day
demands, so a new demand alternative is required. No variation in demand is expected
at J-2, which is an industrial site. As a result, the new demand alternative can inherit J2s demand from Average Day while the other two demands are overridden.
Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alternative, but overrides the selected demand alternative. As a result, we get the following
scenario hierarchy:
9-408

Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative
hierarchy remains the same as before.
Another Set of Demands (Peak Hour Conditions)

Based on pressure requirements, the system is adequate to supply maximum day
demands. Another local regulation requires analysis of peak hour demands, with
slightly lower allowable pressures. Since the peak hour demands also share the industrial load from the Average Day condition, Peak Hour can be inherited from Average
Day. In this instance, Peak Hour could inherit just as easily from Maximum Day.
Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:
Note again that we did not change any physical data, so the physical alternatives
remain the same.
Correcting an Error
This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial
demand is not actually 500 gpmit is 1,500 gpm. Because of the inheritance within
the demand alternatives, however, only the Average Day demand for J-2 needs to be
updated. The changes ripple through to the children. After the single change is made,
the demand hierarchy is as follows:
Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections.
The three scenarios can now be calculated as a batch to update the results.
9-409
Scenario Example - Simple Water Distribution System

When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the
ability to adequately supply the system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.
Analyzing Improvement Suggestions

To counter the headloss from the increased demand load, two possible improvements
are suggested:
A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This
physical alternative is created as a child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative,
inheriting all the diameters except P-1s, which is overridden.
Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonalities between this recommendation and either of the other physical alternatives,
this can be created as a base (root) alternative.
These changes are then incorporated to arrive at the following hierarchies:
This time, the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were
changed. The two new scenarios (Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run
to provide results for these proposed improvements.
Next, features like Scenario Comparison Annotation (from the Scenario Manager) and
comparison Graphs (for extended period simulations, from the element editor dialog
boxes) can be used to directly determine which proposal results in the most improved
pressures.
9-410
Finalizing the Project

It is decided that enlarging P-1 is the optimum solution, so new scenarios are created
to check the results for average day and maximum day demands. Notice that this step
does not require handling any new data. All of the information we want to model is
present in the alternatives we already have!
Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg. Day, Big P1 scenario from Avg. Day (changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from Peak,
Big P-1 (changing the demand alternative). Likewise, Max. Day, Big P-1 could inherit
from either Max. Day or Peak, Big P-1.
Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run
the last set of scenarios, so they remain as they were.
Summary
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), automated scenario management using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of What

If? conditions without becoming overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and
separate results.
9-411
Scenarios
Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it
can provide you with powerful automated tools for directly comparing scenario
results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of
data from existing scenarios without having to re-declare any data.
With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a

new alternative or scenario, avoiding redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as
projects grow to hundreds or thousands of network elements that the advantages of
true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being able to maintain a
collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the
difference between evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore
them.
To learn more about actually using scenario management in our software, start by
running the scenario management tutorial from the Help menu or from within the
scenario manager itself. Then load one of the SAMPLE projects and explore the
scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help, press F1 or the Help button any
time there is a screen or field that puzzles you.
Scenarios
A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation
options, results, and notes associated with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set
up an unlimited number of What If? situations for your model, and then modify,
compute, and review your system under those conditions.
You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives, submit
multiple scenarios for calculation in a batch run, switch between scenarios, and
compare scenario resultsall with a few mouse clicks. There is no limit to the number
of scenarios that you can create.
Click one of the following links to learn more about creating scenarios:
9-412
Base and Child Scenarios on page 9-413
Creating Scenarios on page 9-413
Editing Scenarios on page 9-413
Scenario Manager on page 9-415
Base and Child Scenarios

Note:
The calculation options are not inherited between scenarios, but

are duplicated when the scenario is first created. The
alternatives and data records, however, are inherited. There is a
permanent, dynamic link from a child back to its parent.
There are two types of scenarios:
Base ScenariosContain all of your working data. When you start a new project,
you begin with a default base scenario. As you enter data and calculate your
model, you are working with this default base scenario and the alternatives it
references.
Child ScenariosInherit data from a base scenario, or other child scenarios.

Child scenarios allow you to freely change data for one or more elements in your
system. Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained in their
parent. This is a very powerful concept, giving you the ability to make changes in
a parent scenario that will trickle down through child scenarios, while also giving
you the ability to override values for some or all of the elements in child
scenarios.
Creating Scenarios
You create new scenarios in the Scenario Manager. A new scenario can be a Base
scenario or a Child scenario. For information about the differences between the two
types of scenarios, see Base and Child Scenarios on page 9-413.
To create a new scenario:
1. Select View > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Click the New button and select whether you want to create a Base scenario or a
Child Scenario. When creating a Child scenario, you must first highlight the
scenario from which the child is derived in the Scenario Manager tree view.
By default, a new scenario comprises the Base Alternatives associated with each
alternative type.
3. Double-click the new scenario to edit its properties in the Property Editor.
Editing Scenarios
You edit scenarios in two places in Bentley SewerCAD V8i:
9-413
Scenarios
The Scenario Manager lists all of the projects scenarios in a hierarchical tree
format, and displays the Base/Child relationship between them.
The Property Editor displays the alternatives that make up the scenario that is
currently highlighted in the Scenario Manager, along with the scenario label, any
notes associated with the scenario, and the calculation options profile that is used
when the scenario is calculated.
To edit a scenario:
1. Select View > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Double-click the scenario you want to edit to display its properties in the Property
Editor.
3. Edit any of the following properties as desired:
Scenario label - This is the same operation as renaming the scenario in the
Scenario Manager.
Notes - Add any notes or comments in the Notes field
Alternatives
Calculation Options
Running Multiple Scenarios at Once (Batch Runs)

Performing a batch run lets you set up and run calculations for multiple scenarios at
once. This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of calculations, or manage a
group of smaller calculations as a set. The list of selected scenarios for the batch run
remain with your project until you change it.
To perform a batch run:
1. Selecting View > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario
Manager tab.
2. Click the Compute Current Scenario button, then select Batch Run from the
shortcut menu.
The Batch Run Editor dialog box appears.
3. Check the scenarios you want to run, then click the Batch button. Each scenario is
calculated. You can cancel the batch run between any scenario calculation. The
selected scenarios run consecutively.
9-414

When the batch run is completed, the scenario that was current stays current, even
if it was not calculated.
4. Select a calculated scenario from the Scenario toolbar drop-down list to see the
results throughout the program.
Batch Run Editor Dialog Box

The Batch Run Editor dialog box contains the following controls:
Scenario List
Displays a list of all current scenarios. Click the

check box next to the scenarios you want to run in
batch mode.
Batch
Starts the batch run of the selected scenarios.
Select
Displays a drop-down menu containing the

following commands:
Select All - Selects all scenarios listed.
Clear Selection - Clears all selected

scenarios.
Close
Closes the Batch Run Editor dialog box.
Help
Displays context-sensitive help for the Batch Run

Editor dialog box.
Scenario Manager
The Scenario Manager lets you create, edit, and manage scenarios. There is one builtin default scenariothe Base scenario. If you wish, you only have to use this one
scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating additional scenarios that
reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of each of your
calculations. There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create.
Note:
When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records
because scenarios never actually hold calculation data records
(alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced
by that scenario exist until you explicitly delete them. By
accessing the Alternative Manager, you can delete the
referenced alternatives and data records.
The Scenario Manager consists of a hierarchical tree view and a toolbar.
9-415
Scenarios
The tree view displays all of the scenarios in the project. If the Property Editor is open,
highlighting a scenario in the list causes the alternatives that make up the scenario
appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the alternatives and
scenario information by highlighting the desired scenario and clicking the Properties
button in the Scenario Manager.
New Scenario
9-416

commands:
Child ScenarioLets you create a new

Child scenario from the currently highlighted
Base scenario.
Base ScenarioLets you create a new

Base scenario.
Delete
Removes the currently selected scenario.
Rename
Lets you rename the currently selected scenario.
Go

commands:
ScenarioLets you calculate the currently

highlighted scenario.
HierarchyLets you calculate the entire

currently highlighted branchthe Base
scenario and all Child scenarios currently
associated with it.
ChildrenLets you calculate all of the

Child scenarios associated with the
currently highlighted scenario.
Batch RunLets you run a user-defined

group of scenarios at once.
Make Current
Causes the currently selected scenario to

become the active one, and to be displayed in
the drawing pane.
Help
Displays online help for the Alternative

Manager.
Alternatives
Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios (for more information, see
Scenarios on page 9-412). They are categorized data sets that create scenarios when
placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records. A record holds
the data for a particular element in your system.
Scenarios are composed of alternatives, as well as other calculation options (see
Calculation Options Manager on page 8-373), allowing you to compute and
compare the results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary independently within scenarios, and can be shared between scenarios.
Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze. In combination
with scenarios, you can perform calculations on your system to see what effect each
alternative has. Once you have determined an alternative that works best for your
system, you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the base
alternative if you wish.
When you first set up your system, the data that you enter is stored in the various base
alternative types. If you wish to see how your system behaves, for example, by
increasing the diameter of a few select pipes, you can create a child alternative to
accomplish that. You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters,
and another with smaller diameters. There is no limit to the number of alternatives that
you can create.
Click one of the following links to learn more about creating and editing alternatives:
Base and Child Alternatives on page 9-418
Creating Alternatives on page 9-418
Editing Alternatives on page 9-419
Alternative Manager on page 9-419
Types of Alternatives
The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections. By
breaking up alternatives into these different types, we give you the ability to mix
different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i includes these types of alternatives:
Active Topology Alternative on page 9-421
Physical Alternatives on page 9-424
Design Alternative on page 9-440
9-417
Alternatives
Headloss Alternative on page 9-443
Boundary Condition Alternatives on page 9-444
Initial Settings Alternative on page 9-445
Sanitary Loading Alternative on page 9-447
Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives on page 9-449
System Flows Alternative on page 9-451
Operational Alternative on page 9-452
User Data Extensions Alternative on page 9-452
Base and Child Alternatives

There are two kinds of alternatives: Base alternatives and Child alternatives. Base
alternatives contain local data for all elements in your system. Child alternatives
inherit data from base alternatives, or even other child alternatives, and contain data
for one or more elements in your system. The data within an alternative consists of
data inherited from its parent, and the data altered specifically by you (local data).
Remember that all data inherited from the base alternative are changed when the base
alternative changes. Only local data specific to a child alternative remain unchanged.
Creating Alternatives
New alternatives are created in the Alternative Manager dialog box. A new alternative
can be a Base scenario or a Child scenario. Each alternative type contains a Base alternative in the Alternative Manager tree view.
Note:
For information regarding the differences between the two types

of alternatives, see Base and Child Alternatives on page 9-418.
To create a new Alternative:

1. Select View > Alternatives to open the Alternative Manager, or click the Alternative Manager tab.
2. To create a new Base alternative, highlight the type of alternative you want to
create, then click the New button.
3. To create a new Child alternative, right-click the Base alternative from which the
child will be derived, then select New > Child Alternative from the submenu.
4. Double-click the new alternative to edit its properties in the Alternative Editor.
9-418
Editing Alternatives
You edit the properties of an alternative in its own alternative editor. The first column
in an alternative editor contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have
been changed in this alternative.
If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is
changed in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these
rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternatives parent.
To edit an existing alternative, you can use one of two methods:
Double-click the alternative to be edited in the Alternative Manager.
or
Highlight the alternative to be edited in the Alternative Manager and click the
Properties button.
In either case, the Alternative Editor dialog box for the specified alternative appears,
allowing you to view and define settings as desired.
Alternative Manager
The Alternative Manager lets you create, view, and edit the alternatives that make up
the project scenarios. The dialog box consists of a pane that displays folders for each
of the alternative types which can be expanded to display all of the alternatives for that
type, and a toolbar.
The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
9-419
Alternatives
from ion apparently
New

commands:
Base AlternativeCreates a new Base

Alternative of the currently highlighted
type.
Child AlternativeCreates a new

Child Alternative from the currently highlighted Base Alternative.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted alternative.
Properties
Opens the Alternative Editor dialog box for

the currently highlighted alternative.
Rename

alternative.
Report
Lets you generate a report of the currently

highlighted alternative.
Help
Displays online help for the Alternative

Manager.
Alternative Editor Dialog Box

This dialog box presents in tabular format the data that makes up the alternative being
edited. Depending on the alternative type, the dialog box contains a separate tab for
each element that possesses data contained in the alternative.
9-420

Note:
Note: As you make changes to records, the check box

automatically becomes checked. If you want to reset a record to
its parent's values, clear the corresponding check box.
Many columns support Global Editing (see Globally Editing
Data), allowing you to change all values in a single column.
Right-click a column header to access the Global Edit option.
The check box column is disabled when you edit a base
alternative.
The Alternative Editor displays all of the records held by a single alternative. These
records contain the values that are active when a scenario referencing this alternative
is active. They allow you to view all of the changes that you have made for a single
alternative. They also allow you to eliminate changes that you no longer need.
There is one editor for each alternative type. Each type of editor works similarly and
allows you to make changes to a different aspect of your system. The first column
contains check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alternative.
If the check box is selected, the record on that line has been modified and the data is
local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the check box is cleared, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its
higher-level parent alternative. Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed
in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records on these rows reflect the
corresponding values in the alternative's parent.
Active Topology Alternative

The Active Topology Alternative lets you temporarily remove areas of the network
from the current analysis. This is useful for comparing the effect of proposed
construction and to gauge the effectiveness of redundancy that may be present in the
system.
The Active Topology dialog box is divided into tabs for each element type:
Conduit
Manhole
Transition
Wet Well
Outfall
Pressure Pipe
9-421
Alternatives
Pressure Junction
Pump
Variable Speed Pump Battery
Air Valve
For each tab, the same setup appliesthe tables are divided into three columns. The
first column displays whether the data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the
element Label, and the third column allows you to choose whether or not the corresponding element is Active in the current alternative.
To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, clear the check box in the Is
Active? field that corresponds to that elements Label.
Creating an Active Topology Child Alternative

When creating an active topology child alternative, you may notice that the elements
added to the child scenario also appear in your model when the base scenario is the
current scenario.
To create an active topology alternative so that the elements added to the child
scenario do not show up as part of the base scenario:
1. Create a new project.
2. Open the Property Editor.
3. Open the Scenario Manager and make sure the Base scenario is current (active).
4. Create your model by adding elements in the drawing pane.
5. Create a new child scenario and a new child active topology alternative as
described in the following steps:
a. In the Scenario Manager, click the New button and select Child Scenario
from the submenu.
b. In the Property Editor, which should now display the properties for the newly
created scenario, select <New...> in the Active Topology field.
c. In the Create New Alternative dialog box, type the name of the new child
active topology alternative name then click OK.
6. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the child scenario the current (active) scenario.
7. Add new elements to your model. These elements will be active only in the new
child alternative.
9-422

8. To verify that this worked as expected:
a. In the Scenario Manager, select the base scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the base scenario the current (active) scenario. The
new elements are shown as inactive (they appear grayed out in the drawing
pane).
b. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make
Current button to make the child scenario the current (active) scenario. The
new elements are shown as active.
Note:
If you add new elements in the base scenario, they will show up
in the child scenario. This is normal.
Active Topology Selection Dialog Box

While it is possible to make elements active or inactive by:
1. Checking or unchecking the "Is active?" box in the alternative manager under the
Active Topology Manager,
2. Unchecking the "Is active?" box in a FlexTable, or
3. Picking True of False in property grid next to "Is active?" for individual elements,
another way of making elements active or inactive is the Active Topology Selection
Tool, which is accessed through Tools>Active Topology Selection.
When the user starts Active Topology Selection, a Select tool opens. Clicking
elements in the drawing view while the selection tool is enabled can make them active
or inactive according to the commands below.
Making an element "inactive" means that the element remains in the data file but it is
not included in any hydraulic analysis calculations. Inactive elements will appear in
FlexTables but calculated values will be set to NA.
Changing the active status using this tool only affects the Active Topology Alternative
of the current scenario.
The Select tool consists of the following controls:
Done: Select Done when you are finished selecting elements. This brings the user
back to the drawing pane.
Add: When this button is selected, seelcting elements highlights the elements and
makes them Inactive. Clicking on an element that is already inactive causes the
tool to give a beep and the element remains inactive.
Remove: While in this mode, selecting elements that are inactive deselects them,
making them Active. Clicking on active elements has no effect.
9-423
Alternatives
Select By Polygon: This tool allows you to draw a polygon around one or more
elements. Right-click and select Done when you are finished drawing the
polygon. The elements inside the polygon will be added to or removed from the
selection depending on whether you have the Add or Remove button toggled on.
A node must be fully within the polygon to be affected by this tool; links will be
affected if their adjacent node(s) are contained within the polygon.
Select by Query: This tool allows you to select elements by previously created
selection sets or by using either custom or predefined queries. To create a custom
query, select Custom Queries and then the element type. To use one of the
predefined queries, choose one of the categories and then select the desired query.
Find: Find an element in your model by typing the element label or ID in the
Element menu then clicking the Find button or pressing Enter. The drawing pane
centers around the highlighted element.
Find all elements of a certain type by using an asterisk (*) as a wild-card character. For example, if you want to find all of the conduits in your model, you type
co* (this is not case-sensitive) then click the Find button. The drawing pane
centers around and highlights the first instance of a conduit in your model, and
lists all conduits in your model in the Element menu.
Clear: Clicking on this button causes all elements to become active in the current
scenario.
Right clicking while the Selection tool is open (i.e. opening the right click context
menu) brings up a list which enables the user to switch between Add, Remove or
Done.
Note:
Selecting a node element to become Inactive will also select all

adjacent pipes to become Inactive. This is because all pipes
must end at a node.
In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu
command Repeat to re-open the Active Topology Selection
dialog box.
Physical Alternatives
Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored
in a physical properties alternative, as listed below:
Physical Alternative for Conduits

The physical alternative editor for conduits is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of conduits. The following columns are available:
9-424
Column
Description
ID
Displays the unique identifier for each element in

the alternative.
Label
Displays the label for each element in the

alternative.
Tractive Stress (Local

Minimum)
This field is only available when Use Local

Minimum Tractive Stress? is set to True. The
value defined here will override the Tractive
Stress (Global Minimum) value defined in the
Calculation Options.
Use Local Minimum

Tractive Stress?
If set to True the value defined in the Tractive

Stress (Local Minimum) field overrides the
Tractive Stress (Global Minimum) value defined
in the Calculation Options.
Has User Defined

Length?
Lets you specify whether the conduit has a userdefined or schematic length.
Length (User Defined)
Lets you define the length of each channel in the

alternative that has a userdefined length.
Material
Lets you enter the name of the material used.

Alternatively, clicking the Ellipsis (...) button
opens the Material Engineering Library, allowing
you to select a pre-defined material. If a predefined material is chosen, the roughness value
will change accordingly.
Mannings n
Lets you define the Manning's roughness value for

the associated conduits. This attribute is only
available when Manning's is chosen as the
Hydraulic Analysis Friction Method on the Project
tab of the project Options (Tools > Options).
Darcy-Weisbach e
Lets you define the Darcy-Wesibach roughness

value of each conduit in the alternative. This
attribute is only available when Darcy-Wesibach
is chosen as the Hydraulic Analysis Friction
Method on the Project tab of the project Options
(Tools > Options).
9-425
Alternatives
9-426
Column
Description
Hazen-Williams C
Lets you define the Hazen-Williams roughness

value of each conduit in the alternative. This
attribute is only available when Hazen-Williams is
chosen as the Hydraulic Analysis Friction Method
on the Project tab of the project Options (Tools >
Options).
Kutters n
Lets you define the Kutter's roughness value of

each conduit in the alternative. This attribute is
only available when Kutters is chosen as the
Hydraulic Analysis Friction Method on the Project
tab of the project Options (Tools > Options).
Set Invert to
Upstream?
Lets you automatically set the upstream conduit

invert to the elevation of the upstream node.
Invert (Upstream)
Lets you define the upstream conduit invert.
Set Invert to
Downstream?
Lets you automatically set the upstream conduit

invert to the elevation of the downstream node.
Invert (Downstream)
Lets you define the downstream conduit invert.
Number of Barrels
Lets you specify the number of hydraulically

identical conduit barrels that make up the conduit.
Use Local Conduit

Description?
When this box is checked, you can define your

own conduit description for the associated
conduit. See the Conduit Description Attribute
topic for more details. xxxx
Conduit Description
Displays the Conduit Description. The Conduit

Description field is a special field which can
automatically consolidate several conduit
properties into one field. For more information,
see the Conduit Description Attribute topic. xxxx
Has User Defined Bend

Angle?
When this box is checked, you can define a bend

angle for the conduit in the Bend Angle (User
Defined) field.
Bend Angle (User

Defined)
Lets you specify a bend angle for the associated

conduit. This field is only available when the Has
User Defined Bend Angle? box is checked.
Column
Description
Conduit Type
Allows you to specify whether the conduit is a

User Defined or Catalog Conduit. If User Defined
is selected here, any of the conduit shapes will be
available. If Catalog Conduit is selected, only
those shapes defined in the Conduit Catalog will
be available. See Conduit Catalog Dialog Box for
more details. xxxx
Conduit Shape
Allows you to select the shape of the conduit. The

options available here will vary depending on the
Conduit Type you have chosen. Your selection
here will determine which dimension attributes
will be available. Click the ellipsis button to
access the Conduit Catalog Dialog Box. xxxx
Rise
Lets you define the rise (height) of the associated

conduit.
Span
Lets you define the span (width) of the associated

conduit.
Diameter
Lets you define the diameter of the associated

conduits. This column is only available for
circular and virtual conduits.
Section Size
Allows you to select from the section sizes that are

available for the selected Conduit Shape. This
field is only available for conduits whose Conduit
Type is Catalog Conduit.
Left Bank Station
Allows you to select which of the station points

defined in the Irregular Channel Section dialog
should be defined as the Left bank.
Right Bank Station
Allows you to select which of the station points

defined in the Irregular Channel Section dialog
should be defined as the Right bank.
Channel Weighting
Method
Allows you to select the weighting roughness

method used for the associated open irregular
channel conduit.See Open and Closed Channel
Weighting Methods on page 13-690 for more
information.
9-427
Alternatives
9-428
Column
Description
Irregular Channel
Section
Allows you to access the Irregular Channel dialog,

where you can define the cross sectional station
vs. depth points for the associated irregular
channel.
Bottom Width
Lets you define the base width of the associated

conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.
Right Side Slope
Lets you define the right side slope of the

associated conduits. This column is only available
for conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.
Left Side Slope
Lets you define the left side slope of the associated

conduits that have a Trapezoidal or Virtual
Conduit Shape.
Is Diversion Link?
When this box is checked, the flow into the

associated conduit is determined based on a rating
curve, which is defined in the Diversion Rating
Curve dialog.
Diversion Rating
Curve
Opens the Diversion Rating Curve dialog,

allowing you to define the rating curve using
Upstream Flow vs. Diverted Flow points. This
field is only available when Is Diversion Link? has
been checked.
Roughness Type
Allows you to select the method by which

roughness data is applied to the conduit.
Left Bank Mannings n
Lets you specify the Manning's roughness value

for the left bank of each conduit in the alternative.
This column is only available for conduits that
have a Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual, or Irregular
Channel Conduit Shape.
Column
Description
Channel Mannings n
Lets you specify the Manning's roughness value

for the channel of each conduit in the alternative.
Right Bank Mannings

n
Manning's n Lets you specify the Manning's

roughness value for the right bank of each conduit
in the alternative. This column is only available
for conduits that have a Trapezoidal Channel,
Virtual, or Irregular Channel Conduit Shape.
Left Bank C
Lets you specify the Hazen-Williams roughness

value for the left bank of each conduit in the
alternative. This column is only available for
conduits that have a Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual,
or Irregular Channel Conduit Shape.
Channel C

value for the channel of each conduit in the
Right Bank C

value for the right bank of each conduit in the
Left Bank e
Lets you specify the Darcy-Weisbach roughness

value for the left bank of each conduit in the
Channel e

value for the channel of each conduit in the
9-429
Alternatives
9-430
Column
Description
Right Bank e

value for the right bank of each conduit in the
Left Bank Kutters n
Lets you specify the Kutter's roughness value for

the left bank of each conduit in the alternative.
Channel Kutters n

the channel of each conduit in the alternative. This
column is only available for conduits that have a
Trapezoidal Channel, Virtual, or Irregular Channel
Conduit Shape.
Right Bank Kutters n

the right bank of each conduit in the alternative.
Physical Alternative for Manholes

The physical alternative editor for manholes is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of manholes. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Bolted Cover?
Indicates that the associated manhole has a bolted

cover. If the manhole cover is bolted, then the
hydraulic grade line is not reset to the rim
elevation at the downstream end of the upstream
pipes in the case of a flooding situation (the
calculated HGL being higher than the rim
elevation).
Length
Displays the length of each box manhole in the

alternative.
Diameter
Displays the diameter of each circular manhole in

the alternative.
Structure Type
Indicates whether the manhole is circular or box

shaped. Clicking a field displays a list box that
allows you to switch between the two.
Set Rim to Ground

Elevation
Enables or disables a data entry shortcut. If the

box is checked, the manhole rim elevation is set
equal to the ground elevation automatically.
Elevation (Rim)
Lets you define the top elevation of a manhole

structure. This elevation is typically flush with the
ground surface. However in some cases, the rim
elevation may be slightly below the ground
surface elevation (sunk) or slightly above the
ground surface elevation (raised).
Width
Displays the width of each box manhole in the

alternative.
Elevation (Invert)
Lets you define the elevation at the bottom of the

manhole.
9-431
Alternatives
Column
Description
Elevation (Ground)
Displays the ground elevation for each node in the

alternative.
Physical Alternative for Transitions

The physical alternative editor for transitions is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of transitions. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Set Top to Ground

Elevation?
When this box is checked, the Elevation (Top) will

be set to the value for the Elevation (Ground).
Transition Length
Enter the length of the chamber.
Elevation (Top)
Lets you set the top elevation of the transition

element.
Elevation (Invert)
Lets you set the bottom elevation of the transition

element.
Elevation (Ground)
Lets you set the ground elevation of the transition

element.
Physical Alternative for Wet Wells

The physical alternative editor for wet wellsis used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of wet wells. The following columns are available:
9-432
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Column
Description
Label

alternative.
Elevation (Minimum)
Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level.

If the wet well drains below this point, it will
automatically be shut off from the system.
Operating Range Type
Specify whether the vertical parameters of the

tank are specified as levels measured from the
base elevation or as elevations measured from the
global datum.
Level (Maximum)
A reference level to compare the hydraulic grade

in the tank. Does not influence calculations.
Elevation (Maximum)
Highest allowable water surface elevation or level.

If the tank fills above this point, it will
Elevation (Base)
Elevation of the storage tank base used as a

reference when entering water surface elevations
in the tank in terms of levels.
Use Low Alarm?
Specifies whether or not to check low alarm levels

during the calculation and generate messages if
the levels are violated. When this field is set to
true the Elevation (Low Alarm) and Level (Low
Alarm) fields become active.
Use High Alarm?
Specifies whether or not to check high alarm

levels during the calculation and generate
messages if the levels are violated. When this field
is set to true the Elevation (High Alarm) and Level
(High Alarm) fields become active.
Level (Low Alarm)
The level below which the low level alarm is

generated. Calculation notifications are produced
to advise you of any alarm level violations.
Elevation (Low Alarm)
The elevation below which the low level alarm is

9-433
Alternatives
Column
Description
Level (High Alarm)
The level above which the high level alarm is

Elevation (High
Alarm)
The elevation above which the high level alarm is

Level (Minimum)
Lowest allowable water surface elevation or level.

If the wet well drains below this point, it will
Volume (Inactive)
Enter the inactive volume for this wet well. This

data is used when performing water quality
analysis. This field becomes active when the
Section field is set to Non-Circular or Variable
Area.
Cross Section Curve
Opens the Cross Section Curve dialog which

allows you to defines a curve which specifies the
relationship between depth and volume.
Section
Specify how the tank volume is defined.
Volume Full (Input)
If this is a Variable Area Wet Well enter the total

storage volume for the tank. If this is a Constant
Area Wet Well, the total active volume will be
computed from the other tank data and this field
will not be editable.
Area (Average)
Cross-sectional area of wet well for constant xross

section wet wells.
Diameter
Diameter of the wet well with constant circular

cross section.
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation of the ground surface at the wet well.
Physical Alternative for Outfalls

The physical alternative editor for outfalls is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of outfalls. The following columns are available:
9-434
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Set Rim to Ground

Elevation?
Set the rim elevation to be the same as the ground

elevation.
Elevation (Rim)
Enter the rim elevation for the outfall.
Elevation (Invert)
Enter the invert elevation for the outfall.
Elevation (Ground)
Displays the ground elevation for each node in the

alternative.
Physical Alternative for Pressure Pipes

The physical alternative editor for pressure pipes is used to create various data sets for
the physical characteristics of pressure pipes. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Specify Local Minor

Loss?
If true then the minor coefficient for the element is

manually set, otherwise the value is derived from
the minor loss engineering library. When this field
is set to True the Minor Loss Coefficient (Local)
field becomes active.

(Local)
User defined minor loss coefficient. You can either

type in the value or select a value from the Minor
Loss Engineering Library.
Diameter
this value represents the internal diameter of a

circular pipe or four times the hydraulic radius for
non-circular cross sections.
9-435
Alternatives
9-436
Column
Description
Has Check Valve?
Defines whether the pipe contains a check valve

that limits flow to a single direction. Direction of
flow is with the direction of the pipe.
Minor Losses
Opens the Minor Losses dialog, which lists all the

minor losses associated with the pipe, and can be
used to generate the composite minor loss
coefficient.

(Derived)
Displays the composite minor loss value

calculated from the data in the Minor Loss
Collection.
Invert (Upstream)
Invert at upstream end of conduit.
Set Invert to
Upstream?
If True then the upstream invert of the conduit will

be set to the invert elevation of the upstream node.
Length (User Defined)
A user defined length that is not scaled from the

underlying map dimensions.
Has User Defined

Length?
Allows the calculated scaled pipe length to be

overidden with a user defined value.
Material
Opens the Material Engineering Library, allowing

you to select the construction material of the pipe.
Kutters n
Roughness coefficient used in the Kutters

equation. This field is only available when the
Kutters Friction Method is selected from the
Project tab of the Options dialog.
Hazen-Williams C
Roughness coefficient used in the Hazen Williams

Hazen Williams Friction Method is selected from
the Project tab of the Options dialog.
Darcy-Weisbach e
Roughness coefficient used in the Darcy Weisbach

equation.This field is only available when the
Darcy Weisbach Friction Method is selected from
the Project tab of the Options dialog.
Column
Description
Mannings n
Roughness coefficient used in the Mannings

Mannings Friction Method is selected from the
Project tab of the Options dialog.
Invert (Downstream)
Invert at downstream end of pipe.
Set Invert to
Downstream?
If True then the downstream invert of the conduit

will be set to the invert elevation of the
downstream node
Physical Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The physical alternative editor for pressure junctions is used to create various data sets
for the physical characteristics of pressure junctions. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Elevation
Lets you define the elevation of each pressure

junction in the alternative.
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation at the ground surface of the node.
Physical Alternative for Pumps

The physical alternative editor for pumps is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of pumps. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
9-437
Alternatives
Column
Description
Pattern (Relative
Speed)
Select the pattern by which the relative speed

factor is adjusted over the course of the
simulation.
Control Node on
Suction Side?
Specifies if the VSP has a suction side control

node.
Hydraulic Grade
(Target)
The head that the VSP will attempt to maintain at

the control node.
Relative Speed Factor

(Maximum)
The highest relative speed factor that the pump

can be set at to meet the target head at the control
node. If the target head cannot be met when the
pump is set at the maximum relative speed factor,
the maximum will be used.
Control Node
The node that the VSP checks to determine

whether to increase, maintain, or decrease its
relative speed factor.
Flow (Target)
The flow that the VSP will attempt to maintain at

the control node.
VSP Type
Specify how the VSP is controlled.
Is Variable Speed
Pump?
If True the pump will act as a variable speed

pump.
Pump Definition
Select the pump definition to apply to the pump,

or click the Edit command to open the Pump
Definitions Manager.
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation of the ground surface at the node.
Elevation (Invert)
Bottom elevation of the structure.
Physical Alternative for Variable Speed Pump Batteries

The physical alternative editor for variable speed pump batteries (VSPBs) is used to
create various data sets for the physical characteristics of variable speed pump
batteries. The following columns are available:
9-438
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
VSPB Type
Specify how the VSPB is controlled.
Target Flow
The flow that the battery will attempt to maintain

at the control node.
Control Node on
Suction Side?
Specifies if the VSPB has a suction side control

node.
Lag Pump Count
Number of lag pumps (identical to the lead pump)

whose relative speed factor is adjusted to maintain
the target head.

(Maximum)
The highest relative speed factor that the pump

can be set at to meet the target head at the control
node. If the target head cannot be met when the
pump is set at the maximum relative speed factor,
the maximum will be used.
Hydraulic Grade
(Target)
The head that the barttery will attempt to maintain

at the control node.
Control Node
The node that the VSP checks to determine

whether to increase, maintain, or decrease its
relative speed factor.
Battery Pump
Definition
Select the pump definition for the lead and lag

pumps in the battery, or click the Edit command to
open the Pump Definitions Manager.
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation (Invert)
Bottom elevation of the structure.
Physical Alternative for Air Valves

The physical alternative editor for air valves is used to create various data sets for the
physical characteristics of air valves. The following columns are available:
9-439
Alternatives
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Elevation
Elevation setting of the air valve.
Treat Air Valve as

Junction?
Specifies whether or not to treat the air valve as a

junction element in the computational analysis. if
false, the valve may allow part full flow subject to
the prevailing hydraulic conditions.
Elevation (Ground)
Design Alternative
The Design Alternative Editor allows you to edit the pipe and node constraints
governing the design of the system. It also allows you to specify which gravity
elements you want designed, and the extent to which you want them designed.
For example, you may want to design a particular pipe. However, you may also want
to design the downstream invert elevation to meet a particular velocity, cover, and
slope constraint.
The tabbed dialog for each particular type of element follows the same general format.
The top of the dialog box contains several fields where the design constraints can be
entered. The constraints entered in these fields are applied to every element in the
table on the bottom of the dialog, except the elements that are specified to contain
local values. This system allows you to rapidly enter the values that govern most of
the elements in the table, and then manually override the constraints for those
elements that are exceptions to the majority. The following attributes are available in
this section:
Pipe diameters, invert elevations, and node structures can be all designed with the
same set of design constraints. You also have the option to adjust these values individully for each pipe or node.
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the following tabs:
9-440
Gravity Pipe
Node
Gravity Pipe Tab

The Gravity Pipe tab allows you to enter default constraints to be used for the design
of pipes when performing a calculation run in design mode. The dialog is divided into
the following sections:
Default Constraints
Extended Design
Default Constraints Section

In this section, there is a Velocity tab, a Cover tab, and a Slope tab. You can specify
the following default constraints to be used for the design of gravity pipes:
Velocity Tab: The Velocity tab consists of the following controls:
Velocity Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Velocity value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Velocity (Minimum) vs Velocity (Maximum) points in
tabular format.
Velocity (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable velocity value. This

Velocity (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable velocity value. This

Cover Tab: The Cover tab consists of the following controls:
Cover Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Cover value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Cover (Minimum) vs Cover (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
Cover (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable cover value. This

Cover (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable cover value. This

Slope Tab: The Slope tab consists of the following controls:
Slope Constraints TypeWhen Simple is chosen, a single minimum and

maximum Slope value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify
multiple Rise vs Slope (Minimum) vs Slope (Maximum) points in tabular
format.
9-441
Alternatives
Slope (Minimum)Specify the minimum allowable slope value. This control

Slope (Maximum)Specify the maximum allowable slope value. This control

Extended Design Section

This section lets you specify if the following design parameters are to be used. If they
are to be used, you can also specify the associated default value. The Extended Design
section is split into three tabs:
9-442
Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following
controls:
Is Part Full Design?When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full
target to be used by the design algorithm.
Percent Full Constraint TypeAllows you to specify how the Percent Full
constraints are defined. When Simple is chosen, a single Percentage Full
value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs
Percent Full points in tabular format.
Percentage FullSpecify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part
Full Design? box is checked. This control is only availble when the Percent
Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following
controls:
Allow Multiple Barrels?When checked, allows the design algorithm to use

more than one identical section in parallel, up to the specified Maximum
Number of Barrels.
Maximum Number of BarrelsThe maximum number of identical sections

allowed to be used in parallel when the Allow Multiple Barrels? box is
checked.
Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
Limit Section Size?When checked, limits the pipe section height to the
specified Maximum Rise value during the design process.
Maximum RiseThe maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in

the design when the Limit Section Size? box is checked.
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity
structures when performing calculations in design mode. During an automatic design,
the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to the structure according
to the structure's matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and
Crowns. Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by
a specified amount. This value is called the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program
supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures can minimize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
Headloss Alternative
The headloss alternative editor allows you to define headloss properties for manhole
and transition elements. The following columns are available for both element types:
ID: Displays the unique identifier for each element in the alternative.
Label: Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Headloss Coefficient (Standard): Enter the headloss coefficient for the structure.
The headloss across the structure will be equal to this number multiplied by the exit
conduit velocity head. This field is only used when the Headloss Method is set to
Standard.
Headloss Coefficient (Upstream): This field is only used when the Headloss Method
is set to Generic. The Generic method computes the structure headloss by multiplying
the velocity head of the exit pipe by the user-defined Headloss (Downstream) value
and then subtracting the velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by
thevalue entered in this field.
Headloss Coefficient (Downstream): This field is only used when the Headloss
Method is set to Generic. The Generic method computes the structure headloss by
multiplying the velocity head of the exit pipe by the value entered in this field and
then subtracting the velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by the
user-defined Headloss Coefficient (Upstream) value.
HEC-22 Benching Method: Select which correction factor for benching will be used.
This field is only used when the Headloss Method is set to HEC-22 Energy.
Absolute Headloss: Enter the desired value for headloss at the structure. This method
ensures that the headloss across the structure will be equal to the value entered here
regardless of the actual flows or geometry of the structure. This field is only used
when the Headloss Method is set to Absolute.
9-443
Alternatives
Headloss Method: Select the method to be used to calculate the headlosses through
the associated structure. The option chosen here determines which of the parameter
fields will become available.
Flow-Headloss Curve: Specify the previously defined Flow-Headloss curve to be
applied to the node, or create a new one by choosing the <Select...> option to access
the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog.
AASHTO Shaping Method: Select the correction factor for shaping used in the
calculation of headloss using the AASHTO method. This field is only used when the
Headloss Method is set to AASHTO.
Boundary Condition Alternatives

The boundary condition alternative allows you to define boundary condition settings
for outfall elements. The following columns are available:
9-444
Column
Description
ID
Displays the unique identifier for each element in the

alternative.
Label
Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Elevation-Flow Curve
Displays the label of the Elevation-Flow Curve that

has been assigned to an outfall that is using the
Elevation-Flow curve Boundary Condition Type.
Elevation (Tailwater)
Lets you enter the user defined tailwater value. This

column is only available for elements that use the User
Defined Tailwater Boundary Condition Type.
Column
Description
Boundary Condition
Type
Lets you specify the type of boundary condition to be

used at the associated outfall element. The following
choices are available:
Free OutfallFor a free outfall control, it is

assumed that the downstream discharge conditions do not directly affect the hydraulic response
of the structure. This is equivalent to assuming that
the downstream TW elevation never rises above
the controlling structure outfall invert of the structure.
User Defined TailwaterThis type of boundary

condition allows you to directly enter a tailwater
value.
Elevation Flow CurveFor this type of boundary

condition, an elevation-flow table is specified to
simulate a situation where flow rate varies over
time.
CrownThis condition should be used when the

pipe discharges to an outlet where the water
surface elevation is equal to the elevation of the
top of the pipe.
Initial Settings Alternative

The Initial Settings Alternative contains the data that set the conditions of certain
types of network elements at the beginning of the simulation. For example, a pipe can
start in an open or closed position and a pump can start in an on or off condition.
Wet Well Tab

The initial settings tab for wet wells allows you to define the initial settings for wet
wells. The following conditions are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
9-445
Alternatives
Column
Description
Is Fixed Level In
Steady State?
If False in a steady state run, and if a pump cannot

keep up with inflow the wet well level will be
increased (by the amount set by "increment" in the
calculation options) until the flow keeps up with
the inflow or the level reaches a maximum. If the
level reaches maximum and the inflowing pipe is a
pressure pipe, that pipe will be closed. This can
lead to disconnected systems or subnetworks with
no flow in some cases.
If True, the initial wet well level will be
maintained.
Level (Initial)
The wet well level for a steady run or the level at

time zero for an EPS run.
Elevation (Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation

for each wet well in the alternative that uses the
User Defined Initial Elevation Initial Elevation
Type.
Pressure Pipe Tab

The initial settings tab for pressure pipes allows you to define the initial settings for
pressure pipes. The following conditions are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Status (Initial)
Whether the pipe is Open or Closed at time zero

for an EPS run.
Pump Tab
The initial settings tab for pumps allows you to define the initial settings for pumps.
The following conditions are available:
9-446
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Status (Initial)
Whether the pump is On or Off at time zero for an

EPS run.

(Initial)
The relative speed factor at time zero for an EPS

run.
Variable Speed Pump Battery Tab

The initial settings tab for variable speed pump batteries allows you to define the
initial settings for variable speed pump batteries. The following conditions are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Status (Initial)
Whether the pump is On or Off at time zero for an

EPS run.

(Initial)
The relative speed factor at time zero for an EPS

run.
Sanitary Loading Alternative

The sanitary loading alternative lets you define sanitary loading data for manholes,
wet wells, and pressure junctions, as listed below:
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Manholes on page 9-448
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Wet Wells on page 9-448
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Pressure Junctions on page 9-448
9-447
Alternatives
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Manholes

The sanitary loading alternative for manholes allows you to define sanitary loading
data for manhole elements. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Sanitary Loads
Clicking the Ellipses (...) button allows you to

enter sanitary loads in the Sanitary Loads dialog
box for the currently highlighted element.
Sanitary Loading Alternative for Wet Wells

The sanitary loading alternative for wet wells allows you to define sanitary loading
data for wet well elements. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Sanitary Loads

Sanitary Loading Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The sanitary loading alternative for pressure junctions allows you to define sanitary
loading data for pressure junction elements. The following columns are available:
9-448
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Column
Description
Label

alternative.
Sanitary Loads

Infiltration and Inflow Alternatives

The infiltration and inflow alternative lets you define loading data for elements
capable of accepting an inflow, as listed below:
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Conduits

The infiltration and inflow alternative for conduits allows you to define loading data
for conduits. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Hydrograph Curve
Infiltration Unit Count
Infiltration Pattern
Infiltration Base Flow
Inflitration Loading
Unit
Infiltration Rate per
Loading Unit
Infiltration Load Type
Infiltration Additional
Flow
9-449
Alternatives
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Manholes

The infiltration and inflow alternative for manholes allows you to define loading data
for manholes. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection
Contains an Ellipsis (...) button that allows you to

access the Inflow Collection dialog box for the
associated element.
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Wet Wells

The infiltration and inflow alternative for wet well nodes allows you to define loading
data for wet well nodes. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
Infiltration and Inflow Alternative for Pressure Junctions

The infiltration and inflow alternative for pressure junctions allows you to define
loading data for pressure junctions. The following columns are available:
9-450
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Column
Description
Label

alternative.
Inflow Collection

associated element.
System Flows Alternative

The system flows alternative allows you to specify additional and known flow, along
with other contributing sources of water that are not part of the model. System flows
indicate a final combined result.
System Flow Alternative for Manholes

The system flow alternative for manholes allows you to define known flow loading
data for manholes. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
Flow (Known)
System Flow Alternative for Wet Wells

The system flow alternative for wet wells allows you to define known flow loading
data for wet wells. The following columns are available:
Column
Description
ID

the alternative.
Label

alternative.
9-451
Calculation Options
Column
Description
Flow (Known)
Operational Alternative
The Operational Alternative is where you can specify controls on pressure pipes,
pumps, as well as valves. The Controlled field contains a Boolean (true or false) statement that indicates whether the network element is controlled. Clicking in this field
activates a button that allows you to access the Controls dialog box and edit the
controls for this element.
The Operational Controls alternative allows you to create, modify and manage both
logical controls and logical control sets.
User Data Extensions Alternative

The User Data Alternative allows you to edit the data defined in the User Data Extension command for each of the network element types. The User Data Alternative
editor contains a tab for each type of network element.
Calculation Options
Each scenario is associated with a set of calculation options. Calculation options are
stored in a discrete Calculation Options Profile. Calculation Options Profiles are
discussed in the chapter Creating Your Model.
For more information on Calculation Options Profiles, see Creating Calculation
Profiles on page 8-434 and Calculation Profile Attributes on page 8-435.
9-452
Chapter
10
Presenting Your
Results
Bentley SewerCAD V8i gives you several ways to present your network and results
computed by the software.
Click one of the following links to learn how to present your network and results
computed by Bentley SewerCAD V8i:
Using Background Layers on page 10-453
Annotating Your Model on page 10-462
Color Coding Your Model on page 10-470
Using Profiles on page 10-474
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables on page 10-488
Reporting on page 10-507
Graphing on page 10-509
Chart Options Dialog Box on page 10-520
Print Preview Window on page 10-587
Using Background Layers

Use background layers to display pictures behind your network. For example, you
might want to display a picture of a neighborhood behind your network, so you can
relate elements in your network to structures and roads depicted in the picture. You
can add, delete, edit and rename background layers in the Background Layers
Manager.
You can add multiple pictures to your project for use as background layers, and turn
off the ones you don't want to show and turn on those you do. Additionally, you can
create groups of pictures in folders, so you can hide or show an entire folder or group
of pictures at once.
To add or delete background layers, open the Background Layers manager: click View
> Background Layers (Ctrl+2).
10-453

You can use shapefiles, AutoCAD DXF files, and raster (also called bitmap) pictures
as background images for your model. These raster image formats are supported:
bmp, jpg, jpeg, jpe, jfif, gif, tif, tiff, png, and sid.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using background layers:
Background Layer Manager on page 10-454
Working with Background Layer Folders on page 10-456
Adding Background Layers on page 10-457
Deleting Background Layers on page 10-457
Editing Background Layers on page 10-458
Renaming Background Layers on page 10-458
Turning Background Layers On and Off on page 10-458
Working with Background Layer Folders on page 10-456
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box on page 10-460
DXF Properties Dialog Box on page 10-461
Performing ProjectWise Operations on page 4-159
Background Layer Manager

Note:
When multiple background layers are overlaid, priority is given

to the one that appears highest in the list. In other words, a layer
in the first list position is drawn on top of all other layers,
since they are all below it on the list.
The Background Layer manager lets you add, edit, and remove and manage the background layers that are associated with the project. The dialog box contains a list pane
that displays each of the layers currently contained within the project, along with a
number of button controls.
When a background layer is added, it appears in the Background Layers list pane,
along with an associated check box that is used to control that layers visibility.
Selecting the check box next to a layer causes that layer to become visible in the main
drawing pane; clearing it causes it to become invisible. If the layers in the list pane are
contained within one or more folders, clearing the check box next to a folder causes all
of the layers within that folder to become invisible.
10-454
Presenting Your Results
New

commands:
FileOpens a browse dialog box that

allows you to choose the file to use as a
background layer.
FolderCreates a folder in the Background Layers list pane.
Delete
Removes the currently highlighted

background layer.
Rename

layer.
Edit
Opens the background layer properties

dialog box that corresponds with the
currently highlighted background layer.
Shift Up
Moves the currently highlighted object up in

the list pane.
Shift Down
Moves the currently highlighted object

down in the list pane.
Expand All
Expands all of the branches in the hierarchy

displayed in the list pane.
Collapse All
Collapses all of the branches in the

Help
Displays online help for the Background

Layer Manager.
10-455
Working with Background Layer Folders

You can create folders in the Background Layers Manager to organize your background layers and create a group of background layers that can be turned off as one
entity. You can also create folders within folders. When you start a new project,
Bentley SewerCAD V8i displays an empty folder in the Background Layers Manager
called Background Layers. New background layer files and folders are added to the
Background Layers folder by default.
To add a background layer folder:
1. Click View > Background Layers to open the Background Layers Manager.
2. In the Background Layers Manager, click the New button, then click New Folder
from the shortcut menu.
Or select the default Background Layers folder, then right-click and select New >
Folder from the shortcut menu.
If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click New > New Folder. Or right-click, then select New > Folder from
the shortcut menu.
3. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
4. Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.
To delete a background layer folder:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, select the folder you want to delete, then
click the Delete button.
You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To rename a background layer folder:

2. In the Background Layers Managers, select the folder you want to rename, then
click the Rename button.
You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
3. Type the new name of the folder, then press Enter.
10-456
You can also rename a background layer folder by selecting the folder, then
modifying its label in the Properties Editor.
Adding Background Layers

You add background layers to your project using the Background Layers Manager.
When you start a new project, Bentley SewerCAD V8i displays an empty folder in the
Background Layers Manager called Background Layers. New background layer files
and folders are added to the Background Layers folder by default.
To add a background layer:
2. In the Background Layers Managers, click the New button, then click New File
Or right-click on the default Background Layers folder and select New > File
To add a new background layer file to an existing folder in the Background

Layer Manager, select the folder, then click New > New File. Or right-click,
then select New > File from the shortcut menu.
3. Navigate to the file you want to add as a background layer and select it.
If you select a .dxf file, the DXF Properties dialog box opens. For more information, see DXF Properties Dialog Box.
If you select a .shp the ShapeFile Properties dialog box opens. For more information, see Shapefile Properties Dialog Box.
If you select a .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jfif, .gif, .tif, .tiff, .png, or .sid file, the
Image Properties dialog box opens. For more information, see Image Properties Dialog Box.
4. After you add the background layer, you might have to use the Pan button to move
the layer within the drawing area; Zoom Extents does not center a background
image.
Deleting Background Layers

To delete a background layer:
Select the background layer you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Or, right-click the background layer, then select Delete from the shortcut menu.
10-457
Editing Background Layers

You can edit a background layer in two ways: you can edit its properties or its position
in a list of background layers displayed in the Background Layers Manager.
To edit the properties of a background layer:
1. Select the background layer you want to edit.
2. Click the Edit button. A Properties dialog box opens.
You can also right-click the background layer, then select Edit from the
shortcut menu.
To change the position of a background layer in the list of background layers:

The order of a background layer determines its Z level and what displays if you use
more than one background layer. Background layers at the top of the list display on
top of the other background layers in the drawing pane; so, background layers that are
lower than the top one in the list might be hidden or partially hidden by layers above
them in the list.
Select the background layer whose position you want to change in the list of Background Layers Manager, then click the Shift Up or Shift Down buttons to move the
selected background layer up or down in the list.
Renaming Background Layers

To rename a background layer:
Select the background layer you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Or, right-click the background layer that you want to rename, then select Rename
Turning Background Layers On and Off

You can choose to turn your background layers off by clearing the check box next to
the background layer file or folder than contains it in the Background Layers Manager.
Image Properties Dialog Box

This dialog box opens when you are adding or editing a background-layer image other
than a .dxf or .shp. Use the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
10-458
Image Filter
Lets you more clearly display background images

that you resize. Set this to Point, Bilinear, or
Trilinear. These are methods of displaying your
image on-screen.
Point works well when you are not changing

the size of the image in the display, for
example, when you are displaying a 500 x 500
pixel image at 100% using 500 x 500 pixels
on-screen.
Bilinear and Trilinear work well when you

display your image on-screen using more or
fewer pixels than your image contains, such
as displaying a 500 x 500 pixel image at by
stretching it to 800 x 800 pixels on-screen.
Trilinear gives you smoother transitions when
you zoom in and out of the image.
Transparency
Lets you set the transparency level of the

background layer. Bentley SewerCAD V8i lets
you add transparency to any image type you use as
a background. Bentley SewerCAD V8i ignores
any transparency that exists in the image before
you use it as a background.
Resolution
Lets you select the clarity for MrSID images that

you use as background images. Because using a
higher level of clarity or resolution increases the
time it takes to display a MrSID image, you can
select the resolution that best meets your needs.
For formats other than MrSID, this drop-down list
contains only one selection.
10-459
Use Compression
This checkbox lets you compress the image in

memory so that it takes up less RAM while it is
being loaded. When you check this option, you
may see slight color distortion in the image.
Note:
Image Position Table
The way the image is

compressed depends on your
computers video card. Not all
video cards support this
feature. If you check this option
but your computers video card
does not support image
compression, the request for
compression will simply be
ignored and the image will be
loaded uncompressed.
Lets you position the background layer with

respect to your drawing.
X/Y Image displays the size of the image you

are using for a background and sets its position with respect to the origin of your drawing.
You cannot change this data.
X/Y Drawing displays where the corners of the

image your are using will be positioned relative to your drawing. By default, no scaling is
used. However, you can scale the image you
are using by setting different locations for the
corners of the image you are importing. The
locations you set are relative to the origin of
your Bentley SewerCAD V8i drawing.
You can also use BMP and JPG image files. For more information, see How Do I
Enter the Scale of a Background Image If it is a File Type without an Inherent Scale?
on page 16-919.
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box

The Shapefile Properties dialog box lets you define a shapefile background layer. Use
the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
Filename
10-460
Lists the path and filename of the shapefile to use

as a background layer.
Browse
Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the

file to be used as a background layer.
Label
Identifies the background layer.
Unit
Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial

data within the shapefile. For example, if the X
and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet,
choose ft. from the drop-down list.
Transparency
Lets you specify the transparency level of the

background layer, where 0 has the least
transparency and 100 has the most.
Line Color
Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the

Ellipsis (...) button to open a Color palette
containing more color choices.
Line Thickness
Sets the thickness of the outline of the layer

elements. Use values beginning at 0, where 0 is
the minimum thickness and larger values are
thicker.
Fill Color
Sets the fill color of the layer elements. Click the

Fill Figure
Lets you show or hide the selected fill color for the
layer elements. Select this check box to display
the selected background color; clear it to turn off
the background color and only the outline
displays.
To access the Shapefile Properties dialog box, click New File in the Background
Layers manager, then select an .shp file.
DXF Properties Dialog Box

The DXF Properties dialog box lets you define a .dxf file as the background layer. Use
the following controls to define the properties of the background layer:
Filename
Lists the path and filename of the .dxf file to use

as a background layer.
10-461
Annotating Your Model
Browse
Opens a browse dialog box, letting you select the

file to be used as a background layer.
Label
Identifies the background layer.
Unit
Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial

data within the shapefile. For example, if the X
and Y coordinates of the shapefile represent feet,
choose ft. from the drop-down list.
Transparency
Lets you specify the transparency level of the

background layer, where 0 has the least
transparency and 100 has the most.
Line Color
Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the

Default Color
Lets you use the line color included in the .dxf file
or lets you use a custom color that you select in the
Line Color field. Select this check box to use the
default color included in the .dxf file. cleared this
check box if you want to choose a custom color
from the Line Color field.
Symbol
Lets you choose the symbol that is displayed for

each point element in the .dxf.
Size
Sets the size of the symbol for each point element

in the .dxf.
To access the .dxf properties, click New File In the Background Layers manager, then
select a .dxf file.

You can annotate any of the element types in Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
To work with annotations, open the Element Symbology manager: click View >
Element Symbology (Ctrl+1).
Click one of the following links to learn more about annotating your model:
10-462
Element Symbology Manager on page 10-463
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager on page 10-465
Adding Annotations on page 10-466
Deleting Annotations on page 10-467
Editing Annotations on page 10-467
Renaming Annotations on page 10-467
Annotation Properties Dialog Box on page 10-468
Element Symbology Manager

The Element Symbology manager allows you to control the way that elements and
their associated labels are displayed. The dialog box contains a pane that lists each
element type along with the following buttons:
10-463
New
10-464

commands:
New AnnotationOpens the Annotation Properties dialog box, allowing you

to define annotation settings for the
New Color CodingOpens the Color

Coding Properties dialog box, allowing
you to define annotation settings for the
Add FolderCreates a folder under the

currently highlighted element type,
allowing you to manage the various
color coding and annotation settings
that are associated with an element.
You can turn off all of the symbology
settings contained within a folder by
clearing the check box next to the folder.
When a folder is deleted, all of the
symbology settings contained within it
are also deleted.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted Color

Coding or Annotation Definition or folder.
Rename

object.
Annotate
Opens a shortcut menu containing the

following options:
Refresh AnnotationIf you change an

annotations prefix or suffix in the Property Editor, or directly in the database,
selecting this command refreshes the
annotation.
Update Annotation OffsetIf you

have adjusted the Initial X or Y offsets,
selecting this command resets all annotation Initial X or Y offsets to their default
location (or new default location).
Update Annotation HeightIf youve

adjusted the height multiplier, selecting
this command resets all annotation
height multiplier to their default values.
Shift Up
Moves the currently highlighted object up in

the list pane.
Shift Down
Moves the currently highlighted object

down in the list pane.
Expand All
Expands each branch in the tree view pane.
Collapse All
Collapses each branch in the tree view pane.
Help
Displays online help for the Element

Symbology Manager.
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager

Use folders in the Element Symbology Manager to create a collection of color coding
and/or annotation that can be turned off as one entity.
Adding Folders
Use element symbology folders to control whether related annotations and/or color
coding displays. To create a folder in the Element Symbology Manager:
1. Click View > Element Symbology.
2. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click an element and select New >
Folder.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the folder, click the New button,
then select New Folder.
3. Name the folder.
4. You can drag and drop existing annotations and color coding into the folder you
create, and you can create annotations and color coding within the folder by rightclicking the folder and selecting New > Annotation or New > Color Coding.
5. Use the folder to collectively turn on and off the annotations and color coding
within the folder.
10-465

Note:
You can refresh the display of all color-codings/annotations

within a folder by right-clicking the folder and selecting the
Refresh Group command.
In the Microstation version, the Refresh Group command will
override any local modifications made to color or weight
settings applied to individual elements using Microstation
commands. These elements will revert to the SewerCAD V8i
symbology settings after a Refresh Group command is initiated.
Deleting Folders
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click
the theme folder you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the folder you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Renaming Folders
the theme folder you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the folder you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Adding Annotations
To add an annotation:
Annotation.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the annotation, click the New
button, and select New Annotation.
3. The Annotation Properties dialog box opens. Select the annotation you want in the
Field drop-down list.
If you dont find the Field you want to use immediately, look carefully through the
list of available field selections from top to bottom to make sure you didnt miss
the field you want.
4. If needed, set a Prefix or Suffix. Anything you type as a prefix is added directly to
the beginning of the label, and anything you type as a suffix is added to the end
(so, you may want to include spaces as part of your prefix and suffix).
10-466

Note:
If you add an annotation that uses units, you can type %u in

the prefix or suffix field to display the units in the drawing pane.
5. Select the initial X- and Y- offset for the annotation. Offset is measured from the
center of the node or polygon or midpoint of the polyline.
6. If needed, set an initial height multiplier. Use a number greater than 1 to make the
annotation larger, and a number between 0 and 1 to make the annotation smaller.
If you use a negative number, the annotation is flipped (rotated 180 degrees).
7. If you have created selection sets, you can apply your annotation only to a particular selection set by selecting that set from the Selection Set drop-down list. If you
have not created any selection sets, then the annotation is applied to all elements
of the type you are using.
8. After you finish defining your annotation, click OK to close the Annotation Properties dialog box and create your annotation, or Cancel to close the dialog box
without creating an annotation.
Deleting Annotations
an annotation you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the annotation you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Editing Annotations
the annotation you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the annotation you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
Note:
Changes to annotation settings may not be visible in the

drawing pane immediately. To refresh the drawing view to reflect
any changes that have been made, you can right-click the
annotation that was edited in the Element Symbology Manager
and select the Re-Apply Annotation command from the
submenu that appears.
Renaming Annotations
the annotation you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the annotation you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
10-467
Annotation Properties Dialog Box

The Annotation Properties dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for
each element type.
This dialog box allows you to define annotation settings for each element type. The
dialog box consists of a list pane on the left and a control section on the right. The
control section in the right side of the dialog allow you to edit the settings for the
annotation that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
The dialog box consists of the following buttons:
New
Creates a new annotation in the list pane.
Delete
Deletes the annotation that is currently

Rename
Lets you rename the annotation that is

and the following controls:

List Pane
Label
Displays the name of the current annotation

definition.
Initial X Offset
Displays the initial X-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Initial Y Offset
Displays the initial Y-axis offset of the

annotation in feet.
Selected Annotation
10-468
Field Name
Lets you specify the attribute that is displayed

by the annotation definition.
Free Form
This field is only available when <Free Form

Annotation> is selected in the Field Name list.
Click the ellipsis button to open the Free Form
Annotation dialog box.
Prefix
Lets you specify a prefix that is displayed before

the attribute value annotation for each element
to which the definition applies.
Suffix
Lets you specify a suffix that is displayed after

the attribute value annotation for each element
to which the definition applies.
Note:
If you add an annotation that

uses units, you can type
%u in the prefix or suffix
field to display the units in
the drawing pane.
Selection Set
Lets you specify a selection set to which the

annotation settings will apply. If the annotation
is to be applied to all elements, select the <All
Elements> option in this field. <All Elements>
is the default setting.
Initial Offset
If checked, the values in the X and Y fields will

be applied to all annotations (that are associated
with the current annotation definition) in the
drawing when the Apply button is clicked.
Sets the initial horizontal offset for an

annotation. Set this at the time you create the
annotation.
Sets the initial vertical offset for an annotation.

Set this at the time you create the annotation.
Initial Multiplier
If checked, the value in the Height Multiplier

field will be applied to all annotations (that are
associated with the current annotation
definition) in the drawing when the Apply
button is clicked.
Initial Height Multiplier
Sets the initial size of the annotation text. Set

this at the time you create the annotation.
Free Form Annotation Dialog Box

The Free Form Annotation dialog box allows you to type custom annotations for an
element type.
10-469
Color Coding Your Model

To create an annotation, type the text as you want it to appear in the drawing. You can
add element attributes to the text string by clicking the Append button and selecting
the attribute from the categorized list.
Zoom Dependent Visibility

Available through the Properties dialog box of each layer in the Element Symbology
manager, this feature can be used to cause elements, decorations, and annotations to
only appear in the drawing pane when the view is within the zoom range specified by
the Minimum and Maximum Zoom values.
Enabled: Set to true to enable and set to false to disable Zoom Dependent Visibility.
Minimum Zoom (%): The lowest zoom level at which the element will appear in
the drawing pane.
Maximum Zoom (%) : The highest zoom level at which the element will appear
Apply to Element: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums to the
symbols in the drawing.
Apply to Decorations: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums
to flow arrows, check valves, and constituent sources in the drawing.
Apply to Annotations: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums
to labels in the drawing.

Use color coding to help you quickly see what's going on in your Bentley SewerCAD
V8i model. Use color coding to change the color and/or size of elements based on the
value of data that you select, such as flow or element size.
To work with color coding, open the Element Symbology manager: click View >
Element Symbology (Ctrl+1).
Click one of the following links to learn more about color coding your model:
10-470
Element Symbology Manager on page 10-463
Using Folders in the Element Symbology Manager on page 10-465
Adding Color-Coding on page 10-471
Deleting Color-Coding on page 10-471
Editing Color-Coding on page 10-472
Renaming Color-Coding on page 10-472
Adding Color-Coding on page 10-471
Adding Color-Coding
To add color coding, including element sizing:
Color Coding.
Or, select the element to which you want to add the color coding, click the New
button, and select New Color Coding.
3. The Color Coding Properties dialog box opens. Select the properties for which
you want to color code from the Field and Selection Set drop-down lists.
4. In the Options drop-down list, select whether you want to apply color and/or size
to the elements you are coding.
a. Click Calculate Range. This automatically sets the maximum and minimum
values for your coding. If you want, you can set these values manually.
b. Click Initialize. This automatically creates values and colors in the Color
Map. If you want, you can set these values manually.
5. After you finish defining your color coding, click OK to close the Color Coding
Properties dialog box and create your color coding, or Cancel to close the dialog
box without creating a color coding.
6. Click Compute to compute your network.
7. To see the network color coding and/or sizing change over time:
a. Click View > EPS Results Browser, if needed, to open the EPS Results
Browser dialog box.
b. Click Play to use the EPS Results Browser to review your color coding over
time.
Deleting Color-Coding
the color coding you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the color coding you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
10-471
Editing Color-Coding
the color coding you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the color coding you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
Note:
Changes to color coding settings may not be visible in the

drawing pane immediately. To refresh the drawing view to reflect
any changes that have been made, you can right-click the
annotation that was edited in the Element Symbology Manager
and select the Refresh Color Coding command from the
submenu that appears.
Renaming Color-Coding
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click
the color coding you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the color coding you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Color-Coding Properties Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define color coding for each element type. The dialog
box consists of the following controls:
Properties
10-472
Field Name
Lets you select the attribute by which the color

coding is applied.
Selection Set
Lets you apply a color coding to a previously

defined selection set.
Calculate Range
Automatically finds the minimum and maximum

values for the selected attribute and enters them in
the appropriate Min. and Max fields.
When you click this button a submenu appears,
allowing you to choose between the following
options:
Full Range: This option gets all values across

all time steps for a particular element type.
Quick Range: This option only takes values

from a percentage of the time steps (for
example, if theres 100 time steps, Quick
Range will sample only one in ten). For a large
model with a large number of time steps this
option can significantly increase the performance of the color coding tool.
Min
Lets you define the minimum value of the attribute

to be color coded.
Max
Lets you define the maximum value of the

attribute to be color coded.
Steps
Lets you specify how many rows are created in the

color maps table when you click Initialize. When
you click Initialize, a number of values equal to the
number of Steps are created in the color maps
table. The low and high values are set by the Min
and Max values you set.
Color Map
Options
Lets you select whether you want to use color

coding, sizing, or both to code and display your
elements.
10-473
Using Profiles
Color Maps Table
Lets you map colors to value ranges for the

attribute being color coded. The following buttons
are found along the top of the table:
NewCreates a new row in the Color

Maps table.
DeleteDeletes the currently highlighted row from the Color Maps table.
InitializeFinds the range of values for

the specified attribute, divides it into
equal ranges based on the number of
Steps you have set, and assigns a color to
each range.
RampGenerates a gradient range

between two colors that you specify.
Pick the color for the first and last
values in the list, then Bentley SewerCAD V8i
automatically sets intermediate colors for the
other values. For example, picking red as the
first color and blue as the last color produces
varying shades of purple for the other values.
Above Range Color
Displays the color that is applied to elements

whose value for the specified attribute fall outside
the range defined in the color maps table. This
selection is available if you choose Color or Color
and Size from the Options list.
Above Range Size
Displays the size that is applied to elements whose

value for the specified attribute fall outside the
range defined in the color maps table. This
selection is available if you choose Size or Color
and Size from the Options list.
Using Profiles
A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground
elevation along a section of piping. As well as these side or sectional views of the
ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such as hydraulic
grade or pressure.
You define profiles by selecting a series of adjacent elements. Continous reaches of
conduits, prismatic channels, pressure pipes, as well as their connecting nodes can be
plotted in a profile. The profile you create displays the structures you selected, plus
the relative ground and water elevations.
10-474

The Profiles manager is a dockable window that lets you add, delete, rename, edit, and
view profiles.
Click one of the following links to learn more about how to use profiles:
Profiles Manager on page 10-475
Viewing Profiles on page 10-476
Creating a New Profile on page 10-477
Editing Profiles on page 10-478
Deleting Profiles on page 10-478
Renaming Profiles on page 10-478
Profile Setup Dialog Box on page 10-479
Profile Viewer Dialog Box on page 10-480
Profiles Manager
The Profiles Manager allows you to create, view, and edit profile views of elements in
the network. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the profiles
currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.
New
Opens the Profile Setup dialog box,

allowing you to create a new profile.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted profile.
10-475
Using Profiles
Rename

profile.
Edit
Opens the Profile Setup dialog box,

allowing you to modify the settings of the
currently highlighted profile.
View

commands:
Help
Profile: Opens the Profile Viewer,

allowing you to view the currently highlighted profile.
Engineering Profile: Opens the Engineering Profile Viewer, allowing you to

view the currently highlighted profile as
an engineering profile.
Displays online help for the Profile

Manager.
Viewing Profiles
To view a profile:
1. Click Compute to calculate flows.
2. Click View > Profiles to open the Profile manager.
3. In the Profile Manager:
a. Double-click the profile you want to view to open the Profile Viewer;
b. Select the profile you want to view, click the drop-down menu on the View
Profile button, and select Profile to open the profile view;
c. Or select the profile you want to view, click the drop-down menu on the View
Profile button, and select Engineering Profile to open the engineering profile
view.
Note:
You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
4. If necessary, you can click Chart Settings to change the look of the profile, and
use Print Preview and Print to print the profile.
10-476
Creating a New Profile

To create a new profile:
1. Click View > Profiles or click the Profiles Manager button on the View toolbar to
open the Profiles manager.
2. Right-click in the Profiles manager and select New, or click the New button.
3. The Profile Setup dialog box opens. For more information, see Profile Setup
Dialog Box on page 10-479.
4. Select the Elements you want to use:
a. Click Select from Drawing. The Select dialog box appears:
You must select one path of contiguous elements; you cannot select diverging
paths. You can select upstream and downstream elements, but if you begin at
an upstream element, select downstream, and then make upstream selections
to finish, your profile will be V-shaped, with higher elevations at the beginning and end of the profile than in the middle. Instead, what you might want
to do is select elements beginning at a high elevation and selecting elements at
increasingly lower elevations towards an outfall.
b. To add elements to the profile, click elements in the drawing pane. (By
default, the Add button is active in the Select dialog box.) You can only add
elements to either end of your selectionall selected elements must be
contiguous.
When there is a plus sign next to the cursor, you can select elements to add to
the profile; elements that you successfully select are highlighted red.
c. To remove elements from the profile, click the Remove button in the Select
dialog box. Thereafter, elements you select in the drawing pane are removed
from the profile. You can only remove elements from either end of your selectionall selected elements must be contiguous.
When there is a minus sign next to the cursor, you can remove elements from
the profile; unselected elements are not highlighted.
d. When you are finished adding elements to your profile, click the Done button
in the Select dialog box.
10-477
Using Profiles
5. The Profile Setup dialog box opens and displays a list of the elements you
selected. If necessary, use the Reverse button to reverse the order of these
elements, and the Select from Drawing or Remove buttons to add or remove
elements from the list.
Note:
You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and
compute your network with the Profile Viewer dialog box open,
but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog
box if you do make changes.
6. Click Close and Open Profile to close the Profile Setup dialog box and open the
Profile Viewer dialog box.
Editing Profiles
You can edit a profile to change the elements that it uses or the order in which those
elements are used. To edit a profile:
1. Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager.
2. In the Profiles manager, right-click the profile you want to edit, then select Edit.
Or, select the profile you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
3. The Profile Setup dialog box opens. Modify the profile as needed and click OK to
save your changes or Cancel to exit without saving your changes.
Deleting Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, rightclick the profile you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the profile you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Renaming Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, rightclick the profile you want to rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the profile you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
10-478
Profile Setup Dialog Box

Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the adjacent elements on which the profile
is based. The Profile Setup dialog box includes the following options:
Label
Displays the list of elements that define the

profile.
User Defined Station
Check a box to enter a user defiined station.
Station
This field displays the distance along the

alignment of pipes. The field is automatically
calculated unless you check the corresponding
User Defined Station box; if the box is checked
you can define the station.
Select From Drawing
Lets you select and clear elements for the profile.

You can select channels, conduits, and ponds for
inclusion in your profile.
Note:
In AutoCAD mode, you cannot

use the shortcut menu, you
must re-open the Profile Setup
dialog box.
Reverse
Lets you reverse the profile, so the first node in the

list becomes the last, and the last node becomes
the first.
Remove All
Removes all elements from the profile.
Remove All Previous
Removes all elements that appear before the

selected element in the list. If the selected element
is a pipe, the associated node is not removed.
Remove All Following
Removes all elements that appear after the

selected element in the list. If the selected element
is a pipe, the associated node is not removed.
Open Engineering
Profile
Closes the Profile Setup dialog and opens the

Engineering Profile Viewer dialog box.
Open Profile
Closes the Profile Setup dialog box and opens the

Profile Viewer dialog box.
After everything is set up to your satisfaction, click OK to generate the plot of the
profile.
10-479
Using Profiles
Note:
Results for gravity elements are available only for hydraulic time
steps. Therefore some results will not be displayed in the profile
view for gravity elements, such as HGL.
Profile Viewer Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the profile view of the profile run that is plotted from the
Profile Manager. It consists of the profile display pane and the following controls:
10-480
Zoom Window
Lets you magnify or reduce the display of a

section of the graph. To zoom or magnify an area,
select the Zoom Window tool, click to the left of
the area you want to magnify, then drag the mouse
to the right, across the area you want to magnify,
so that the area you want to magnify is contained
within the marquee that the Zoom Window tool
draws. After you have selected the area you want
to magnify, release the mouse button to stop
dragging.
To zoom out, or reduce the magnification, drag the
mouse from right to left across the magnified
image.
Zoom Extents
Magnifies the profile so that the entire graph is

displayed.
Chart Settings

commands:
Display Annotation Labels: Lets you display or
hide labels for the elements in your profile
plot.
Profile Annotation Table: Lets you display or

hide the profile element annotation table.
HGL: Lets you display or hide the line representing hydraulic grade line in the profile plot.
EGL: Lets you display or hide the line representing energy grade line in the profile plot.
Legend: Lets you display or hide the profile

plot legend.
Axis Options: Opens the Axis Options dialog.
Chart Options: Opens the Chart Options

dialog box, letting you view and modify the
display settings for the current profile plot. For
more information, see Chart Options Dialog
Box on page 10-520.
Warning!
Never delete or rename any

of the series entries on the
Series Tab of the Chart
Options dialog box. These
series were specifically
designed to enable the
display of the Profile Plots.
Export to DXF: Exports the profile view as a

dxf file.
Print
Prints the current view of the profile to your

default printer. If you want to use a printer other
than your default, use Print Preview to change the
printer and print the profile.
Print Preview
Opens a print preview window containing the

current view of the profile. You can use the Print
Preview dialog box to select a printer and preview
the output before you print it.
Note:
Do not change the print

preview to grayscale, as doing
so might hide some elements
of the display.
10-481
Using Profiles
10-482
Copy
Copies the contents of the Profile Viewer dialog

box as an image to the Windows clipboard, from
where you can paste it into another application,
such as Microsoft Word or Adobe
Photoshop.
Zoom Extents

displayed.
Zoom

dragging.
image.
EPS Results Browsers
The following EPS Results Browsers are found to

the right of the Refresh button:
Rewind (Full)Sets the currently displayed

time step to the beginning of the simulation.
PauseStops the animation. Restarts it again

with another click.
PlayAdvances the currently displayed time

step from beginning to end.
Time DisplayShows the current time step

that is displayed in the drawing pane.
Time SliderLets you manually move the

slider representing the currently displayed
time step along the bar, which represents the
full length of time that the scenario encompasses

Note:
Results for gravity elements are available only for hydraulic time
steps. Therefore some results will not be displayed in the profile
view for gravity elements, such as HGL.
Axis Options Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to define the scale of the profile plot. Specify a unit, enter a
value for the Horizontal and vertical axes, and specify whether the direction is
measured from Left to Right or Right to Left.
Engineering Profile Viewer Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the profile view of the profile run that is plotted from the
Profile Manager. It consists of the profile display pane and the following controls:
Zoom Window

dragging.
image.
Zoom Extents

displayed.
10-483
Using Profiles
Chart Settings

commands:
Display Annotation Labels: Lets you display or
hide labels for the elements in your profile
plot.
Profile Annotation Table: Lets you display or

hide the profile element annotation table.
HGL: Lets you display or hide the line representing hydraulic grade line in the profile plot.
EGL: Lets you display or hide the line representing energy grade line in the profile plot.
Legend: Lets you display or hide the profile

plot legend.
Axis Options: Opens the Axis Options dialog.
Chart Options: Opens the Chart Options

dialog box, letting you view and modify the
display settings for the current profile plot. For
more information, see Chart Options Dialog
Box on page 10-520.
Warning!
Export to DXF: Exports the profile view as a

dxf file.
Print
Prints the current view of the profile to your

default printer. If you want to use a printer other
than your default, use Print Preview to change the
printer and print the profile.
Print Preview
Opens a print preview window containing the

current view of the profile. You can use the Print
Preview dialog box to select a printer and preview
the output before you print it.
Note:
10-484
Never delete or rename any

of the series entries on the
Series Tab of the Chart
Options dialog box. These
series were specifically
designed to enable the
display of the Profile Plots.
Do not change the print

preview to grayscale, as doing
so might hide some elements
of the display.
Copy
Copies the contents of the Profile Viewer dialog

box as an image to the Windows clipboard, from
where you can paste it into another application,
such as Microsoft Word or Adobe
Photoshop.
Zoom Extents

displayed.
Zoom

dragging.
image.
EPS Results Browsers
The following EPS Results Browsers are found to

the right of the Refresh button:
Rewind (Full)Sets the currently displayed

time step to the beginning of the simulation.
PauseStops the animation. Restarts it again

with another click.
PlayAdvances the currently displayed time

step from beginning to end.
Time DisplayShows the current time step

that is displayed in the drawing pane.
Time SliderLets you manually move the

slider representing the currently displayed
time step along the bar, which represents the
full length of time that the scenario encompasses
Engineering Profile Options

This dialog allows you to change various display options for engineering profiles. It is
divided into the following tabs:
10-485
Using Profiles
Axis Tab
Scale: Allows you to define the horizontal and vertical scale of the engineering
profile view.
Direction: Allows you to choose the direction in which elements are displayed in
the engineering profile view.
Axis Labeling: Allows you to choose where to place the labels along the axis of
the engineering profile view.
Automatic Scaling: When this box is checked the scaling is handled automatically and the Minimum and Maximum fields are not editable. When this box is
not checked you can define the Minimum and Maximum fields.
Minimum: The left-most station. When Automatic Scaling is checked this field is
not editable.
Maximum: The right-most station. When Automatic Scaling is checked this field
is not editable.
Increment: The length between intermediate values.
Drawing Tab
Text Height Multiplier: Increases or decreases the size of the text by the factor
indicated.
Ground Elevation Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the
ground elevation line in the engineering profile view.
Structure Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of structure lines
in the engineering profile view.
HGL Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the hydraulic
grade line in the engineering profile view.
EGL Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the energy grade
line in the engineering profile view.
Layers Tab
This tab allows you to select the color and/or change the visibility of the various
elements of the profile view. Uncheck the Is Visible box to turn the corresponding
element off in the engineering profile view. Click the Layer Color to access the color
menu to change the color of the corresponding element in the engineering profile
view.
10-486
Ground Profile Options

This dialog allows you to define the line representing ground elevation in the engineering profile view.
By default, the Elevation Data Type is set to Automatic. If you change it to Ground
Elevation/Depth Curve, you can use the Station vs. Elevation table to define the
ground elevation. Click the New button to add a row to the table or Delete to remove
the currently highlighted row. Click the Import button to import ground elevation data
from a Tab-delimited text file.
Annotation Properties Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for nodes. The
following controls are available:
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-toright) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-anddown) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the annotation
over an annotated element.
Show Leader Line: When this box is checked, a line is drawn between the annotation and the associated element.
Show Leader Arrow: When this box is checked, an arrow is drawn pointing to
the associated element.
Link Annotation Properties Dialog Box

This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for links. The
following controls are available:
Align Text With Pipes: When this box is checked the annotation will align with
the angle of the corresponding pipe.
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-toright) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-anddown) placement of the annotation over the annotated element.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the annotation
over an annotated element.
10-487
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables
Show Leader Line: When this box is checked, a line is drawn between the annotation and the associated element.
Show Leader Arrow: When this box is checked, an arrow is drawn pointing to
the associated element.
Text Properties
This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for the axis
labels. The following controls are available:
Text: This field displays the text of the label. This field is not editable.
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-toright) placement of the label annotation.
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-anddown) placement of the label annotation.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the label annotation .

FlexTables lets you view input data and results for all elements of a specific type in a
tabular format. You can use the standard set of FlexTables or create customized
FlexTables to compare data and create reports.
FlexTables lets you view all elements in the project, all elements of a specific type, or
any subset of elements. Additionally, to ease data input and present output data for
specific elements, FlexTables can be:
Filtered (see Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data on page 10-498)
Globally edited (see Globally Editing Data on page 10-497)
Sorted (see Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data on page 10-498)
If you need to edit a set of properties for all elements of a certain type in your network,
you might consider creating a FlexTable and making your changes there, rather than
editing each element one at a time, in sequence.
FlexTables can also be used to create results reports that you can print, save as a file,
or copy to the Windows clipboard for copying into word processing or spreadsheet
software.
To work with FlexTables, select the FlexTables manager or use View > FlexTables
(Ctrl+7) to open the FlexTables manager if it is closed.
10-488

Click one of the following links to learn more about using FlexTables:
FlexTables Manager on page 10-489
Working with FlexTable Folders on page 10-491
Opening FlexTables on page 10-494
Creating a New FlexTable on page 10-495
Deleting FlexTables on page 10-495
Naming and Renaming FlexTables on page 10-495
Editing FlexTables on page 10-496
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data on page 10-498
Customizing Your FlexTable on page 10-501
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box on page 10-502
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data on page 10-505
Using Predefined Tables on page 10-507
FlexTables Manager
The FlexTables Manager allows you to create, manage, and delete custom tabular
reports. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the custom FlexTables
currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.
10-489
New
FlexTableCreates a new tabular

report and opens the FlexTable Setup
dialog box, allowing you to define the
element type that the FlexTable
displays, and the columns that are
contained in the table.
FolderCreates a folder in the list

pane, allowing you to group custom
FlexTables.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted FlexTable.
Rename

FlexTable.
Edit
Opens the FlexTable Setup dialog box,

allowing you to make changes to the format
of the currently selected table
Open
Lets you open the currently highlighted

FlexTable. Click the dropdown arrow to
open a submenu containing the following
options:
Help
10-490

commands:
Open: Opens the currently highlighted

table.
Open on Selection: Opens the

currently highlighted table, however the
table will contain only elements that are
selected in the drawing pane. This
command is unavailable unless one or
more elements of the highlighted table
type are selected.
Displays online help for the FlexTable

Manager.
Working with FlexTable Folders

You can add, delete, and rename folders in the FlexTable Manager to organize your
FlexTables into groups of that can be turned off as one entity. You can also create
folders within folders. When you start a new project, Bentley SewerCAD V8i displays
two items in the FlexTable Manager: Tables - Project (for project-level FlexTables)
and Tables - Shared (for FlexTables shared by more than one Bentley SewerCAD V8i
project). You can add new FlexTables and FlexTable folders to either item or to
existing folders.
To add a FlexTable folder:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager.
2. In the FlexTable Manager, select either Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
click the New button.
If you are creating a new folder within an existing folder, select the folder,
then click the New button.
3. Click New Folder from the shortcut menu.

4. Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
5. Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.
To delete a FlexTable folder:
2. In the FlexTables Manager, select the folder you want to delete, then click the
Delete button.
You can also right-click a folder to delete, then select Delete from the shortcut
menu.
To rename a FlexTable folder:

2. In the FlexTables Manager, select the folder you want to rename, then click the
Rename button.
You can also right-click a folder to rename, then select Rename from the
shortcut menu.
3. Type the new name of the folder, then press Enter.
You can also rename a FlexTable folder by selecting the folder, then modifying its label in the Properties Editor.
10-491
FlexTable Dialog Box

FlexTables are displayed in the FlexTable dialog box. The dialog box contains a
toolbar, the rows and columns of data in the FlexTable, and a status bar.
10-492
Export to File
Export to a Shapefile .shp, a Tab Delimited

file .txt, or a Comma Delimited File .csv.
Copy
Lets you copy the contents of the selected

table cell, rows, and/or columns for the
purpose of pasting into a different row or
column or into a text editing program such
as Notepad.
Paste
Lets you paste the contents of the Windows

clipboard into the selected table cell, row, or
column. Use this with the Copy button.
Edit
Opens the FlexTable Setup dialog box,

allowing you to make changes to the format
of the currently selected table
Zoom To
Lets you zoom into and center the drawing

pane on the currently selected element in the
FlexTable.
Report
Lets you create and view a report of your

FlexTable for either the current time step or
all time steps.
Options

commands:
Select In Drawing
Create Selection SetLets you create

a new static selection set ( a selection
set based on selection) containing the
currently selected elements in the
FlexTable.
Add to Selection SetLets you add

the currently selected elements in the
FlexTable to an existing selection set.
Remove from Selection Set

Removes the currently selected
elements from an existing selection set.
RelabelOpens an Element Relabeling

box where you can Replace, Append, or
Renumber

commands:
Select In DrawingSelects the

currently highlighted element(s) in the
drawing pane.
Add to SelectionAdds the currently

highlighted element(s) to the group that
is currently highlighted in the drawing
pane.
Remove From SelectionRemoves

the currently highlighted element(s) from
the group that is currently highlighted in
the drawing pane.
The status bar at the bottom of the FlexTable dialog box contains the following items:
x of x elements displayedNumber of elements displayed in the FlexTable of

the total possible number of that type of element.
10-493
FILTEREDIf you have applied a filter to the FlexTable, this appears in the
status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over this panel to display a tool tip, which lists a
summary of active filters.
SORTEDIf you have sorted the order of any items in the FlexTable, this
appears in the status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over this panel to display a tool
tip, which lists a summary of active sorting.
Statistics Dialog Box

The Statistics dialog box displays statistics for the elements in a FlexTable. You can
right-click any unitized input or output column and choose the Statistics command to
view the count, maximum value, mean value, minimum value, standard deviation, and
sum for that column.
Opening FlexTables
You open FlexTables from within the FlexTable Manager.
To open FlexTables:
1. Click View > FlexTables or click the FlexTables button on the View toolbar to
open the FlexTables Manager.
10-494
Right-click the FlexTable you want to open, then select Open.
Select the FlexTable you want to open, then click the Open button.
Double-click the FlexTable you want to open.
Creating a New FlexTable

You can create project-level or shared FlexTables.
Project-level FlexTables are available only for the project in which you create
them.
Shared tables are available in all Bentley SewerCAD V8i projects.
To create a new FlexTable:

Project-level and shared FlexTables are created the same way:
2. In the FlexTables Manager, right-click Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then
select New > FlexTable.
Or, select Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, click the New button, then select
FlexTable.
3. The Table Setup dialog box opens.
4. Select the Table Type you want to create. This lets you filter your table by element
type.
5. Select the items you want in the FlexTable by moving them to the Selected
Columns pane.
6. Click OK.
7. The table displays in the FlexTables Manager; you can type to rename the table or
accept the default name.
Deleting FlexTables
Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager. In the FlexTables manager,
right-click the FlexTable you want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the FlexTable you want to delete, then click the Delete button. You cannot
delete predefined FlexTables.
Note:
You cannot delete predefined FlexTables.
Naming and Renaming FlexTables

You name and rename FlexTables in the FlexTable Manager.
10-495

To rename FlexTables:
Right-click the FlexTable you want to rename, then select Rename.
Select the FlexTable you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Click the FlexTable you want to rename, to select it, then click the name of
the FlexTable.
Note:
You cannot rename predefined FlexTables.
Editing FlexTables
You can edit a FlexTable to change the columns of data it contains or the values in
some of those columns.
Editable columns:
Columns that contain data you can edit are displayed

with a white background. You can change these
columns directly in the FlexTable and your changes
are applied to your model when you click OK.
The content in the FlexTable columns can be
changed in other areas of Bentley SewerCAD V8i,
such as in a Property Editor or managers; but, it
might be more efficient to make changes to
numerous elements in a FlexTable rather than the
Property Editor or a manager.
If you make a change that affects a FlexTable outside
the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically
to reflect the change.
Non-editable columns:
Columns that contain data you cannot edit are

displayed with a yellow background, and correspond
to model results calculated by the program and
composite values.
The content in these columns can be changed in other
areas of Bentley SewerCAD V8i, such as in a
Property Editor and by running a computation.
If you make a change that affects a FlexTable outside
the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically
to reflect the change.
10-496

To edit a FlexTable:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager, then you can:
Right-click the FlexTable, then select Edit.
Double-click the FlexTable to open it, then click Edit.
Click the FlexTable, to select it, then click the Edit button.
2. The Table dialog box opens. .

3. Use the Table dialog box to include and exclude columns and change the order in
which the columns appear in the table.
4. Click OK after you finish making changes, to save your changes and close the
dialog box; or, click Cancel to close the dialog box without making changes.
Editing Column-Heading Text
To change the text of a column heading:
2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit.
3. Right-click the column heading and select Edit Column Label.
4. Type the new name for the label and click OK to save those changes and close the
dialog box or Cancel to exit without making any changes.
Changing Units, Format, and Precision in FlexTables
To change the units, format, or precision in a column of a FlexTable:
1. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit.
2. Right-click the column heading and select Units.
3. Make the changes you want and click OK to save those changes or Cancel to exit
without making any changes.
Navigating in Tables
The arrow keys, Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+End, PgUp, PgDn, and Ctrl+arrow keys navigate to
different cells in a table.
Globally Editing Data
10-497

Using FlexTables, you can globally edit all of the values in an entire editable column.
Globally editing a FlexTable column can be more efficient for editing properties of an
element than using the Properties Editor or managers to edit each element in your
model individually.
To globally edit the values in a FlexTable column:
2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit and find the
column of data you want to change.
If necessary, you might need to first create a FlexTable or edit an existing one to
make sure it contains the column you want to change.
3. Right-click the column heading and select Global Edit.
4. In the Operation field, select what you want to do to data in the column: Add,
Divide, Multiply, Set, or Subtract.
Note:
The Operation field is only available for numeric data.
5. In the Global Edit field, type or select the value you wantfor numeric data, you
typically type a new value, for other data you might select from a drop-down list
or select a check box.
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data

You can sort and filter your FlexTables to focus on specific data or present your data
in one of the following ways:
To sort the order of columns in a FlexTable:
You can sort the order of columns in a FlexTable in two ways:
Edit the FlexTable (see Editing FlexTables), to open the Table dialog box and
change the order of the selected tables using the up and down arrow buttons.
The top-most item in the Selected Columns pane appears furthest to the left in the
resulting FlexTable.
Open the FlexTable, click the heading of the column you want to move, then click
again and drag the column to the new position. You can only move one column at
a time.
To sort the contents of a FlexTable:

1. Open the FlexTable you want to edit
2. Right-click a column heading to rank the contents of the column.
10-498

3. Select Sort Ascending Sort Descending, or Custom.
Sort AscendingSorts alphabetically from A to Z, from top to bottom. Sorts

numerically from negative to positive, from top to bottom. Sorts selected
check boxes to the top and cleared ones to the bottom.
Sort DescendingSorts alphabetically from Z to A, from top to bottom.

Sorts numerically from positive to negative, from top to bottom. Sorts cleared
check boxes to the top and selected ones to the bottom.
CustomOpens the Custom Sort dialog box, which allows you to choose an
attribute to sort by in ascending or descending order.
To filter a FlexTable by creating a query:

1. Open the FlexTable you want to filter.
2. Right-click the column heading you want to filter, and select Filter > Custom.
The Query Builder dialog box opens.
3. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list
pane, available SQL operators and keywords are represented by buttons, and
available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list pane.
Perform the following steps to construct your query:
a. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database
column name of the selected field appears in the preview pane.
b. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword
is added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
c. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of
unique values available for the selected field. The Refresh button is becomes
disabled after you use it for a particular field.
d. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is
added to the SQL expression in the preview pane.
e. Click the Validate button above the preview pane to validate your SQL
expression. If the expression is valid, the word VALIDATED is displayed in
the lower right corner of the dialog box.
f.
Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If you
didnt validate the expression, the Apply button validates it before executing
it.
g. Click OK.
10-499
Double-click the
desired field to add it
to the preview pane
Click the desired operator

or keyword button to add it
to the SQL expression in
the preview pane
Click the Refresh

button to display the
list of available
unique values
Double-click the
desired unique
value to add it to
the SQL
expression in the
preview pane
Apply button
Preview pane
Validate
button
The FlexTable displays columns of data for all elements returned by the query and
the word FILTERED is displayed in the FlexTable status bar.
To filter a FlexTable by using an existing query:
1. Open the FlexTable you want to filter.
2. Right-click the column heading you want to filter, and select Filter > By Query.
3. In the Queries - Select a Query dialog that appears, choose the Query Type, then
choose the Selected Query.
4. Click OK.
10-500

Note:
The query you select should be for the same type of element as
the FlexTable.
To reset a filter:
1. Right-click the column heading you want to filter.
2. Select Filter.
3. Click Reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message is highlighted.
Note:
Table filtering lets you perform global editing (see Editing

FlexTables) on any subset of elements. Only the elements that
appear in the filtered table can be edited.
Custom Sort Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to choose an attribute to sort by, and whether to sort in
asending or descending order. You can choose multiple attributes to sort by. When
multiple sort attributes are specified, the first attribute specified will take precedence,
then the second, and so on.
Customizing Your FlexTable

There are several ways to customize tables to meet a variety of output requirements:
Changing the Report TitleWhen you print a table, the table name is used as
the title for the printed report. You can change the title that appears on your
printed report by renaming the table. For more information, see Naming and
Renaming FlexTables on page 10-495.
10-501
Adding/Removing ColumnsYou can add, remove, and change the order of

columns from the Table Setup dialog box. For more information, see Editing
FlexTables on page 10-496 and Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data on
page 10-498.
Drag/Drop Column PlacementWith the Table window open, select the

column heading of the column that you would like to move and drag the column
to its new location. For more information, see Sorting and Filtering FlexTable
Data on page 10-498.
Resizing ColumnsWith the Table open, click the vertical separator line
between column headings. Notice that the cursor changes shape to indicate that
you can resize the column. Drag the column separator to the left or right to stretch
the column to its new size.
Changing Column HeadingsWith the Table window open, right-click the

column heading that you wish to change and select Edit Column Label.
FlexTable Setup Dialog Box

The Table Setup dialog box allows you to customize any table through the following
options:
10-502
Table Type
Lets you specify the type of elements that appear

in the table. It also provides a filter for the
attributes that appear in the Available Columns
list. When you choose a table type, the available
list only contains attributes that can be used for
that table type. For example, only manhole
attributes are available for a manhole table.
Available Columns
Contains all the attributes that are available for

your table design. The Available Columns list is
located on the left side of the Table Setup dialog
box. This list contains all of the attributes that are
available for the type of table you are creating.
The attributes displayed in yellow represent noneditable attributes, while those displayed in white
represent editable attributes.
Selected Columns
Contains attributes that appear in your custom

designed FlexTable. When you open the table, the
selected attributes appear as columns in the table
in the same order that they appear in the list. You
can drag and drop or use the up and down buttons
to change the order of the attributes in the table.
The Selected Columns list is located on the righthand side of the Table Setup dialog box. To add
columns to the Selected Columns list, select one
or more attributes in the Available Columns list,
then click the Add button [>] or drag and drop the
highlighted attributes to the Selected Columns list.
Column Manipulation
Buttons
Lets you select or clear columns to be used in the

table, as well as to arrange the order in which the
columns appear.
The Add and Remove buttons are located in the
center of the Table Setup dialog box.
[ > ] Adds the selected items from the Available Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
[ >> ] Adds all of the items in the Available

Columns list to the Selected Columns list.
[ < ] Removes the selected items from the

Selected Columns list.
[ << ] Removes all items from the Selected

Columns list.
To rearrange the order of the attributes in the

Selected Columns list, highlight the item to be
moved, then move it up or down in the list by
dragging or clicking the up or down button located
below the Selected Columns list.
10-503
Element Relabeling Dialog Box

This dialog is where you perform global element relabeling operations for the Label
column of the FlexTable.
The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of
element labels: Replace, Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is
chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of the Relabel Elements
dialog box. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active
relabel operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list
presents a description of the available element relabel operations.
10-504
ReplaceThis operation allows you to replace all instances of a character or

series of characters in the selected element labels with another piece of text. For
instance, if you selected elements with labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5, you
could replace all the COs with the word Conduit by entering CO in the Find field,
Conduit in the Replace With field, and clicking the Apply button. The resulting
labels are Conduit-1, Conduit-2, Conduit-12, and Conduit-5. You can also use this
operation to delete portions of a label. Suppose you now want to go back to the
original labels. You can enter Conduit in the Find field and leave the Replace With
field blank to reproduce the labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5. There is also
the option to match the case of the characters when searching for the characters to
replace. This option can be activated by checking the box next to the Match Case
field.
RenumberThis operation allows you to generate a new label, including suffix,

prefix, and ID number for each selected element. For example, if you had the
labels CO-1, CO-4, CO-10, and Conduit-12, you could use this feature to
renumber the elements in increments of five, starting at five, with a minimum
number of two digits for the ID number field. You could specify a prefix CO- and
a suffix -Z1 in the Prefix and Suffix fields, respectively. The prefix and suffix are
appended to the front and back of the automatically generated ID number. The

value of the new ID for the first element to be relabeled, 5, is entered in the Next
field. The value by which the numeric base of each consecutive element is in
increments, 5, is entered in the Increment field. The minimum number of digits in
the ID number, 2, is entered in the Digits field. If the number of digits in the ID
number is less then this value, zeros are placed in front of it. Click the Apply
button to produce the following labels: CO-05-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1, and
CO-20-Z1.
AppendThis operation allows you to append a prefix, suffix, or both to the

selected element labels. Suppose that you have selected the labels 5, 10, 15, and
20, and you wish to signify that these elements are actually conduits in Zone 1 of
your system. You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and
suffix, such as CO- and -Z1, by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix
fields and clicking the Apply button. Performing this operation yields the labels
CO-5-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1 and CO-20-Z1. You can append only a prefix or
suffix by leaving the other entry field empty. However, for the operation to be
valid, one of the entry fields must be filled in.
The Preview field displays an example of the new label using the currently defined
settings.
Copying, Exporting, and Printing FlexTable Data

You can output your FlexTable several ways:
Copy FlexTable data via the clipboard
Export FlexTable data as a text file
Create a FlexTable report
To copy FlexTable data via the clipboard:

You can copy your FlexTable data via the clipboard and paste it into another Windows
application, such as a word-processing application as tab-delimited text.
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables manager.
2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to use.
3. Click Copy. The contents of the FlexTable are copied to the Windows clipboard.
10-505

Caution:
Make sure you paste the data you copied before you copy
anything else to the Windows clipboard. If you copy
something else to the clipboard before you paste your
FlexTable data, your FlexTable data will be lost from the
clipboard.
4. Paste (Ctrl+v) the data into other Windows software, such as your wordprocessing application.
To export FlexTable data as a text file:
You can export the data in a FlexTable as tab- or comma-delimited ASCII text, for use
in other applications, such as Notepad, spreadsheet, or word processing software.
3. Click File > Export data.
4. Select either Tab Delimited or Comma Delimited.
5. When prompted, set the path and name of the .txt file you want to create.
To create a FlexTable report:
Create a FlexTable Report if you want to print a copy of your FlexTable and its values.
Note:
Instead of Print Preview, you can click Print to print the report
without previewing it.
3. Click Report. A print preview of the report displays to show what your report will
look like if printed using your default printer.
Note:
You cannot edit the format of the report.
4. Click Print to open the Print dialog box and print the report to a printer that you
select.
10-506
Using Predefined Tables on page 10-507
Using Predefined Tables

Element tables are read-only, predefined FlexTables. There is one predefined table for
every element available in Bentley SewerCAD V8i. You can access the element tables
by clicking Report > Element Tables or from the FlexTable manager. Use these
tables to review data about the elements in your model.
Reporting
Use reporting to create printable content based on some aspect of your model, such as
element properties or results.
You need to compute your model before you can create reports about results, such as
the movement of water in your network. But, you can create reports about input data
without computing your model, such as conduit diameters. (To compute your model,
after you set up your elements and their properties, click the Compute button.)
You can access reports by:
Clicking the Report menu
Right-clicking any element, then selecting Report
Reporting includes:
Using Standard Reports on page 10-507
Reporting on Element Data on page 10-508
Using Standard Reports

There are several standard reports available. To access the standard reports, click the
Report menu, then select the report you want.
You can use these standard reports:
Creating a Project Inventory Report on page 10-507
Creating a Scenario Summary Report on page 10-508
Creating a Conduit and Pressure Pipe Inventory on page 10-508
Creating a Project Inventory Report

To create a report that provides an overview of your network, click Report > Project
Inventory. The report dialog box opens and displays your report. You cannot format
the report, but you can print it by clicking the Print button.
10-507
Reporting
Creating a Scenario Summary Report

To create a report that summarizes your scenario, click Report > Scenario Summary.
The report dialog box opens and displays your report. You cannot format the report,
but you can print it by clicking the Print button.
Creating a Conduit and Pressure Pipe Inventory

To create a report that lists the conduits and pressure pipes in the model, click Report
> Pressure Pipe Inventory. The Conduit Inventory tab lists the total lengths of conduit
by description, count, and material type. The Pressure Pipe Inventory tab lists the total
lengths of pressure pipe by diameter, material type, and volume. The report dialog
opens and displays the Conduit and Pressure Pipe Inventory report. You can copy
rows, columns, or the entire table to the clipboard by highlighting the desired rows
and/or columns and clicking Ctrl+C.
Reporting on Element Data

You can create reports for specific elements in your network by computing the
network, right-clicking the element, then selecting Report. You cannot format the
report, but you can print it by clicking the Print button. You can also create a report
for multiple elements by lcicking the Report menu and selecting the Element Details
command. Select the elements you wish to create a report for by using the tools in the
Select toolbar. In the Element Details dialog that appears, you can preview and/or
print the element detail report. To remove an item from the list, highlight it and click
the Remove button.
Report Options
The Report Options dialog box offers control over how a report is displayed.
10-508
Load factory default

settings to current view
Changes the display settings

used by the current repor to
the factory default.
Load global settings to

current view
Changes the display settings

used by the current report to
the previously saved global
settings.
Save current view settings

to global settings
Saves the display settings

used by the current report as
the new global settings.
The header and footer can be fully customized and you can edit text to be displayed in
the cells or select a pre-defined dynamic variable from the cell's menu.
%(Company) - The name specified in the project properties.
% (DateTime) - The current system date and time.
% (BentleyInfo) - The standard Bentley company information.
% (BentleyName) - The standard Bentley company name information.
% (Pagination) - The report page out of the maximum pages.
% (ProductInfo) - The current product and its build number.
% (ProjDirectory) - The directory path where the project file is stored.
% (ProjEngineer) - The engineer specified in the project properties.
% (ProjFileName) - The full file path of the current project.
% (ProjStoreFileName) - The full file path of the project.
% (ProjTitle) - The name of the project specified in the project properties.
% (ReportTitle) - The name of the report.
% (Image) - Opens up the Select Image file window.
You can also select fonts, text sizes, and customize spacing.
Graphing
Use graphing to visualize some aspect of your model, such as element properties or
results. You need to compute your model before you can create graphs. To compute
your model, after you set up your elements and their properties, click the Compute
button.
10-509
Graphing
Click one of the following links to learn more about using graphs in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i:
Graph Manager on page 10-510
Creating a Graph on page 10-511
Printing a Graph on page 10-512
Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying on page 10-512
Graph Dialog Box on page 10-512
Chart Options Dialog Box on page 10-520
Graph Manager
The Graph Manager lets you recall a graph you have created and saved in the current
session or in a previous session of Bentley SewerCAD V8i. Graphs listed in the Graph
Manager retain any customizations you have applied.
To use the Graph Manager:
1. Compute your model and resolve any errors. (Press F9 or click Analysis >
Compute.)
2. Open the Graph Manager, click View > Graphs.
3. Create your graph. (For more information, see Creating a Graph on page 10511.)
4. After you create a graph, it is available in the Graph Manager. You can select it by
double-clicking it. Also, you can right-click a graph listed in Graph Manager to:
Delete it
Rename the graphs label
Open it, by selecting Properties
Graphs are not saved in Graph Manager after you close Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Graph Manager
The Graph Manager contains a toolbar with the following buttons:
10-510
New
Inserts a new graph of the currently selected

elements in your model. If no elements are
selected, you are prompted to select one or
more elements to graph.
Delete
Deletes the currently highlighted graph.
Rename

graph.
View
Opens the Graph dialog box, allowing you

to view the currently highlighted graph.
Help
Displays online help for the Graph Manager.
Creating a Graph
You can graph computed values, such as flow and velocity. To create a graph:
1. Compute your Bentley SewerCAD V8i network.
2. If necessary, use Shift+click to select multiple elements.
3. Right-click an element and select Graph. The Graph dialog box opens (see
Graph Dialog Box on page 10-512).
4. If needed, use the Scenarios drop-down list (for more information, see Scenario
Manager on page 9-471) to select check boxes to include different or multiple
scenarios in the graph. Click Refresh after you make any changes, so the graph
displays your changes.
5. If needed, use the Elements drop-down list to select check boxes to include
different or multiple element properties in the graph. Click Refresh after you
make any changes, so the graph displays your changes.
Note:
Bentley SewerCAD V8i assumes initial flowflow at time 0in

all networks to be 0; thus, graphs of flow begin at 0 for time 0.
6. If needed, click Chart Settings to change the display of the graph. For more
information, see Graph Manager on page 10-510.
10-511
Graphing
Tip:
If you want your graph to display over more time (for example, it
displays a 24-hour time period and you want to display a 72-hour
period), click View > Calculation Options and change Total
Simulation Time in the Property Editor (for more information,
see Editing Attributes in the Property Editor on page 15-823).
Printing a Graph
To print a graph, click the Print button to open the print dialog box or click the Print
Preview button to see what your graph looks like before clicking Print.
Working with Graph Data: Viewing and Copying

Bentley SewerCAD V8i lets you view the data that your graphs are based on. To view
your data, create a graph, then, after the Graph dialog box opens, click the Data tab.
You can copy this data to the Windows clipboard for use in other applications, such as
word-processing software. To copy this data:
1. Click in the top-most cell of the left-most column to select the entire table, click a
column heading to select an entire column, or click a row heading to select an
entire row.
2. Press Ctrl+C to copy the selected data to the clipboard.
3. As needed, press Ctrl+V to paste the data as tab-delimited text into other software.
Tip:
To print out the data for a graph, copy and paste it into another
application, such as word-processing software or Notepad, and
print the pasted content.
Graph Dialog Box

The Graph dialog box allows you to view graphs and modify graph settings as desired.
After you create a graph, you view it in the Graph dialog box.
The following controls are available:
10-512
Graph Tab
Add to Graph Manager
Lets you save the Graph to the graph

manager. When you click this button,
the graph options (i.e., attributes to
graph for a specific scenario) and the
graph settings (i.e., line color, font
size) are saved with the graph. If you
want to view a different set of data
(for example, a different scenario),
you must change the scenario in the
Graph Series Options dialog box.
Simply switching the active scenario
will not change the graph. Graphs
that you add to the Graph manager
are saved when you save your model,
so that you can use the graph after
you close and reopen Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
Graph Series Options
Lets you control what your graph

displays. For more information, see
Graph Series Options Dialog Box
on page 10-517.
Chart Settings
Opens the Chart Options dialog box,

allowing you to change graph
display settings.
Print
Prints the current view in the graph

display pane.
Print Preview
Opens the Print Preview Window,

displaying the graph exactly as it will
be printed.
Copy
Copies the current view in the graph

display pane to the Windows
Clipboard.
Zoom Extents
Zooms out so that the entire graph is

displayed
10-513
Graphing
Zoom Window
10-514
Zooms in on a section of the graph.

When the tool is toggled on, you can
zoom in on any area of the graph by
clicking on the chart to the left of the
area to be zoomed, holding the
mouse button, then dragging the
mouse to the right (or, the opposite
extent of the area to be magnified)
and releasing the mouse button when
the area to be zoomed has been
defined.
To zoom back out, click and hold the
mouse button, drag the mouse in the
opposite direction (right to left), and
release the mouse button.
Time (VCR) Controls
Lets you evaluate plots over time.
If you click Restart, the Time

resets to zero and the vertical
line that marks time resets to the
left edge of the Graph display.
If you click Pause, the vertical

line that moves across the graph
to mark time pauses, as does the
Time field.
If you click Play, a vertical line

moves across the graph and the
Time field increments.
The following controls are also

available:
Graph Display Pane
TimeDisplays the time location of the vertical black bar in

the graph display. This is a readonly field, to set a specific time,
use the slider button.
SliderLets you set a specific

time for the graph. A vertical line
moves in the graph display and
intersects your plots to show the
value of the plot at a specific
time. Use the slider to set a
specific time value.
Displays the graph.
Data Tab
10-515
Graphing
Data Table
850_GraphDialog_002.bmp
The Data tab displays the data that
comprise your graphs. If there is
more than one item plotted, the data
for each plot is provided.
You can copy and paste the data from
this tab to the clipboard for use in
other applications, such as Microsoft
Excel.
To select an entire column or row,
click the column or row heading. To
select the entire contents of the Data
tab, click the heading cell in the topleft corner of the tab. Use Ctrl+C and
Ctrl+V to paste your data. The
column and row headings are not
copied.
The Data tab is shown below.
10-516
Graph Series Options Dialog Box

Click the Graph Series Options button in the Graph dialog box (Graph Dialog Box
on page 10-512) to use the Graph Series Options dialog box to customize your graph.
This dialog box lets you choose which scenarios, elements, and fields you want to plot
(this affects both the Graph and Data tabs). Click to select the check boxes next to
those items you want to plot and clear the check boxes for those items you do not want
to plot. Click Close after you have made your selections and the graph is updated to
display the items you chose.
Filter Dialog Box

The Filter dialog box lets you specify your filtering criteria. Each filter criterion is
made up of three items:
AttributeThe attribute to filter.
OperatorThe operator to use when comparing the filter value against the data
in the specific column (operators include: =, >, >=, <, <=, < >).
ValueThe comparison value.
Any number of criteria can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are implicitly
joined with a logical AND statement. When multiple filter criteria are defined, only
rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A filter will remain active
for the associated table until the filter is reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows
displayed and the total number of rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed).
When a filter is active, this message will be highlighted.
Observed Data Dialog Box

Use this feature to display user-supplied time variant data values alongside calculated
results in the graph display dialog. Model competency can sometimes be determined
by a quick side by side visual comparison of calculated results with those observed
and collection in the field.
Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units
of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the data points
represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear
in the graph.
Preparing your data - Typically, observed data can be organized as a collection

of points in a table. In this case, the time series data can simply be copied to the
clipboard directly from the source and pasted right into the observed data input
table. Ensure that your collection of data points is complete. That is, every value
10-517
Graphing
must have an associated time value. Oftentimes data points are stored in tab or
comma delimited text files; these two import options are available as well. See the
Sample Observed Data Source topic for an example of the observed data source
file format.
Specifying the characteristics of your data - The following charecteristics must

be defined:
Time from Start - An offset of the start time for an EPS scenario.
Y Dimension - Unit class for the observed data point(s).
Numeric Formatter - Group of units that correspond to the selected value.
Y Unit - A preview of the current displayed unit for the selected format.
Note:
Go to Tools > Options > Units for a complete list of formats.
Caution:
Observed data can only be saved if the graph is saved.
To create Observed Data
1. Click New
2. Set hours, dimension, and formatter.
3. Add hours and Y information (or import a .txt or .csv file
4. Click Graph
).
to view the Observed data.
5. Click Close.
10-518

Sample Observed Data Source
Below is an example of an Observed Data source for import and graph comparison.
The following table contains a flow meter data collection retreived in the field for a
given pipe. We will bring this observed data into the model for a quick visual inspection against our model's calculated pipe flows.
Table 10-1: Observed Flow Meter Data (Time in Hours)
Time (hrs)
Flow (gpm)
0.00
125
0.60
120
3.00
110
9.00
130
13.75
100
18.20
125
21.85
110
With data tabulated as in the table above, we could simply copy and paste these rows
directly into the table in the Observed Data dialog. However if we had too many
points to manage, natively exporting our data to a comma delimited text file may be a
better import option. Text file import is also a better option when our time values are
not formatted in units of time such as hours, as in the table below.
Table 10-2: Observed Flow Meter Data (24-Hr Clock)
Time (24-hr
clock)
Flow (gpm)
00:00
125
00:36
120
03:00
110
10-519
Chart Options Dialog Box

Table 10-2: Observed Flow Meter Data (24-Hr Clock)
Time (24-hr
clock)
Flow (gpm)
09:00
130
13:45
100
18:12
125
21:51
110
Below is a sample of what a comma-delimited (*.csv) file would look like:

0:00,125
0:36,120
3:00,110
9:00,130
13:45,100
18:12,125
21:51,110
Note:
Database formats (such as MS Access) are preferable to simple

spreadsheet data sources. The sample described above is
intended only to illustrate the importance of using expected data
formats.
To import the comma delimited data points:

1. Click the Import toolbar button from the Observed Data dialog.
2. Pick the source .csv file.
3. Choose the Time Format that applies, in this case, HH:mm:ss, and click OK.

Use the Chart Options dialog box to format a graph.
10-520

Note:
Changes you make to graph settings are not retained for use
with other graphs.
To open Chart Options dialog box:

1. Open your project and click Compute.
2. Select one or more elements, right-click, then select Graph.
3. Click the Chart Settings button.
Click one of the following links to learn more about Chart Options dialog
box:
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab on page 10-521
Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab on page 10-547
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab on page 10-555
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab on page 10-556
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab on page 10-558
Border Editor Dialog Box on page 10-559
Gradient Editor Dialog Box on page 10-560
Color Editor Dialog Box on page 10-561
Color Dialog Box on page 10-561
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box on page 10-562
Pointer Dialog Box on page 10-565
Change Series Title Dialog Box on page 10-566
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box on page 10-566
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box on page 10-578
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart Tab

The Chart tab lets you define overall chart display parameters. This tab is subdivided
into second-level sub-tabs:
Series Tab
Panel Tab
Axes Tab
General Tab
Titles Tab
10-521
Walls Tab
Paging Tab
Legend Tab
3D Tab
Series Tab
Use the Series tab to display the series that are associated with the current graph. To
show a series, select the check box next to the series name. To hide a series, clear its
check box. The Series tab contains the following controls:
Up/Down arrows
Lets you select the printer you want to use.
Add
Adds a new series to the current graph. The

TeeChart Gallery opens, see TeeChart Gallery
Dialog Box.
Delete
Lets you remove the currently selected series.
Title
Lets you rename the currently selected series.
Clone
Creates a duplicate of the currently selected series.
Change
Lets you edit the currently selected series. The

TeeChart Gallery opens, see TeeChart Gallery
Dialog Box.
Panel Tab
Use the Panel tab to set how your graph appears in the Graph dialog box. The Panel
tab includes the following sub-tabs:
Borders Tab
Use the Borders tab to set up a border around your graph. The Borders tab contains the
following controls:
10-522
Border
Lets you set the border of the graph. The Border

Editor opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box.
Bevel Outer
Lets you set a raised or lowered bevel effect, or no

bevel effect, for the outside of the chart border.
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you
use; inner and outer bevels can use different color
values.
Bevel Inner

bevel effect, for the inside of the chart border.
Size
Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that

you use; inner and outer bevels use the same size
value.
Background Tab
Use the Background tab to set a color or image background for your graph. The Background tab contains the following controls:
Color
Lets you set a color for the background of your

graph. The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor
Dialog Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the background of your

graph. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch
Brush Editor Dialog Box.
Transparent
Makes the background of the graph transparent.
Background Image
Lets you set an existing image as the background

of the graph. Click Browse, then select the image
(including .bmp, .tif, .jpg, .png,. and .gif). After
you have set a background image, you can remove
the image from the graph by clicking Clear.
You can control the Style of the background
image:
StretchResizes the background image to fill

the entire background of the graph.
TileRepeats the background image as

many times as needed to fill the entire background of the graph.
CenterPuts the background image in the

horizontal and vertical center of the graph.
NormalPuts the background image in the

top-left corner of the graph.
Gradient Tab
10-523

Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your graph. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
Visible
Determines whether a gradient displays or not.

Select this check box to display a gradient you
have set up, clear this check box to hide the
gradient.
Direction
Sets the direction of the gradient. Vertical causes

the gradient to display from top to bottom,
Horizontal displays a gradient from right to left,
and Backward/Forward diagonal display gradients
from the left and right bottom corners to the
opposite corner.
Angle
Lets you customize the direction of the gradient

beyond the Direction selections.
Colors Tab
Start
Lets you set the starting color for your gradient.

Opens the Color Editor dialog box.
Middle
Lets you select a middle color for your gradient.

The Color Editor opens. Select the No Middle
Color check box if you want a two-color gradient.
End
Lets you select the final color for your gradient.

Gamma Correction
Lets you control the brightness with which the

background displays to your screen; select or clear
this check box to change the brightness of the
background on-screen. This does not affect printed
output.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your gradient, where

100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma
10-524
Lets you set the location on the chart background

of the gradients end color.
Sigma Focus
Lets you use the options controls. Select this

check box to use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Scale
Lets you control how much of the gradients end

color is used by the gradient background.
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for your graph. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
Visible
Lets you display a shadow for your graph. Select

this check box to display the shadow, clear this
check box to turn off the shadow effect.
Size
Set the size of the shadow by increasing or

decreasing the numbers for Horizontal and/or
Vertical Size.
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow of your graph.

You might set this to gray but can set it to any
other color.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow of your

graph. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your shadow, where

opaque.
Axes Tab
Use the Axes tab set how your axes display. It includes the following controls and
subtabs:
Visible
When checked, displays all of your graphs axes;

clear it to hide all of the graphs axes.
Behind
When checked, displays all of your graphs axes

behind the series display; clear it to display the
axes in front of the series display.
10-525
Axes
Caution:
Select the axis you want to edit. The Scales,

Labels, Ticks, Title, Minor, and Position tabs and
their controls pertain only to the selected axis.
Do not delete the axes called Custom 0 and Custom 1, as
these are reserved axes that are needed by Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
Scales Tab
Use the Scales tab to define your axes scales. The Scales tab contains the following
controls:
Automatic
Lets you automatically or manually set the

minimum and maximum axis values. Select this
check box if you want TeeChart to automatically
set both minimum and maximum, or clear this
check box if you want to manually set either or
both.
Visible
Displays the axis if selected, hides the axis if

cleared.
Inverted
Reverses the order in which the axis scale

increments. If the minimum value is at the origin,
then selecting Inverted puts the maximum value at
the origin.
Change
Lets you change the increment of the axis.
Increment
Displays the increment value you set for the axis.
Logarithmic
Lets you use a logarithmic scale for the axis.
Log Base
If you select a logarithmic scale, set the base you

want to use in the text box.
Minimum Tab
10-526
Auto

minimum axis value.
Change
Lets you enter a value for the axis minimum.
Offset
Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the

location of the minimum or maximum axis value
with respect to the origin.
Maximum Tab
Auto

maximum axis value.
Change
Lets you enter a value for the axis maximum.
Offset
Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the

location of the minimum or maximum axis value
with respect to the origin.
Labels Tab
Use the Labels tab to define your axes text. The Labels tab contains the following
subtabs and controls:
Style Tab
Visible
Lets you show or hide the axis text.
Multi-line
Lets you split labels or values into more than one

line if the text contains a space. Select this check
box to enable multi-line text.
Round first
Controls whether axis labels are automatically

rounded to the nearest magnitude.
Label on axis
Controls whether Labels just at Axis Minimum

and Maximum positions are shown. This applies
only if the maximum value for the axis matches
the label for extreme value on the chart.
Size
Determines distance between the margin of the

graph and the placement of the labels.
Angle
Sets the angle of the axis labels. In addition to

using the up and down arrows to set the angle in
90 increments, you can type an angle you want to
use.
Min. Separation %
Sets the minimum distance between axis labels.
10-527
Style
Lets you set the label style.
AutoLets TeeChart automatically set the

label style.
ValueSets axis labeling based on minimum

and maximum axis values.
TextUses text for labels. Since Bentley

SewerCAD V8i uses numeric values, this is
not implemented; dont use it.
NoneTurns off axis labels.
MarkUses SeriesMarks style for labels.

Since Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses numeric
values, this is not implemented; dont use it.
Format Tab
Exponential
Displays the axis label using an exponent, if

appropriate.
Values Format
Lets you set the numbering format for the axis

labels.
Default Alignment
Lets you select and clear the default TeeChart

alignment for the right or left axes only.
Text Tab
10-528
Font
Lets you set the font properties for axis labels.

This opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the axis label font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see
Color Editor Dialog Box).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern the axis label font. The

Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush
Editor Dialog Box.
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the axis labels.
VisibleLets you display a shadow for the

axis labels. Select this check box to display
the axis label shadow.
SizeLets you set the location of the shadow.

Use larger numbers to offset the shadow by a
large amount.
ColorLets you set a color for the shadow.

other color. The Color Editor opens.
PatternLets you set a pattern for the

shadow. The Hatch Brush Editor opens.
TransparencyLets you set transparency for

your shadow, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
Ticks Tab
Use the Ticks tab to define the major ticks and their grid lines. The Ticks tab contains
Axis
Lets you set the properties of the selected axis.

Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Grid
Lets you set the properties of the graphs grid lines

that intersect the selected axis. Opens the Border
Editor dialog box.
Ticks
Lets you set the properties of the tick marks that

are next to the labels on the label-side of the
selected axis. Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Len
Sets the length of the Ticks or Inner ticks.
Inner
Lets you set the properties of the tick marks that

are next to the labels on the graph-side of the
selected axis. Opens the Border Editor dialog box.
Centered
Lets you align between the grid labels the graphs

grid lines that intersect the selected axis.
At Labels Only
Sets the axis ticks and axis grid to be drawn at

labels only. Otherwise, they are drawn at all axis
increment positions.
10-529

Title Tab
Use the Title tab to set the axis titles. The Title tab contains the following subtabs and
controls:
Style Tab
Title
Lets you type a new axis title.
Angle
Sets the angle of the axis title. In addition to using

the up and down arrows to set the angle in 90
increments, you can type an angle you want to use.
Size
Determines distance between the margin of the

graph and the placement of the labels. xxxx not
functional (busted)
Visible
Check box that lets you display or hide the axis

title.
Text Tab
10-530
Font
Lets you set the font properties for axis title. This
opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the axis title font.
Double-click the colored square between Font and
Fill to open the Color Editor dialog box (see
Color Editor Dialog Box).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern the axis title font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the axis title.

axis title. Select this check box to display the
axis label shadow.

large amount.



Minor Tab
Use the Minor tab to define those graph ticks that are neither major ticks. The Minor
tab contains the following controls and tabs:
Ticks
Lets you set the properties of the minor tick

marks. The Border Editor opens, see Border
Editor Dialog Box.
Length
Sets the length of the minor tick marks.
Grid
Lets you set the properties of grid lines that align

with the minor ticks. The Border Editor opens, see
Border Editor Dialog Box.
Count
Sets the number of minor tick marks.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the axes position for your graph. The Position tab contains
Position %
Sets the position of the axis on the graph in pixels

or as a percentage of the graphs dimensions.
10-531
Start %
Sets the start of the axis as percentage of width

(horizontal axis) and height (vertical axis) of the
graph. The original axis scale is fitted to new axis
height/width.
End %
Sets the end of the axis as percentage of width

(horizontal axis) and height (vertical axis) of the
graph. The original axis scale is fitted to new axis
height/width.
Units
Lets you select pixels or percentage as the unit for

the axis position.
Z%
Sets the Z dimension as a percentage of the

graphs dimensions. This is unused by Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
General Tab
Use the General tab to preview a graph before you print it and set up scrolling and
zooming for a graph. It includes the following controls:
Print Preview
Lets you see the current view of the document as it

will be printed and lets you define the print
settings, such as selecting a printer to use. Opens
the Print Preview dialog box.
Margins
Lets you specify margins for your graph. There are

four boxes, each corresponding with the top,
bottom, left, and right margins, into which you
enter a value that you want to use for a margin.
Units
Lets you set pixels or percentage as the units for

your margins. Percentage is a percentage of the
original graph size.
Cursor
Lets you specify what your cursor looks like.

Select a cursor type from the drop-down list, then
click Close to close the TeeChart editor, and the
new cursor style displays when the cursor is over
the graph.
Zoom Tab
10-532

Use the Zoom tab to set up zooming on, magnifying, and reducing the display of a
graph. The Zoom tab contains the following controls:
Allow
Lets you magnify the graph by clicking and

dragging with the mouse.
Animated
Lets you set a stepped series of zooms.
Steps
Lets you set the number of steps used for

successive zooms if you selected the Animated
check box.
Pen
Lets you set the thickness of the border for the

zoom window that surrounds the magnified area
when you click and drag. The Border Editor
opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box.
Pattern
The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush

Editor Dialog Box.
Minimum pixels
Lets you set the number of pixels that you have to

click and drag before the zoom feature is
activated.
Direction
Lets you zoom in the vertical or horizontal planes

only, as well as both planes.
Mouse Button
Lets you set the mouse button that you use to click
and drag when activating the zoom feature.
Scroll Tab
Use the Scroll tab to set up scrolling and panning across a graph. The Scroll tab
Allow Scroll
Lets you scroll and pan over the graph. Select this
check box to turn on scrolling, clear the check box
to turn it off.
Mouse Button
Lets you set the mouse button that you click to use
the scroll feature.
Titles Tab
The Titles tab lets you define titles to use for your graph. It includes the following
controls and tabs:
10-533
Title
Lets you set the location of the titles you want to

use. The Titles sub tabs apply to the Title that is
currently selected in the Title drop-down list.
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to display and create a selected title. Type the text of the title in the
text box on the Style tab. The Style tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Lets you display the selected title.
Adjust Frame
Lets you wrap the frame behind the selected title

to the size of the title text.
Each title can have a frame behind it (see Format
Tab). By default, this frame is transparent. If you
turn off transparency to see the frame, the frame
can be sized to the width of the graph or set to
snap to the width of the title text.
Select the Adjust Frame check box to set the
width of the frame to the width of the title text;
clear this check box to set the width of the frame
to the width of the graph.
Alignment
Lets you set the alignment of the selected title.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the placement of the selected title. The Position tab contains
Custom
Lets you set a custom position for the selected

title. Select this check box to set a custom
position.
Left/Top
Lets you set the location of the selected title

relative to the left and top of the graph. If you
select the Custom check box, use these settings to
position the selected title.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format a background shape behind the selected title. The
Format tab contains the following controls:
10-534
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Color Editor
opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
Frame
Lets you define the outline of the shape you create

behind the selected title. The Border Editor opens,
see Border Editor Dialog Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the shape you
create behind the selected title. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog
Box.
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the rectangular

shape you create behind the selected title. Select
this check box to round the corners of the shape.
Transparent
Lets you set the fill of the shape you create behind
the selected title as transparent. If the shape is
completely transparent, you cannot see it, so clear
this check box if you cannot see a shape that you
expect to see.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the shape, where 100

is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the selected title. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font
Lets you set the font properties for the text. This
Color
Lets you select the color for the text. Double-click

the colored square between Font and Fill to open
the Color Editor dialog box (see Color Editor
Dialog Box).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern for the text. The Hatch

Dialog Box.
10-535
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the text.

text. Select this check box to display the axis
label shadow.

large amount.



Gradient Tab
Note:
To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your axis title. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible
Sets whether a gradient displays or not. Select this

check box to display a gradient you have set up,
clear this check box to hide the gradient.
Direction

opposite corner.
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
10-536
Middle

End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the background for the selected title. The
Shadow tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Lets you display a shadow. Select this check box

to display the shadow, clear this check box to turn
off the shadow effect.
Size

Vertical Size.
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set
this to gray but can set it to any other color. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.
10-537
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch

Dialog Box.
Transparency

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Note:
To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the
Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Bevels tab to create rounded effects for the background for the selected title.
The Bevels tab contains the following controls:
Bevel Outer

bevel effect, for the background for the selected
title.
Color
values.
Bevel Inner

bevel effect, for the inside of the background for
the selected title.
Size

value.
Walls Tab
Use the Walls tab to set and format the edges of your graph. The Walls tab contains the
following subtabs:
Left/Right/Back/Bottom Tabs
Use the Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs to select the walls that you want to edit.
You might have to turn off the axes lines to see the effects (see Axes Tab on
page 10-525) for the back wall and turn on 3D display to see the effects for the left,
right, and bottom walls (see 3D Tab on page 10-546).
The Left, Right, Back, and Bottom tabs contain the following controls:
10-538
Color
The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog

Box.
Border
The Border Editor opens, see Border Editor

Dialog Box.
Pattern

Editor Dialog Box.
Gradient
Lets you set a color gradient for your walls. The

Gradient Editor opens, see Gradient Editor
Dialog Box.
Visible
Lets you display the walls you set up.
Dark 3D
Lets you automatically darken the depth

dimension for visual effect. Select a Size 3D larger
than 0 to enable this check box.
Size 3D
Lets you increase the size of the wall in the

direction perpendicular to its length (the graph
resizes automatically as a result).
Transparent
Lets you set transparency for your background,

where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Paging Tab
Use the Paging tab to display your graph over several pages. The Paging tab contains
Points per Page
Lets you scale the graph to fit on one or many

pages. Set the number of points you want to
display on a single page of the graph, up to a
maximum of 100.
Scale Last Page
Scales the end of the graph to fit the last page.
Current Page Legend
Shows only the current page items when the chart

is divided into multiple pages.
Show Page Number
Lets you display the current page number on the

graph.
10-539
Arrows
Lets you navigate through a multi-page graph.

Click the single arrows to navigate one page at a
time. Click the double arrows to navigate directly
to the last or first pages of the graph.
Legend Tab
Use the Legend tab to display and format a legend for your graph. The Legend tab
includes the following controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set up and display a legend for your graph. The Style tab contains
Visible
Lets you show or hide the legend for your graph.
Inverted
Lets you draw legend items in the reverse

direction. Legend strings are displayed starting at
top for Left and Right Alignment and starting at
left for Top and Bottom Legend orientations.
Check boxes
Activates/deactivates check boxes associated with

each series in the Legend. When these boxes are
unchecked in the legend, the associated series are
invisible.
Font Series Color
Sets text in the legend to the same color as the

graph element to which it applies.
Legend Style
Lets you select what appears in the legend.
Text Style
Lets you select how the text in the legend is

aligned and what data it contains.
Vert. Spacing
Controls the space between rows in the legend.
Dividing Lines
Lets you use and define lines that separate

columns in the legend. The Border Editor opens,
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to control the placement of the legend. The Position tab contains
10-540
Position
Lets you place the legend on the left, top, right, or

bottom of the chart.
Resize Chart
Lets you resize your graph to accommodate the

legend. If you do not select this check box, the
graph and legend might overlap.
Margin
Lets you set the amount of space between the

graph and the legend.
Position Offset %
Determines the vertical size of the Legend. Lower

values place the Legend higher up in the display
Custom
Lets you use the Left and Top settings to control

the placement of the legend. xxxx seems broken
Left/Top
Lets you enter a value for custom placement of the

legend.xxxx seems broken
Symbols Tab
Use the Symbols tab to add to the legend symbols that represent the series in the
graph. The Symbols tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Lets you display the series symbol next to the text

in the legend.
Width
Lets you resize the symbol that displays in the

legend. You must clear Squared to use this
control.
Width Units
Lets you set the units that are used to size the
width of the symbol.
Default border
Lets you use the default TeeChart format for the

symbol. If you clear this check box, you can set a
custom border using the Border button.
Border
Lets you set a custom border for the symbols. You

must clear Default Border to use this option. The
Border Editor opens, see Border Editor Dialog
Box.
Position
Lets you put the symbol to the left or right of its

text.
10-541
Continuous
Lets you attach or detach legend symbols. If you

select this check box, the color rectangles of the
different items are attached to each other with no
vertical spacing. If you clear this check box, the
legend symbols are drawn as separate rectangles.
Squared
Lets you override the width of the symbol, so you

can make the symbol square shaped.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the box that contains the legend. The Format tab
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the legends box.
The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.
Frame
Lets you define the outline of the legends box.

Dialog Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the legends

box. The Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the legends box.

Select this check box to round the corners of the
shape.
Transparent
Lets you set the fill of the legends box as

transparent. If the shape is completely transparent,
you cannot see it, so clear this check box if you
cannot see a shape that you expect to see.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the legends box,

where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Text Tab
10-542

Use the Text tab to format the text used in the legend. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font
Color

Dialog Box).
Fill

Dialog Box.
Shadow

label shadow.

large amount.



Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your legend. The
Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible

10-543
Direction

opposite corner.
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
Middle

End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

Shadow Tab
10-544

Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the legend. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
Visible

Size

Vertical Size.
Color
Box.
Pattern

Dialog Box.
Transparency

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for the legend. The Bevels tab contains
Bevel Outer

title.
Color
values.
Bevel Inner

the selected title.
Size

value.
10-545
3D Tab
Use the 3D tab to add a three-dimensional effect to your graph. The 3D tab contains
10-546
3 Dimensions
Lets you display the chart in three dimensions.

Select this check box to turn on three-dimensional
display.
3D %
Lets you increase or decrease the threedimensional effect. Set a larger percentage for
more three-dimensional effect, or a smaller
percentage for less effect.
Orthogonal
Lets you fix the graph in the two-dimensional

work plane or, if you clear this check box, lets you
use the Rotation and Elevation controls to rotate
the graph freely.
Zoom Text
Lets you magnify and reduce the size of the text in

a graph when using the zoom tool. clear this check
box if you want text, such as labels, to remain the
same size when you use the zoom tool.
Quality
Lets you select how the graph displays as you

manipulate and zoom on it.
Clip Points
Trims the view of a series to the walls of your

graphs boundaries, to enhance the threedimensional effect. Turn this on to trim the graph.
You only see this effect when the graph is in
certain rotated positions.
Zoom
Lets you magnify and reduce the display of the

graph in the Graph dialog box.
Rotation
Lets you rotate the graph. You must clear

Orthogonal to use this control.
Elevation

Horiz. Offset
Lets you adjust the left-right position of the graph.
Vert. Offset
Lets you adjust the up-down position of the graph.
Perspective

Chart Options Dialog Box - Series Tab

Use the Series tab to set up how the series in your graph display. Select the series you
want to edit from the drop-down list at the top of the Series tab.
The Series tab is organized into second-level sub-tabs:
Format Tab
Point Tab
General Tab
Data Source Tab
Marks Tab
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set up how the selected series appears. The Format tab contains
Border
Lets you format the graph of the selected series.

Dialog Box.
Color
Lets you set a color for the graph of the selected

series. The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor
Dialog Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the graph of the selected

series. This might only be visible on a threedimensional graph (see 3D Tab). The Hatch
Dialog Box.
Dark 3D

dimension for visual effect.
Color Each
Assigns a different color to each series indicator.
Clickable
This is unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
10-547
Color Each line
Lets you enable or disable the coloring of

connecting lines in a series. This is unused by
Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Height 3D
Lets you set a thickness for the three-dimensional

effect in three-dimensional graphs.
Stack
Lets you control how multiple series display in the

Graph dialog box.
NoneDraws the series one behind the

other.
OverlapArranges multiple series with the

same origin using the same space on the
graph such that they might overlap several
times.
StackLets you arrange multiple series so

that they are additive.
Stack 100%Lets you review the area under

the graph curves.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your series, where

opaque.
Stairs
Lets you display a step effect between points on

your graph.
Inverted
Inverts the direction of the stairs effect
Outline
Displays an outline around the selected series. The

Border Editor opens.
Point Tab
Use the Point tab to set up how the points that make up the selected series appear. The
Point tab contains the following controls:
10-548
Visible
Lets you display the points used to create your

graph.
3D
Lets you display the points in three dimensions.
Dark 3D

Inflate Margins
Adjusts the margins of the points to display points

that are close to the edge of the graph. If you clear
this option, points near the edge of the graph
might only partly display.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the points in your series.

Editor Dialog Box. You must clear Default to use
this option.
Default
Lets you select the default format for the points in

your series. This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each
Assigns a different color to each series indicator.
Style
Lets you select the shape used to represent the

points in the selected series.
Width/Height
Lets you set a size for the points in the selected

series.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the shapes that

represent the points in the selected series. The
Box.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the points in the

selected series, where 100 is completely
transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
General Tab
Use the General tab to modify basic formatting and relationships with axes for series
in a graph. The General tab contains the following controls:
Show in Legend
Lets you show the series title in the legend. To use

this feature, the legend style has to be Series or
LastValues (see Style Tab).
Cursor
Lets you specify what your cursor looks like.

Select a cursor type from the drop-down list, then
click Close to close the TeeChart editor, and the
new cursor style displays when the cursor is over
the graph.
10-549
Depth
Lets you set the depth of the three-dimensional

effect (see 3D Tab).
Auto
Lets you automatically size the three-dimensional

effect. clear and then select this check box to reset
the depth of the three-dimensional effect.
Values
Controls the format of the values displayed when

marks are on and they contain actual numeric
values
Percents
Controls the format of the values displayed when

marks are on and they contain actual numeric
values.
Horizontal Axis
Lets you define which axis belongs to a given

series, since you can have multiple axes in a chart.
Vertical Axis
Lets you define which axis belongs to a given

series, since you can have multiple axes in a chart.
Date Time
This is unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Sort
Sorts the points in the series using the labels list.
Data Source Tab

Use this tab to connect a TeeChart series to another chart, table, query, dataset, or
Delphi database dataset.
This lets you set the number of random points to generate and overrides the points
passed by Bentley SewerCAD V8i to the chart control. The Data Source feature can
be useful in letting you set its sources as functions and do calculations between the
series created by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
10-550
Randomxxxx not sure
Number of sample valuesxxxx not sure
Defaultxxxx not sure
Applyxxxx not sure
Marks Tab
Use the Marks tab to display labels for points in the selected series. Series-point labels
are called marks. The Marks tab contains the following tabs and controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set how the marks display. The Style tab contains the following
controls:
Visible
Lets you display marks.
Clipped
Lets you display marks outside the graph border.

clear this check box to let marks display outside
the graph border, or select it to clip the marks to
the graph border.
Multi-line
Lets you display marks on more than one line.

Select this check box to enable multi-line marks.
All Series Visible
Lets you display marks for all series.
Style
Lets you set the content of the marks.
Draw every
Sets the interval of the marks that are displayed.

Selecting 2 would display every second mark, and
3 would display every third, etc.
Angle
Lets you rotate the marks for the selected series.
Arrow Tab
Use the Arrow tab to display a leader line on the series graph to indicate where the
mark applies. The Arrow tab contains the following controls:
Border
Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor

Pointer
Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
Pointer Dialog Box.
Arrow head
Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to

add to the leader line.
Size
Lets you set the size of the arrow head.
10-551
Length
Lets you set the size of the leader line and arrow
head, or just the leader line if there is no arrow
head.
Distance
Lets you set the distance between the leader line

and the graph of the selected series.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the boxes that contains the marks. The Format
tab contains the following controls:
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Box.
Frame
Lets you define the outline of the boxes. The

Box.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Editor Dialog Box.
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select

Transparent
Lets you set the fill of the boxes as transparent. If

the shape is completely transparent, you cannot
see it, so clear this check box if you cannot see a
shape that you expect to see.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the boxes, where 100

opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the marks. The Text tab contains the
following controls:
Font
10-552
Color

Dialog Box).
Fill

Dialog Box.
Shadow

label shadow.

large amount.



Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your marks. The
Gradient tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
Visible

Direction

opposite corner.
10-553
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
Middle

End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the marks. The Shadow tab contains the
following controls:
10-554
Visible

Size

Vertical Size.
Color
Box.
Pattern

Dialog Box.
Transparency

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for your marks. The Bevels tab contains
Bevel Outer

title.
Color
values.
Bevel Inner

the selected title.
Size

value.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab

Use the Tools tab to add special figures in order to highlight particular facts on a given
chart. For more information, see Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box on page 10-566.
The Tools tab contains the following controls:
Add
Lets you add a tool from the Chart Tools Gallery.

To be usable in the current graph, a tool needs to
be added and set to Active.
10-555
Delete
Deletes the selected tool from the list of those

available in the current graph.
Active
Activates a selected tool for the current graph. To

be usable in the current graph, a tool needs to be
added and set to Active.
Up/Down arrow
These are unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Note:
Each tool has its own parameters, see Chart Tools Gallery Dialog
Box.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Export Tab

Use the Export tab to save your graph for use in another application. The Export tab
Copy
Lets you copy the contents of the graph to the

Windows clipboard, so you can paste it into
another application. You must consider the type of
data you have copied when choosing where to
paste it. For example, if you copy a picture, you
cannot paste it into a text editor, you must paste it
into a photo editor or a word processor that
accepts pictures. Similarly, if you copy data, you
cannot paste it into an image editor, you must
paste it into a text editor or word processor.
Save
Lets you create a new file from the contents of the

graph.
Picture Tab
Use the Picture tab to save your graph as a raster image or to copy the graph as an
image to the clipboard. The Picture tab contains the following controls and subtabs:
Format
10-556
Lets you select the format of the picture you want

to save. GIF, PNG, and JPEG are supported by the
Worldwide Web, a metafile is a more easily
scalable format. A Bitmap is a Microsoft BMP file
that is widely supported on Windows operating
systems, whereas TIFF pictures are supported on a
variety of Microsoft and non-Microsoft operating
systems.
Options Tab
Colors
Lets you use the default colors used by your graph

or to convert the picture to use grayscale. This
feature is used when you save the picture as a file,
not by the copy option.
Size Tab
Width/Height
Lets you change the width and height of the

picture. These values are measured in pixels and
are used by both the Save and Copy options
Keep aspect ratio
Lets you keep the relationship between the height

and width of the picture the same when you
change the image size. If you clear this check box,
you can distort the picture by setting height or
width sizes that are not proportional to the original
graph.
Note:
Changing the size of a graph using these controls might cause

some loss of quality in the image. Instead, try saving the graph
as a metafile and resizing the metafile after you paste or insert it
into its destination.
Native Tab
The Native tab contains the following controls:
Include Series Data
This is unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.xxxx

broken
File Size
Displays the size of an ASCII file containing the

data from the current graph.
Data Tab
The Data tab contains the following controls:
Series
Lets you select the series from which you copy

data.
Format
Lets you select a file type to which you can save

the data. This is not used by the Copy function.
10-557
Include
Select the data you want to copy.
Text separator
Lets you specify how you want rows of data

separated. This is supported by the Save function
and only by the Copy function if you first saved
using the text separator you have selected, before
you copy.
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print Tab

Use the Print tab to preview and print your graph. The Print tab contains the following
controls and subtabs:
Printer
Lets you select the printer you want to use.
Setup
Lets you configure the printer you want to use. For

example, if the selected printer supports printing
on both sides of a page, you might want to turn on
this feature.
Print
Prints the displayed graph to the selected printer.
Page Tab
Orientation
Lets you set up the horizontal and vertical axes of

the graph. Many graphs print better in Landscape
orientation because of their width:height ratio.
Zoom
Lets you magnify the graph as displayed in the

print preview window. Use the scrollbars to
inspect the graph if it doesnt fit within the
preview window after you zoom. Changing the
zoom does not affect the size of the printed output.
Margins
Lets you set up top, bottom, left, and right margins

that are used when you print.
Margin Units
Lets you set the units used by the Margins

controls: percent or hundredths of an inch.
Format Tab
Print Background
10-558
When checked, prints the background of the

graph.
Quality
You do not need to change this setting. The box is

cleared by default.
Proportional
Lets you change the graph from proportional to

non-proportional. When you change this setting,
the preview pane is automatically updated to
reflect the change. This box is checked by default.
Grayscale
Prints the graph in grayscale, converting colors

into shades of gray.
Detail Resolution
Lets you adjust the detail resolution of the

printout. Move the slider to adjust the resolution.
Preview Pane
Displays a small preview of the graph printout.
Border Editor Dialog Box

The Border Editor dialog box lets you define border properties for your graph. The
Border Editor dialog box contains the following controls:
Visible
Displays or hides the border. Select this check box

to display the border.
Color
Lets you select a color for the border. The Color

Editor dialog box opens, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.
Ending
Lets you set the ending style of the border.
Dash
Lets you select the dash style, if you have a

selection other than Solid set for the border style.
Width
Lets you set the width of the border.
Style
Lets you set the style for the border. Solid is an

uninterrupted line.
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your border, where

opaque.
10-559
Gradient Editor Dialog Box

Use the Gradient Editor dialog box to set a blend of two or three colors as the fill.
Click OK to apply the selection. The Gradient Editor contains the following controls
and tabs:
Format Tab
Visible

Direction

opposite corner.
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
Middle

End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma
10-560

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

To access the Gradient Editor dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box,
then click the Tools tab. Select the Axis tab and Color Band tool, then click the
Gradient button.
Color Editor Dialog Box

Use the Color Editor dialog box to select a color. Click the basic color you want to use
then click OK to apply the selection. The Color Editor dialog box contains the
following controls:
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for your color, where

opaque.
Custom
Lets you define a custom color to use. The Color

dialog box opens, see Color Dialog Box.
OK/Cancel
Click OK to use the selection. Click Cancel to

close the dialog box without making a selection.
To access the Color Editor dialog box, click a Color button in the Chart Options dialog
box.
Color Dialog Box

Use the Color dialog box to select a basic color or to define a custom color. After you
select the color you want to use, click OK to apply the selection.
Basic colors
Lets you click a color to select it.
Custom colors
Displays colors you have created and selected for

use.
Color matrix
Lets you use the mouse to select a color from a

range of colors displayed.
Color|Solid
Displays the currently defined custom color.
10-561
Hue/Sat/Lum
Lets you define a color by entering values for hue,

saturation, and luminosity.
Red/Green/Blue
Lets you define a color by entering values of red,

green, and blue colors.
Add to Custom Colors
Adds the current custom color to the Custom

colors area.
To access the Color dialog box, click the Custom button in the Color Editor dialog
box.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box

Use the Hatch Brush Editor dialog box to set a fill. The Hatch Brush Editor dialog box
contains the following controls and tabs:
Visible
Displays or hides the pattern. Select this check

box to display the selected pattern.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Solid Tab
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Hatch Tab
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Gradient Tab
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Image Tab
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Solid Tab

Use the Solid tab to set a solid color as the fill. The Solid tab contains the following
controls:
10-562
Transparency

opaque.
Custom
Lets you define a custom color to use. The Color

dialog box opens, see Color Dialog Box.
OK/Cancel
Click OK to use the selection. Click Cancel to

close the dialog box without making a selection.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Hatch Tab

Use the Hatch tab to set a pattern as the fill. Click OK to apply the selection. The
Hatch tab contains the following controls:
Hatch Style
Select the pattern you want to use. These display

using the currently selected background and
foreground colors.
Background/
Foreground
Select the color you want to use for the

background and foreground of the pattern. This
opens the Color Editor, see Color Editor Dialog
Box.

opaque.
Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Gradient Tab

Use the Gradient tab to set a blend of two or three colors as the fill. Click OK to apply
the selection. The Gradient tab contains the following controls:
Format Tab
Visible

Direction

opposite corner.
Angle

Colors Tab
Start
Middle

10-563
End
Gamma Correction

output.
Transparency

opaque.
Options Tab
Sigma

Sigma Focus

Sigma Scale

Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box - Image Tab

Use the Image tab to select an existing graphic file or picture to use as the fill. Click
OK to apply the selection. The Image tab contains the following controls:
10-564
Browse
Lets you navigate to then select the graphic file

you want to use. When selected, the graphic
displays in the tab.
Style
Lets you define how the graphic is used in the fill.
StretchResizes the image to fill the usable

space.
TileRepeats the image to fill the usable

space.
CenterPuts the image in the horizontal and

vertical center.
NormalPuts the image in the top-left corner
Pointer Dialog Box

Use the Pointer dialog box to set up a pointers for use with leader lines. The Pointer
dialog box contains the following controls:
Visible
Sets whether a pointer displays or not.
3D
Lets you display the pointer in three dimensions.
Dark 3D

Inflate Margins
Adjusts the margins of the pointers to display

pointers that are close to the edge of the graph. If
you clear this option, pointers near the edge of the
graph might only partly display.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the pointers. The Hatch

Dialog Box. You must clear Default to use this
option.
Default
Lets you select the default format for the pointers.

This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each
Assigns a different color to each pointer.
Style
Lets you select the shape used to represent the

pointers.
Width/Height
Lets you set a size for the pointers.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the shapes that

represent the pointers. The Border Editor opens,
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the pointers, where

opaque.
To access the Pointer dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box, then
click Series > Marks > Arrow.
10-565
Change Series Title Dialog Box

Use the Change Series Title dialog box to change the title of a selected series. Type the
new series title, then click OK to apply the new name or Cancel to close the dialog
box without making a change.
To access the Change Series title dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog
box, then click the Series tab, then the Title button.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box

Use the Chart Tools Gallery dialog box to add tools to your graph. For more information, see Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools Tab on page 10-555.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Chart Tools Gallery dialog
box:
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab

Use the Series tab to add tools related to the series in your chart. The Series tab
contains the following tools:
Cursor
Displays a draggable cursor line on top of the series. After you have added the Cursor
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
10-566
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to

apply the tool.
Style
Lets you select a horizontal line, vertical line, or

both as the format of the tool.
Snap
Causes the cursor tool to adhere to the selected

series.
Follow Mouse
Causes the cursor tool to follow your movements

of the mouse.
Pen
Lets you define the cursor tool. The Border Editor

Drag Marks
Lets you drag series marks. To use this tool, you must display the marks for a selected
series, see Marks Tab. After you have added the Drag Marks tool to your graph, you
can modify the following settings:
Series

apply the tool.
Reset Positions
Moves any marks you have dragged back to their

original position.
Drag Point
Lets you drag a series point. After you have added the Drag Point tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:
Series

apply the tool.
Style
Lets you constrain the movement of the series

point to one axis or both (no constraint).
Mouse Button
Lets you select the mouse button you click to drag.
Cursor
Lets you select the appearance of the cursor when

using the tool.
Draw Line
Lets you draw a line on the graph by dragging. After you have added the Draw Line
tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series

apply the tool.
Pen
Lets you define the line. The Border Editor opens,

Button
Lets you select the mouse button you click to drag.
10-567
Enable Draw
Enables the Draw Line tool. Select this check box

to let you draw lines, clear it to prevent you from
drawing lines.
Enable Select
Lets you select and move lines that you have

drawn. Select this check box, then click and drag
the line you want to move. clear this check box if
you want to prevent lines from being moved.
Remove All
Removes all lines you have drawn.
Gantt Drag
Lets you move and resize Gantt bars by dragging. This is unused by Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
Image
Displays a picture using the selected series axes as boundaries. After you have added
the Image tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
10-568
Series

apply the tool.
Browse
Lets you navigate to and select the image you

want to use. Browse is unavailable when there is a
selected image. To select a new image, first clear
the existing one.
Clear
Lets you remove a selected image. Clear is

unavailable when there is no selected image.
Mode
Lets you set up the image you select.
NormalPuts the background image in the

top-left corner of the graph.
StretchResizes the background image to fill

the entire background of the graph. The image
you select conforms to the series to which you
apply it.
CenterPuts the background image in the

horizontal and vertical center of the graph.
TileRepeats the background image as

many times as needed to fill the entire background of the graph.

Mark Tips
Displays data in tooltips when you move the cursor over the graph. After you have
added the Mark Tips tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series

apply the tool
Style
Lets you select what data the tooltips display.
Action
Sets when the tooltips display. Select Click if you

want the tooltips to display when you click, or
select Move if you want the tooltips to display
when you move the mouse.
Delay
Lets you delay how quickly the tooltip displays.
Nearest Point
Lets you define and display an indicator when you are near a point in the selected
series. After you have added the Nearest Point tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
Series

apply the tool.
Fill
Lets you set the fill for the nearest-point indicator.

Editor Dialog Box.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the nearest-point

indicator. The Border Editor opens, see Border
Editor Dialog Box.
Draw Line
Creates a line from the tip of the cursor to the

series point.
Style
Sets the shape for the indicator
Size
Sizes the indicator.
Pie Slices
Outlines or expands slices of pie charts when you move the cursor or click them. This
is unused by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
10-569

Series Animation
Animates series points. After you have added the Series Animation tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:xxxx seems broken.
Series

apply the tool.
Steps
Lets you select the steps used in the animation. Set

this control towards 100 for smoother animation
and away from 100 for quicker, but less smooth
animation.
Start at min. value
Lets you start the animation at the series

minimum value. clear this check box to set your
own start value.
Start value
Sets the value at which the animation starts. To use

this control, you must clear Start at min. value.
Execute!
Starts the animation.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab

Use the Axis tab to add tools related to the axes in your chart. The Axis tab contains
the following tools:
Axis Arrows
Lets you add arrows to the axes. The arrows permit you to scroll along the axes. After
you have added the Axis Arrows tool to your graph, you can modify the following
settings:
10-570
Axis
Select the axis to which you want to add arrows.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the arrows. The Border

Editor opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box.
Fill
Lets you set the fill for the arrows. The Hatch
Dialog Box.
Length
Lets you set the length of the arrows.
Inverted Scroll
Lets you change the direction in which the arrows

let you scroll.
Scroll
Changes the magnitude of the scroll. Set a smaller

percentage to reduce the amount of scroll caused
by one click of an axis arrow, or set a larger
percentage to increase the amount of scroll caused
by a click.
Position
Lets you set an axis arrow at the start, end, or both

positions of the axis.
Color Band
Lets you apply a color band to your graph for a range of values you select from an
axis. After you have added the Color Band tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
Axis
Select the axis that you want to use to define the

range for the color band.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the color band. The

Box.
Pattern
Lets you set the fill of the color band. The Hatch
Dialog Box.
Gradient
Lets you set a gradient for the color band. A

gradient overrides any solid color fill you might
have set. The Gradient Editor opens, see Gradient
Editor Dialog Box.
Color
Lets you set a solid color for the color band. The
Box.
Start Value
Sets where the color band begins. Specify a value

on the selected axis.
End Value
Sets where the color band ends. Specify a vale on

the selected axis.
Transparency

opaque.
10-571
Draw Behind
Lets you position the color band behind the

graphs. If you clear this check box, the color band
appears in front of your graphs and hides them,
unless you have transparency set.
Color Line
Lets you apply a color line, or plane in three dimensions, at a point you set at a value
on an axis. After you have added the Color Line tool to your graph, you can modify
the following settings:
10-572
Axis
Select the axis that you want to use to define the

location for the line.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the color line. The

Box.
Value
Sets where the color line is. Specify a value on the

selected axis.
Allow Drag
Lets you drag the line or lock the line in place.

Select this check box if you want to permit
dragging. clear this check box if you want the line
to be fixed in one location.
Drag Repaint
Lets you smooth the appearance of the line as you

drag it.
No Limit Drag
Lets you drag the line beyond the axes of the

graph, or constrain the line to boundaries defined
by those axes. Select this check box to permit
unconstrained dragging.
Draw Behind
Lets you position the color line behind the graphs.

If you clear this check box, the color band appears
in front of your graphs. This is more noticeable in
3D graphs.
Draw 3D
Lets you display the line as a 2D image in a 3D

chart. If you have a 3D chart (see 3D Tab), clear
this check box to display the line as a line rather
than a plane.
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab

Use the Other tab to add tools to your chart, including annotations. The Other tab
contains the following tools:
3D Grid Transpose
Swaps the X and Z coordinates to rotate the series through 90 degrees. This is unused
by Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
Annotation
Lets you add text to the chart. After you have added the Annotation tool to your graph,
you can modify the following settings:
Options Tab
Text
Lets you enter the text you want for your

annotation.
Text alignment
Sets the alignment of the text inside the annotation

box.
Cursor
Lets you set the style of the cursor when you move
it over the annotation.
Position Tab
Auto
Lets you select a standard annotation position.
Custom
Lets you select a custom position for the

annotation. Select this check box to override the
Auto setting and enable the Left and Top controls.
Left/Top
Lets you set a position from the Left and Top

edges of the graph tab for the annotation.
Callout Tab
Border
Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor

Pointer
Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the
leader line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see
Pointer Dialog Box.
Position
Sets the position of the callout.
10-573
Distance
Lets you set the distance between the leader line

and the graph of the selected series.
Arrow head
Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to

add to the leader line.
Size
Lets you set the size of the arrow head.
Format Tab
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The
Box.
Frame
Lets you define the outline of the boxes. The

Border Editor opens.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The
Editor Dialog Box.
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select

Transparent
Lets you set the fill of the boxes as transparent. If

the shape is completely transparent, you cannot
see it, so clear this check box if you cannot see a
shape that you expect to see
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the boxes, where 100

opaque.
Text Tab
10-574
Font
Lets you set the font properties for text. This

Color
Lets you select the color for the text font. Doubleclick the colored square between Font and Fill to
open the Color Editor dialog box.
Fill
Lets you set a pattern for the text font. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens.
Shadow

text. Select this check box to display the
shadow.

large amount.



Gradient Tab
Format
FormatLets you set up the gradients

properties.
VisibleSets whether a gradient displays or

not. Select this check box to display a gradient
you have set up, clear this check box to hide
the gradient.
DirectionSets the direction of the gradient.

Vertical causes the gradient to display from
top to bottom, Horizontal displays a gradient
from right to left, and Backward/Forward diagonal display gradients from the left and right
bottom corners to the opposite corner.
AngleLets you customize the direction of

the gradient beyond the Direction selections.
10-575
Colors
Options
Lets you set the colors used for your gradients.

The Start, Middle, and End selections open the
Color Editor, see Color Editor Dialog Box.
StartLets you set the starting color for your

gradient.
MiddleLets you select a middle color for

your gradient. The Color Editor opens. Select
the No Middle Color check box if you want a
two-color gradient.
EndLets you select the final color for your

gradient.
Gamma CorrectionLets you control the

brightness with which the background
displays to your screen; select or clear this
check box to change the brightness of the
background on-screen. This does not affect
printed output.

your gradient, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
Lets you control the affect of the start and end

colors on the gradient, the middle color is not
used.
SigmaLets you use the options controls.

Select this check box to use the controls in the
Options tab.
Sigma FocusLets you set the location on

the chart background of the gradients end
color.
Sigma ScaleLets you control how much of

the gradients end color is used by the
gradient background.
Shadow Tab
10-576
Visible

Size

Vertical Size.
Color
Color Editor opens.
Pattern

Brush Editor opens.
Transparency

opaque.
Bevels Tab
Bevel Outer

bevel effect, for the outside of the legend.
Color
values.
Bevel Inner

bevel effect, for the inside of the legend.
Size

value.
Page Number
Lets you add a page number annotation. For more information, see Annotation.
Rotate
Lets you rotate the chart by dragging. After you have added the Rotate tool to your
graph, you can modify the following settings:
Inverted
Reverses the direction of the rotation with respect

to the direction you move the mouse.
Style
Lets you rotate horizontally, vertically, or both.

Rotation is horizontal rotation about a vertical
axis, whereas elevation is vertical rotation about a
horizontal axis.
Outline
Lets you set the outline. The Border Editor opens,

10-577
TeeChart Gallery Dialog Box

Use the TeeChart Gallery dialog box to change the appearance of a series.
Series
The available series chart designs include:
Standard
Stats
Financial
Extended
3D
Other
View 3DLets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
SmoothSmooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.
Functions
The available function chart designs include:
Standard
Financial
Stats
Extended
View 3DLets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this
check box to view the charts in 3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
SmoothSmooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the
display, clear it to turn off smoothing.
Customizing a Graph
10-578
850_GraphDemo_DecimalPlaces_009.bmp
850_GraphDemo_Annotation_012.bmp
850_GraphDemo_RainVOutflow_014.bmp
To customize a graph:
1. If you do not have your own model, open Sample-1.swc, one of the sample
models that is included with Bentley SewerCAD V8i.
2. Create a graph.
a. Click Compute.
b. Close the Calculation Executive Summary.
c. Save your model.
d. Right click an element, in Sample-1.swc, shift+click CO-11, CO-3, and CO-7
to select them, then right-click one of them and select Graph.
e. Click Save in the Graph dialog box, to add the graph to the Graph manager.
3. Move the legend.
a. Click Chart Settings, to open the Chart Options dialog box.
b. Click the Chart button, Legend tab, and Position subtab.
c. Click the Right button in the Position area to set the legend to the right side of
the graph. You can use other controls on this subtab to move the legend.
10-579
4. Change the line colors and weights.

a. Click Chart Settings, to open the Chart Options dialog box.
b. In the Chart, Series tab click the series that you want to edit, to select and
highlight it. You can select more than one series by Ctrl+ or Shift+clicking
them.
c. Click Series and select the Format tab.
10-580

d. Click the Color button and select a new color, to change the color of the line.
The Color Editor dialog box opens (for more information, see Color Editor
Dialog Box on page 10-561).
e. Click OK after you click the color you want to use. The series that are
changed are those that you highlighted in the Chart, Series tab.
f.
Click Outline to change the thickness of a line. The Border Editor dialog box
open (for more information, see Border Editor Dialog Box on page 10-559).
g. Select Visible.
h. Change the Width.
i.
Make sure the Transparency is set to 0 if you want the line to appear opaque.
j.
Click OK after you define the line width and attributes. The series that are
changed are those that you highlighted in the Chart, Series tab.
5. Change the interval between labels, grid, and ticks.

a. Click Chart > Axes > Scales > Change to change the interval between labels
on the axes.
b. Select the Axis you want to change from the list of axes in the Axes area.
10-581
c. In the Increment dialog box, type the new value and click OK. This also
changes the distance between major and minor ticks.
d. If needed, change the axis you have selected for changes.

e. Click Chart > Axes > Minor and change the Count to change the interval
between minor ticks on the axes.
10-582

6. You can show and hide a grid associated with the major ticks.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Ticks and click Grid.
b. Select the axis on which you want to change the grid.
c. In the Border Editor dialog box, select or clear Visible to show or hide the
grid. (For more information, see Border Editor Dialog Box on page 10559.)
7. You can show and hide a grid associated with the minor ticks.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Minor and click Grid.
c. In the Border Editor dialog box, select or clear Visible to show or hide the
grid.
8. You can set the minimum and maximum range for an axis.
a. Click Chart > Axes > and select Scales.
c. Use the Minimum tab to change the minimum value for an axis. Clear the
Auto check box.
d. Click Change.
e. Set the minimum value for the axis.
f.
Use the Maximum tab to change the maximum value for an axis. Clear the
Auto check box.
g. Click Change.
h. Set the maximum value for the axis.
10-583
9. Change the background colors.

a. Click Chart > Panel > and select Background.
b. Use the Color and Pattern buttons to set a background color and/or pattern
for the graph (see Color Editor Dialog Box on page 10-561 and Hatch
Brush Editor Dialog Box on page 10-562).
10. Change the number of decimal places used in axis labels.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Labels and select Format.
b. Select the axis you want to change.
c. Change the number of decimal places by making a selection from the Values
Format drop-down list.
11. Change the fonts used by the axes and titles.
a. Click Chart > Axes > Labels and select Text.
b. Select the axis you want to change.
c. Click Font to open the Font dialog box and change the format of the fonts
used by the axis labels.
d. Click Chart > Axes > Title and select Text.
10-584

e. Select the axis you want to change.
f.
Click Font to open the Font dialog box and change the format of the fonts
used by the axis title.
12. Add a text box to the graph.

a. Click Tools > Add > Other > Annotation.
b. In the Text pane, type the text you want in your annotation.
13. Plot rainfall and flow on the same graph for a catchment.
a. Open Sample-1.swc.
b. Click Compute.
c. Right-click CM-5 and select Graph.
d. In the Graph dialog box, click Graph Series Options.
e. In the Graph Series Options dialog box, select Precipitation (Cumulative)

and Total Outflow, then click Close. The Graph dialog box displays two
graphs, one for total outflow and the other for cumulative precipitation.
f.
Click Chart Settings. The Graph Options dialog box opens.
g. Click the Precipitation (Cumulative) series to select it.
10-585
h. Click Change.
i.
Click the Bar graph type, to select it, then click OK.
j.
Change the axis used by the bar graph.
k. Click Series, then select Precipitation (Cumulative) in the drop-down list.

l.
Click the General subtab, then change Vertical Axis from Left to Custom 0.
m. To disable marks, click the Series > Marks > Style subtab, and clear the
Visible check box.
n. If you want to invert the Y-axis for the Precipitation (Cumulative) series, click
Chart > Axis, select the Custom 0 axis from the Axes list, and select the
Inverted check box.
o. Close the Chart Options dialog box when you finish.
10-586
Print Preview Window

The Print Preview window can be used to print documents from Bentley SewerCAD
V8i, such as reports and graphs. This window lets you see the current view of the
document as it will be printed and lets you define the print settings, such as selecting a
printer to use.
The following controls are available in the Print Preview window:
Contents
Displays a table of contents for the document, if

one is created.
Print
Opens the Print dialog box and lets you print the
document as it appears in the preview pane. You
can change printers in the Print dialog box, if you
want.
Copy
Copies the document to the Windows clipboard,

so you can paste it into other applications.
10-587
Contours
Find
Lets you search for words in the document. To

find a word, click Find, in the Find dialog box,
type the word you want to find, then click Find
Next. Words that are found are highlighted in the
print preview; click Find Next to continue
searching the document.
Single/Multiple Page
View
Displays the document as a single page or multiple

pages in the preview pane.
Zoom In/Out
Enlarges or reduces the display of the document in

the print preview.
Note:
Changing the zoom only affects

how the document displays onscreen, it does not affect how
the document prints.
Zoom Combo
Lets you select or type the amount of zoom used to

display the document, where 100% is full size.
Previous Page
Displays to the previous page in the document.
Next Page
Displays the next page in the document.
Page
Displays the current page number and the total

pages in the current chart. You can type the page
number you want to display, and press Enter to
display it.
Backward/Forward
Displays the page that was previously displayed.

Backward and Forward are based on your
navigation in the document and not on the page
order of the document. For example, if you
navigated from page 2 directly to page 6, clicking
Backward would display page 2 again; if you
then clicked Forward, page 6 would display
again.
Contours
Using SewerCAD V8i you can visually display calculated results for many attributes
using contour plots.
The Contours dialog box is where all of the contour definitions associated with a
project are stored. Choose View > Contours to open the Contours dialog box.
10-588

The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the contours currently contained
within the project, along with a toolbar.
New
Opens the Contour Definition dialog box,

allowing you to create a new contour.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected contour.
Rename
Renames the currently selected contour.
Edit
Opens the Contour Definition dialog box,

where you can modify the settings of the
currently selected contour.
Export

Export to Shapefile - Exports the

contour to a shapefile, opening the
Export to File Manager to select the
shapefile.
Export to DXF - Exports the contour as

a .dxf drawing.
Export to Native Format - Opens the

Shapefile Properties dialog box,
allowing you to add it to the Background
Layers Manager.
View
Contour
Browser
Opens the Contour Browser dialog,

allowing you to display detailed contour
results for points in the drawing view.
Refresh
Regenerates the contour.
Shift Up
Moves the currently selected contour up in

the list pane.
Shift
Down
Moves the currently selected contour down

in the list pane.
Help
Displays online help for the Contours.
10-589
Contours
Contour Definition
The Contour Definition dialog box contains the information required to generate
contours for a calculated network.
Contour
10-590
Field
Select the attribute to apply the contour.
Selection Set
Apply an attribute to a previously defined

selection set or to one of the following predefined
options:
All Elements - Calculates the contour based

on all elements in the model, including spot
elevations.
All Elements Without Spots - Calculates the

contour based on all elements in the model,
except for spot elevations.
Minimum
Lowest value to be included in the contour map. It

may be desirable to use a minimum that is above
the absolute minimum value in the system to avoid
creating excessive lines near a pump or other highdifferential portions of the system.
Maximum
Highest value for which contours will be

generated.
Increment
Step by which the contours increase. The contours

created will be evenly divisible by the increment
and are not directly related to the minimum and
maximum values. For example, a contour set with
10 minimum, 20 maximum, and an increment of 3
would result in the following set: [ 12, 15, 18 ] not
[ 10, 13, 16, 19 ].
Index Increment
Value for which contours will be highlighted and

labeled. The index increment should be an even
multiple of the standard increment.
Smooth Contours
The Contour Smoothing option displays the results

of a contour map specification as smooth, curved
contours.
Line Weight
The thickness of contour lines in the drawing view.
Color by Range
Contours are colored based on attribute ranges.

Use the Initialize button to create five evenly
spaced ranges and associated colors.
InitializeThis button, located to the right of the
Contour section, will initialize the Minimum,
Maximum, Increment, and Index Increment values
based on the actual values observed for the
elements in the selection set.
Tip:
Initialization can be
accomplished by clicking the
Initialize button to automatically
generate values for the
minimum, maximum,
increment, and index increment
to create an evenly spaced
contour set.
RampAutomatically generate a gradient range

between two colors that you specify. Pick the color
for the first and last values in the list and the
program will select colors for the other values.
Color by Index
The standard contours and index contours have

separately controlled colors that you can make the
contours more apparent.
Contour Plot
The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accurate, straight-line contours.
View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using the animation feature.
Choose Analysis > EPS Results Browser and click the Play button to automatically
advance through the time step increments selected in the Increment bar.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file. Choose File > Export > DXF to
export the plot.
10-591
Using Named Views

Tip:
Although the straight-line contours generated by this program

are accurate, smooth contours are often more desirable for
presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking
Options and selecting Smooth Contours.
Note:
Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this

view before sending the plot to the printer. The Contour Plot
Status pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
Contour Browser Dialog Box

The Contour Browser dialog box displays the X and Y coordinates and the calculated
value for the contour attribute at the location of the mouse cursor in the drawing view.
Enhanced Pressure Contours

Normal contouring routines only include model nodes, such as junctions, tanks and
reservoirs. When spot elevations are added to the drawing, however, you can create
more detailed elevation contours and enhanced pressure contours.
These enhanced contours include not only the model nodes but also the interpolated
and calculated results for the spot elevations. Enhanced pressure contours can help the
modeler to understand the behavior of the system even in areas that have not been
included directly in the model.
Using Named Views

The Named View dialog box is where you can store the current views X and Y coordinates. When you set a view in the drawing pane and add a named view, the current
view is saved as the named view. You can then center the drawing pane on the named
view with the Go To View command.
Choose View > Named Views to open the Named View dialog box.
10-592

New
Named ViewOpens a Named View

Properties box to create a new named
view.
FolderOpens a Named Views Folder

Properties box to enter a label for the
new folder.
Delete
Deletes the named view or folder that is

currently selected.
Rename
Rename the currently selected named view

or folder.
Go to View
Centers the drawing pane on the named

view.
Shift Up and Shift

Down
Moves the selected named view or folder up

or down.
Expand All or
Collapse All

folders.
Help
Displays online help for Named Views.
Using Aerial View

The Aerial View is a small navigation window that provides a graphical overview of
your entire drawing. You can toggle the Aerial View window on or off by selecting
View > Aerial View to open the Aerial View window.
A Navigation Rectangle is displayed in the Aerial View window. This Navigation
Rectangle provides a you-are-here indicator showing you current zoom location
respective of the overall drawing. As you pan and zoom around the drawing, the Navigation Rectangle will automatically update to reflect your current location.
You can also use the Aerial View window to navigate around your drawing. To pan,
click the Navigation Rectangle to drag it to a new location. To zoom, click anywhere
in the window to specify the first corner of the Navigation Rectangle, and click again
to specify the second corner.
10-593
Time Series Field Data

In AutoCAD mode, see the AutoCAD online help for a detailed explanation.
In Stand-Alone mode, with Aerial View window enabled (by selecting the View >
Aerial View), click and drag to draw a rectangular view box in the aerial view. The
area inside this view box is displayed in the main drawing window. Alternately, any
zooming or panning action performed directly in the main window updates the size
and location of the view box in the Aerial View window.
The Aerial View window contains the following buttons:
Zoom ExtentsDisplay the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.
Zoom InDecrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
Zoom OutIncrease the area displayed in the Aerial View window.
HelpOpens the online help.
To resize the view box directly from the Aerial View window, click to define the new
rectangular view box. To change the location of the view box, hover the mouse cursor
over the current view rectangle and click to drag the view box frame to a new location.

The Time Series Field Data dialog allows you to enter your observed field data and
compare it to the calculated results from the model in graph format. This is especially
useful in comparing time series data for model calibration.
10-594

Use this feature to display user-supplied time variant data values alongside calculated
results in the graph display dialog. Model competency can sometimes be determined
by a quick side by side visual comparison of calculated results with those observed in
the field.
Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside
source, you should take the time to get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units
of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the data points
represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear
in the graph. Each property should be in a separate column in your data source
file.
Preparing your data - Typically, observed data can be organized as a collection

of points in a table. In this case, the time series data can simply be copied to the
clipboard directly from the source and pasted right into the observed data input
table. Ensure that your collection of data points is complete. That is, every value
must have an associated time value. Oftentimes data points are stored in tab or
comma delimited text files; these two import options are available as well.
Starting time series data entry - To create a time series data set, click the
Component menu and select Time Series Field Data. Pick the element type (e.g.
Pipe, Junction) and select the New button on the top row of the dialog. (You may
also right click on the Element Type Name and click the Add button) You will
then see the Select Associated Modeling Attribute dialog where you select the
property (attribute) to be imported. Choose the attribute and click OK. You may
import any number of data sets for any Property and Element. The data set will
have the default name of Property-N (e.g. Flow - 1). To change the name, click
the Rename button (third button along the top of the table).
10-595
Specifying the characteristics of your data - The following charecteristics must

be defined:
Start Date Time - Specify the date and time the field data was collected.
Element - Choose the element that represents the field data measurement
location. Click the ellipsis button to select the element from the drawing.
Time From Start - Specify an offset of the start time and date for an EPS
scenario.
Attribute Value - Enter the value for the specified attribute at the specified
Time from Start.
You can perform a quick graphical check on the data import by clicking the Graph
button at the top of the data table.
If the number of observations is large, it is best to use the Copy/Paste commands.
Copy the data from the original source to the clipboard, then go to the top of the Time
from Start or Property (e.g. Flow) column and hit CTRL-V to paste the values into the
appropriate column.
Click the Close button when done.
The data is saved with the model file. If you modify the source data file, the changes
will not appear until time series data is imported again.
To add the time series field data to a graph, first create the graph of the property from
an EPS model run (e.g. right click on element and pick Graph). In the Graph options
dialog, select Time Series Field Data and then the name of the time series (in the Field
pane (right pane). The field data will appear in the graph as points (by default) while
the model results will appear as a continuous line. This can be changed using the Chart
Settings button at the top of the graph (third from left).
Select Associated Modeling Attribute Dialog Box

This dialog appears when you create a new field data set in the Time Series Field Data
dialog. Choose the attribute represented in the time series data source. The available
attributes will vary depending on the element type chosen.
10-596
Chapter
11
Features of the
MicroStation Version
Bentley SewerCAD V8i features support for MicroStation integration. You run
Bentley SewerCAD V8i in both MicroStation and stand-alone mode.
The MicroStation functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i base product. Once you become familiar with the stand-alone
mode, you will not have any difficulty using the product in MicroStation mode.
In MicroStation mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available
in the MicroStation design and drafting environment. The standard environment is
extended and enhanced by using MicroStations MDL (MicroStation Development
Language) client layer that lets you create, view, and edit the native Bentley
SewerCAD V8i network model while in MicroStation.
MDL is a complete development environment that lets applications take full advantage of the power of MicroStation and MicroStation-based vertical applications. MDL
can be used to develop simple utilities, customized commands or sophisticated
commercial applications for vertical markets.
Some of the advantages of working in MicroStation mode include:
Lay out network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans.
You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use,
along with any custom MDL applications.
Use native MicroStation insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley SewerCAD

V8i elements with respect to other entities in the MicroStation drawing.
Use native MicroStation commands on Bentley SewerCAD V8i model entities

with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.
Control destination levels for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Note:
Bentley SewerCAD V8i supports MicroStation version 8.11 only.
Additional features of the MicroStation version includes:
11-597
MicroStation Environment
MicroStation Environment on page 11-598
MicroStation Project Files on page 11-599
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties on page 11-599
Working with Elements on page 11-601
MicroStation Commands on page 11-603
Undo/Redo on page 11-604
Special Considerations on page 11-605
MicroStation Environment
The MicroStation environment includes:
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout on page 11-598
MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout

In MicroStation mode, our products provide a set of extended options and functionality beyond those available in stand-alone mode. This additional functionality
provides enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends
the command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
MicroStation.
Key differences between MicroStation and stand-alone mode include:
Full element symbol editing functionality is available through the use of custom
cells. All elements and graphical decorations (flow arrows, control indicators,
etc.) are contained within a SewerCAD V8i .cel file.
You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the
Element Levels command under the View menu. For example, you can assign a
specific level for all outlets, as well as assign the label and annotation text style to be
applied.
11-598
Features of the MicroStation Version

Note:
Any Microstation tool that deletes the target element (such as

Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the connection of that
element to SewerCAD V8i. After the SewerCAD V8i connection is
removed, the element is no longer a valid link and will not show
properties on the property grid.
MicroStation Project Files

When using Bentley SewerCAD V8i in MicroStation mode, there are three files that
fundamentally define a Bentley SewerCAD V8i model project:
Drawing File (.DGN)The MicroStation drawing file contains the elements that
define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
serves as the model background.
Model File (.swc)The model file contains model data specific to SewerCAD
V8i, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a particular model may not
bave the same filename as the models .swc file.
Database File (.MDB)The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model. Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a
particular model may not bave the same filename as the models .mdb file.
To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
It is important to understand that archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the associated .swc and .MDB files.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties

Bentley SewerCAD V8i element properties includes:
Element Properties on page 11-600
Levels on page 11-600
Text Styles on page 11-601
11-599
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties
Element Properties
When working in the MicroStation mode, this feature will display a dialog box
containing fields for the currently selected elements associated properties. To modify
an attribute, click each associated grid cell.
You can also review or modify MicroStation drawing information about an
element(s), such as its type, attributes, and geometry, by using the Element Information dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element Information
button or click the Element menu and select the Information command.
RELATED TOPICS
See Levels on page 600.
See Text Styles on page 601.
Levels
To control display of elements in the selected levels, use the Level Display dialog box.
To access the Level Display dialog, click the Settings menu and select the Level >
Display command.
If you want to freeze elements in levels, select Global Freeze from the View Display
menu in the Level Display dialog.
You can create new Levels in the Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click
the Settings menu and select the Level > Manager command.
To control the display of levels, use level filters. Within MicroStation, you can also
create, edit, and save layer filters to DWG files in the Level Manager. To access the
Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select the Level > Manager command.
Layer filters are loaded when a DWG file is opened, and changes are written back
when the file is saved. To create and edit Level Filters,
RELATED TOPICS
11-600
See Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties on page 599.
Element Levels Dialog

This dialog allows you to assign newly created elements and their associated annotations to specific MicroStation levels.
To assign a level, use the pulldown menu next to an element type (under the Element
Level column heading) to choose the desired level for that element. You can choose a
seperate level for each element and for each elements associated annotation.
You cannot create new levels from this dialog; to create new levels use the MicroStation Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select
the Level > Manager command.
Text Styles
You can view, edit, and create Text Style settings in MicroStation mode by clicking
the Element menu and selecting the Text Styles command to open the Text Styles
dialog.
RELATED TOPICS
See Bentley SewerCAD V8i Element Properties on page 599.
Working with Elements

Working with elements includes:
Edit Elements on page 11-602
Deleting Elements on page 11-602
Modifying Elements on page 11-602
Edit Elements
Elements can be edited in one of two ways in MicroStation mode:
Element Properties Dialog: To access the Element Properties dialog, click the
SewerCAD V8i View menu and select the Properties command.
FlexTables: To access the FlexTables dialog, click the SewerCAD V8i View menu
and select the FlexTables command.
11-601
Working with Elements
Deleting Elements
In MicroStation mode, you can delete elements by clicking on them using the Delete
Element tool, or by highlighting the element to be deleted and clicking your
keyboards Delete key.
Note:
Any Microstation tool that deletes the target element (such as

Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the connection of that
element to SewerCAD V8i. After the SewerCAD V8i connection is
removed, the element is no longer a valid swc link and will not
show properties on the property grid. Storm.
Modifying Elements
In MicroStation mode, these commands are selected from the shift-right-click shortcut
menu (hold down the Shift key while right-clicking). They are used for scaling and
rotating model entities.
Change Pipe Widths

In MicroStation mode, you can change the line width through the Element Information dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element menu and
select the Information command. To change the width of a pipe, select it and open the
Element Information dialog. Then change the value in the Weight pulldown menu
RELATED TOPICS
See Edit Elements on page 602.
Edit Elements
In MicroStation mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable
editor or a selection of one or more network figures. You are prompted to select
figures on which to build a table.
RELATED TOPICS
See Change Pipe Widths on page 602.
Working with Elements Using MicroStation Commands

Working with elements using MicroStation commands includes:
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Custom MicroStation Entities on page 11-603
11-602

MicroStation Commands on page 11-603
Moving Elements on page 11-603
Moving Element Labels on page 11-604
Snap Menu on page 11-604
Bentley SewerCAD V8i Custom MicroStation Entities

The primary MicroStation-based Bentley SewerCAD V8i element entities are all
implemented using native MicroStation elements. These elements have feature linkages to define them as SewerCAD V8i objects.
This means that you can perform standard MicroStation commands (see MicroStation Commands on page 11-603) as you normally would, and the model database will
be updated automatically to reflect these changes.
It also means that the model will enforce the integrity of the network topological state.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
also be deleted since their connecting nodes topologically define model pipes.
Using MDL technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained during
Undo and Redo transactions.
See MicroStation Mode Graphical Layout on page 598.
MicroStation Commands
When running in MicroStation mode, Bentley Systems products make use of all the
advantages that MicroStation has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features.
Additionally, MicroStation commands can be used as you would with any design
project. For example, our products elements and annotation can be manipulated using
common MicroStation commands.
Moving Elements
When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate,
Mirror, and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the MicroStation command by either typing it at the
command prompt or selecting it. Follow the MicroStation prompts, and the node and
its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch
depending on the new location of the node.
RELATED TOPICS
See MicroStation Commands on page 603.
11-603
Undo/Redo
Moving Element Labels

When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate,
Mirror, and Array can be used to move element text labels.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the MicroStation command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the MicroStation prompt, and the label
will be moved without the element.
RELATED TOPICS
See MicroStation Commands on page 603.
Snap Menu
When using MicroStation mode, you can enable the Snaps button bar by clicking the
Settings menu and selecting the Snaps > Button Bar command. See the MicroStation
documentation for more information about using snaps.
Undo/Redo
If you use the native MicroStation undo, you are limited to a single redo level.
If you undo using the MicroStation undo/redo and you restore Bentley SewerCAD
V8i elements that have been previously deleted, some model state attributes such as
diameters or elevations may be lost, even though the locational and topological state is
fully consistent. This will only happen in situations where the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
command history has been deleted. In such cases, you will be warned to check your
data carefully.
In MicroStation mode, you have two types of undo/redo available to you. From the
Edit menu, you have access to Bentley SewerCAD V8i undo and redo. Alternatively,
you can perform the native MicroStation undo and redo by typing at the MicroStation
command line. The implementations of the two different operation types are quite
distinct.
The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on Bentley
SewerCAD V8i elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server.
The main advantage of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited
undo and redo levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is
quite useful to be able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions.
11-604

Whenever you use a native MicroStation undo, the server model will be notified when
any Bentley SewerCAD V8i entities are affected by the operation. Bentley
SewerCAD V8i will then synchronize the model to the drawing state. Wherever
possible, the model will seek to map the undo/redo onto the model servers managed
command history. If the drawings state is not consistent with any pending undo or
redo transactions held by the server, Bentley SewerCAD V8i will delete the command
history. In this case, the model will synchronize the drawing and server models.
Special Considerations
Special considerations include:
Import Bentley SewerCAD V8i on page 11-605
Annotation Display on page 11-605
Use SewerCAD V8i Z Order Command on page 11-605
Import Bentley SewerCAD V8i

When running SewerCAD V8i in MicroStation mode, this command imports a
selected SewerCAD V8i data (.swc) file for use in the current drawing. The new
project file will now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.swc. Whenever you save changes to the network model through SewerCAD
V8i, the associated .swc data file is updated and can be loaded into SewerCAD V8i
4.0 or higher.
Warning!
A SewerCAD V8i Project can only be imported to a new,

empty MicroStation design model.
Annotation Display
Some fonts do not correctly display the full range of characters used by SewerCAD
V8is annotation feature because of a limited character set. If you are having problems
with certain characters displaying improperly or not at all, try using another font.
Use SewerCAD V8i Z Order Command

When this control is toggled on, SewerCAD V8i will parse the elements when the
screen is redrawn. It takes significant time to do this parsing, so for larger models
performance can be improved by toggling this control off
11-605
11-606
Chapter
12
Working in AutoCAD
Mode
Caution:
If you previously installed Bentley ProjectWise and turned

on AutoCAD integration, you must add the following key to
your system registry using the Windows Registry Editor.
Before you edit the registry, make a backup copy.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Bentley\ProjectWise
iDesktop Integration\XX.XX\Configuration\AutoCAD"
String value name: DoNotChangeCommands
Value: 'On'
To access the Registry Editor, click Start > Run, then type
regedit. Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause
serious, system-wide problems that may require you to reinstall Windows to correct them. Always make a backup
copy of the system registry before modifying it.
SewerCAD V8i features support for AutoCAD integration.

The AutoCAD functionality has been implemented in a way that is the same as the
SewerCAD V8i base product. Once you become familiar with the stand-alone mode,
you will not have any difficulty using the product in AutoCAD mode.
Some of the advantages of working in AutoCAD mode include:
Layout network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and
drafting environment that you use to develop your engineering plans. You will
have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with
any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.
Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley SewerCAD

V8i elements with respect to other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.
12-607
The AutoCAD Workspace
Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on

Bentley SewerCAD V8i model entities with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.
Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Note:
Bentley SewerCAD V8i supports AutoCAD 2009 only.
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands on page 12-613
Undo/Redo on page 12-615
Special Considerations on page 12-616

In AutoCAD mode, you will have access to the full range of functionality available in
the AutoCAD design and drafting environment. The standard environment is extended
and enhanced by an AutoCAD ObjectARX Bentley SewerCAD V8i client layer that
lets you create, view, and edit the native Bentley SewerCAD V8i network model
while in AutoCAD.
Click one of the following links to learn more about Bentley SewerCAD V8i
AutoCAD environment:
AutoCAD Integration with SewerCAD V8i on page 12-608
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout on page 12-609
Menus on page 12-609
Toolbars on page 12-609
Drawing Setup on page 12-610
Symbol Visibility on page 12-610
AutoCAD Integration with SewerCAD V8i

When you install SewerCAD V8i after you install AutoCAD, integration between the
two is automatically configured.
If you install AutoCAD after you install SewerCAD V8i, you must manually integrate
the two by selecting Start > All Programs > Bentley >SewerCAD V8i > Integrate
SewerCAD V8i with AutoCAD-ArcGIS. The integration utility runs automatically.
You can then run SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode.
12-608
Working in AutoCAD Mode

The Integrate SewerCAD V8i with AutoCAD-ArcGIS command can also be used to
fix problems with the AutoCAD configuration file. For example, if you have
SewerCAD V8i installed on the same system as Bentley SewerCAD V8i and you
uninstall or reinstall SewerCAD V8i, the AutoCAD configuration file becomes unusable. To fix this problem, you can delete the configuration file then run the Integrate
SewerCAD V8i with AutoCAD-ArcGIS command.
AutoCAD Mode Graphical Layout

In AutoCAD mode, our products provide a set of extended options and functionality
beyond those available in stand-alone mode. This additional functionality provides
enhanced control over general application settings and options and extends the
command set, giving you control over the display of model elements within
AutoCAD.
Note:
In AutoCAD, you must hold down the mouse button to keep the
submenu open while selecting an element from the layout
toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click
menu to select elements or using the command line.
Menus
In AutoCAD mode, all of the SewerCAD commands are contained within a single
SewerCAD menu.
The Bentley SewerCAD V8i menu commands work the same way in AutoCAD and
the Stand-Alone Editor. For complete descriptions of Bentley SewerCAD V8i menu
commands, see Menus on page 2-11.
Toolbars
In AutoCAD mode, in addition to AutoCADs toolbars, the following Bentley
SewerCAD V8i toolbars are available:
Layout
View
Compute
Scenarios
Analysis
Links
12-609

The Bentley SewerCAD V8i toolbars work the same way in AutoCAD and the StandAlone Editor. For complete descriptions of Bentley SewerCAD V8i toolbars, see
Toolbars on page 2-25.
Drawing Setup
When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with our products in many
different AutoCAD scales and settings. However, Bentley Systems product elements
can only be created and edited in model space.
Symbol Visibility
Note:
In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the

ERASE command. You should not use ERASE to control
visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a
selected group of element labels, you should move them to
another layer that can be frozen or turned off.
In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the check box in
the Drawing Options dialog box.
Layout Options Dialog

The Layout Options are associated with the Entity command layout support. You can
choose Entity, pick an existing polyline, and if there are no existing nodes at the end
of the pline, you will be prompted for the type of node to put at each endpoint.
The Allowable Entity Types toggles allow you to disallow certain line types from
being available for use with the Entity command.
12-610
AutoCAD Project Files

When using Bentley SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode, there are three files that
fundamentally define a Bentley SewerCAD V8i model project:
Drawing File (.dwg)The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
Model File (.swc)The native Bentley SewerCAD V8i model database file that
contains all the element properties, along with other important project data.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i .swc files can be loaded and run using the Stand-Alone
Editor. These files may be copied and sent to other Bentley SewerCAD V8i users
who are interested in running your project. This is the most important file for the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i model.
SewerCAD Exchange Database (.swc.mdb)This file contains the model data.
The three files have the same base name. It is important to understand that archiving
the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the
associated .swc and swc.mdb file.
Since the .swc file can be run and modified separately from the .dwg file using the
Stand-Alone Editor, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you
ever modify the model in the Stand-Alone Editor and then later load the AutoCAD
.dwg file, the Bentley SewerCAD V8i program compares file dates, and automatically
use the built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.
Click one of the following links to learn more about AutoCAD project files and
Bentley SewerCAD V8i:
Drawing Synchronization on page 12-612

When using SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode, there are three files that fundamentally define a SewerCAD V8i model project:
Drawing File (.DWG)The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities
that define the model, in addition to the planimetric base drawing information that
Model File (.SWC)The model file contains model data specific to SewerCAD
V8i, including project option settings, color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
Database File (.MDB)The model database file that contains all of the input and
output data for the model.
12-611

To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
The two files will have the same base name. It is important to understand that
archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also
preserve the associated .SWC and .MDB files.
Since the .SWC file can be run and modified separately from the .DWG file using
Stand-Alone Editor, it is quite possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you
ever modify the model in Stand-Alone Editor mode and then later load the AutoCAD
.DWG file, the SewerCAD V8i program will compare file dates, and automatically
use the built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.
Click one of the following links to learn more about AutoCAD project files and
SewerCAD V8i:
Drawing Synchronization on page 12-612
Drawing Synchronization
Whenever you open a Bentley SewerCAD V8i-based drawing file in AutoCAD, the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i model server will start. The first thing that the application
will do is load the associated Bentley SewerCAD V8i model (.swc) file. If the time
stamps of the drawing and model file are different, Bentley SewerCAD V8i will automatically perform a synchronization. This protects against corruption that might
otherwise occur from separately editing the Bentley SewerCAD V8i model file in
stand-alone mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the
Bentley SewerCAD V8i application is not loaded.
The synchronization check will occur in two stages:
First, Bentley SewerCAD V8i will compare the drawing model elements with
those in the server model. Any differences will be listed. Bentley SewerCAD V8i
enforces network topological consistency between the server and the drawing
state. If model elements have been deleted or added in the .swc file during a
SewerCAD V8i session, or if proxy elements have been deleted, Bentley
SewerCAD V8i will force the drawing to be consistent with the native database by
restoring or removing any missing or excess drawing custom entities.
After network topology has been synchronized, Bentley SewerCAD V8i will
compare other model and drawing states such as location, labels, and flow directions.
You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the following command:
swcCSYNCHRONIZE
swcWSYNCSERVER
12-612

Or by selecting Tools > Database Utilities > Synchronize Drawing.
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands

This section describes how to work with elements using AutoCAD commands,
including:
SewerCAD V8i custom AutoCAD entities
SewerCAD V8i custom AutoCAD entities
AutoCAD commands
Explode entities
Move entities
Move element labels
Use the Snap menu
This section includes the following topics about working with elements using
AutoCAD commands:
AutoCAD Commands on page 12-614
Explode Elements on page 12-614
Moving Elements on page 12-615
Moving Element Labels on page 12-615
Snap Menu on page 12-615
SewerCAD V8i Custom AutoCAD Entities

The primary AutoCAD-based SewerCAD V8i element entities are all implemented
using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they are vested with a specialized model
awareness that ensures that any editing actions you perform will result in an appropriate update of the model database.
This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see AutoCAD
Commands on page 12-614) as you normally would, and the model database will be
updated automatically to reflect these changes.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a manhole, its connecting pipes will
Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained
during Undo and Redo transactions.
12-613
Working with Elements Using AutoCAD Commands
SewerCAD V8i Custom AutoCAD Entities

The primary AutoCAD-based SewerCAD V8i element entitiespipes, channels,
gutter links, manholes, catch basins, outfalls, pond outlet structures, and cross section
nodesare all implemented using ObjectARX custom objects. Thus, they are vested
with a specialized model awareness that ensures that any editing actions you perform
will result in an appropriate update of the model database.
This means that you can perform standard AutoCAD commands (see AutoCAD
Commands on page 12-614) as you normally would, and the model database will be
updated automatically to reflect these changes.
Therefore, if you delete a nodal element such as a junction, its connecting pipes will
Using ObjectARX technology ensures the database will be adjusted and maintained
during Undo and Redo transactions.
AutoCAD Commands
When running in AutoCAD mode, Bentley Systems products make use of all the
advantages that AutoCAD has, such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Additionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design project. For
example, our products elements and annotation can be manipulated using common
AutoCAD commands.
Explode Elements
In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all
custom entities into equivalent AutoCAD native entities. When a custom entity is
exploded, all associated database information is lost. Be certain to save the exploded
drawing under a separate filename.
Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the
model network. You can also deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals
who do not own a Bentley Systems Product license, since a fully exploded drawing
will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. For more information, see
Working with Proxies on page 12-617.
12-614
Moving Elements
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move elements.
To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command
prompt or selecting it. Follow the AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated
label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or stretch depending on the
new location of the node.
Moving Element Labels

When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror,
and Array can be used to move element text labels.
To move an element text label separately from the element, click the element label you
wish to move. The grips will appear for the label. Execute the AutoCAD command
either by typing it at the command prompt, by selecting it from the tool palette, or by
selecting it from the right-click menu. Follow the AutoCAD prompt, and the label will
be moved without the element.
Snap Menu
When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that
provides options for picking an exact location of an object. See the Autodesk
AutoCAD documentation for more information.
Undo/Redo
Note:
If you use the native AutoCAD undo, you are limited to a single
redo level. The Bentley SewerCAD V8i undo/redo is faster than
the native AutoCAD undo/redo. If you are rolling back Bentley
SewerCAD V8i model edits, it is recommended that you use the
menu-based Bentley SewerCAD V8i undo/redo.
If you undo using the AutoCAD undo/redo and you restore
Bentley SewerCAD V8i elements that have been previously
deleted, morphed, or split, some model state attributes such as
diameters or elevations may be lost, even though the locational
12-615
and topological state is fully consistent. This will only happen in
situations where the Bentley SewerCAD V8i command history
has been deleted. In such cases, you will be warned to check
your data carefully.
In AutoCAD mode, you have two types of undo/redo available to you. From the Edit
menu, you have access to Bentley SewerCAD V8i undo and redo. Alternatively, you
can perform the native AutoCAD undo and redo by typing at the AutoCAD command
line. The implementations of the two different operation types are quite distinct.
The menu-based undo and redo commands operate exclusively on Bentley
SewerCAD V8i elements by invoking the commands directly on the model server.
The main advantage of using the specialized command is that you will have unlimited
undo and redo levels. This is an important difference, since in layout or editing it is
quite useful to be able to safely undo and redo an arbitrary number of transactions.
Whenever you use a native AutoCAD undo, the server model will be notified when
any Bentley SewerCAD V8i entities are affected by the operation. Bentley
SewerCAD V8i will then synchronize the model to the drawing state. Wherever
possible, the model will seek to map the undo/redo onto the model servers managed
command history. If the drawings state is not consistent with any pending undo or
redo transactions held by the server, Bentley SewerCAD V8i will delete the command
history. In this case, the model will synchronize the drawing and server models.
There are special considerations to remember when you perform the following tasks
in AutoCAD mode:
12-616
Importing SewerCAD V8i Data on page 12-617
Importing SewerCAD V8i Data on page 12-617
Working with Proxies on page 12-617
Importing SewerCAD V8i Data

When running SewerCAD V8i AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected
SewerCAD V8i data (.swc) file for use in the current drawing. The new project file
will now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.swc. Whenever you save changes to the network model through SewerCAD V8i, the associated
.swc data file is updated and can be loaded into SewerCAD V8i.
Warning!

empty AutoCAD drawing.
Importing SewerCAD V8i Data

When running SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected
SewerCAD V8i data (.swc) file for use in the current drawing. The new project file
will now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.swc. Whenever you save changes to the network model through SewerCAD V8i, the associated
.swc data file is updated and can be loaded into SewerCAD V8i 4.0 or higher.
Warning!

empty AutoCAD drawing.
Working with Proxies

If you open a Bentley SewerCAD V8i drawing file on an AutoCAD workstation that
does not have the Bentley SewerCAD V8i application installed, you will get an
AutoCAD Proxy Information message box. This is because the executable logic for
managing the AutoCAD entities is not available, and the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
modeling elements are not associated with the Bentley SewerCAD V8i native database.
Bentley SewerCAD V8i proxy objects can be moved and erased. However, doing so
will put the drawing state out of sync with the model database if the drawing is saved
with its original name. If this happens, and you later reload the drawing on an
AutoCAD station that is running a Bentley SewerCAD V8i application, the application will automatically load and will attempt to reconcile any differences it finds by
automatically loading its Database Synchronization routine. (For more information,
see Drawing Synchronization on page 12-612).
12-617
12-618
Chapter
Theory
13
This appendix provides an overview of the methods that SewerCAD uses to compute
flows and hydraulic grades throughout the system, including both gravity and pressure
computations.
Some of the basic concepts underlying the calculations are as follows:
SewerCAD can run both Steady State and Extended Period Analyses. Steady
State Analyses model a single instant in time and are generally used to model a
network under peak loading conditions. Extended Period Simulations model a
network over a specified duration of time and can be used to model hydrograph
loading, wet well capacities, and automated pump behavior.
Loads are the sources of flow in the sanitary sewer system, and are categorized as
sanitary (dry weather) loads, wet weather loads, and known loads. The total load
at any given point may be a combination of these basic load types.
Loads can be adjusted through the use of fixed or variable peaking factors during
a Steady State analysis in order to analyze the system under a variety of conditions, such as daily average, minimum, and maximum scenarios. Common predefined variable peaking methods are included, but you may also specify your
own as tables or equations.
Loads can also be varied over time using loading patterns and hydrographs during
an Extended Period Simulation.
Gravity pipe headlosses are computed based on gradually varied flow profiles or
approximate profiles. Either of these profile methods allows for free-surface
(open channel) flow, full flow (as for a pipe that is submerged), and mixed conditions. Pressure pipe headlosses are based strictly on full-flow hydraulics.
Gravity structure losses may be based on several common methodologies. Where

appropriate, these calculations may account for pipe bend angles, structure
benching, and other influential factors.
13-619
Loading
During an Extended Period Simulation hydrographs are routed through the gravity
pipes to account for translation and other effects.
All or portions of gravity systems may be selected for automatic design. This
preliminary design can be used to set pipe and structure elevations, as well as to
size the pipes.
Loading
SewerCAD classifies loads as sanitary (dry weather) loads, wet weather loads, and
known loads.
Sanitary loads correspond to loads that result from human activity, and are not
weather-dependent. Common sources of sanitary loads are various residential,
commercial, recreational, and industrial usage. Wet weather loads are related to rainfall activity, such as groundwater infiltration (water leaking into a pipe through cracks,
joints, and other defects) and structure inflow (surface water entering a structure
through the cover).
Known loads are typically used to model flows that have already been gathered from
some other source, such as external calculations or field measurements.
Common Load Types

There are two different loading types that can be applied as both wet weather and sanitary loads. The behavior of each loading type is the same regardless of how it is
applied. The two common loads are:
Hydrographs
Pattern Loads
Hydrographs
In SewerCAD you can enter time vs. flow data directly as a load. The hydrographs
will then be directly added to any other loads coming to that point and then routed
downstream
During a Steady State analysis a hydrograph loaded can be converted into a single
load, based on one of the following selected Steady State Loading options.
13-620
Peak - The peak of the hydrograph will be used as the Steady State load.
Average - The average of the hydrograph flows will be used as the Steady State
load.
Theory
Minimum - The minimum flow of the hydrograph will be used as the Steady
State load.
Zero - The hydrograph is disregarded during the Steady State run.

Note:
When the length of the hydrograph is shorter than the duration

of an EPS run, The final flow value of the hydrograph will remain
constant for the duration of the simulation.
Pattern Loads
A pattern load is comprised of a base load and an associated loading pattern. The
pattern is a series of multipliers, which describes how the base load varies over time.
During a Steady State Analysis the entered base load is used as the load regardless of
the applied loading pattern.
Extreme Flow Factors are not applied to entered base loads.
Hydrographs vs. Pattern Loads

Hydrographs and Pattern loads are two distinct ways to describe how flow varies over
time. Ultimately, you can attain the same results using either method but there are
some behavioral and semantic differences that should be noted.
Pattern loads consists of a single average base load and a series of dimensionless
multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over time. A hydrograph, simply, is
a time-discharge series.
Hydrographs are usually applied as wet weather loads, and are generated using hydrologic methods, while patterns are more typically applied to sanitary loads. Patterns
are developed based on predetermined variations in loading over the course of a day.
The patterns are then assumed to represent templates for how the loads of a similar
type vary over time. These statements represent typical usage of both loading types;
they do not represent hard and fast rules.
During an Extended Period Simulation if the duration of the simulation exceeds the
duration of a pattern then the pattern will repeat itself. If the duration of the simulation exceeds the duration of a hydrograph the last point of the hydrograph will remain
constant for the extent of the remaining time.
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loading

The total sanitary load may be comprised of an unlimited number of individual sanitary loads. For example, the local load for a given manhole may be a combination of
loads from an apartment building, a gas station, and a film development store, each
with different loading characteristics. They can either be entered as:
13-621
Loading
Unit Sanitary Loads
Pattern Loads
Hydrographs
Unit sanitary loads and pattern loads are calculated or entered as a base load, which
represent the average loading on the system at that point. During a Steady State analysis the unit sanitary loads can be adjusted to represent peak or minimum loads using
the Extreme Flow Factor methods. During an Extended Period Simulation a loading
pattern can be applied to both the unit sanitary loads and pattern loads to described
how the base load varies over time.
Hydrographs can also be applied as sanitary loads. They are meant to represent actual
measured flow or hydrographs generated from other programs, and SewerCAD does
not apply peaking factors or patterns to them.
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Loads

Unit sanitary (dry weather) loads are entered based on a number of contributing units,
with a specified average load per unit, such as X-amount of flow per apartment resident. With each load type, you can then associate a peaking factor method or a
loading pattern, allowing you to account for the knowledge that peaking factors and
patterns are most likely different for residential and commercial areas.
Peaking factors are applied only during the Steady State analyses. During Extended
Period Simulations loading patterns can be applied to the base loads generated from
the unit sanitary loads to account for variations in sanitary inflow over time.
Extreme Flow Factor

Sewer design and analysis generally considers a variety of loading conditions, such as
minimum, average, and peak conditions. Base (average) sanitary loads are transformed into minimum or peak loads using an Extreme Flow Factor.
The most common type of Extreme Flow Factor (EFF) is the Variable Peaking Factor
(PF).
Qpeaked = Qbase * EFF
Where:
13-622
Qpeaked = Transformed flow (l/s, gpm)
Qbase = Base flow (l/s, gpm)
EFF = Extreme Flow Factor (unitless)
Theory
Note:
Extreme Flow Factor methods are only used during Steady State
analyses. During Extended Period Simulations loading patterns
can be applied to the Unit Dry Weather base loads.
Common Variable Peaking Factors

Some of the most common variable peaking factor (PF) calculation methods are:
Babbitt
5.0
PF = -------------------------P 0.20
---------- 1000
Where: P = Contributing population (number of capita)
Harmon
14.0
PF = 1.0 + ---------------------------------------P 0.50
4.0 + ------------
1000
Ten States Standard (Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board)
P
18 + -----------1000
PF = ---------------------------P
4 + -----------1000
Federov
2.69
PF = ---------------0.121
Q
Where: Q = Base dry weather load (l/s)
13-623
Loading
Note:
The Babbit peaking method does not converge to 1. For

populations larger than 3,125,000 the peaking factor will become
smaller than 1.
Wet Weather Loading

The Wet Weather Load represents the intrusion of rainfall water into the sewer system.
Wet weather loads consist of groundwater infiltration, rainfall inflow, and illegal
invert pump connections. Groundwater infiltration occurs in gravity pipes, while
inflow occurs at manholes, pressure junctions, and wet wells. Infiltration loads refer to
wet weather loads entering pipes, where water leaks into the system through joints,
cracks, and other defects. Inflow loads refer to wet weather loads entering structures,
typically surface water entering through a structure's cover.
Infiltration
Infiltration resulting from the presence of groundwater can be modeled for gravity
pipes. Infiltration enters the system at conduit elements. It is combined with the loads
at the upstream end of the pipe to determine the pipe's Flow.
There are several common methods of determining infiltration based on pipe characteristics, which is why
SewerCAD allows infiltration to be defined with any of the following methods:
13-624
Proportional to Pipe Length - The infiltration is specified as an Infiltration Rate

per Unit of Pipe Length.
Proportional to Pipe Diameter-Length - The infiltration is specified by an Infiltration Rate per Unit of Pipe Diameter times Pipe Length. The amount of infiltration is proportional to the pipe length and to the pipe diameter.
Proportional to Pipe Surface Area - The infiltration is specified by an Infiltration Rate per Unit of Pipe Surface Area, where the pipe's surface area is calculated
as its length multiplied by its full perimeter. The amount of infiltration is proportional to the pipe length and the pipe diameter.
Proportional to Count - The infiltration is specified by count value, which may

be the number of defects in the pipe, and the Infiltration Rate per Unit of Count.
Additional Infiltration - Fixed amount of infiltration that is added to the total wet
weather load. This value is constant regardless of the pipe's characteristics.
Hydrographs - The infiltration is specified as a table of flow vs. time.
Pattern Loads - The infiltration is specified as an average base load and a loading
pattern.
Theory
During an Extended Period Simulation the five non-time-based methods will generate
a single straight-line hydrograph producing a constant load for the duration of the
simulation.
Inflow
Inflow loads refer to wet weather loads entering structures, which are typically from
surface water entering through a structure's cover, or pumped illegally into a force
main system. Inflows can be entered as the following loading types:
Hydrographs
Pattern Loads
During Steady State analysis these loads can be modeled, and are combined with
upstream wet weather loads to determine the Total Wet Weather Flow.
During Extended Period Simulations the loads are not classified once they enter the
system they are added to together as a single lump hydrograph.
Inflows can be applied to manholes, wet wells, and pressure junctions.
Known Flow
Known flows are a special type of fixed flow. As with other fixed flows, known flows
remain constant as they progress downstream and combine directly as a simple sum.
The special behavior of known flows occurs during a Steady State Analysis when
another known flow is specified at a downstream location. While most fixed flows
combine directly under any circumstances, a non-zero known flow at any location
replaces all upstream known flows. Known flows do not override hydrograph or
pattern loads from upstream. Therefore it is not advisable to mix known flows with
these other types of node.
For this reason, known flows may be desirable for modeling flows that originate from
external calculations or field measured data (flows that do not require SewerCAD to
generate or sum them in any way).
During Extended Period Simulations, Known Flows are modeled as a single constant
flow hydrograph over the duration of the simulation. They are added directly to the
existing flows coming from upstream sources and are all lumped together as a single
hydrograph for routing. The Known Flows are additive and do not replace each other
during Extended Period Simulations, much like a fixed pattern load.
13-625
Gravity Pipe Hydraulics

This documentation is intended to familiarize you with some of the methods used in
this program's calculations. However, there is not a great deal of time spent on
common hydraulic terms and equations, such as determination of wetted perimeter,
hydraulic radius, hydraulic depth, and Reynolds number.
The Energy Principle

The first law of thermodynamics states that for any given system, the change in energy
is equal to the difference between the heat transferred to the system and the work done
by the system on its surroundings during a given time interval.
The energy referred to in this principle represents the total energy of the system minus
the sum of the potential, kinetic, and internal (molecular) forms of energy, such as
electrical and chemical energy. The internal energy changes are commonly disregarded in water distribution analysis because of their relatively small magnitude.
In hydraulic applications, energy is often represented as energy per unit weight,
resulting in units of length. Using these length equivalents gives engineers a better feel
for the resulting behavior of the system. When using these length equivalents, the state
of the system is expressed in terms of head. The energy at any point within a hydraulic
system is often represented in three parts:
Pressure Head:
p/
Elevation Head:
Velocity Head:
V2/2g
Where:
Pressure (N/m2, lb./ft.2)
Specific weight (N/m3, lb./ft.3)
Elevation (m, ft.)
Velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft./sec.2)
These quantities can be used to express the headloss or head gain between two locations using the energy equation (for more information, see The Energy Equation on
page 13-627).
13-626
Theory
The Energy Equation

In addition to pressure head, elevation head, and velocity head, there may also be head
added to the system, by a pump for instance, and head removed from the system due
to friction. These changes in head are referred to as head gains and headlosses, respectively. Balancing the energy across two points in the system, you then obtain the
energy equation:
p1
V2
p
V 2
+ z1 + 1 + h p = 2 + z 2 + 2 + hL
2g
2g
Where:
Pressure (N/m2, lb./ft.2)
Specific weight (N/m3, lb./ft.3)
Elevation at the centroid (m, ft.)
hp
Head gain from a pump (m, ft.)
hL
Combined headloss (m, ft.)
The components of the energy equation can be combined to express two useful quantities, which are the hydraulic grade and the energy grade.
RELATED TOPICS
See Network Hydraulics Theory on page 969..
See Hydraulic and Energy Grades on page 628.
See Conservation of Mass and Energy on page 973.
See The Gradient Algorithm on page 668.
See Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm on page 669.
See The Linear System Equation Solver on page 671.
See Pump Theory on page 662.
See Valve Theory on page 984.
13-627
Hydraulic and Energy Grades

Hydraulic and energy grades includes:
Hydraulic Grade on page 13-629
Energy Grade on page 13-629
Figure 13-1: EGL and HGL

RELATED TOPICS
13-628
See Network Hydraulics Theory on page 969..
See The Energy Equation on page 627.
See Conservation of Mass and Energy on page 973.
See The Gradient Algorithm on page 668.
See Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm on page 669.
See The Linear System Equation Solver on page 671.
See Pump Theory on page 662.
See Valve Theory on page 984.
Theory
Hydraulic Grade
The hydraulic grade is the sum of the pressure head (p/g) and elevation head (z). The
hydraulic head represents the height to which a water column would rise in a piezometer. The plot of the hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the hydraulic
grade line, or HGL.
Energy Grade
The energy grade is the sum of the hydraulic grade and the velocity head (V2/2g).
This is the height to which a column of water would rise in a pitot tube. The plot of the
hydraulic grade in a profile is often referred to as the energy grade line, or EGL. At a
lake or reservoir, where the velocity is essentially zero, the EGL is equal to the HGL,
as can be seen in the following figure.
Friction Loss Methods

Friction loss methods include:
Chezys Equation on page 13-629
Colebrook-White Equation on page 13-630
Hazen-Williams Equation on page 13-631
Darcy-Weisbach Equation on page 13-631
Mannings Equation on page 13-633
Chezys Equation
Chezys equation is rarely used directly, but it is the basis for several other methods,
including Mannings equation. Chezys equation is:
Q =CA RS
Where:
Discharge in the section (m3/s, cfs)
Chezys roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft.1/2/sec.)
Flow area (m2, ft.2)
Hydraulic radius (m, ft.)
Friction slope (m/m, ft./ft.)
13-629

RELATED TOPICS
See Hazen-Williams Equation on page 631.
See Darcy-Weisbach Equation on page 631.
See Mannings Equation on page 633.
See Colebrook-White Equation on page 630.
Colebrook-White Equation
The Colebrook-White equation is used to iteratively calculate for the Darcy-Weisbach
friction factor:
Free Surface:
1
k
2.51
= - 2 log
+
12
0
R
.
f
Re f
Full Flow (Closed Conduit):
1
k
2.51
= - 2 log
+
f
3.7 D Re f
Where:
Friction factor (unitless)
Darcy-Weisbach roughness height (m, ft.)
Re
Reynolds Number (unitless)
Pipe diameter (m, ft.)
RELATED TOPICS
13-630
See Chezys Equation on page 629.
Theory
Hazen-Williams Equation
The Hazen-Williams Formula is frequently used in the analysis of pressure pipe
systems (such as water distribution networks and sewer force mains). The formula is
as follows:
Q = k C A R0.63 S0.54
Where:
Discharge in the section (m3/s, cfs)
Hazen-Williams roughness coefficient (unitless)
Constant (0.85 for SI units, 1.32 for US units).
RELATED TOPICS
See Roughness ValuesHazen-Williams Equation on page 1009.
Darcy-Weisbach Equation
Because of non-empirical origins, the Darcy-Weisbach equation is viewed by many
engineers as the most accurate method for modeling friction losses. It most commonly
takes the following form:
hL = f
L V2
D 2g
Where:
hL
Headloss (m, ft.)
Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)
13-631
Pipe length (m, ft.)
Flow velocity (m/s, ft./sec.)
For section geometries that are not circular, this equation is adapted by relating a
circular sections full-flow hydraulic radius to its diameter:
D = 4R
Where:
Diameter (m, ft.)
This can then be rearranged to the form:

Q = A 8g
Where:
RS
f
Discharge (m3/s, cfs)
Darcy-Weisbach friction factor (unitless)
The Swamee and Jain equation can then be used to calculate the friction factor. For
more information, see Swamee and Jain Equation on page 13-633.
RELATED TOPICS
13-632
Theory
Swamee and Jain Equation
Note:
The Kinematic Viscosity is used in determining the friction

coefficient in the Darcy-Weisbach Friction Method. The default
units are initially set by Bentley Systems.
1.325
f =
2
.
5
74
ln e
+
0.9
3.7 D
R
Where:
Friction factor (unitless)
Roughness height (m, ft.)
Re
Reynolds Number (unitless)
The friction factor is dependent on the Reynolds number of the flow, which is dependent on the flow velocity, which is dependent on the discharge. As you can see, this
process requires the iterative selection of a friction factor until the calculated
discharge agrees with the chosen friction factor.
RELATED TOPICS
See Roughness ValuesDarcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White) on

page 1008.
Mannings Equation
Note:
Mannings roughness coefficients are the same as the

roughness coefficients used in Kutters equation.
Mannings equation, which is based on Chezys equation, is one of the most popular
methods in use today for free surface flow. For Mannings equation, the roughness
coefficient in Chezys equation is calculated as:
C=k
R1/ 6
n
13-633
Where:
Chezys roughness coefficient (m1/2/s, ft.1/2/sec.)
Mannings roughness (s/m1/3)
Constant (1.00 m1/3/m1/3, 1.49 ft.1/3/ft.1/3)
Substituting this roughness into Chezys equation, you obtain the well-known
Mannings equation:
k
A R2 / 3 S1/ 2
n
Q=
Where:
Constant (1.00 m1/3/s, 1.49 ft.1/3/sec.)
Mannings roughness (unitless)
RELATED TOPICS
See Roughness ValuesMannings Equation on page 1007.
Flow Regime
The hydraulic grade in a flow section depends heavily on the tailwater conditions,
pipe slope, discharge, and other conditions. The basic flow regimes that a pipe may
experience include:
13-634
Pressure Flow
Uniform (Normal) Flow
Theory
Critical Flow
Subcritical Flow
Supercritical Flow
Based on the gradually varied flow analysis, different portions of any given pipe may
be under different flow regimes.
Pressure Flow
When a pipe is surcharged, headlosses are simply based on the full barrel area and
wetted perimeter. Because these characteristics are all functions of the section shape
and size, friction loss calculations are greatly simplified by pressurized conditions.
Uniform Flow and Normal Depth

Uniform flow refers to a hydraulic condition where the discharge and cross-sectional
area, and therefore the velocity, are constant throughout the length of the channel or
pipe. For a pipe flowing full, all that this requires is that the pipe be straight and have
no contractions or expansions. For a non-full section, however, there are a few additional points of interest:
In order for the cross-sectional area to remain the same, the depth of flow must be
constant throughout the length of the channel. This requires that the friction slope
equal the constructed slope. This depth is called normal depth.
Since the hydraulic grade line parallels the invert of the section and the velocity does
not change, the energy grade line is parallel to both the hydraulic grade line and the
section invert under uniform flow conditions.
In prismatic channels, flow conditions will typically approach normal depth if the
channel is sufficiently long.
Critical Flow, Critical Depth, and Critical Slope

Critical flow occurs when the specific energy of the section is at a minimum. This
condition is defined by the situation where:
A3 Q2
=
T
g
Where:
A= Area of flow ( m , ft )
13-635
T = Top width of flow (m, ft)
Q = Section Discharge ( m s , ft s )
g = Gravitational acceleration ( m s , ft s )
This is a relatively simple computation for simple geometric shapes, but can require
iterative calculation for more complex shapes (such as arches). Some sections may
even have several valid critical depths, making numerical convergence more difficult.
Critical depth refers to the depth of water in a channel for which the specific energy is
at its minimum. Critical slope refers to the slope at which the critical depth of a pipe
would be equal to the normal depth.
Subcritical Flow
Subcritical flow refers to any flow condition where the Froude number is less than 1.0.
For this condition, the depth is above critical depth, and the velocity is below the critical depth velocity.
Supercritical Flow
Supercritical flow refers to any condition where the Froude number, or the ratio of
internal forces to gravity forces, is greater than 1.0. For this condition, the depth is
below critical depth, and the velocity is above the critical depth velocity.
Gradually Varied Flow Analysis

For free surface flow, depth rarely remains the same throughout the length of a
channel or pipe. Starting from a boundary control depth, the depth changes gradually,
increasing or decreasing until normal depth is achieved (if the conduit is sufficiently
long). The determination of a boundary control depth depends on both the tailwater
condition and the hydraulic characteristics of the conduit. The areas of classification
for gradually varied flow analysis are:
Slope Classification
Zone Classification
Profile Classification
Slope Classification
The constructed slope of a conduit is a very important factor in determining the type
of gradually varied flow profile that exists. Slopes fall into one of five types, all of
which are handled by the program:
13-636
Adverse Slope
Theory
Horizontal Slope
Hydraulically Mild Slope
Critical Slope
Hydraulically Steep Slope
Any pipe can qualify as only one of these slope types for a given discharge. For
differing flows, though, a pipe may change between qualifying as a mild, critical, and
steep slope. These slopes do not relate to just the constructed slope, but to the
constructed slope relative to the critical slope for the given discharge.
Adverse Slope
Adverse slope occurs when the upstream invert elevation of a pipe is actually below
the downstream invert elevation. Normal depth is undefined for adverse slopes, since
no amount of positive flow would result in a rising friction slope. Most flow conditions for adverse sloping pipes are subcritical.
Pipes are typically not designed to be adverse, so most situations with adverse slopes
are due to construction errors or other unusual circumstances. Adverse pipes may
cause some concern beyond the hydraulic capacity of the system, because stagnant
water, excessive clogging, and other non-desirable conditions may result.
Horizontal Slope
As the name suggests, a horizontal slope results when a pipe's upstream and downstream invert elevations are the same. Normal depth for a horizontal pipe is theoretically infinite, although critical depth may still be computed. Like adverse slopes,
most flow conditions for horizontal pipes are subcritical.
Hydraulically Mild Slope
A hydraulically mild slope is a condition where the constructed slope is less than the
critical slope. For this condition, the section's normal depth is above critical depth,
and the flow regime is usually subcritical.
Critical Slope
A pipe or channel may have exactly the same slope as the critical slope for the
discharge it carries. This is a very uncommon occurrence, but it is possible and the
program does calculate it appropriately. Critical depth is an inherently unstable
surface, so flow is most likely to be subcritical for these slopes.
13-637

Hydraulically Steep Slope
A hydraulically steep slope is a condition where the constructed slope is greater than
the critical slope. For this condition, the section's normal depth is below critical depth,
and the flow regime is usually supercritical. However, high tailwater conditions may
cause flow to be subcritical.
Zone Classification
There are three zones that are typically used to classify gradually varied flow:
Zone 1 is where actual flow depth is above both normal depth and critical depth.
Zone 2 is where actual flow depth is between normal depth and critical depth.
Zone 3 is where actual flow depth is below both normal depth and critical depth.
13-638
Theory
Profile Classification
The gradually varied flow profile classification is simply a combination of the slope
classification and the zone classification. For example, a pipe with a hydraulically
mild slope and flow in zone 1 would be considered a Mild-1 profile (M1 for short).
The program will analyze most profile types, but will not analyze certain flow profile
types that occur rarely in conventional sewer system such as H3, M3, and S3.
13-639
Energy Balance
Even for gradually varied flow, the solution is still a matter of balancing the energy
between the two ends of a pipe segment. The energy equation as it relates to each end
of a segment is as follows (note that the pressures for both ends are zero, since it is
free surface flow):
V22
V12
Z1 +
= Z2 +
+ HL
2g
2g
Where:
Z 1 = Hydraulic grade at upstream end of the segment (m, ft)

V 1 = Velocity at the upstream end (m/s, ft/s)
Z 2 = Hydraulic grade at the downstream end of the segment (m, ft)
V 2 = Velocity at the downstream end (m/s, ft/s)
H 1 = Loss due to friction - other losses assumed to be zero (m, ft)
g = Gravitational acceleration constant ( m s , ft) s )
The friction loss is computed based on the average rate of friction loss along the
segment and the length of the segment. This relationship is as follows:
H L = S Avg x =
S1 + S 2
x
2
Where:
HL =Loss across the segment (m, ft)
Savg = Average friction slope (m/m, ft/ft)
S1 = Friction slope at the upstream end of the segment (m/m, ft/ft)
S2 = Friction slope at the downstream end of the segment (m/m, ft/ft)
?x = Length of the segment being analyzed (m, ft)
13-640
Theory
The conditions at one end of the segment are known through asinverttion or from a
previous calculation step. Since the friction slope is a function of velocity, which is a
function of depth, the depth at the other end of the segment can be found through iteration. There are two primary methods for this iterative solution, the Standard Step
method and the Direct Step method.
Note:
Because it generates better resolution within the changing part

of the profile, the gravity flow algorithm of StormCAD and
SewerCAD primarily use the direct step method to compute
gradually varied flow profiles.
Standard Step Method

The standard step method of gradually varied flow energy balance involves dividing
the channel into segments of known length and solving for the unknown depth at one
end of the segment, starting with a known or assumed depth at the other end. The
standard step method is the most popular method of determining the flow profile
because it can be applied to any channel, not just prismatic channels.
Note:

SewerCAD primarily use the direct step method to compute
gradually varied flow profiles.
Direct Step Method

The direct step method is based on the same basic energy principles as the standard
step method, but takes a slightly different approach towards the solution. Instead of
assuming a segment length and solving for the depth at the end of the segment, the
direct step method assumes a depth and then solves for the segment length.
Note:

SewerCAD use the direct step method to compute gradually
varied flow profiles.
Mixed Flow Profiles

Although the hydraulic slope of a pipe will be the same throughout its length, a pipe
may contain several different profile types. The transitions that may be encountered
include:
Sealing (Surcharging) Conditions
Rapidly Varied Flow (Hydraulic Jumps)
13-641
Sealing (Surcharging) Conditions

There may be conditions such that part of the section is flowing full, while part of the
flow remains open. These conditions are called sealing conditions, and the sections
are analyzed in separate parts. For sealing conditions, the portion of the section
flowing full is analyzed as pressure flow, and the remaining portion is analyzed with
gradually varied flow techniques.
Rapidly Varied Flow

Rapidly varied flow is turbulent flow resulting from the abrupt and pronounced curvature of flow streamlines into or out of a hydraulic control structure. Examples of
rapidly varied flow include hydraulic jumps, bends, and bridge contractions.
The hydraulic phenomenon that occurs when the flow passes rapidly from supercritical to subcritical flow is called a hydraulic jump. The most common occurrence of
this within a gravity flow network occurs when there is a steep pipe discharging into a
particularly high tailwater, as shown in the following figure.
There are significant losses associated with hydraulic jumps, due to the amount of
mixing and hydraulic turbulence that occurs. These forces are also highly erosive, so
engineers typically try to prevent jumps from occurring in gravity flow systems, or at
least try to predict the location of these jumps in order to provide adequate channel,
pipe, or structure protection. The program does not perform any specific force analyses that seek to precisely locate the hydraulic jump, nor does it identify the occurrence of jumps that might happen as flows leave a steep pipe and enter a mild pipe.
Rather it performs analyses sufficient to compute grades at structures.
Backwater Analysis
The classic solution of gravity flow hydraulics is via a backwater analysis. This type
of analysis starts at the network outlet under free discharge, submerged, or tailwater
control, and proceeds in an upstream direction.
13-642
Theory
Steep pipes tend to "interrupt" the backwater analysis, and reset the hydraulic control
to critical depth at the upstream end of the steep pipe. A frontwater analysis may be
needed for a steep profile (such as an S2), with the backwater analysis recommencing
from the upstream structure.
Free Outfall
This program lets you define the tailwater condition at the outlet as either Free Outfall,
Crown Elevation or User-Specified.
For a pipe with a hydraulically steep slope, the Free Outfall condition will yield a
starting depth equal to normal depth in the pipe. For a pipe with a hydraulically mild
slope, the Free Outfall condition will yield a starting depth equal to critical depth.
When an outlet has multiple incoming pipes, the Free Outfall condition yields a
starting elevation equal to the lowest of the individual computed elevations.
The Crown condition should be used when the pipe discharges to an outlet where the
water surface elevation is equal to the elevation of the top of the pipe.
Structure Flooding
Flooding at manholes in SewerCAD and inlets in StormCAD occurs whenever the
elevation of water is above the structure rim elevation. When this occurs, the backwater analysis will continue by resetting the hydraulic grade to the structure rim elevation or ground elevation, whichever is higher. However, if a structure is defined with
a bolted cover, the hydraulic grade is not reset to the rim elevation.
In actual flooding situations, flows may be diverted away from the junction structure
and out of the system, or attenuated due to surcharged storage. In this program, even
though the governing downstream boundary for the next conduit is artificially lowered
to prevent the propagation of an incorrect backwater, the peak discharges at the structure are conserved and are not reduced by the occurrence of flooding at a junction.
Frontwater Analysis
The program will perform a frontwater analysis in a steep pipe operating under supercritical flow, since these pipes are typically entrance controlled. The hydraulic control
is at the upstream end of the conduit, and the gradually varied flow analysis will
proceed in a downstream direction until either the normal depth is achieved, a
hydraulic jump occurs, or the end of the pipe is encountered.
The program's algorithm is fundamentally based on backwater analysis. As a result, a
continuous frontwater analysis is not performed through two or more consecutive
steep pipes.
13-643

Note:
This is a performance trade-off that has little impact in

evaluating performance of the collection system in most
situations. The asinverttion of critical depth at the upstream end
results in a conservative depth in all cases, and is exactly
correct at the point of the steep run furthest upstream.
Pipe Average Velocity

Several common methods for computing a pipe's average velocity are available:
Uniform Flow Velocity
Full Flow Velocity
Uniform Flow Velocity

The uniform flow velocity of a pipe is obtained by calculating the velocity in the pipe
at normal depth. If the normal depth corresponds to a surcharged condition, the full
flow velocity is used instead.
Full Flow Velocity

The full flow velocity corresponds to the velocity when the pipe is flowing full. The
flow area is equal to the entire cross-sectional area of the pipe.

The simple average velocity is computed by:
Va =
Vu + Vd
2
The Simple Average Velocity method does not account for any depth changes between
the two ends of the pipe as the weighted average velocity method does.
13-644
Theory

To compute the weighted average velocity, the simple average velocity of each profile
segment is considered and given a weight based on its length:
n V + V
di
Va = ui
i =1
2
Li

Lt
Va =Average velocity for the pipe (m/s, ft/s)
Vui =Upstream velocity for segment i (m/s, ft/s)
Vdi =Downstream velocity for segment i (m/s, ft/s)
Li =Length of the profile segment i (m, ft)
Lt =Total length of the pipe (m, ft)
Pipe Average Velocity and Travel Time

The travel time though each pipe is computed as:
t=L/V
Where:
t = Time of travel through the pipe (s)
V = Average velocity though the pipe (m/s, ft/s)
L = Length of the pipe (m, ft)
Capacity Analysis (Approximate Profiles)

Traditionally, gravity pipe analyses and designs have not included the calculationintense process of estimating a gradually varied flow profile. With this program, you
have the option of determining discharge using gradually varied flow, or using the
more traditional Capacity Analysis option. Capacity analysis still uses a backwater
approach, with the profile type for a pipe being primarily dependent on the pipe's full
flow capacity and downstream hydraulic grade.
The capacity analysis is advantageous over the gradually varied flow analysis in terms
of processing time. If you are dealing with a relatively large network and you wish to
arrive quickly at reasonable approximation then the capacity analysis is the way to go.
The gradually varied flow algorithms are more rigorous and generate solutions that
more closely reflect reality.
13-645

There are two basic approximate profile cases: the Full Capacity Profile and the
Excess Capacity Profile.
Full Capacity Profiles

Full capacity profiles occur when the pipe's actual discharge is greater than or equal to
the pipe's full flow capacity. In these cases, the downstream depth is taken as the
greater of the actual downstream hydraulic grade or the free discharge tailwater elevation. The free discharge tailwater depth is commonly approximated as halfway
between the crown of the pipe and the pipe's critical depth (in accordance with the
U.S. Federal Highway Administration's HDS-5).
Starting from the tailwater elevation, the pipe's full flow friction slope is used to determine the hydraulic grade at the upstream end of the profile.
Excess Capacity Profiles

Excess capacity profiles occur when the full flow capacity of the pipe is greater than
the actual flow in the pipe. For these profiles, there are three basic tailwater conditions:
Case 1 - Hydraulic grade downstream less than or equal to normal depth.
Case 2 - Hydraulic grade downstream greater than normal depth, and less than or
equal to pipe crown.
Case 3 - Hydraulic grade downstream greater than or equal to pipe crown.
Excess Capacity Profile, Case 1 (Hydraulic Grade <= Normal Depth):

If the downstream depth in the pipe is at or below the pipe's normal depth, normal
depth is assumed for the pipe's entire length.
13-646
Theory
Excess Capacity Profile, Case 2 (Normal Depth < Hydraulic Grade <=
Pipe Crown)
When the hydraulic grade is above the pipe's normal depth but below the top of the
pipe, a friction slope of zero is assumed until it either intersects the pipe's normal
depth or reaches the end of the pipe.
Excess Capacity Profile, Case 3 (Hydraulic Grade >= Pipe Crown)

If the hydraulic grade is above the pipe crown, the hydraulic grade continues upstream
following the pipe's full flow friction slope. This slope will continue until it either
intersects the pipe crown or reaches the end of the pipe.
13-647
Junction Headlosses and Minor Losses

Note:
If the full friction slope intersects the crown of the pipe, the
profile will continue with a Case 2 profile analysis.
Composite Excess Capacity Profiles

An excess capacity profile may actually be a composite of two more simple profiles.
Consider the case below, where the tailwater is above the crown of the pipe. In this
case, the profile begins as a Case 3 profile. Where the full flow friction slope intersects the crown of the pipe, the profile changes to a Case 2 profile, following a flat
slope until it reaches normal depth. Where normal depth is intersected, a Case 1
profile begins, extending all the way to the upstream end of the pipe.

Junction headlosses and minor losses are discussed in the following topics:
Manhole Head Loss Equations (AASHTO/HEC-2 Overview) on page 13-649Junction Headlosses on page 13-649
Junction Headlosses on page 13-649
Minor Losses on page 13-660
13-648
Theory
Manhole Head Loss Equations (AASHTO/HEC-2 Overview)

The HEC-22 headloss method used in SewerCAD is based on the FHWAs Urban
Drainage Design Manual, Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22 (HEC-22) energyloss methodology. This method computes an adjusted headloss coefficient by multiplying the initial headloss coefficient by correction factors for diameter, flow depth,
relative flow, plunging flow and benching (Headloss-HEC-22 Energy Method on
page 13-651). This adjusted headloss coefficient is then multiplied by the velocity
head in the outlet pipe to determine the total junction headloss. This is the method
outlined in the current edition of the HEC-22 document (HEC-22, Second Edition,
August 2001).
The AASHTO headloss method used in SewerCAD was originally implemented
based on the 1991 version of the AASHTO Model Drainage Manual. This method
determines the total junction headloss by adding the contraction, bend and expansion
losses at a junction, then applying correction factors for non-piped flow and shaping if
applicable (Headloss - AASHTO Method on page 13-656). More recently, the
AASHTO Model Drainage Manual has dropped this method in favor of the method
described in HEC-22, Second Edition (August 2001). However for compatibility with
earlier versions of SewerCAD, and also with the various state and regional drainage
authorities who continue to use the original AASHTO headloss method, the
AASHTO headloss method in SewerCAD is still based on the 1991 version of the
AASHTO Model Drainage Manual.
Junction Headlosses
Junction headlosses includes the following:
Structure Headloss on page 13-649
Special Assumptions on page 13-652
Structure Headloss
When water flows through a junction structure, there are headlosses associated with
mixing, change of direction, and so forth. This section deals with the computation of
these losses based on the following popular methods:
Absolute
Standard
HEC-22 Energy
Generic
Flow-Headloss Curve
13-649

Structure headlosses are used to determine the hydraulic grade to use as the tailwater
condition for upstream pipes during the backwater analysis. With the exception of the
HEC-22 Energy method, the headloss through the structure is assumed to be the same
for each incoming pipe.
Headloss - Absolute Method
The absolute method is the simplest of the headloss methods. The structure headloss
becomes an editable value, which is then used during calculations. No computations
relating to velocity, confluence angle, or other factors are needed.
Headloss - Standard Method
The standard method calculates structure headloss based on the exit pipe's velocity.
The exit velocity head is multiplied by a user-entered coefficient to determine the loss:
Vo2
hs = K
2g
Where:
hS = Structure headloss (ft, m)
VO = Exit pipe velocity (ft/s, m/s)
g = Gravitational acceleration constant (ft/s2, m/s2)
K = Headloss coefficient (unitless)
For suggested coefficient values for various structure configurations, see the Typical
Headloss Coefficient table at the end of this chapter.
Headloss - Generic Method
The generic method computes the structure headloss by multiplying the velocity head
of the exit pipe by the user-entered downstream coefficient and then subtracting the
velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by the user-entered upstream
coefficient.
Vo2
V12
hs = K0
K1
2g
2g
Where:
13-650
hS = Structure headloss (ft, m)
Theory
VO = Exit pipe velocity (ft/s, m/s)
KO = Downstream coefficient (unitless)
V1 = Governing upstream pipe velocity (ft/s, m/s)
K1 = Upstream coefficient (unitless)
g = Gravitational acceleration constant (ft/s2, m/s2)
If there are multiple upstream pipes entering the junction then the program must
choose one of the pipes to use in the calculation. The pipe that is chosen is considered
the governing upstream pipe. The governing upstream pipe is selected based on one of
the following methodologies:
The upstream pipe with the maximum flow times velocity
The upstream pipe with the maximum velocity head
The upstream pipe with the minimum bend angle
The default method for selecting the governing upstream pipe is to choose the pipe
with the maximum flow times velocity. However, the user can select one of the other
options through the generic structure loss options.
Headloss-HEC-22 Energy Method
Similar to the standard method, the HEC-22 Energy method (from the FHWA's Urban
Drainage Design Manual, Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22) correlates structure
headloss to the velocity head in the outlet pipe using a coefficient. Experimental
studies have determined that this coefficient can be approximated by:
K = K o CD C dC Q Cp CB
Where:
K = Adjusted headloss coefficient
KO= Initial headloss coefficient based on relative junction size
CD = Correction factor for the pipe diameter
Cd = Correction factor for flow depth
CQ= Correction for relative flow
CP = Correction for plunging flow
CB = Correction factor for benching
13-651

Headloss - Flow-Headloss Curve Method
In this method, the user defines a curve where a given flow rate causes a resultant
headloss.
Special Assumptions
The HEC-22 Energy method documentation is written with a limited range of applicability. Many of the equations are written on the basis of pipe diameter, structure diameter, and so on. Since StormCAD and SewerCAD offer non-circular pipes and noncircular structures, this creates the need for some interpretation of the term "diameter."
In some cases, the intent of the methodology is to compare the size of one pipe to
another pipe, or to the size of a structure. In these cases an equivalent diameter is
used, which is computed from the full area of the pipe or structure. Equivalent diameter is the diameter of a circle with the area equal to the area of the examined pipe or
structure.
In other cases, the intent of the methodology is to compare depths within the structure.
For these cases, the rise (height) of the pipes is used in place of "diameter."
Pressure Flow, Free Surface Flow, and Transitional Flow
Throughout the documentation for HEC-22 Energy losses, you will see references to
"pressure flow", "free surface flow", and "transitional flow".
Pressure flow (submerged flow) is assumed to be any condition for which the depth of
water above the outlet pipe invert is greater than 3.2 times the height of the outlet pipe.
Free surface flow (unsubmerged flow) is assumed to be any condition for which the
depth of water above the outlet pipe invert is less than the height of the pipe.
Transitional flow is any condition between pressure flow and free surface flow.
Initial Headloss Coefficient
The initial headloss coefficient, which is based on relative junction size, is calculated
as:
b
K o = 0.1
De
b
(1 sin ) + 1.4
0.15
sin
Where:
13-652
? Deflection angle between inflow and outflow pipes
Theory
b = Equivalent diameter of the structure (m, ft)
De = Equivalent diameter of the outlet pipe (m, ft)

Note:
The angle used in this equation is a deflection angle, so a

straight run has a deflection angle of 180. The bend angle in
this case is 0.
Correction for Pipe Diameter

The correction factor due to differences in pipe size is calculated only for pressure
flow situations. For non-pressure situations, a value of 1.0 is used.
D
C D = o
Di
Where:
DO = Outlet pipe rise (m, ft)
Di = Inflow pipe rise (m, ft)
Correction for Flow Depth

The correction factor for flow depth is used only in cases of free surface flow or transitional flow. For pressure flow, a value of 1.0 is used.
d
C d = .5 aho
De
0.6
Where
daho = Water depth in the structure (m, ft)
De = Outlet pipe rise (m, ft)
13-653

Correction for Relative Flow
The correction factor for relative flow is calculated only when the invert elevation for
the pipe in question is approximately equal to the invert elevation of the outlet pipe
and at least one other pipe. Otherwise, a value of 1.0 is used.
Q
C Q = (1 2 sin )1 i
Qo
0.75
+1
Where:
? = Deflection angle between inflow and outflow pipes
iQ = Flow in the inflow pipe (m/s, cfs)
oQ =Flow in the outflow pipe (m/s, cfs)

Note:
The term "approximately equal" is quite a vague definition for

when to use relative flow corrections. StormCAD and
SewerCAD enable you to change the tolerance for
"approximately equal" elevations so that you can use your
judgment to fine-tune the HEC-22 methodology.
Correction for Plunging Flow

The correction factor for plunging flow accounts for the effect that flow plunging into
a junction from another inflow pipe has on the inflow pipe for which the headloss is
calculated. It is calculated only when vertical distance from the invert of the plunge
pipe to the center of the outflow pipe is greater than the depth in the structure relative
to the outlet pipe invert. Otherwise a value of 1.0 is used.
h
C p = 1 + 0.2
Do
h d aho
D
o
Where:
13-654
h = Vertical distance from invert of the plunge pipe to the center of the outflow
pipe (m, ft)
De = Outflow pipe rise (m, ft)
daho = Water depth in the junction relative to the outflow pipe invert (m, ft)
Theory
Correction for Benching
The correction factor for structure benching is similar to the shaping correction factor
used in the AASHTO structure loss method. The correction accounts for smoother
transitions from the inflow pipe to the outflow pipe based on the presence (or lack) of
shaping in the bottom of the structure.
The following figure represents the four types of benching:
By default, the program uses the values documented in HEC-22 (and presented in the
following table) for pressure and free surface flow, but the user can change these
values. For transitional flow, the program interpolates from the table linearly, based
on the actual ratio of depth in the access hole to the height of the outflow pipe.
13-655

Table 13-1: Correction for Benching
Bench Type
Correction factor, CB
Pressure*
Free Surface**
Flat Floor
1.00
1.00
Depressed Floor
1.00
1.00
Half Bench
0.95
0.15
Full Bench
0.75
0.07
d aho
D e > 3.2
* pressure flow --------------------
d aho
D e < 1.0
** free surface flow --------------------
d aho is the water depth in the structure above an outlet pipe invert and D e is the
outlet pipe diameter.
Headloss - AASHTO Method
The AASHTO method (as defined in the AASHTO Model Drainage Manual) for
structure headloss is based on power-loss methodologies. This method can be summarized by the following equation:
h s = (h c + h b + h e ) C n C s
Where:
13-656
hS = Structure headloss (m, ft)
hC = Contraction loss (m, ft)
hb = Bend loss (m, ft)
he = Expansion loss (m, ft)
Cn = Correction factor for non-piped flow (unitless) CS =Correction factor for

shaping (unitless).
Theory
AASHTO Contraction Loss
The contraction loss is due to flow transitioning from large-area, low-velocity flow to
small-area, high- velocity flow, such as flow exiting a structure and entering a downstream pipe. This loss is calculated based on the exit pipe's velocity and a contraction
coefficient, as follows:
Vo2
hc = Kc
2g
Where:
hc =Contraction loss (m, ft)
Kc = Contraction coefficient (unitless)
VO = Exit pipe velocity (m/s, ft/s)
g = Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s, ft/s)
The contraction coefficient defaults to the AASHTO documented value of 0.25, but
can be changed by the user in the Calculation Options.
AASHTO Bend Loss
Vo
( 1 K i )Q i V i
h b = --------- --------------------------- -------2g
Qo
2g
Where:
VO =Outflow pipe velocity (m/s, ft/s)
QO = Outflow pipe velocity (m3/s, cfs)
Vi = Inflow pipe velocity (m/s, ft/s)
Qi = Inflow pipe flow (m/s, cfs)
Ki = Bend factor
13-657

Note:
The previous equation is a generalized version of the equation

as it appears in the AASHTO manual.
The program automatically computes a bend factor based on the angles at which the
pipes come together. The program's default bend factors are based on Figure 13-12 of
the AASHTO manual, but these values, as with other AASHTO coefficients and
corrections, can be changed by the user.
See Headloss Coefficients for Junctions on page 13-698.
AASHTO Bend Loss Original Equation
The structure bend loss is computed for each incoming pipe using the following equation from the AASHTO manual. Losses are computed for each incoming pipe, and the
greatest value is used.
V
h b = Ki 0
2g
Where:
Ki = Bend loss coefficient (unitless)
Vo = Incoming pipe's velocity (m/s, ft/s)
The AASHTO manual also documents another bend loss method shown in the
following equation. The authors of the AASHTO manual agree that either equation is
acceptable. Because of the following equation's tendency to compute negative bend
losses in certain cases, we decided to use the above equation exclusively within this
program.
Hi =
2
13-658
Q 4 V42 Q 1 V12 Q 2 V22 + KQ q V12

2gQ 4
Theory
AASHTO Expansion Loss

Expansion losses are encountered when small-area, high-velocity flow meets a largearea, low-velocity flow, such as a pipe discharging into a structure. To compute this
loss, the following equation is used:
Vs2
he = K e
2g
Where:
he = Expansion loss (m, ft)
Ke = Expansion coefficient (unitless)
Vs = Most significant incoming pipe's velocity (m/s, ft/s)
The most significant pipe is the pipe that has the greatest product of velocity and
discharge, omitting any pipes that have a discharge less than 10% of the structure's
outflow. The expansion coefficient defaults to the AASHTO documented value of
0.35, but can be changed by the user.
13-659

AASHTO Correction For Non-Piped Flow
If non-piped flow accounts for 10% or more of the total structure outflow, a correction
factor is applied to the total loss. By default, this value is a 30% increase in headloss
(a factor of 1.3) as documented in the AASHTO manual, but can be changed by the
user in the Calculation Options.
AASHTO Correction for Shaping
If the bottom of the structure is shaped to facilitate smoother transitions from inflow
pipes to the discharge pipe, a correction factor can be applied to the total loss. By
default, this value is a 50% reduction (a factor of 0.5) as documented in the AASHTO
manual, but can be changed by the user in the Calculation Options.
Minor Losses
Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence
that create a drop in the energy and hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The
magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the fitting, which
directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.
Figure 13-2: Flow Lines at Entrance

The equation most commonly used for determining the loss in a fitting, valve, meter,
or other localized component is:
hm = K
13-660
V2
2g
Theory
Where:
hm
Loss due to the minor loss element (m, ft.)
Loss coefficient for the specific fitting
Gravitational acceleration constant (m/s2, ft./sec. 2)
Typical values for fitting loss coefficients are included in Fitting Loss Coefficients
on page 13-661.
Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller
headlosses. For example, the figure below shows the effects of entrance configuration
on typical pipe entrance flow lines.
Fitting Loss Coefficients

For similar fittings, the K-value is highly dependent on things such as bend radius and
contraction ratios.
Table 13-2: Typical Fitting K Coefficients
Fitting
K Value
Pipe Entrance
Fitting
K Value
90 Smooth Bend
Bellmouth
0.03-0.05
Bend Radius / D = 4
0.16-0.18
Rounded
0.12-0.25
Bend Radius / D = 2
0.19-0.25
Sharp-Edged
0.50
Bend Radius / D = 1
0.35-0.40
Projecting
0.80
ContractionSudden
Mitered Bend
= 15
0.05
D2/D1 = 0.80
0.18
= 30
0.10
D2/D1 = 0.50
0.37
= 45
0.20
D2/D1 = 0.20
0.49
= 60
0.35
= 90
0.80
ContractionConical
D2/D1 = 0.80
0.05
D2/D1 = 0.50
0.07
Line Flow
0.30-0.40
D2/D1 = 0.20
0.08
Branch Flow
0.75-1.80
ExpansionSudden
Tee
Cross
13-661
Pump Theory
Table 13-2: Typical Fitting K Coefficients (Contd)
Fitting
K Value
Fitting
K Value
D2/D1 = 0.80
0.16
Line Flow
0.50
D2/D1 = 0.50
0.57
Branch Flow
0.75
D2/D1 = 0.20
0.92
45 Wye
ExpansionConical
D2/D1 = 0.80
0.03
D2/D1 = 0.50
0.08
D2/D1 = 0.20
0.13
Line Flow
0.30
Branch Flow
0.50
Pump Theory
Pumps are an integral part of many pressure systems. Pumps add energy, or head
gains, to the flow to counteract headlosses and hydraulic grade differences within the
system.
A pump is defined by its characteristic curve, which relates the pump head, or the
head added to the system, to the flow rate. This curve is indicative of the ability of the
pump to add head at different flow rates. To model behavior of the pump system, additional information is needed to ascertain the actual point at which the pump will be
operating.
The system operating point is based on the point at which the pump curve crosses the
system curve representing the static lift and headlosses due to friction and minor
losses. When these curves are superimposed, the operating point can easily be found.
This is shown in the figure below.
13-662
Theory
Figure 13-3: System Operating Point

As water surface elevations and demands throughout the system change, the static
head (Hs) and headlosses (HL) vary. This changes the location of the system curve,
while the pump characteristic curve remains constant. These shifts in the system curve
result in a shifting operating point over time.
Variable Speed Pumps

Variable speed pumps are not a separate type of element but are simply pump
elements for which the property "Is variable speed pump?" is set to True. The pressure
solver uses the pump affinity laws to adjust the pump performance. When multiple
variable speed pumps are run in parallel at the same speed, it may be better to use the
Variable Speed Pump Battery element (Variable Speed Pump Batteries on page 6190).
A pumps characteristic curve is fixed for a given motor speed and impeller diameter,
but can be determined for any speed and any diameter by applying the affinity laws.
For variable speed pumps, these affinity laws are presented as:
Q1
n
= 1
Q2 n2
and
h 1 n1
=
h 2 n 2
13-663
Pump Theory
Where:
Pump flow rate (m3/s, cfs)
Pump head (m, ft.)
Pump speed (rpm)
Figure 13-4: Effect of Relative Speed on Pump Curve

The model assumes that the pump curve specified in the pump definition corresponds
to a relative speed of 1.0. Any adjustments are made relative to that pump curve and
are reported in terms of relative speed, not absolute speed (i.e. 0.95 rather than 1150
rpm).
The user can set the Relative speed maximum to the maximum value that the pump
will reach. If a higher speed is called for in the model, the speed is limited to this
value. The default value is 1.0.
There are several types of variable speed pump behavior supported by the model:
1. Pattern Based (default) treats the relative speed as a function of time as specified
by the user in Components > Patterns > Pump. Once the VSP Type is set to
Pattern, these patterns are assigned to a given pump in the Pattern (Relative
Speed) property. Note that once a pattern has been assigned to control pump speed
settings they will override any control based settings including attempting to turn
the pump off or on.
2. Fixed head treats the pump as trying to maintain a fixed head at some target node.
The user specifies the target node and the maximum relative speed the pump can
attain.
There is a slightly different algorithm for suction side or discharge side target
nodes which the user identifies by setting Control Node on Suction Side? to True
or False.
13-664
Theory
When the user selects a junction as a control node they must also specify the target
head that the pump is trying to maintain by increasing or decreasing speed,
however, when the user selects a storage node as a control node the target head is
the initial level of the storage node.
In general, wastewater pumps are controlled on the suction side while water distribution pumps are controlled on the discharge side.
Control statements can be used to turn variable speed pumps on and off but pump
speeds specified in control statements cannot override speeds determined by the
model. While the pumps are on or off, the hydraulic grade at the target node may
deviate from the target grade. If that node is a tank/wet well, the variable speed
pump algorithm keeps track of the volume that must be pumped to bring the level
back to the target. For nodes with no storage, the grade instantly reaches the target
when the pump comes back on.
The variable speed pump continues to operate in the model even when the target
tank reaches min or max level. Warning messages are issued to identify this condition.
3. Fixed Flow treats the pump output as a constant and adjusts the speed to produce
that flow as long as the speed does not exceed the maximum. Note that fixed flow
pumps do not support being controlled with simple or logical controls and they do
not turn on automatically at any time after being closed by the hydraulic engine
(e.g., if a water source becomes unavailable).
4. The speed of a variable speed pump can also be adjusted using a series of control
statements. This requires more work on data entry but can be used to handle
complex controls. If you want the variable speed pump to be controlled by a set of
control statements, the pump should be a Pattern type variable speed pump with a
pattern of <None>. That is: Is variable speed? = True, VSP Type = Pattern Based,
Pattern = <None>. Then the controls specified in the Operational alternative will
be used.
Because of its discrete nature, this type of control can display oscillations in
speed. For example with the controls below:
IF (Level <5 and Level =>3) Speed = 0.8
IF (Level <7 and Level =>5) Speed = 0.7
when the level is very close to 5, the speed can oscillate between 0.7 and 0.8
rather than ramp smoothly between the two settings.
13-665
Pump Theory
Constant Horsepower Pumps

During preliminary studies, the exact characteristics of the constant horsepower pump
may not be known. In these cases, the asinverttion is often made that the pump is
adding energy to the water at a constant rate. Based on power-head-flow rate relationships for pumps, the operating point of the pump can then be determined. Although
this asinverttion is useful for some applications, a constant horsepower pump should
only be used for preliminary studies.
This software currently models six different types of pumps:
Tip:
Whenever possible, avoid using constant power or design point

pumps. They are often enticing because they require less work
on behalf of the engineer, but they are much less accurate than a
pump curve based on several representative points.
Constant PowerThese pumps may be useful for preliminary designs and estimating pump size, but should not be used for any analysis for which more accurate results are desired.
Design Point (One-Point)A pump can be defined by a single design point (Hd
@ Qd). From this point, the curves interception with the head and discharge axes
is computed as Ho = 1.33Hd and Qo = 2.00Qd. This type of pump is useful for
preliminary designs, but should not be used for final analysis.
Standard (Three-Point)This pump curve is defined by three pointsthe

shutoff head (pump head at zero discharge), the design point (as with the singlepoint pump), and the maximum operating point (the highest discharge at which
the pump performs predictably).
Standard ExtendedThe same as the standard three-point pump, but with an

extended point at the zero pump head point. This is automatically calculated by
the program.
Custom ExtendedThe custom extended pump is similar to the standard

extended pump, but allows you to enter the discharge at zero pump head.
Multiple PointThis option allows you to define a custom rating curve for a
pump. The pump curve is defined by entering points for discharge rates at various
heads. Since the general pump equation, shown below, is used to simulate the
pump during the network computations, the user-defined pump curve points are
used to solve for coefficients in the general pump equation:
Y = A (B Q C )
13-666
Theory
Where:
Head (m, ft.)
A,B,C
Pump curve coefficients
The Levenberg-Marquardt Method is used to solve for A, B and C based on the given
multiple-point rating curve.
Conservation of Mass and Energy

Conservation of Mass
At any node in a system containing incompressible fluid, the total volumetric or mass
flows in must equal the flows out, less the change in storage. Separating these into
flows from connecting pipes, demands, and storage, you obtain:
QIN t = Q OUT t + VS
Where:
QIN
Total flow into the node (m3/s, cfs)
QOUT
Total demand at the node (m3/s, cfs)
VS
Change in storage volume (m3, ft.3)
Change in time (s)
13-667
Pump Theory
Conservation of Energy
The conservation of energy principle states that the headlosses through the system
must balance at each point. For pressure networks, this means that the total headloss
between any two nodes in the system must be the same regardless of what path is
taken between the two points. The headloss must be sign consistent with the assumed
flow direction (i.e., gain head when proceeding opposite the flow direction and lose
head when proceeding in the flow direction).
The same basic principle can be applied to any path between two points. As shown in
the figure above, the combined headloss around a loop must equal zero in order to
achieve the same hydraulic grade as at the beginning.
The Gradient Algorithm

The gradient algorithm for the solution of pressure pipe networks is formulated upon
the full set of system equations that model both heads and flows. It is applied one pressure subnetwork at a time. Since both continuity and energy are balanced and solved
with each iteration, the method is theoretically guaranteed to deliver the same level of
accuracy observed and expected in other well-known algorithms such as the Simultaneous Path Adjustment Method (Fowler) and the Linear Theory Method (Wood).
In addition, there are a number of other advantages that this method has over other
algorithms for the solution of pipe network systems:
13-668
The method can directly solve both looped and partly branched networks. This
gives it a computational advantage over some loop-based algorithms, such as
Simultaneous Path, which require the reformulation of the network into equivalent looped networks or pseudo-loops.
Using the method avoids the post-computation step of loop and path definition,
which adds significantly to the overhead of system computation.
Theory
The method is numerically stable when the system becomes disconnected by

check valves, pressure regulating valves, or modelers error. The loop and path
methods fail in these situations.
The structure of the generated system of equations allows the use of extremely
fast and reliable sparse matrix solvers.
The derivation of the Gradient Algorithm starts with two matrices and ends as a
working system of equations (for more information, see Derivation of the Gradient
Algorithm on page 13-669).
Derivation of the Gradient Algorithm

Given a network defined by N unknown head nodes, P links of unknown flow, and B
boundary or fixed head nodes, the network topology can be expressed in two incidence matrices:
A12 = A21T
(P x N) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix
and
A10 = A01T
(P x B) Fixed head nodes incidence matrix
The following convention is used to assign matrix values:
A12(i,j) = 1, 0, or -1
(PxN) Unknown head nodes incidence matrix
Assigned nodal demands are given by:
qT = [q1, q2,, qN]
(1 x N) Nodal demand vector
Assigned boundary nodal heads are given by:
HfT = [Hf1, Hf2,, HfB ]
(1 x B) Fixed nodal head vector
The headloss or gain transform is expressed in the matrix:
13-669
Pump Theory
FT(Q) = [f1, f2, fp ]
(1 x P) Non-linear laws expressing headlosses in

links
fi = fi (Qi )
These matrix elements that define known or iterative network state can be used to
compute the final steady-state network represented by the matrix quantities for
unknown flow and unknown nodal head.
Unknown link flow quantities are defined by:
QT = [Q1,Q2, Qp ]
(1 x P) Unknown link flow rate vector
Unknown nodal heads are defined by:
HT = [H1, H2 , HN ]
(1 x N) Unknown nodal head vector
These topologic and quantity matrices can be formulated into the generalized matrix
expression using the laws of energy and mass conservation:
A 12H + F(Q) = A 10H f
A 12 Q = q
A second diagonal matrix that implements the vectorized head change coefficients is
introduced. It is generalized for Hazen-Williams friction losses in this case:
R Q n1 1
1 1
n 1
R2 Q2 2
A 11 =
...
...
nP 1
R P QP
This yields the full expression of the network response in matrix form:
A 11 A 12 Q A 10H f
=
0 H
q
A 21
13-670
Theory
To solve the system of non-linear equations, the Newton-Raphson iterative scheme
can be obtained by differentiating both sides of the equation with respect to Q and H
to get:
NA 11 A 12 dQ dE
=
0 dH dq
A 21
with
n1
n2
N=
...
nP
The final recursive form of the Newton-Raphson algorithm can now be derived after
matrix inversion and various algebraic manipulations and substitutions (not presented
here). The working system of equations for each solution iteration, k, is given by:
1
H k +1 = (A 21 N 1 A 11 A 12 ) 1 A 21 N 1 (Q k + A 11 A 10 H f ) + (q A 21Q k )
1
Q k +1 = (1 N 1 )Q k N 1 A 11 (A12 H k +1 + A 10 H f )
The solution for each unknown nodal head for each time iteration is computationally
intensive. This high-speed solution utilizes a highly optimized sparse matrix solver
(see The Linear System Equation Solver on page 13-671) that is specifically
tailored to the structure of this matrix system of equations.
Sources:
Todini, E. and S. Pilati, A gradient Algorithm for the Analysis of Pipe Networks,
Computer Applications in Water Supply, Vol. 1Systems Analysis and Simulation,
ed. By Bryan Callback and Chin-Hour Or, Research Studies Press LTD, Watchword,
Hertfordshire, England.
The Linear System Equation Solver

The Conjugate Gradient method (see The Gradient Algorithm on page 13-668) is
one method that, in theory, converges to an exact solution in a limited number of steps.
The Gradient working equation can be expressed for the pressure network system of
equations as:
Ax = b
where:
13-671
Pump Theory
x = Hk + 1
b = A 21 N 1 (Q k + A 11 A 10 H f ) + (q A 21Q k )
The structure of the system matrix A at the point of solution is:

A = A 21(NA 11 ) 1 A 12 = A 21DA 12
and it can be seen that the nature of the topological matrix components yield a total
working matrix A that is:
Symmetric
Positive definite
Stieltjes type
Because of the symmetry, the number of non-zero elements to be retained in the

matrix equals the number of nodes plus the number of links. This results in a low
density, highly sparse matrix form. It follows that an iterative solution scheme would
be preferred over direct matrix inversion, in order to avoid matrix fill-in, which serves
to increase the computational effort.
Because the system is symmetric and positive definite, a Cholesky factorization can
be performed to give:
A = LLT
where L is lower triangular with positive diagonal elements. Making the Cholesky
factorization allows the system to be solved in two steps:
y = L1b
x = (LT ) 1 y
The use of this approach over more general sparse matrix solvers that implement
traditional Gaussian elimination methods without consideration to matrix symmetry is
preferred, since performance gains are considerable. The algorithm utilized in this
software solves the system of equations using a variant of Choleskys method which
has been optimized to reduce fill-in of the factorization matrix, thus minimizing
storage and reducing overall computational effort.
13-672
Theory
Extended Period Simulations

Extended Period Simulations Overview
The Extended Period Simulation (EPS) models how a sewer network will behave over
time. This type of analysis allows the user to model wet wells filling and draining,
how pumps toggle on and off, and how pressures, hydraulic grades, and flow rates
change throughout the system in response to varying loading conditions and in
response to automatic control strategies formulated by the modeler. In SewerCAD
the algorithm proceeds in a general downstream direction proceeding towards the
outfall and occurs in the following steps:
The analysis begins in the gravity portion of the network. All hydrographs are generated entering into the gravity system and successively routed and summed as the flows
approach the bounding wet well. Ultimately, the total inflow hydrograph to the wet
well is determined.
Knowing the inflow to the wet well, the pressure calculations for the force main
system bounded by the wet well are performed. In addition to flow velocities and
pressures, the levels in the wet well are determined over time.
SewerCAD then returns to the gravity portion of the network discussed in step 1. The
hydraulics and HGL profiles are calculated throughout the gravity system for each
time step using the known level of the wet well as the boundary condition for the
backwater analysis.
The process then repeats, continuing to the systems downstream of the pressure
network until an outlet is reached.
Routing Overview
As a hydrograph flows through a conduit it undergoes changes in shape and temporal
distribution caused by translation and storage effects.
SewerCAD uses two methods to determine the shape and distribution of a hydrograph
routed through a gravity pipe.
Convex Routing
Weighted Translation Routing
13-673
Extended Period Simulations

Note:
Fixed and Known flows are not routed. Fixed Unit loads and
Time-variant loads are routed.
Convex Routing
The underlying asinverttion of the convex routing method is that the routed outflow
for a time step is based on the inflow and outflow for the previous time step. Each
outflow ordinate is calculated as:
Ot + t = cI t + (1 c )Ot
Where:
Ot + = Outflow at time t + t
= Current time (s, min)
t = Hydrologic time step (s, min)
c = Convex routing coefficient
It = Inflow at time t (l/s, gpm)
Ot = Outflow at time t (l/s, gpm)
The convex routing coefficient is essentially a ratio of the hydrologic time step and
representative flow travel time through the pipe and is calculated as follows:
c = t
V t
=
L tt
Where:
t = Hydrologic time step (s)
tt = Travel time (s)
V = Velocity established for representative flow. (m/s, ft/s)
L = Length of pipe (m, ft)
The velocity used to calculate the coefficient is either the normal velocity or full flow
velocity generated for a user-specified percentage of the peak of the inflow
hydrograph. In other words, if the percentage of the peak flow is greater than the
capacity of the pipe then the full-flow velocity is used. If the percentage of the peak
flow is less than the capacity the flow velocity for normal depth is used.
13-674
Theory
Note:
You can specify the percentage of the peak flow, which is used
to calculate the Convex Routing coefficient for each pipe, by
clicking the Go button and then clicking the Options button.
Then click the Convex tab of the Calculation Options dialog. The
values typically range between 50% and 75%.
The higher the percentage of flow the faster the velocity used to calculate the convex
routing coefficient, hence the closer the routed hydrograph will be to a pure translation
of the inflow hydrograph.
The user-specified percentage can be modified in the calculation options. A typical
value is around 75 % but can be modified for oddly shaped hydrographs with sharp
uncharacteristic peaks or for calibration purposes.
Note:
Known Flows are not routed. Known Flows override other

known flows, and are not cumulative going downstream.
Weighted Translation Routing

The Convex Routing method is only valid when the Convex Routing coefficient, c is
less than 1 or when the hydrologic time step is less than the calculated travel time. In
certain cases where the travel time exceeds the hydrologic time step, SewerCAD automatically uses an alternate method of routing.
Each ordinate of the outflow hydrograph is derived from a weighted average of the
ordinates for the current and previous time steps of the inflow hydrograph. The
weights are calculated based on the Convex Routing coefficient.
Each ordinate of the outflow hydrograph is calculated as follows:
1
1
Ot = I t t + 1 I t
c
c
Where:
Ot = Outflow at current time step (l/s, gpm)
c = Convex Routing coefficient
It - = Inflow at previous time step (l/s, gpm)
It = Inflow at current time step (l/s, gpm)
13-675
Transitioning Between Gravity and Pressure Networks
Hydrologic and Hydraulic Time Steps

SewerCAD uses two distinct time steps when running an Extended Period Simulation.
Hydrologic Time Step - This time step is used to calculate the routed hydrographs
and represents the time increment of all hydrographs generated during the analysis. The hydrologic time step is also used as the calculation increment for the
pressure calculations.
Hydraulic Time Step - This time step represents how often the hydraulic calculations are performed. Flows are interpolated off the previously generated hydrographs using the hydraulic time step and are used to perform the gradually varied
flow analyses for that time step.
The hydrologic time step should be less than or equal to the hydraulic time step. The
hydraulic time step should be a multiple of the hydrologic time step.
Note:
The Hydrologic and Hydraulic Time Steps can be modified in the

Calculation Options.
Transitioning Between Gravity and Pressure

Networks
This section describes the major distinctions between gravity pipes and force mains in
SewerCAD. It also describes how flow and the hydraulic grade transition between
force mains and gravity pipes and vice versa.
Identifying Gravity Pipes and Force Mains

By default, SewerCAD depicts a pressure pipe as a single black line, and a gravity
pipe as a thicker red line, although this symbology may be changed by the user.
Gravity pipes are referred to as "conduits" and force mains are referred to as "pressure
pipes" in SewerCAD. Pressure pipes also refer to pipes in a pressure sewer (grinder
pump) system.
Gravity pipes hydraulics are solved using gradually varied flow equations and can
become surcharged. Pressure pipes are pipes solved with the Bentley pressure engine
(similar to WaterCAD/GEMS) and are generally assumed to be flowing full, with the
exception of a pipe immediately downstream of an open air valve. Pipes which regularly transition between full and partly full flow are generally better treated as
conduits.
13-676
Theory
The difference can also be recognized by the pipe's context in the network. The pipes
in a gravity system must all converge on a single termination point in a classic tree
structure. Multiple pipes can enter into a single gravity node, but only one may exit.
The gravity subnetwork can either terminate on a wet well, or an outlet.
The force mains can be much more complex with loops and multiple outlet points.
The pressure subnetwork can terminate on an outlet or a manhole.
See Subnetworks on page 13-682 for more information.
Direction of Flow in Gravity and Pressure Systems

In gravity pipes flow will always travel towards the termination point of the gravity
network.
The terminology Start and Stop nodes for a link refer to the direction which the
element was entered into SewerCAD. These may be reversed by the user. The terminology Upstream/Downstream is determined by the program based on the direction of
flow to the outlet
Pressure systems are usually designed such that flow will travel from the wet well to
an outfall point at either an outlet or a gravity system. If the elevation is too high at
that point, SewerCAD will allow flow to travel backwards from the gravity system to
the pressure network. There are no programmatic limitations as to the direction of
flow in the force main system.
Transitioning From Gravity Pipes to Force Mains

The only way to transition between a gravity pipe and a force main in SewerCAD is
through an intermediate wet well. This establishes a boundary condition for both the
connecting systems. During a Steady State analysis the wet well level can be calculated based on generating the required HGL for the outflow to either match or exceed
the inflow, or the wet well level can be fixed to a user-specified level. During an
Extended Period Simulation the wet well level is determined for a time step by calculating the change in storage over time.
The inflow into the wet well is determined by summing all loads flowing to that wet
well.
Hydraulic (HGL) Transition from Gravity to Pressure Network

Gravity hydraulic calculations upstream of a wet well are based on the wet well
hydraulic grade, just as they are for standard calculations within gravity systems.
13-677

During a Steady State analysis there is a difference, however, in determining the
hydraulic grade within the wet well itself. The wet well level may be set by the user to
either be fixed or not fixed.
Fixed Wet Well Level during Steady State Analysis
If the wet well level is fixed, the wet well's starting hydraulic grade is used for pressure calculations. No adjustments are made, and this grade is used as the tailwater
grade for the upstream gravity systems.
Non-Fixed Wet Well Level during Steady State Analysis
If the wet well level is not fixed, the pressure calculations will attempt to balance the
wet well level such that the total flow out of the wet well is equal to or greater than the
total flow into the wet well.
The wet well's starting grade is used for the first iteration. If the calculated flows out
of each wet well are greater than or equal to each wet well's incoming flow, the iterations stop there. If not, the wet well levels are increased by the increment specified in
the calculation options, and the pressure subnetwork is recalculated. When the wet
well level is increased, it changes the static heads and increases the discharge for
connected pumps, and may also trigger additional pumps to turn on.
This process continues until the level in each non-fixed wet well either meets the flow
criteria, or is prevented by rising to the maximum elevation of the wet well.
Wet Well Level During Extended Period Simulations
During an Extended Period Simulation the fixed wet well level options are not available. The wet well level for a time step is actually determined by the change in
storage due to inflows and outflows over a single time step.
Hydrologic (Flow) Transition from Gravity to Pressure Network

The hydrologic transition from a gravity system into a pressure system is quite simple.
Gravity loads upstream from the wet well are accumulated and combined with the wet
well's local load to determine the total load entering the pressure system at that location. This can be imagined as the total load "dumping into" the wet well.
Transitioning From Force Mains to Gravity Elements

Force mains can empty directly into the gravity system via a manhole, or a junction
chamber, or they can terminate at an outlet. During a Steady State analysis the flow
entering the gravity system can either be only the specified sanitary and wet weather
loads, or the load generated based on the pumps, the wet well level and the hydraulic
characteristics of the force main system.
13-678
Theory
During an Extended Period Simulation flows to the gravity system are solely determined based on the hydraulic characteristics of the force main system.
If the force main empties into an outlet the HGL boundary is determined by the elevation of the user specified-tailwater. The HGL boundary between the force main and
gravity system is determined by the elevation of the force main at the boundary point.
Hydraulic (HGL) Transition from Pressure to Gravity Network

If the force main empties into and outlet element, then the hydraulic grade will be the
higher of the set tailwater elevation or the crown of the pressure pipe.
The hydraulic grade at a manhole or a junction chamber downstream from a
discharging force main is not considered when performing pressure calculations.
Instead, the boundary hydraulic grade is assumed to be equal to the crown elevation of
the discharge pipe.
For example, if a 150 mm pipe discharges at an invert elevation of 10.000 m, the
hydraulic grade that is used as the boundary condition for the pressure system is
10.150 m.
This asinverttion is absolutely valid and conservative when the hydraulic grade line in
the gravity element is below the crown of the pipe.
This is generally a valid asinverttion when the hydraulic grade line is above the crown
of the pipe as the head at the entrance of the gravity network is often insignificant
compared to the friction losses incurred through the force mains.
Hydrologic (Flow) Transition from Pressure to Gravity Network

The hydrologic transition from a pressure system into a gravity system during a
Steady State analysis is somewhat complicated, with different desired behaviors for
different analysis purposes. If the model is built for direct analysis of flows in the
system, it is most likely that instantaneous pumped flows are important, and the downstream gravity loads should include the pumped discharge from the pressure system.
If the analysis is for large-scale planning purposes, however, it is more likely that
instantaneous pumping rates are not as important. In these cases, the downstream
gravity system should be analyzed based on the total contributing population, area, or
other factors for determining peak flows.
13-679
Hydrologic Transition from Pressure to Gravity During Steady

State Analysis
Conserving Pumped Flow
When instantaneous pumped flows are a concern in the downstream gravity system,
the calculation option to conserve pumped flow should be used. This is found on the
Pressure Hydraulics Options tab of the Calculation Options dialog. When this option
is used, the contributing load components from the pressure system are ignored, and a
load of type "Pumped" is added to the gravity system with the magnitude of the flow
in the discharging pressure pipe. If the flow in the pressure pipe is such that the
gravity system would be draining into the pressure system, no load is transferred to
that gravity node.
Conserving Load Components
When instantaneous pumped flows are not a concern in the downstream gravity
system, the calculation option to conserve load components (not pumped flow) should
be used. When conserving load components, the total contributing components to the
pressure system (population, area, and so forth) are considered. The total contributing
load is distributed to the downstream gravity systems proportionally to the pressure
pipe discharge rates. If the flow in a pressure pipe is such that the gravity system
would be draining into the pressure system, no load is transferred to that gravity node.
Comparison of Pressure Load Routing
Consider the system below with the following load equivalents:
300 people = 100 l/s
200 people = 70 l/s
13-680
Theory
100 people = 50 l/s
The total load population contributing to the load entering the pressure system is 300
people, equivalent to a flow of 100 liters per second. The operating points of each
pump are such that the discharges into the downstream gravity systems are 200 liters
per second and 400 liters per second. This is more than the rate of flow entering the
wet well.
When conserving pumped flow, the flows in each discharging force main are transferred directly to the downstream gravity system, resulting in a pumped load of 200 l/
s at O-1 and a pumped load of 400 l/s at O-2.
When conserving load components, the 300 people contributing to the load at the wet
well are split proportionally to the downstream gravity systems (1/3 and 2/3). This
results in a load of 100 people (50 l/s) at O-1, and 200 people (70 l/s) at O-2.
The differences can also be seen for the following system, with the same load equivalents as above.
When conserving pumped loads, the downstream gravity load is computed as:
13-681

400 l/s + 100 people = 400 l/s + 50 l/s = 450 l/s
When conserving load components, the downstream gravity load is computed as:
200 people + 100 people = 300 people = 100 l/s
Note that for this piping configuration (one source of loading for the pressure system,
one possible discharge point for the pressure system), the downstream load will
always be 100 l/s (300 people) regardless of the actual pump operating point.
Hydrologic Transition from Pressure to Gravity During Extended Period
Simulations
Since the wet well level will vary over time, based on the inflow and outflow, no
distinction is made between standard loads and pumped loads during an Extended
Period Simulation. The loads will be transferred through the force main system based
on the hydraulic characteristics of the pumps and the system headlosses.
If the elevation of the force main emptying into the gravity system is high enough that
flow goes backward from the gravity element during an Extended Period Simulation,
the negative portion of the hydrograph going through the gravity system at that point
will be truncated. Only positive flows are analyzed in the gravity system. Negative
flows are assumed to be 0. (See the Hydraulic Transition from Pressure to Gravity
Network for more information).
Subnetworks
The SewerCAD solver works efficiently on complex gravity/pressure collection
systems because it breaks the system into individual gravity and pressure subnetworks
which it solves quickly with the most efficient and appropriate equations. At the start
of each run, the system is parsed into subnetworks each of which is given its own ID
which is the label for the outfall of that subnetwork (which may be a wet well in some
cases) for gravity subnetworks or a number (starting at 1) for pressure subnetworks.
The name of the subnetwork in which an element is located can be found in the property grid under "Results (Engine parsing)".
A gravity subnetwork consists of all the gravity conduits (and associated nodes)
connected upstream from the outfall/wet well. A pressure subnetwork consists of all
the pressure pipes (and associated nodes) connected to the outfall or manhole that
transitions back to a gravity subnetwork.
Each pressure subnetwork can be highlighted in the drawing from the Calculation
Detailed Summary > Pressure Summary tab by clicking the Highlight button next to
the Pressure Subnetwork name.
13-682
Theory
Constraint Based Automatic Design

Gravity Pipes and Structures Design
This program allows you to automatically design gravity piping and structures. The
design is flexible enough to allow you to specify the elements to be designed, from a
single pipe size to the entire system, or anything in between.
The design algorithm adjusts invert elevations and the section size of the pipe to meet
several constraints, such as allowable ranges of slope, velocity and cover. In general,
the design algorithm attempts to minimize pipe size and excavation, which is typically
the most expensive part of installing sewer piping and structures.
Some of the other things that are considered include:
Pipe Matching
Offset Matching
Drop Structures
Structure invert Elevations
The designed pipe will be the smallest available section size from the Engineering
Library that meets the constraints and has a capacity greater than its discharge. In a
situation where there are no pipe sizes with adequate capacity, the largest available
size will be used.
Part Full Design

Pipes are designed such that the capacity is greater than the calculated discharge. For
standard designs, this capacity is based on full pipe, normal depth - that is, the flow in
the pipe when the depth is 100% of the pipe rise.
With partially full design, the designed capacity of the pipe is for a design depth that is
only a portion of the pipe rise. In other words, a pipe that is designed for 50% full will
be selected based on a depth of half of the pipe's rise.
For example, consider a circular pipe with the following characteristics: Slope = 0.01
m/m
Roughness n = 0.013
Required flow = 100 l/s
13-683

The following table presents several typical section sizes, with their capacities at
various depths.
Table 13-3: Part Full Design
Circular
Section
Size
100% Full
Nominal
Diameter
Depth
(mm)
Capacity
(l/s)
80% Full
Depth
(mm)
Capacity
(l/s)
50% Full
Depth
(mm)
Capacity
(l/s)
300 mm
300
101
240
99
150
50
375 mm
375
183
300
179
188
91
450 mm
450
297
360
291
225
149
Depending on the selected percent-full, the smallest available pipe could be for any of
the bold values above. Obviously, if the design percentage were something different,
an even larger section may be required.
Hydraulically, the capacity at a percentage of pipe rise is generally not equal to that
percentage of the full pipe capacity. As can be seen in the table above, 80%-full
capacity does not equal 80% of the 100%-full capacity.
For sections that are vertically symmetrical, 50% full is a special case where the
wetted perimeter and area are both half that of full flow. This means that the hydraulic
radius and velocity are the same for half-full and full flow, resulting in a highly special
condition where the 50%-full capacity is actually equal to one half of the 100%-full
capacity.
Allow Multiple Sections

Situations may be encountered where the desired capacity cannot be met with a single
pipe, due to a limiting maximum section rise, a lack of larger available pipes, or other
restrictions. For these situations, the pipe can be designed with multiple barrels. All
barrels will have the same physical characteristics. Multiple barrels will only be used
if the design cannot be met by a single available section size, and the pipe allows
multiple sections for design. In these cases, the design will increase the number of
barrels and attempt to find a section size that meets the capacity, continuing until the
capacity is met or the maximum number of barrels is reached.
For example, consider a circular pipe with the following characteristics:
13-684
Slope = 0.01 m/m
Theory
Roughness n = 0.013
Required flow = 750 l/s
Maximum Design Section Rise = 700 mm
Assume that the design is for 100% full capacity, allowing up to three barrels of the
following section sizes:
Table 13-4: Alow Multiple Sections
Circular
Section
Size
Nominal
Diameter
1 Barrel
Capacity
(l/s)
Meets
Flow?
2 Barrels
Capacity
(l/s)
Meets
Flow?
3 Barrels
Capacity
(l/s)
Meets
Flow?
300 mm
101
No
202
No
203
No
375 mm
183
No
366
No
549
No
450 mm
297
No
595
No
892
Yes
525 mm
449
No
897
Yes
1346
Yes
600 mm
641
No
1281
Yes
1922
Yes
For these conditions, the selected design would use two 525 mm barrels - the smallest
section size within the least number of barrels to meet the capacity criteria.
Limit Section Size

There may be situations in design where it is desired to limit the size of the designed
pipe. This may be done to avoid conflicts with obstructions or other utilities, for
example. For these situations, The program enables you to limit the maximum section
rise that will be selected. A smaller size will be used if possible. If none of the available design sections have a small enough rise, the smallest one will be used.
Pipe Matching
When pipes meet at a structure, it is often desirable to have the pipes at approximately
the same elevation. To do this, the program allows you to design your pipes to match
inverts or crowns. This means that when the design is done (if a valid design was
found), all of the designed pipes entering a structure will have the same invert elevation or crown elevation.
13-685
Offset Matching
If an offset value is specified, it represents the desired drop across the structure. The
design incorporates this offset, resulting in upstream pipes that are higher than the
downstream pipe by the specified offset. Note that all designed upstream pipes will
have the same invert or crown elevation.
For example, an offset of 0.1 meter could result in a downstream pipe with an invert of
100.0 meters, and several upstream pipes with invert elevations at 100.1 meters.
Drop Structures
Drop structures are structures at which the incoming pipes are not all at the same
elevation, nor do any of them necessarily match the downstream pipe. Including these
structures may help to reduce excavation, since the entire upstream system does not
need to be as deep.
The program will only use drop structures if you have chosen to allow them, and if a
pipe's maximum slope constraint cannot be met. Otherwise, the upstream system will
be designed as needed to maintain the desired slope and velocity constraints, which
may require significantly lower pipe elevations.
Structure invert Elevations

The program can adjust structure invert elevations to account for the invert elevations
of newly designed pipes, and any desired additional invert depth.
For example, if a structure is to be adjusted with a invert depth of 0.5 meters and the
lowest pipe invert is 100.0 meters, the structure invert elevation would be set to 99.5
meters.
Design Priorities
Unfortunately, it is not always possible to automate a design that meets all desired
constraints. With this in mind, there are certain priorities that are considered when the
automated design is performed. These priorities are in place to try to minimize the
effect on existing portions of the system while providing appropriate capacity in the
designed pipes.
While this sequence does not go into complete detail regarding the design process, it
does indicate the general priorities for the automated design. The priorities, of course,
only deal with elements that are being designed. If a pipe has fixed inverts or is not to
be designed at all, some or all of these criteria obviously do not apply.
13-686
Theory
A Designed Pipe Should Fit within Adjacent Existing Structures

If a pipe connects to an existing structure, the pipe rise should be completely within
the existing structure. The only time this may be violated is if there are no available
section sizes that would not violate that condition (i.e., the existing structure height is
so small that all available pipes have rises too big). In this very unlikely condition, the
smallest available section size will be selected, with the invert elevation placed at the
bottom of the structure.
A Designed Pipe Should Not Have a Crown Above an Adjacent

Designed Structure
Where pipe inverts are fixed, it is possible that the required section size would cause
the pipe crown to be higher than the top elevation of an adjacent designed structure. If
all available pipe section rises are greater than the depth of the pipe invert, the smallest
pipe size will be chosen.
Note:
This situation will only be encountered in situations where the

structure's top elevation is set equal to the ground elevation otherwise, the structure will be designed with a higher top
elevation.
Pipe Capacity Should Be Greater Than the Discharge

If the pipe is not limited by adjacent structures, the pipe should be sized such that the
design capacity is greater than the calculated discharge in the pipe. The design
capacity may be based on one or more pipes, flowing full or part-full, depending on
user-set design options. If site restrictions or available section limitations result in a
situation where no sections meet the required capacity, the largest available size and
number of barrels will be chosen.
13-687
Downstream Pipes Should Be at Least as Large as Upstream

Pipes
Designs typically avoid sizing downstream pipes smaller than upstream pipes, regardless of differing slope and velocity requirements. One of the primary reasons for this
is debris that passes through the upstream pipe could become caught in the connecting
structure, clogging the sewer.
Pipe Matching Criteria Downstream Should Be Met

Whenever possible, the designed pipe should have its downstream invert set such that
the pipe meets the matching criteria, such as matching inverts or crowns. Note that
because of higher design priorities, such as the pipe fitting within existing structures,
the matching criteria may not always be met.
13-688
Theory
Minimum Cover Constraint Should Be Met

Pipe inverts should be set such that the upstream and downstream crowns of the pipe
are below the ground elevation by at least the amount of the minimum cover. Note
that higher design priorities, such as existing structure locations and matching criteria,
may prevent the minimum cover constraint from being met.
Pipe Matching Criteria Upstream Should Be Met

The upstream invert of the designed pipe should be set to meet the matching criteria of
the upstream structure. Higher design priorities, such as minimum cover constraints,
may result in a pipe that does not match upstream as desired.
Maximum Slope Constraint Should Be Met

Wherever possible, the designed pipe should not exceed the desired maximum slope.
In some situations, elevation differences across the system may result in a case where
a drop structure can be used to offset pipes. This is used instead of a pipe that is too
steep, or instead of upstream piping that would require much more excavation. Note
that the maximum slope constraint may be violated if higher priority design considerations, such as existing structure location or pipe matching criteria, governs.
Other Constraints and Considerations

There are many degrees of freedom when designing a piping system. Several
constraints that are not mentioned above, such as minimum velocity constraints and
minimum slope constraints, may also result in adjustments to the designed pipe.
Other constraints may be too limiting, such as maximum cover constraint and
maximum velocity, resulting in designed pipes that could violate too many other
constraints.
This wide range of choices and priorities emphasizes the need for careful review of
any automated design by a professional. It is not always possible to meet every
desired condition, so it is very much the responsibility of the engineer to make final
judgments and decisions regarding the best design for the client.
Automatic Design with Hydrograph and Pattern Loads

Automatic designs are run only during a Steady State analysis, which examines only a
single instant in time. There are some key behaviors attributed to time-based loads
that you may wish to take into account when designing the system.
13-689
Open and Closed Channel Weighting Methods

As described in the Common Load Types section of the help, hydrographs can be
applied as stead state loads in four different ways (Peak, Average, Minimum, and
Zero). If you have hydrograph loading applied to the gravity model, the selected
steady state loading option could have a dramatic effect on the ultimate design. For
example, when running a design, you may get larger pipes when the inflow loads are
based on the peak flows of the hydrographs vs. if they are based on the minimum
flows of the hydrographs.
Pattern Loads generally consist of an average base load and a diurnal pattern. During
a Steady State Analysis, and hence the Design, the pattern is disregarded and the base
load is used as the load.
Constraint Based Warning Messages

The calculated properties of the pipe such as flow velocity, slope, and cover are
always being checked against the design constraints regardless of the type of simulation being run.
During a design, you will get warning messages associated with a particular pipe if the
algorithm could not attain a solution where all the constraints are met.
If you are running a regular Steady State analysis or an Extended Period Simulation,
however, and the constraints are violated (i.e. a velocity in a pipe is higher than the
maximum velocity constraint), then, like in Design mode, a warning message will also
be generated stating a violation as occurred.
These types of warning messages are generated based entirely on the on the user-specified design constraints, and have no affect on the results or the analysis. These
constraints are setup as either default design constraints through the Analysis menu, or
as local constraints through the element editor or the Design Alternative. The local
design constraints have precedence over the default design constraints.

Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses the following weighting methods:
Pavlovskiis MethodThe Pavlovskii method may be used for open channel as

well as closed top irregular channels.
N
n=
13-690
(PN nN2 )
2
2
2
Pn
1 1 + P2 n2 + .... + PN nN
P
(13.1)
Theory
Where
Roughness coefficient
Weighted perimeter
Subscripts represents subdivisions of one given
section
Hortons MethodThe Horton composite roughness equation is normally used

for solving closed top irregular channels such as custom arches or cunnette
conduit sections. This equation is also applied in certain specific situations to
open channels where steep banks or wide flat floodplains are encountered.
N
PN n1N.5
1.5 3
1.5
1.5
(Pn
1 1 + P2 n2 + .... + PN nN )
=
n=
Where
(13.2)
Wetted perimeter
section
Colebatch MethodThe Colebatch equation is normally used for open, irregular

channels such as natural floodplains.
N
AN n1N.5
(
1
n=
Where
A1n11.5 + A2 n12.5 + .... + AN n1N.5 ) 3

(
=
A
(13.3)
Flow area
section
13-691
Cox MethodThe Cox equation is normally used for open, irregular channels
such as natural floodplains.
N
(AN nN )
n=
Where
A1n1 + A2 n2 + .... + AN nN
A
Flow area
(13.4)

section
Lotter MethodThe Lotter equation is normally used for open, irregular channels such as natural floodplains.
n=
PR
N
1
Where
PR
3
5
PN RN 3
nN
P1R1 3 P2 R2 3
P R 3
+
+ .....+ N N
n1
n2
nN
Wetted perimeter
Hydraulic radius
(13.5)

section
13-692
Improved Lotter MethodThis method uses a combination of the Horton and

Lotter equations. Because both methods are based on Mannings conveyance
equations, it is recommended that you use Mannings friction method for irregular
channels. For more information, see Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO
Users on page 13-693.
Theory
Note to HEC-2, WSP-2, and WSPRO Users

Improved Lotter Method uses a weighted roughness method for solving uniform flow
equations unlike most standard step backwater programs (HEC-2, WSP-2, and
WSPRO), which use a segmented conveyance method. Improved Lotter weighted
roughness method is more general and, unlike the step backwater programs, can be
used for both open channel sections and closed sections. Improved Lotter Method will
produce results similar to the segmented conveyance method (HEC-2, WSP-2,
WSPRO) except for the following two cases:
Sections containing steep vertical segments or flat shallow submerged overbanks
intersected by water surface. The segmented conveyance method (HEC-2, WSP-2,
and WSPRO) tends to underestimate effective roughness, and in many instances the
effective weighted roughness will be actually lower than any of the input segment
roughnesses. Bentley SewerCAD V8i's weighted roughness method avoids underestimating effective roughness by combining adjacent segments using Horton's equation
in a manner similar to the method applied for subdivided main channels with banks
steeper than 5H:1V as documented in Section 2.3 of the HEC-2 User's Manual
(September, 1990). Unlike HEC-2, Improved Lotter Method does not confine this
correction to the main channel, but will make this adjustment at any location in the
section. Improved Lotter Method also dynamically adjusts its flatness and steepness
checks ensuring that computed roughness values will always be higher than the
minimum input value encountered over the wetter flow area. For these situations,
Improved Lotter Method yields a higher effective weighted roughness for the total
section than the segmented conveyance method.
There are a few special considerations that should be realized when analyzing a sewer
system. These are conditions where special asinverttions need to be made, or where
calculations may seem counter-intuitive at first glance. These considerations include:
Energy Discontinuity
Structure Energy Grade
Design Considerations
Energy Discontinuity
The program by default uses hydraulic grade as the basis for its hydraulic computations. Energy grade at any given point is then computed by adding the velocity head
to the hydraulic grade. Because of this standard practice, energy discontinuities may
occasionally occur, such as when pipe size decreases in the downstream direction, or
pipe slope increases.
13-693
If you want the calculations to be based on the energy grade line you can change it
with the Structure Loss Mode Calculation Option.
Flow discontinuities can also be responsible for energy discontinuities. Since a structure is analyzed based on a different system time than a pipe, a direct comparison of
energy grades is not reasonable.
Structure Energy Grade

The energy grade line (EGL) at the upstream side of a structure is computed based on
the characteristics of the structure and its upstream pipes. The reported EGL is generally reported as the lowest EGL of all non- plunging upstream pipes, based on normalized flow values. If there are no non-plunging pipes upstream, the structure's
upstream EGL is taken as the higher of the structure's downstream EGL and upstream
hydraulic grade line (HGL).
In situations where the structure's upstream EGL is lower than its downstream EGL or
upstream HGL, the highest value governs. This rare condition may indicate that the
presumed headloss in the structure is not significant enough to produce the expected
energy loss. The modeler may accept this as a minor limitation of the hydraulic
theory, or may choose to use different structure headloss methods or values.
The reported upstream velocity and velocity head for the structure are based on the
difference between the structure's upstream EGL and HGL.
Design Considerations
As with any automated design, the program's design is intended only as a preliminary
step. It will select pipe sizes and pipe invert elevations based on the input provided,
but no computer program can match the skills that an experienced engineer has. The
modeler should always review any automated design, and should make any changes
required to adjust, improve, and otherwise polish the system.
Reporting Flow Attributes

SewerCAD has many attributes available in the FlexTables, Annotations, Color
Coding, and Database/GIS connections on different aspects of flow in a sanitary sewer
system. During a Steady State analysis the flow is broken down into categories, (I.e.
wet weather, sanitary, known flow and so on). This is done so the program can apply
the correct extreme flow methods. During an Extended Period Simulation essentially
all the different flows are lumped together into a single hydrograph and the initial
categories are disregarded.
13-694
Theory
In the gravity portion of the system there are two variables that can be used in both
Extended Period Simulations and Steady State analyses. These are valuable to know
if you are switching back and forth between the two analysis modes, and would like to
maintain the same reports, color coding, etc
Total Flow - Is available for gravity pipes and gravity nodes. In gravity nodes it
represents the sum of all the flow exiting the node. In gravity pipes during a
Steady State analysis it represents the sum of all the flow entering into the pipe. In
an Extended Period Simulation it represents the flow used during a time step's
hydraulic analysis and represents a flow point on the pre-routed hydrograph.
Diverted Flow Out - Is available for gravity nodes. Represents the flow exiting
the node via a diversion.
In the pressure portion of the system, the Pressure Flow attribute for the pressure pipes
shows the total amount of flow going through the pipe for a time step, and is available
for both Extended Period Simulations and Steady State analyses.
Mannings n Coefficients
Table 13-5: Mannings n Coefficient Table
Lined Channels
Concrete, with surfaces as indicated
Concrete, bottom float-finished, sides as

indicated
Gravel bottom, sides as indicated
Mannings n
Formed, no finish
0.013 0.017
Trowel finish
0.012 0.014
Float finish
0.013 0.015
Float finish, gravel on bottom
0.015 0.017
Gunite, good section
0.016 0.019
Gunite, wavy section
0.018 0.022
Dressed stone in mortar
0.015 0.017
Random stone in mortar
0.017 0.020
Cement rubble masonry
0.020 0.025
Cement rubble masonry, plastered
0.016 0.020
Dry rubble (riprap)
0.020 0.030
Formed concrete
0.017 0.020
Random stone in mortar
0.020 0.023
Dry rubble (riprap)
0.023 0.033
13-695
Mannings n Coefficients
Table 13-5: Mannings n Coefficient Table (Contd)
Brick
Asphalt
Concrete-lined excavated rock
0.014 0.017
Smooth
0.013
Rough
0.016
Wood, planed, clean
0.011 0.013
Good section
0.017 0.020
Irregular section
0.022 0.027
Unlined Channels
Earth, uniform section
Earth, fairly uniform section
Dragline excavated or dredged
Mannings n
Clean, recently completed
0.016 0.018
Clean, after weathering
0.018 0.020
With short grass, few weeds
0.022 0.027
In gravely soil, uniform section, clean
0.022 0.025
No vegetation
0.022 0.025
Grass, some weeds
0.025 0.030
Dense weeds or aquatic plants in deep

channels
0.030 0.035
Sides clean, gravel bottom
0.025 0.030
Sides clean, cobble bottom
0.030 0.040
No vegetation
0.028 0.033
Light brush on banks
0.035 0.050
Rock: Based on design section

Based on actual mean section
0.035
Smooth and uniform
0.035 0.040
Jagged and irregular
0.040 0.045
Channels not maintained, weeds and brush Dense weeds, high as flow depth
uncut
Clean bottom, brush on sides
0.05 0.08
Clean bottom, brush on sides, highest stage

of flow
0.07 0.11
Dense brush, high stage
0.10 0.14
Highway Channels and Swales with Maintained Vegetation
13-696
0.08 0.12
Mannings n
Theory
Table 13-5: Mannings n Coefficient Table (Contd)
(Values shown are for velocities of 2 and 5 fps)
Depth of flow up to 0.7 ft.
Bermuda grass, Kentucky bluegrass, buffalo Mowed to 2 in.
grass
Good Stand, any grass
Fair stand, any grass
0.07 0.045
Length 4 to 6 in.
0.09 0.05
Length about 12 in.
0.18 0.09
Length about 24 in.
0.30 0.15
Length about 12 in.
0.14 0.08
Length about 24 in.
0.25 0.13
Depth flow 0.7 ft. to 1.5 ft.

Bermuda grass, Kentucky bluegrass, buffalo Mowed to 2 in.
grass
Good Stand, any grass
Fair stand, any grass
0.05 0.035
Length 4 to 6 in.
0.06 0.04
Length about 12 in.
0.12 0.07
Length about 24 in.
0.20 0.10
Length about 12 in.
0.10 0.06
Length about 24 in.
0.17 0.09
Gutters
Mannings n
Concrete gutter
Troweled finish
0.012
Asphalt pavement
Smooth texture
0.013
Rough texture
0.016
Smooth
0.013
Rough
0.015
Float finish
0.014
Broom finish
0.016
Concrete gutter with asphalt pavement
Concrete pavement
For gutters with small slope, where sediment may accumulate, increase all above values
of n by
0.002
(Source: Searcy 1973.)
13-697
Headloss Coefficients for Junctions

(Source: U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986.)
1. The n values are a composite of information compiled by Engman (1986).

2. Includes species such as weeping lovegrass, bluegrass, buffalo grass, blue grama
grass, and native grass mixtures.
3. When selecting n, consider cover to a height of about 0.1 ft. This is the only part
of the plant cover that obstructs sheet flow.

These are typical headloss coefficients used in the standard method for estimating
headloss through manholes and junctions.
Table 13-6: Typical Headloss Coefficients
Type of Manhole
Trunkline only with no bend at the
junction
Diagram
Headloss
Coefficient
0.5
Trunkline only with 45 bend at the

junction
0.6
Trunkline only with 90 bend at the

junction
0.8
13-698
Theory
Table 13-6: Typical Headloss Coefficients
Type of Manhole
Diagram
Headloss
Coefficient
Trunkline with one lateral

Small 0.6
Large 0.7
Two roughly equivalent entrance lines

with angle < 90 between lines
0.8
Two roughly equivalent entrance lines

with angle > 90 between lines
0.9
Three or more entrance lines
1.0
Roughness ValuesMannings Equation

Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
13-699

Table 13-7: Mannings Coefficients n for Closed-Metal Conduits Flowing
Partly Full
Channel Type and Description
a. Brass, smooth
Min.
Normal
Max.
0.009
0.010
0.013
1. Lockbar and welded
0.010
0.012
0.014
2. Riveted and spiral
0.013
0.016
0.017
1. Coated
0.010
0.013
0.014
2. Uncoated
0.011
0.014
0.016
1. Black
0.012
0.014
0.015
2. Galvanized
0.013
0.016
0.017
1. Subdrain
0.017
0.019
0.021
2. Storm drain
0.021
0.024
0.030
b. Steel
c. Cast iron
d. Wrought iron
e. Corrugated metal
Roughness ValuesDarcy-Weisbach Equation (Colebrook-White)

Commonly used roughness values for different materials are:
Table 13-8: Darcy-Wesibach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits
13-700
Pipe Material
k (mm)
k (ft)
Glass, drawn brass, copper (new)
0.0015
0.000005
Seamless commercial steel (new)
0.004
0.000013
Commercial steel (enamel coated)
0.0048
0.000016
Commercial steel (new)
0.045
0.00015
Wrought iron (new)
0.045
0.00015
Theory
Table 13-8: Darcy-Wesibach Roughness Heights k for Closed Conduits
Pipe Material
k (mm)
k (ft)
Asphalted cast iron (new)
0.12
0.0004
Galvanized iron
0.15
0.0005
Cast iron (new)
0.26
0.00085
Concrete (steel forms, smooth)
0.18
0.0006
Concrete (good joints, average)
0.36
0.0012
Concrete (rough, visible, form marks)
0.60
0.002
Riveted steel (new)
0.9~9.0
0.003-0.03
Corrugated metal
45
0.15
13-701
13-702
Appendix
14
References
Ming Jin, Samuel Coran and Jack Cook (2004), New One-Dimensional Implicit
Numerical Dynamic Sewer and Storm Model, Haestad Methods Inc., Waterbury, CT
Ben C. Yen (2001), "Hydraulics of Sewer System", in Stormwater Collection Systems
Design Handbook, ed. Larry W. Mays, McGraw-Hill, New York
Danny L. Fread (1993), "Flow Routing", in Handbook of Hydrology, ed David R.
Maidment, McGraw-Hill, New York
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (2000) "Discussion on the Application of Relaxation
Scheme to Wave-Propagation Simulation in Open-Cannel Networks", Journal of
Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 126(1), 89-91.
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (1999) "One-dimensional modeling of mud/debris
unsteady flows", Journal of Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 25(8), 827-834.
Ming Jin and Danny L. Fread (1997) "Dynamic flood routing with explicit and
implicit numerical solution schemes", Journal of Hydraulic Eng., ASCE, 123(3), 166173.
14-703
14-704
Appendix
About Bentley
Systems
15
Bentley Systems, Incorporated provides software for the lifecycle of the worlds infrastructure. The companys comprehensive portfolio for the building, plant, civil, and
geospatial vertical markets spans architecture, engineering, construction (AEC) and
operations. Bentley is the leading provider of AEC software to the Engineering NewsRecord Design 500 and major owner-operators. For more information, visit the
Bentley Web site at http://www.bentley.com.
Bentley Systems, Inc. offers software solutions to civil engineers throughout the world
for analyzing, modeling, and designing all sorts of hydrologic and hydraulic systems,
from municipal water and sewer systems to stormwater ponds, open channels, and
more. With point-and-click data entry, flexible units, and report-quality output,
Bentley Systems, Inc. is the ultimate source for your modeling needs.
In addition to the ability to run in Stand-Alone mode with a CAD-like interface, three
of our productsWaterCAD, StormCAD, and Bentley SewerCAD V8ican be
totally integrated within AutoCAD. These three programs also share numerous
powerful features, such as scenario management, unlimited undo/redo, customizable
tables for editing and reporting, customizable GIS, database and spreadsheet connection, and annotation.
Be sure to contact us or visit our Web site at http://www.haestad.com to find out about
our latest software, books, training, and open houses.
Software
Bentley Institute Press
Training
Internet Resources
Software
Bentley Systems, Inc. software includes:
15-705
Software
CivilStorm
SewerGEMS
SewerGEMS
WaterGEMS
WaterCAD
StormCAD
PondPack
FlowMaster
CulvertMaster
HAMMER
GISConnect
CivilStorm
CivilStorm revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your concern
is a stormwater master plan, localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water quality
BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do faster and smarter designs
every day, CivilStorm fits your needs. It is the only commercially available software
package that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package. CivilStorm
also gives you the ability to perform analyses using either the SWMM algorithm or
CivilStorm's own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.
CivilStorm provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond,
and open channel networks, and provides stunning graphics and reporting tools for
visualizing your storm systems in action.
Use CivilStorm For:
Comprehensive Stormwater Master Plans
Watershed-Based Master Planning
Analysis of Open-channel, Closed-conduit and Combination systems
Floodplain Studies
Complex Flow Regime Analysis
Water Quality Assessments
Integrated Stormwater Quantity and Quality Assessments
NPDES Permitting
CivilStorm can be run in a MicroStation integrated interface, a Stand-Alone graphical

user interface, or an AutoCAD integrated interface.
15-706
About Bentley Systems
SewerGEMS
SewerGEMS is the first and only fully-dynamic, multi-platform (GIS, CAD, and
Stand-Alone) sanitary and combined sewer modeling solution. With SewerGEMS,
you will analyze all sanitary and combined sewer system elements in one package and
have the option of performing the analyses with the SWMM algorithm or our own
implicit solution of the full Saint Venant equations.
Simply put, SewerGEMS offers the most comprehensive solution available for optimizing Best Management Practice (BMP) designs and meeting sanitary sewer overflow (SSO) and combined sewer overflow (CSO) regulations.
With SewerGEMS, you can:
Develop system master plans
Assess the impact of inflow and infiltration on SSOs
Develop SSO and CSO remediation programs
Perform system evaluations associated with US EPA CMOM and NPDES
Optimize lift station and system storage capacities
Determine developer connection fees
Implement real-time control strategies
Model relief sewers, overflow diversions, and inverted siphons
Accurately simulate operations with variable-speed pumping and logical controls
Simulate out-of-service or proposed sewers within the same model
SewerGEMS
SewerGEMS revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your
concern is a stormwater master plan, localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water
quality BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do faster and smarter
designs every day, SewerGEMS fits your needs. It is the only commercially available
software package that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package.
SewerGEMS also gives you the ability to perform analyses using either the SWMM
algorithm or SewerGEMSs own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.
SewerGEMS provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond,
and open channel networks, and provides stunning graphics and reporting tools for
visualizing your storm systems in action.
Use SewerGEMS For:
Comprehensive Stormwater Master Plans
15-707
Software
Watershed-Based Master Planning
Analysis of Open-channel, Closed-conduit and Combination systems
Floodplain Studies
Complex Flow Regime Analysis
Water Quality Assessments
Integrated Stormwater Quantity and Quality Assessments
NPDES Permitting
WaterGEMS
WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next
level. It is the only water-distribution modeling software that provides full, completely
seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the combined functionality of
WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advantages of each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of
freedom, power, efficiency, and usability.
You can create, display, edit, run, map, and design water models from within the GIS
environment, and view the results of the simulations as native GIS maps or with traditional Haestad Methods modeling tools. These abilities, in conjunction with the crossproduct functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object Model architecture, provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling projects.
WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: ArcView, ArcEdit, ArcInfo,
AutoCAD, or the standalone WaterGEMS Modeler interface.
WaterCAD
WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized-pipe networks, such as
municipal water-distribution systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of
functions, including steady-state and extended-period simulations of pressure
networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.
WaterCADs abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues,
with extensive water quality features, automated fire protection analyses, comprehensive scenario management, and enterprise-wide data-sharing capabilities.
WaterCAD is available with your choice of a stand-alone graphical user interface and/
or an AutoCAD-integrated interface.
SewerCAD can be run in a stand-alone graphical user interface, an AutoCAD-integrated interface, or an ArcView- or ArcInfo-integrated interface.
15-708
StormCAD
StormCAD is a highly efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer
collection systems. From graphical layout and intelligent network connectivity to flexible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of storm-sewer modeling.
Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity and inlet hydraulics
conform to FHWA HEC-22 methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a
variety of popular junction-loss methods are the foundation of StormCADs robust
gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and
diversions to hydraulic jumps.
StormCAD is available with your choice of a stand-alone graphical user interface, an
AutoCAD-integrated interface, or an ArcView- or ArcInfo-integrated interface.
PondPack
PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that
analyzes a tremendous range of situations, from simple sites to complex networked
watersheds. PondPack analyzes pre- and post-developed watershed conditions and
estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing,
and also computes outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond
infiltration, and pond-detention times.
PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, automatically creating
section and page numbers, tables of contents, and indexes. You can quickly create an
executive summary for an entire watershed or build an elaborate drainage report
showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed diagrams, rainfall curves, and hydrographs, are fully compatible with other Windows software.
FlowMaster
FlowMaster is an efficient program for the design and analysis of a wide variety of
hydraulic elements, such as pressure pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets.
FlowMasters Hydraulics Toolbox can create rating tables and performance curves for
any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest
FHWA guidelines, and weighting of irregular section roughness can be based on any
popular techniques.
15-709
Software
CulvertMaster
CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert
hydraulics, from single-barrel crossings to complex multibarrel culverts with roadway
overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies, allowing
you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you do not know, such as culvert size,
peak discharge, and headwater elevation. Output capabilities include comprehensive
detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.
HAMMER
HAMMER is the premier software in the world for analyzing hydraulic transients,
surge control devices, and water hammer effects. HAMMER models any hydraulic
element, transient source or surge protection devices, including:
Transients for flow, head, or entrained vapor
Pressurized pipelines and networks
Ingress of contaminants into pipe networks
Surcharged sewers or storage tunnels
Pump start and shut down scenarios
Flow shifting via pumps or valves
Power or pump failure
Rapid valve closure
Catastrophic pipe or pump breaks
HAMMER can easily import steady-state model results from industry-standard

models such as WaterCAD, WaterGEMS, EPANET, or EXTRAN (for line filling).
Users can also build their own models using the advanced graphical interface or
robust database connections.
GISConnect
Run your GIS inside AutoCAD. GISConnect is the long anticipated product that
brings together the data management power of ArcGIS and the drawing capabilities
of AutoCAD. Master your company's existing CAD expertise to deliver the GIS
solutions that your clients demand.
15-710
Bentley Institute Press
HPRESS_Logo_CMYK.eps
Bentley Institute Press provides civil engineering professionals with affordable,

quality reference and textbooks dedicated to the practical application of engineering
theory to hydraulics and hydrology. Bentley Institute Press publications include:
References and Textbooks:
Authored by industry-recognized experts, Bentley

Institute Press offers a complete line of reference
books for use in both academic and professional
settings.
Technical Journals:
With an eye towards computer technology, journals

like Current Methods address the latest innovations
in water-resources modeling and practical modeling
case studies, as well as offering credit towards
certification.
Independent Papers:
Bentley Institute Press also provides funding for

engineers to write case studies of their projects, with
potential publication in a variety of industry journals
and magazines.
Books from Bentley Institute Press:

Advanced Water Distribution Modeling and Management, first edition
Haestad, Walski, Chase, Savic, Grayman, Beckwith, and Koelle
Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, fifth edition
Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Durrans, and Meadows
Floodplain Modeling Using HEC-RAS, first edition
Haestad, Dyhouse, Hatchett, and Benn
Proceedings of the First Annual Water Security Summit, first edition
Haestad
Stormwater Conveyance Modeling and Design, first edition
Haestad and Durrans
Wastewater Collection System Modeling and Design, first edition
Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Merritt, Harold, Walker, and Whitman
Water Distribution Modeling, first edition
Haestad, Walski, Chase, and Savic
15-711
Training
To order or to receive additional information on these or any other Bentley Institute
Press titles, please call 800-727-6555 (U.S. and Canada) or +1-203-755-1666 (worldwide) or visit www.bentley.com/books.
Training
The Bentley Institute manages professional training programs to ensure consistent,
high quality, user training for a variety of Bentley products and varying levels of
application experience. Bentley Institute training is developed to maximize your
productivity by using examples relevant to your day-to-day project efforts. Training is
developed concurrently with software applications to provide knowledge of the latest
tools and features. Additionally, all Bentley Institute faculty meet rigorous certification requirements.
The Bentley Institute offers complete training for Haestad Methods products.These
training programs are famous for efficiently and effectively teaching engineers how to
apply hydraulic theory and state-of-the-art software to real-world design situations.
Modelers can become certified in a variety of water-related fields, through an

assortment of teaching methods including:
JumpStart Seminars
Comprehensive Workshops
Publication-Based Programs
To obtain more information about Bentley Systems, Inc. certification programs or to

see upcoming events in a city near you, visit http://www.haestad.com.
Accreditations
Bentley Systems has achieved the highest levels of accreditation from both the International Association for Continuing Education and Training (IACET) and the Professional Development Registry for Engineers and Surveyors (PDRES). In addition to
our own prestigious certifications, these endorsements enable modelers to earn
Continuing Education Units (CEUs) and Professional Development Hours (PDHs) for
their satisfactory participation in various training and educational programs.
15-712
Glossary
Alternative:
A categorized data set that create scenarios when placed

together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of
records. A record holds the data for a particular element
in your system.
Backflow:
The backing up of water through a conduit or channel in

the direction opposite to normal flow.
Batch Run:
A set of multiple scenarios that are computed together.

This is helpful if you want to queue a large number of
calculations, or manage a group of smaller calculations as
a set.
bmp:
File name extension for bitmap image files, which can be

used as background layers in SewerCAD V8i.
Branch:
In Bentley SewerCAD V8i, a series of connected

elements. The Bentley SewerCAD V8i calculation
engine includes a heuristic routine that decomposes a
network into its component branches, and each branch is
solved independently using an implicit solver. Each
branch comprises a series of connected elements.
Elements with the same branch ID are solved together.
Calculation Options Profile: A set of calculation options associated with a specific

scenario.
Catalog Pipes:
User-defined re-usable data sets that define common

physical characteristics of pipes.
Collection:
Bentley SewerCAD V8i uses the term Collection to

identify some fields where you enter a set of data instead
of a single value. To use this feature, click the field in
which the word Collection appears, then click the
Ellipsis () button to open a dialog box into which you
enter data.
Composite Hydrograph:
A graph of the total flow over time from multiple defined

fixed/unit loads, hydrographs, and pattern loads.
16-713
Conduit:
An open- or closed-section element through which water

moves. A conduit has a constant roughness and cross
section shape along its entire length. In Bentley
SewerCAD V8i, a conduit can refer to any prismatic
channel or pipe that conveys flow. The cross section of a
conduit must remain constant from one end to the next.
Drag:
Dragging is an action you perform with the mouse to

select items in the drawing pane. Click in the drawing
pane, hold down the mouse button, and move the mouse
to form a rectangle around the elements you want to
select. After you have formed the rectangle around the
items you want to select, let go of the mouse button.
dwh:
File name extension for the binary format file used by the
SewerCAD V8i Stand-Alone mode only. The .dwh file
contains the drawing.
dxf:
File name extension for Data Exchange File format

image files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerCAD V8i. Dxf files store vector data for drawings
typically produced in CAD programs.
Dynamic Manager:
A dialog box that can be displayed floating above the

workspace or attached (docked) to any one of the sides of
the workspace.
Dynamic selection set:
A selection created by running a query.
English:
E-Q-TWU.S. customary units, such as inch or acre
Element Symbology:
Refers to the way in which elements and their associated

labels are displayed in Bentley SewerCAD V8i You use
the Element Symbology manager to manage element
annotations and color coding.
Element Table:
A read-only, predefined FlexTable that you can use to

review data about a specific element type. There is one
predefined table for every element available in Bentley
SewerCAD V8i.
Extended Period Simulation:A calculation type where the model is analyzed over a
specified duration of time.
16-714
FlexTable:
A customizable table that lets you view input data and

results for all elements of a specific type in a tabular
format. You can use the standard set of FlexTables or
create your own FlexTables to compare data and create
reports.
Freeboard:
The difference between the top of dam elevation and the

water surface elevation.
gif:
File name extension for Graphic Image Format image

files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerCAD V8i.
GIS:
Geographic information system
Hydrograph:
A graph of discharge versus time.
Hyperlink:
In Bentley SewerCAD V8i, a link to an external file, such

as an image or movie file, for the purpose of associating
the file with a specific element.
Implicit Engine:
One of two calculation engines available in Bentley

SewerCAD V8i. The implicit engine uses a four-point
implicit finite difference solver which tends to be more
stable than an explicit solver. The implicit engine in
Bentley SewerCAD V8i is based on the solver in the
National Weather Service FLDWAV model.
Infiltration:
Water that enters the system from the ground through

defective pipes, pipe joints, connections, or manhole
walls
Inflow:
Inflow is specified at a manhole or wet well as the total

amount of wet weather inflow. Together with the
infiltration along the pipes, the inflow forms the wet
weather part of the sewer load.
Inflow Collection:
A collection of any combination of fixed, hydrograph, or

pattern inflows for an element.
Inlet flow:
Flows added to the manholes and wet wells in your

model, including user input hydrographs and flows from
other sources, such as pumps.
jpg:
File name extension for image files produced using the

Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) standard.
JPEG files, which can also have the file name extension
jpeg, can be used as background layers in SewerCAD
V8i.
Junction chamber:
A structure in which flow can be mixed or split. In

combined sewers systems, flow can be split between that
going to treatment and that going to an overflow.
Manhole:
Element that provides access to the system for inspection

and maintenance. Manholes are usually installed where
there is a change in horizontal (plan-view) pipe direction
or pipe slope, where several pipes join, or where the pipe
size changes.
16-715
16-716
mdb:
File name extension for SewerCAD V8i database files.

The .mdb file contains all modeling data, and includes
everything needed to perform a calculation. This file is an
open access database format file and can be viewed and
edited.
MrSID:
File name extension for Multi-resolution Seamless Image

Database format raster image files, which can be used as
background layers in SewerCAD V8i.
Outfall:
The ultimate termination points in a network.
Overflow:
The flow lost when the water surface elevation at a

manhole or other type of node is above the rim elevation
or user-specified overtopping elevation.
Pattern:
A series of multipliers which describe how the base load

varies over time.
Pattern Load:
A single average base load and a series of dimensionless

multipliers used to delineate how the load varies over
time.
Pattern Setup:
In SewerCAD V8i, a pattern setup allows you to match

unit sanitary (dry weather) loads with appropriate loading
patterns. Each scenario can use a different pattern setup,
thus allowing you to model different loading alternatives
for different extended period simulations.
png:
File name extension for Portable Network Graphic

format image files, which can be used as background
layers in SewerCAD V8i.
Pressure junction:
A connection between two or more pressure pipes of

varying characteristics. Loads may enter a pressure
portion of a network through a pressure junction.
Pressure pipe:
In SewerCAD V8i, a type of link element used to connect

node elements in pressure portions of a network.
Profile:
A graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance,

such as ground elevation along a section of piping. As
well as these side or sectional views of the ground
elevation, profiles can be used to show other
characteristics, such as hydraulic grade, pressure, and
constituent concentration.
Pump:
A structure in a wastewater system designed to add the

energy (head) necessary to overcome elevation
differences and head losses.
Q:
Flow
Query:
A SQL expression you build in Bentley SewerCAD V8i

to filter a FlexTable or create a selection set.
Sanitary Flow Collection:
A collection of loads that contains any combination of

hydrograph, unit, or pattern loads.
Sanitary Load:
A load that results from human activity and are not

weather-dependent.
Scenario:
A set of input data (in the form of alternatives),

calculation options, results, and notes associated with a
set of calculations. Scenarios let you set up an unlimited
number of "What If?" situations for your model, and then
modify, compute, and review your system under those
conditions.
Selection Sets:
User-defined groups of network elements that let you

predefine a group of elements to manipulate together.
shp:
File name extension for shapefiles, which you can import

as background layers for your model.
SI:
International System of units or metric units.
Static selection set:
A selection set created by selecting a group of elements

in your model.
swc:
File name extension for SewerCAD V8i project files. The

.swc file contains data such as annotation, color-coding,
and project-level options. This file is an open .xml format
file and can be viewed and edited.
tiff:
File name extension for Tagged Image File Format raster

image files, which can be used as background layers in
SewerCAD V8i. The extension .tif is also used for these
types of files.
Unit Hydrograph:
A time versus flow curve.
Unit Sanitary Load:
Loading unit count representing the local count of

loading units for a specified unit dry weather load.
User data extensions:
A set of one or more attribute fields that you can define to

hold data to be stored in the model. User data extensions
allow you to add your own data fields to your project.
User Notifications:
Messages that appear after you compute your model.

These messages can help you troubleshoot errors in your
model.
16-717
16-718
Virtual Conduit:
Virtual conduits are a special compatibility element

included in Bentley SewerCAD V8i to help modelers
achieve fidelity between the Bentley SewerCAD V8i
model and other storm modeling solutions that model
pumps and control structures such as weirs, orifices, and
rating tables as network links. Virtual conduits are
displayed in your model as dashed lines.
Wet Weather Load:
A load that is not related to rainfall activity, such as

groundwater infiltration (water leaking into a pipe
through cracks, joints, and other defects) and structure
inflow (surface water entering a structure through the
cover).
Wet well:
A boundary condition between the pressure and gravity

portions of a network. Wet wells serve as a collection
point for gravity systems, and as an HGL boundary node
for the pressure system. Dry loads can also enter the
sewer network at these locations.
Symbols
Symbols
%u 467
.hlb 245
.pdf 5
A
AASHTO 649
about CivilStorm 1
about SewerGEMS 1
actions tab 275
active 423
active topology 421, 423
active topology alternative 421
active topology child alternative 422
Active Topology dialog box 421
actual and plan length 203
actual and plan length as a function of slope 204
Add Hyperlinks dialog box 253
Add To Selection Set dialog box 234
adding annotations 466
adding background layers 457
adding color coding 471
adding elements 193
adding fixed loads 301
adding user defined hydrographs 302
address
See contacting Bentley Systems. 7
affinity laws 663
air valve 191
Allocation strategies 336
Alternative Editor dialog box 420
Alternative Manager 419
alternatives 397, 417, 713
base 418
boundary condition 444
child 418
creating 418
defined 402
editing 419
initial conditions 445
making elements inactive in 422
merge 417
overview 397, 417
Index-719
B
physical 424
sanitary loading 447
types of 417
analysis
hydraulic 369, 370
analysis menu 17
Animation Control Manager 370
Animation Controls 482, 485
Animation Options dialog box 372
Annotation Properties dialog box 468
annotations 462, 463, 468
%u 467
adding 466
deleting 467
displaying units 467
editing 467
renaming 467
Apply Sanitary Load to Selection dialog box 332
attributes
editing 199
scenario 402
attributes for calculation profiles 376
AutoCAD 597, 607, 608
commands 603, 614
drawing synchronization 612
entities 603, 613, 614
importing WaterCAD 605, 617
proxies 617
undo/redo 604, 605, 615, 616
AutoCAD mode 11, 597, 607, 608
graphical layout 598, 609
project files 611
toolbars 609
Autodesk 597, 607
automated scenario management 398
B
backflow 713
background layer files
using with ProjectWise 126
Background Layer manager 454
background layers 454
adding 457
deleting 457
dxf files 461
Index-720
C
editing 458
image compression 460
renaming 458
shapefiles 460
supported image types 454
turning on and off 458
working with folders 456
base alternative 417
base alternatives 418
Base Calcuation Options 374
batch run 414, 713
Batch Run Editor dialog box 415
batch runs 414
Batch Update Conduit Descriptions 23
Bend command 194
Bentley Institute Press 711
Bentley SELECT 3
Bentley Systems 705
about us 705
accreditations 712
addresses 6
contacting 6
email addresses 7
Haestad Methods products 705
program update 3
training 712
Web site 7
Bernoulli equation 627
Billing Meter aggregation 338
Border Editor dialog box 559
border properties for graphs 559
border tool 192
boundary condition alternative 444
boundary polygon feature classes 359
branch 713
buffering point area percentage 358, 359
building a model 194
C
C coefficient 631
calculation detailed summary 384
calculation errors 395
calculation options 395, 452
Calculation Options Manager 373
Calculation Options manager 373
Index-721
C
Calculation Options Profile 713
calculation profiles 373
attributes 376
calculation warnings 395
catalog pipes 247, 713
certification 712
change pipe width 602
Change Series Title dialog box 566
changing the drawing view 223
Channel Weighting Methods 690
characteristic curve
pump 663
pumps 662, 663
Chart Options dialog box 520
Chart Tab 521
Export tab 556
Print tab 558
Series Tab 547
Tools tab 555
Chart Tools Gallery dialog box 566
check data 384
Chezys equation 629, 634
child alternative
creating active topology 422
child scenarios 413
Cholesky 672
CivilStorm
about 1
CivilStorm 2005 707
CivilStorm database file
importing 128
clearing element selection 197
ClientCare 6
Colebatch 691
Colebrook-White
equation 630
collection 713
collections
inflow 322
minor loss 171
sanitary flow 332
color coding 470
adding 471
deleting 471
editing 472
renaming 472
Color dialog box 561
Index-722
C
Color Editor dialog box 561
Color Map Tables 474
Color-Coding Properties dialog box 472, 588
column headings
editing for FlexTables 497
commands (AutoCAD mode) 603, 614
Compact Database Enabled option 112
Component 144, 152
component 136
components menu 18
Composite Action 278
Composite Condition 274
composite hydrograph 713
composite hydrograph data table window 319
Composite Hydrograph Window 318
composite hydrographs 318, 323
Composite Logical Action 276
Compress Database command 23
compressing large database files 23, 112
Conditions List 276
Conditions tab 269
conditions tab 269
conduit infiltration 299, 360
conduits 714
conjugate gradient method 671
connecting elements 194
connecting pumps to wet wells 195
connection
synchronization 612
connectivity
explicit 149
implicit 149
conservation
of mass & energy 667
constant horsepower pump 666
constant power pump 666
constructing a query 259, 500
contacting Bentley Systems
email 7
fax 7
hours 7
mail 7
sales 6
technical support 6
telephone 7
continuous patterns 304
contour 590, 591
Index-723
D
smoothing 590, 591
Contour Browser 589, 592
Contour Manager 588
Contour Plot 591
Contours 588
Control Manager 263
Control Sets tab 279
Controlling Results Output 382
controls tab 264
convert 245
copy 46
copying
FlexTables 505
Correct Data Format 151
cox 692
create a new System Head Curve 214
create a new Totalizing Flow Meter 211
create Observed Data 518
Create Selection Set dialog box 231
creating
graph 511
creating a model 194
creating a query 257
creating alternatives 418
creating dynamic 231
creating queries 259, 500
creating reports 507
creating sanitary flow collections 332
creating selection sets 231, 232
cross sectional shapes of link elements 174
CulvertMaster 710
curve
pump 662, 663, 664, 666
curved pipes 194
custom AutoCAD entities 603, 613, 614
custom extended
pump 666
customize
drawing 610
customizing
FlexTables 501
customizing graphs 578
D
Darcy Weisbach
Index-724
D
Colebrook-White equation 630
equation 632
data
check 383, 384
organization 417
validation 383
Data Format Needs Editing 151
data source tables 151
data types for user data extensions 285
Database Utilities 23
datasource 136, 142
decimal point 202
default units 117
defining geometry of link elements 172
defining pump settings 183
defining sanitary flow collections 332
defining user data extensions 281
deleting
FlexTables 495
deleting annotations 467
deleting background layers 457
deleting color coding 471
deleting elements 198
deleting groups of elements in a selection set 234
deleting profiles 478
demand
multipliers 306
demand allocation 335
demand projection 341
depth 173
design point 666
direction of flow 677
disconnect 199
display format 203
Display Precision 202
display precision 202
displaying multiple projects 110
diurnal curves 303
dockable managers 40
Downstream Edge 145
downstream edge 148
downstream node 194
dragging 714
drawing
scale 116
setup (AutoCAD mode) 610
synchronization (AutoCAD mode) 612
Index-725
E
drawing scale 116
drop manholes 178
dry weather flow collections 332
DWG 611, 612
DXF file
exporting 132
DXF Properties dialog box 231, 234, 461
dynamic inheritance 404
dynamic managers 714
E
edit elements 602
Edit Hyperlink dialog box 253
edit menu 15
editing
FlexTables 496
numerous elements at once 498
editing alternatives 419
editing annotations 467
editing background layers 458
editing color coding 472
editing column headings
FlexTables 497
editing element attributes 199
editing scenarios 413
editing units
FlexTables 497
EGL 628, 629
element
deleting 602
modify 602
moving 603, 615
relabel 201
element connectivity 194
element label project files 120
element labeling settings 120
element properties 600
Element Property Inferencing 217, 223
element relabeling 504
element symbology 714
Element Symbology Manager 463
using folders in 465
element tables 507, 714
elements 169
adding data to link elements 170
Index-726
E
adding in the middle of a pipe 198
adding to your model 193
clearing selection of 197
connecting 170, 194
defining cross sectional shapes of link elements 174
defining geometry of link elements 172
deleting 195
editing attributes 199
globally editing data in numerous elements 498
link 170
manholes 175
moving 195
outfalls 180
overview 169
pressure junctions 182
pumps 182
reporting on 508
selecting 195
selecting all 197
selecting all of the same type 197
viewing in selection sets 230
wet wells 179
elevation vs. flow curves
adding to outfalls 181
Elevation-Flow Curve dialog box 181
email 7
email address 7
energy
conservation 667, 668
equation 627
grade line 629
principle 626
engineering libraries 242, 245
adding unit sanitary loads in 313
overview 241
sharing on a network 245
working with 242
engineering libraries dialog box 245
engineering library file 245
English units 714
Enhanced Pressure Contours 592
enhanced pressure contours 592
entering additional data to link elements 170
entering data 199
entities
in AutoCAD 603, 613, 614
enumerated user data extensions 289
Index-727
F
Enumeration Editor dialog box 289
EPS 369
analysis 369, 370
EPS Results Browser 370
EQT curves
adding to outfalls 181
error messages 147, 383
errors 393
Explicit connectivity 148
explicit connectivity 149
explode elements (AutoCAD mode) 614
export 132
exporting
FlexTables 506
exporting data 132
to a DXF file 132
exporting FlexTables 505
Extended Period Analysis 307
extended period analysis 369
extended period simulation 714
External Tool Manager 291
F
F1 5
fax 7
file menu 11
filter
resetting 501
Find 200
Find Logical Action dialog box 276
finding elements 200
fitting loss coefficients 660, 661
fixed loads
adding 301
Fixed Point 203
FlexTable dialog box 492
FlexTable Setup dialog box 502
FlexTables 488, 714
copying 505
copying data 505
creating 495
customizing 501
deleting 495
editing 496
editing column headings 497
Index-728
F
editing globally 498
editing units 497
exporting 505
exporting data 506
global editing 498
navigating in 497
opening 494
ordering columns 498
printing 505, 506
renaming 496
reports 506
saving as text 506
shortcut keys 497
sorting column order 498
FlexTables Manager 489
folders in 491
FlexTables manager 489
Flow (Diverted In Outside Subnetwork) 320
Flow (Diverted Out) 321
Flow (Downstream Conduit) 322
Flow (In net) 322
Flow (Local Diverted In Same Subnetwork) 320
Flow (Locally Injected) 320
Flow (Non-Diverted Out) 321
Flow (Out net) 322
Flow (System Known) 320
Flow (System Sanitary) 320
Flow (System Total Wet Weather) 321
Flow (System Wet Well Collection) 320
Flow (Total Diverted In) 320
Flow (Total In) 320
Flow (Total Out) 320, 322
flow distribution 339
flow increment 130
FlowMaster 709
folders
in Background Layers Manager 456
in Element Symbology Manager 465
in FlexTables Manager 491
format
unit 202
FoxPro 142
freeboard 714
Index-729
G
Gaussian elimination method 672
General 203
general settings 112
Geometric data source 136
geometry
of link elements 172
polyline vertices 172
GIS 715
demand allocation 335
global edit 498
global editing
FlexTables 498
global settings 111
grade line
energy 629
hydraulic 629
gradient algorithm 668
derivation 669
Gradient Editor dialog box 560
graph
copying and pasting data 512, 516
data 516
new 511
Graph dialog box 512
Graph Manager 510
Graph Series Options dialog box 517
graph settings 517
graphical layout
AutoCAD 598, 609
graphing 511
changing total time period 512
refresh 511
graphs 509
customizing 578
data 512
printing 512
H
Haestad Methods
program update 3
training 712
Haestad Press 711
Index-730
I
Haestad.log 7
Hatch Brush Editor dialog box 562
Hazen-Williams equation 631
headloss coefficient
in minor loss collections 172
HEC-22 649
help menu 24
HGL 628, 629
history of what-if analyses 398
hortons 691
hydraulic analysis 369
hydraulic grade line 629
hydrograph 715
Hydrograph Curve dialog box 360
hydrographs
user defined 302
hydrographs vs. pattern loads 301
hyperlinks 251, 715
adding 252
deleting 254
editing 253
Hyperlinks dialog box 251
I
image compression 460
Image Filter 459
Image Properties dialog box 458
impeller 663
implicit connectivity 149
implicit engine 715
Import
WaterCAD 605, 617
import 153, 158, 162
WaterCAD 605, 617
importing
CivilStorm data 128
importing data 127
improved Lotter 692
inactive 423
inactive elements in alternatives 422
independent papers 711
individual elements
adding to your model 193
inferencing 223
infiltration 360, 715
Index-731
K
Infiltration (System Additional) 321
Infiltration (System Non-Additional) 321
Infiltration (System Total) 321
inflow 298, 319, 325, 715
inflow alternatives
for manholes 450, 451
for pressure junctions 450
for wet wells 450
inflow collection 715
Inflow Collection Editor 323, 715
inflow collections
defining 322
inflow control center 325
Inflow Control Center dialog box 325
inflows 319, 325
inheritance 403, 405
dynamic 404
overriding 404
initial conditions alternative 445
initial conditions of networks 511
initial flow equals zero 511
inlet flow 715
Inlet Flow Settings 130
interpolate 223
interpolation 223
introduction 1
irregular channel 173
K
K coefficients 661
knowledgebase 3
known flows 625
L
laws
affinity 663
conservation of mass and energy 667
layout
AutoCAD 598, 609
layout settings 113
layout tool 193
legacy 245
lessons 5
Index-732
M
Levenberg-Marquardt method 667
library types 242
Like operator 261
line tool 192
linear system equation solver 671
linear theory method 668
link element
defining geometry of 172
link elements 170
defining cross sectional shapes of 174
entering additional data to 170
Load (Calculated) 322
LoadBuilder 298, 335, 342
manager 342
run summary 354
wizard 343
loading 297
adding fixed loads 301
defining inflow collections 322
hydrographs vs. pattern loads 301
methods for 298
patterns 303
types of loads 299
user defined hydrographs 302
logical control 267
dialog box 265
manager 263
set editor 280
Logical controls 266
logical controls
overview 262
loop-based algorithms 668
losses
friction 631, 670
minor 660, 661, 662
Lotter 692
M
mail 7
Management controls 305
Manhole Head Loss Equations (AASHTO/HEC-2 Overview) 649
manholes 175, 715
inflow alternatives for 450, 451
physical alternative for 431
sanitary loading alternative for 448
Index-733
N
Mannings equation 633
Mannings n coefficient table 695
Mapping 144
mass conservation 667
maximum flow 130
merge
merge
alternatives 417
meter aggregation 338
meter assignment 336
methods of entering loads 298

Microsoft OLE DB Provider 142
Microstation mode 10
Minor Loss Coefficients dialog box 208
minor loss collection 171
Minor Loss Collection dialog box 172
minor losses 660, 662
fitting 661
model calculations
troubleshooting 395
ModelBuilder 142, 153, 158, 162
errors and warnings 147
supported formats 135
using 135
ModelBuilder Connections manager 138
ModelBuilder wizard 141
move
elements 603, 615
labels 604, 615
moving elements 197
moving toolbars 37
multiple
pump curve 666, 667
multiple elements
selecting 197
multiple point pump 666
multiple projects
maximum number of 110
Multipliers 306
Municipal License Administrator 2
N
named view 44
named views 44, 592
navigating in a FlexTables 497
Index-734
O
Network Navigator 236
New Logical Action dialog box 276
nodal demand vector 669
non-convergence 369
Number 203
O
Observed Data 517
OLE DB 142
online book 5
See also .pdf.
online help 5
opening an existing project 110
opening managers 38
operation 498
Operational Alternative 262
options 111
drawing 116
global 111
labeling 120
project 114
ProjectWise 121
setting 111
units 117
Options Dialog Box
ProjectWise settings 121
ORACLE 142
Oracle 135
ordering
FlexTable columns 498
organize data 417
outfalls 180
adding elevation vs. flow curves to 181
adding EQT curves to 181
boundary condition alternative 444
output
tables 488
output data 382
overflow 716
overriding inheritance 404
Index-735
P
Pan tool 223
panning 223
using a mousewheel to 224
parent scenario 413
paste 46
pattern 305, 716
demand multipliers 305
extended period analysis 307, 370
pattern editor 305
time steps 305
pattern load 716
pattern loads 303
Pattern Manager 305
pattern setup 716
pattern setups 307
Pattern Setups dialog box 308
patterns 162, 303
continuous 304
stepwise 304
Pavlovskiis 690
Percent Full (Calculated) 179
physical alternatives 424
for manholes 431
for outfalls 434
Pipe Catalog dialog box 247
pipe infilitration 360
pipe length 203
pipeline infiltration 360
pipes
modeling with curves 194
splitting 198
point demand assignment 341
Pointer dialog box 565
polyline vertices 172
Polyline Vertices dialog box 173
Polyline-to-Pipe 137
PondPack
upgrade 3
predefined queries 238, 254
pressure
head 627, 629
pressure junctions 182
inflow alternatives for 450
Index-736
P
pressure pipes
adding a minor loss collection to 171
print preview
FlexTables 506
Print Preview Window 587
printing
FlexTables 506
printing FlexTables 505
printing graphs 512
proejct queries 254
profile 716
editing 478
Profile Setup dialog box 479
Profile Viewer dialog box 480
profiles 474
creating 477
deleting 478
renaming 478
viewing 476
Profiles manager 475
project
files 599, 611, 612
project inventory 507
project properties 110
Project Properties dialog box 110
projection 341
projects 110
ProjectWise 13, 121
closing projects 123
general guidelines for using 123
guidelines 123
performing operations 124
using background layer files with 126
using with CivilStorm 123
using with SewerGEMS 123
viewing status 124
ProjectWise options 121
properties
editing 199
Properties Editor 42
Property Editor 199
using Find Element 200
prototypes 239
creating 239
prototypes manager 240
Index-737
Q
proxies 617
publications 711
pump
affinity laws 662
constant horsepower 666
curve 662, 663, 666, 667
custom extended 666
impeller 663
multiple point 666
operating point 662, 663, 666
static head 663
static lift 662
theory 662
three point 666
type 666
variable speed 663
Pump Curve Definitions dialog box 182, 183
pump curves 158
pump definitions 153
pump settings 183
pumps 182
662
connecting to wet wells 195

defining settings for 183
Q
Q 716
queries 254, 259, 500
creating 257
predefined 254
project 254
shared 254
using Like operator in 261
Queries Manager dialog box 255
Query Builder dialog box 259
R
ranking
reconnect 199
redo 604, 605, 615, 616
references and textbooks 711
refresh 511
Index-738
S
relabeling elements 201
Remove
Columns 503
removing elements from selection sets 234
renaming
FlexTables 496
renaming annotations 467
renaming background layers 458
report menu 24
report options 508
reporting
on a group of elements in a selection set 234
Reporting Time Step Type 382
reports 507
creating for elements 508
FlexTables 506
scenario 508
standard 507
reset
FlexTable filter 501
Reset Workspace 37
roughness
Chezys equation 629
Colebrook-White equation 630
Darcy-Weisbach equation 631
Hazen-Williams equation 631
Mannings equation 633
roughness height 630, 633
rounding of numbers 202
rule based 263
S
sales 6
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor 333
sanitary flow collection 717
sanitary flow collections
defining 332
sanitary load 717
sanitary load control center 332
sanitary loading 298
unit sanitary loads 310
sanitary loading alternative 447
for manholes 448
for wet wells 448
Index-739
S
saving FlexTables as text 506
scenario example 407
Scenario Management 411
Example 407
Scenario Manager 415
scenario summary 508
scenarios 397, 717
advantages of using 398
attribute inheritance 405
attributes 402
base 413
batch run 414
calculation options for 452
creating new 413
editing 413
inheritance 403
local and inherited values in 405
overview 397, 400, 412
Scientific 203
Section Results dialog box 175
select boundary polygon feature class 358
Select in Drawing button
in Query Manager 256
select the point 358
selecting all elements 197
selecting an element 197
selecting elements
all of the same type 197
selecting multiple elements 197
selection 423
Selection by Query dialog box 232
Selection Set Element Removal dialog box 234
selection sets 227, 228, 231, 234, 717
adding a group of elements to 233
adding elements to 233
creating 231, 232
creating from queries 231
group-level operations 234
in FlexTables 493
removing elements from 234
viewing elements in 230, 231
Selection Sets Manager 228
Selection tool 27
Set Field Options dialog box 202
setup 610
SewerGEMS
about 1
Index-740
S
features 707
shapefile 149
Shapefile Properties dialog box 460
Shared Field Specification dialog box 288
shared queries 254
sharing engineering libraries on a network 245
shortcut keys
FlexTables 497
SI 202, 717
Simple Logical Action 276
simultaneous path adjustment method 668
smoothing contours 590
snap menu (AutoCAD mode) 604, 615
software
upgrades 3
sorting
sparse matrix 669, 672
spatial data 142, 149, 150
splitting pipes 198
SQL Server 142
standard extended pump 666
standard reports 507
start node 677
starting a new project 110
static head
pump 663
static lift
pump 662
station 173
station-elevation curves 174
steady state analysis 369
steady-state analyses 369
stepwise patterns 304
Stieltjes 672
stop node 677
StormCAD 709
submersible pump 189
support 6
addresses 7
hours 7
Swamee and Jain equation 633
SWG file 611
symbol
visibility (AutoCAD mode) 610
Synchronize 137
synchronize 140
Index-741
T
synchronize (AutoCAD mode) 612
System Head Curve editor 214
System Head Curves 213, 214
System Head Curves manager 213
system operating point 662
T
Table
Properties 502
Type 502
table
setup 502
tables 46
column headings 497
editing FlexTables 496
Mannings n coefficients 695
units 497
tabular report 488
technical journals 711
technical support 6
TeeChart Gallery dialog box 578
text 604, 615
text height 117
multiplier 117
text tool 192
The 712
theme folders
renaming 466
theme groups
deleting 466
theory 619
Thiessen polygon generation 354
This 314
three point pump 666
time of simulation 512
Time Series Field Data 594
Tolerance 149
tolerance 142
Toolbar buttons 36
toolbars 25, 36
customizing 36
tools menu 22
topology 148, 383, 384, 669
Totalizing Flow Meter Editor 211
Totalizing Flow Meter editor 211
Index-742
U
Totalizing Flow Meter manager 210
Totalizing Flow Meter Manager Dialog 210
training 712
TRex Wizard 293
TRex wizard 293
troubleshooting 393, 395
knowledge database 3
turning background layers on and off 458
turning toolbars off 37
turning toolbars on 37
tutorials 5
See also lessons.
types of loads 299
U
U.S. customary 202
undo/redo operations in AutoCAD 604, 616
Unit 202
unit hydrograph 717
unit loading 309
unit of measurement 202
Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load dialog box 314
unit sanitary load 717
unit sanitary loading 309
unit sanitary loads 310
adding in engineering libraries 313
types of 310
units 117, 119
displaying in annotations 467
editing for FlexTables 497
units and formatting 202
Updates 3
updating PondPack via the Web 3
upgrade
PondPack 3
upstream node 194
user data extensions 280, 717
data types 285
enumerated 289
User Data Extensions dialog box 283
user defined hydrographs 302
User Notification Details dialog box 395
user notifications 393, 717
User Notifications Manager 393
Index-743
V
validation 383, 384
variable speed pump
curve equations 663
variable speed pump batteries 190, 438
Variable Speed Pump Battery 190
variable speed pumps 663
velocity
head 629
vertices 172
view
tabular 488
view menu 19
viewing elements in a selection set 230, 231
viewing profiles 476
virtual conduits 718
visibility of symbols 610
Visual FoxPro 142
VSPB 190, 438
W
warning messages 147
warnings 393
WaterCAD 708
custom AutoCAD entities 603, 613, 614
WaterCAD in AutoCAD 597, 607
WaterGEMS 708
WCD file 599, 612
Web updates 3
Website 7
weighted roughness method 693
weighting 690
welcome dialog 109
wet weather load 718
wet wells 179
connecting to pumps 195
inflow alternatives for 450
white
table columns 496
window color settings 113
World Wide Web
See Web. 3
Index-744
Y
yellow
table cells 496
Z
Z Order 605
zero flow at time 0 511
Zoom 225
Zoom Center 226
Zoom Center dialog box 226
zoom dependent visibility 470
Zoom Extents 225
Zoom Factor 226
Zoom In 224
Zoom Out 224
Zoom Previous
Zoom Next 225
Zoom Realtime 225
Zoom Window 225
zooming 223, 226
element tables
See also predefined FlexTables
Index-745
Index-746

Manual SewerCAD V8i - Guia Del Usuario (Ingles) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual SewerCAD V8i - Guia Del Usuario (Ingles) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter

Loading on page 7-297

Learn how to use Bentley SewerCAD V8i data loading features to

Introducing the Workspace on page 2-9

Calculating Your Model on page 8-369

Learn about the Bentley SewerCAD V8i workspace, including menus,

Learn how to create and manage "what-if" scenarios.

Quick Start Lessons on page 3-51

Using Scenarios and Alternatives on page 9-397

Perform these tutorials to learn the basics of using Bentley SewerCAD

Learn how to define calculation options, calculate your model, and

Starting a Project on page 4-109

Presenting Your Results on page 10-453

Learn how to present results in graphs, profile s and reports.

Using Modelbuilder on page 5-135

Working in AutoCAD Mode on page 12-607

Learn how to use ModelBuilder in ArcGIS mode or the Stand-Alone

Learn how to use Bentley SewerCAD V8i in AutoCAD mode.

Creating Your Model on page 6-169

Theory on page 13-619

Learn about the theory behind Bentley SewerCAD V8i.

Bentley SewerCAD V8i Users Guide

Bentley SewerCAD V8i Users Guide

Chapter 1: Welcome to Bentley SewerCAD V8i

Chapter 2: Introducing the Workspace9

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Chapter 3: Quick Start Lessons51

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Part 4 - Create a Profile3-95

Chapter 4: Starting a Project109

Chapter 5: Using Modelbuilder135

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Step 3Specify Field Mappings for each Table/Feature Class5-144

Chapter 6: Creating Your Model169

SECTIONS RESULTS DIALOG BOX6-175

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Modeling Curved Pipes6-194

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Converting Legacy Engineering Library Files6-245

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Composite Hydrograph Data Table Window7-318

Chapter 8: Calculating Your Model369

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Pressure Summary Tab8-391

Chapter 9: Using Scenarios and Alternatives397

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Active Topology Alternative9-421

Chapter 10: Presenting Your Results453

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Shapefile Properties Dialog Box10-460

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

CUSTOM SORT DIALOG BOX10-501

Chart Options Dialog Box10-520

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Color Dialog Box10-561

Chapter 11: Features of the MicroStation Version

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Chapter 12: Working in AutoCAD Mode607

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Chapter 13: Theory619

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Bentley SewerCAD V8 XM Edition Users Guide

Hydrologic and Hydraulic Time Steps13-676